Ge a

THE mt :)

AMERICAN JOURNAL

SCIENCE AND ARTS.

EDITORS AND PROPRIETORS,
- Proressors JAMES D. DANA anv B. SILLIMAN.

ASSOCIATE EDITORS,

Prorressors ASA GRAY anp WOLCOTT GIBBS,
OF CAMBRIDGE,
AND
Prorrssors H. A. NEWTON, S. W. JOHNSON,
GEO. J. BRUSH anp A. E. VERRILL,
OF NEW HAVEN.

THIRD SERIES.
VOL, I1L—[WHOLE NUMBER, CHIT.)
Nos. 13--18.
JANUARY TO JUNE, 1872.

WITH TWO MAPS AND THIRTEEN PLATES.

NEW HAVEN: EDITORS.
1872.
PRINTED BY TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR, 22] STATE ST.

RESe@oUR) Bota’ CAL
@aapun Lisi 2Y

‘CONTENTS OF VOLUME IIL
NUMBER XL

Arr. I,—On Alpine Geology; by T. Srerry Hunt, ----..---
arte. Note on the Genus Pr gene te ei

a
TV, wg a cae Species of Fossil from the Lower Silurian ; My
‘ AMES UcGens cic tee es
V.—Glacial Action on Mount Katahdi in; by Joun DeLasxt,- 27
VI—Table for the computation of Relative Altitudes ; by
OLRV NL Ag Bee ee ieee reuee ces 31
VIL—On the relative proportion of Iron and Sulphur in the
“ Pyrite’ tained in several specimens of Iowa Coal;

: Occur
Sulphide; by Giwzon E. Moors, --.-----.------------ 3
TX.—Norian Rocks in New Hampshire ; by ©. H. Hrrencock, 43
X.—Contributions eet the Laboratory of the Sheffield Scientific
School. No. XXII.—On the Composition of the Labra-
K

dorite rocks of Waterville, N. H.; by E. 8. Dawa,---- . 48
XIL—Recent German Arctic Explorations, eae i once eek 50
SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE,
Chantry moar —On a new method of nickel-plating, 54.—On the direct
oxidation eeters to mellitic warn 55.—Gmelin-Kraut, tEimdbach der Chemie:
Neues ar aarti 9 der Chem

Geology and Natural History.—Dise sao of a remarkable Fossil Bird, 0. C. Marsu,
56.—Oceurrence of Diamonds in "anthophyllite, P. VON JEREMEJEW : Triassic
0

o um)
Oth Parallel; Botany, 6 be Oliver’s Flora o' at
~~ i eens. Die ices Flora der Lemp yy iae .—On K sas Vertebrate

onomy.

Uclipse : need Maps, E. S. Marry, 68.—The Wisconsin Uciowvite, am i LAPHAM:
New Comet: Magnetometer Indications on September 7th, C. A. Youne, 69.—
The first Alias to the Washington Observations for 1869, 70.—Annals of
he Dudley Observatory, Vol. L.: Astronomische Age - In und Formeln: The

Miscellaneous ligence.—Masses of ua tere on, 71.—On the Phos-
phorescence of the Eggs of the common Glow: UssET: Coast vada
Deep-Sea Dredging ge me 73.—Jay’s Cabinet ie the 74,— Obitua
Ohates Babbage, T4. —Reyv. J. A. Swan. si

Chemistry, 78.—An Siecentacs Tre atise on Heat: A Treatise npon Terrestrial
Magnetism: Sur les Tremblements de terre et les éruptions voleaniques dans

.

lV CONTENTS.

YArchipel Hawaien, en 1868, 79.—Uebersicht der seit 1847 fortgesetzten Unter-
suchungen iiber das von der ’ Atmosphiire unsichtbar getragene reiche ——
coat : i

—- leichfasslicht dargestellt: Revue de Géologie pour les années |
a = 1868, 8 |

NUMBER XIV.

Page

Arr. XII.—Observations on Encke’s Comet at the Dart-

mouth College Observatory ; by C. A. Youne, .-------- 80
XIII.—Note on the occurrence of the “ Primordial Fauna”

in Nevada; by J. D. Wurrney, 84 -
XIV.—Notice of the Address of Prof. T. Sterry fas before

the American Association at Tudiena olis by J.D. Dana, 86
XV.—On the Age of the Quartzites, ‘Rehists and. Conglom-

erates of Sauk County, Wisconsin; by R. Irvine, ------ 93
XVI.—On Canon Moseley’s views upon Glacier-motion ; by

Pe or eee 99
XVII.—The Hot t. Springs and Geysers of the Yellowstone

and Firehole Rivers; by F. V. Haypen. With maps, 105

oe GY tes on Granitic Rocks; b ne SrERRY Honr, - 115

XIX.—Brief Contributions to ates m the Museum of
Yale tne No. XVII.—Descriptions oe North Ameri-
can fresh-water Leeches; by A. E. VERRILL,------------ 126

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
Chemistry and Physics ——On a new double salt of Thallium, FriswEtt.
: On the

Aurine, DALE and ScHor ER the preparation of Camphoric acid,
WwW N, 140.—O: Synthesis of Oxaluric acid, Henry: On the bapa
aon of Cochineal, LIEBERMANN and VAN Dorp, 141.—On the Betaine

Phosphorus Series, MEYER, 142.

Geology pee Natural History. Geological Survey of Report of Progress in
1870, NEWBERRY, &c., 143.—Geological Survey of Califo 144.—Note on the
discovery of fossils in the “ wince i marble” at Scranton, Vt., E. BILLines,
145.—Yale College con Sheers: to the Mountsins and ifie Coast:
Discovery of a a in Massachusetts, ITCHCOCK

Resources of North Caro ar tiny GeENTH, 146. Final Repor rt of the United States
Geological Survey of Nebraska and portions of Rpt aces nt Territories, F. V.
HAYDEN: Miers, Contrib ee to Botany, Iconographic and Descriptive, &c.,
147.—8. Watson, Botany of a Geological ager gee of the Fortieth Ponies
a. hice King, 148. “Pants of Oregon, E. Hau: Saunders’ Ref
—The Inflore or Powe in Euphorbia, 151. der seiacirer
Noarlogy 1816. tl; it —Fish seek in the sea-weed of the Sa
assiz, 154.—On

Ill
: ' sadly
e American Naturalist, 156. __Anatomisch-system atische, Theat schreibung der
Alcyonarien, erste Abtheilung, &c., A. K6uu1KER: Supplement to the Ophiuridz
AN, 157.

Astronomy.—Stellar Photography, 157.—Eclipse of the Sun of Dec. 12th, 158.

Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence.—Chi Academy of Sci Th tural
Sciences in Public Schools, 158. ies : ee

Miscellaneous Bibliograp. _ Treatise on the Origin, Nature and Varieties of
Wine, W. TuupicHum and A. Dup 159.—Journal of the Anthropological
Institute of New York : Organic Philosophy, H. DoneRry: Maps of the Geyser
Region of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers, 160.

CONTENTS. Vv

NUMBER XV.
Page
Art. XX.—The Hot wb ir and Geysers of the Yellow-
stone and Firehole Rivers; by F. V. Haypen, - -- -- nade T61
XXI.—On the Electrolysis of the Substituted Derivatives of
Acetic Acid. Preliminary Notice; by Dr. G. E. Moorn, 177
XXII.—Green Mountain Geology. On’ the Quartzite ; by
damm DD. Dawa, oo. soe e a we a 179
XXIII.—Brief Contributions to Zodlogy from the Museum
of Yale College. No, XVIII.—On the Affinities of Paleo-
a Tabulate Corals with Existing Species; by A
i gevGunine «Glue iene 187
XXIV. -Gockigiog! and Mineralogical Notes on some of the
Mining Districts of Utah Territory, and especially those
of the en and Oquirrh Ranges of Mountains; by
B. Snaiman) ds osass sea ook eel ak egeoeae 195
XXV.—On ‘the enera Cornulites and Sacer, and on
anew genus pet cere, ; by H. A. Nionorson, 22 202
XXVL ~—On the Meteo of the Bahonea’ “ La Concep- |
tion” and of San ners y Juan Ureinnt 207
XVII.—On the Mean Motions uf Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus
and Neptane; by D.. Rime woot, 2.2 4-2 sscl science 208
XXVIIL.—Brief Contributions to Zotlogy from the Museum
of Yale lege. No. Recent Additions to the
Molluscan Fauna of New England and the adjacent
waters, with notes on other species; by A. E. Verrim1,.. 209

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
Chemistry and Physics. Beet an essential improvement in the method — a
en LiNNEMANN: On the preparation - Abso a oe
214.—On the action ot tight me Chlorine and B orn “Os the
Ammonia-platinum Bases, CLE 5.—Ca silane sisencdinks Ot skdow, 217,
Geology and Natural H: —Geological Survey of Ohio. Report of Progress in
1870, 218.—On new Tree Fern s and other Fossils from the Devonian, DAWSON.
22

fossil
Corr: Illustrated Catalogue of the Museum of Comparative Zoédlogy. Su ae
ment to the Ophiuridz and Astro nv Fe 224.
Astronomy.—Eclipse of the As Dec. 12, 1871, JANNSEN: On the Solar Eclipse of
Dec. 12, 1871, LCT EN, 2 a ‘of the a, Observatory, 230.

SE, xico, 23
the Meteoric Collection co Charles Upham ene 236,—The tictord Medals,
237.—Light of the bottom of the Ocean: Manna from a Linden in the Vosges,
BovssINGAULT, 238.—Hailstones of salt and sulphide of iron: Temperature of
the Sun, 239.

Miscellaneous Bibliography.—Catalogue of Photographic Illustrations by Wm. H.
Jackson: Fireside eae. a Series of Popular Scientitic Essays upon Subjects
connected with Every-day Life, Soars ee —A Treatise on Localized Electri-
zation, and its applications to Pathology and Therapeutics, Soneecs, The Lens,
@ Quarterly Journal of Microscopy ps the anes Natural Sciences: Elementary
Treatise on Natural Philosophy, DESCHANEL,

vi CONTENTS.

NUMBER XVIL

Page

Arr. XXIX.—-Discovery of additional remains of Pterosauria,
with. aes Sar of two new Species; by O. C. Marsn, 241

XXX.—On a new method = en the Velocity of
Rotation * A. E. Dor 248

rer ae —Gre ountain Geckaanl On the Quartzite; by
cs 12 Soe

XX Xi1_—Deseriptons of two new Star-fishes, and a Cri-

noid, from the Cincinnati group of Ohio and Indiana;
by F. B. Mace, ES Syege a eee CE eae 257
XXXIII.—Note on "Recurrent Vision; by C. A. You homage” 262

XXXIV.

1880.5: The 0 Awe ee se ec Suh 264
XV. —Acoustical pana I? by Al M; Mave. 2.22 267
XXXVI—Note on a Question of ‘Priority ; by E. Briuines, 270
XXXVIL_ Ihe Aurora of Feb. 4, 1872; by A. C. Twintne, 273

XXXVIII.—Brief Contributions to Zodlogy from the Mu-

seum of Yale College. No. —Recent additions to

the Molluscan Fauna of New England and the ge ear
waters, with notes on other species ; ERRILL, 281

P. E. Cua
XLI.—The Yalan National Park; by F. V. Haypen, 294

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
Chemistry and Physics.—On the w: wave-lengths i gp em tots 8 ag tegen ER,
ib Ce the spectroscopic observation of the rota of the sun, ZOLLNER
OG i

: nm the m
—-On some new s of roseo-cobalt and luteo-cobalt, Krox, 300.—On the
peg ohapees of pena into monatomic and hexatomic alcohols, BoucHAR-

penis BERTHOUD : United States yiverbacer Surveys: Second Report of the

of the Geological Survey of Wisconsin, MuRRISH : Annual Report it ‘the State
of New Jersey for the year 1871: Das Elbthalgeb irge in Sachsen: Scheutz,
Prodomus Monographize Georum, 306.—Baillon, Histoire des Plantes, 307.
Astronomy.—On the Kclipse of the Sun on Sept. 29, 1875, Pain, 308.—Solar
Relipse of Dee. 12, 310, 312.---Prof. To on the Eclipse —— 314.
Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence.—Correspondence relating to the Dismissal *
the la tanist to the —— of eran 315; Hethcnt Analysis in

stances, e
unt’s Green Mountain Serie sag Obituary—D r. Wm. Baird, 319.
W. H. P aan Canon Moseley: Adolph Seresker, 320,

CONTENTS. vu
NUMBER XVIL.

Page

Arr. XLU.—Recent Geographical work in the U. States,.. 321

eageewhs Molecular and Cosmical Physics; by W. A.
RTON,

XLIV. sa new Sensitive Singing Flame; by W. E. Guymr, 340
XLV.—I. On the Electro-motive — of Eqelde separated

Membranes; by Joun TRowBRIDGE,.---2---~----- 342
il. Demagnetization of Dinorrsanenata by Rozerr W.

ELV —Uenons of Systematic N somes as for the higher
groups; by Samuen H. ScuppE 348
ae wees some new Spates of Palaonas Fossils; by E.
XEVHL =-Prelintiaary Description of Hesperornis regalis,

with notices of four other new Species of Cretaceous
Birds; by. O.'C; Mamell,o os. 5000322 eu ki tL eee 360
X.—On a proposed method of estimating gs Alcohol

when present in Methylic Alcohol; by AREY Lea, 365
L.—Discovery of a New Planet; by J amEs C. WatTson,... 367
SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE,
Chemistry and Physics—On the aromatic phosphines, Hormann, 367.—On the

products of the oxidation of the methyl- and ely -phosphins, 368.-On the
compounds of Tungsten, Roscorz, 369.—On the mposition of Potassium
Chlorate, BAUDRIMONT, 370.—A delicate Test for ‘Prona) eee 371.—On
the Physiological ‘Action of et VoHL an

adjacent Territory, HayDEN: Dana’s Mineralogy, Appendix to the
tion, 375.—Bentham, Revision of the genus Cassia, 376.—Delpino, on the e Fer

ta:

of the Phenogamous Plants of the United States, etc.: Ilustrated Catalogue of
the Museum of hcg Zodlogy, Lyman, 381.—Additional Note on the
Rules of Nomenclature, VERRILL, 386.—New Zodlogical Pe eriodicals : East India
Crustaceans, Woop-Mason: Greenland Meteorite, 388.
Astronomy.—Recent auroral displays in the United States, 389.—Note on the

Zodiacal Light, 390.—The American Eclipse Expedition: Aurora of February
4th, 391.—A New Planet, Lutuer, 392.
Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence.—Topography xc the Punjab Oil Region, Lyman,
392.—The Pacific Gulf Stream, 394.—On the Climate of Boston, R. T.
Pate: Climate of the Post-tertiary, or Quaternary, after the Glacial era, 395.—
Acer +8 aes PowkLL: Cruise of the Schoo! Lship ‘ con : = ae

Vill CONTENTS.
NUMBER XVIIL.

Arr. LL—Brief pomntenors | to p foblogy. from the Museum

of Yale College. No. The Early Stages of the

American. cates Silene Americanus Edwards) ;

by S. L Smara,...-.-.----------------------------- 401
R ks onthe N lat f Achromatic Objectives

"for the Compound Microscope; by J. J. Woopwarp,.. 406
LI1.—On a _ form of Lantern-Galvanometer; by ALFRED
SF os ee ee er ee ee ee 414
LIV. peseripitias of some new species of Primordial Fos-
sila: by 8 W. Foun: 2.5 oo e222 2-2-2 ee 419
LV. —Deseriptions of New Hees = — from the Cin- .
cinnati Group of Ohio, by F. B. Mrrx,-------------- 423
LVI.—On the Age of the pe ee Rocks of Lake
Superior; by T. B. Brooxs and R. Pumpetty, 428

LVIL. Biel Contributions to lees from the Museum of
Yale College. No. XXII.—On Radiata from the Coast
of

.—On a Meteoric Iron buds found in El abe coun-
Y California ; by CuaRrLEs v.

a Solar ‘Halo; ; by Prof. Witi1am W. 7 OHNSON,-- 439

LX._On? Molecular and Cosmical Physics; by W.A. Norton, 440 |

LXI.—On the Structure of the Skull and Limbs in Mosasau-
roid Reptiles, with descriptions of new Genera and

Species; by O. C. Marsa. With four UME a an 448 :

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.

pean and Physics.—On the Reversal of the Spectrum-lines of Metallic Va- .
new ae powerful Thermo-Battery, 465.—Anomalous Production of ©

pors

Ozone, ets i
Geology and eh History. eSiegiee oo on the Taconic Controversy, BILLINGS,

te —On the True —— Dana, 468,—The Dee aaeunieat of Limulus Polyphe-

mus, PackaRD, Jr., 471.— a of Water by Leaves under certain cit-

nsti PECK .—Coo (4
Saran’ of Sota, British od yore, 474.—Fossil Flora of Great ‘Britain, 475.

—The Garde — fe

Astronomy. iy Po of Comets, 476.—New Planets: Discovery
of a new coaes aiok N, 4

Miscellaneous Scientific th eee —On the cn odagrge — Petroleum in the Island
of Santo Domingo, ge Terrestrial Magneti: of the sun’s rate of
rotation, H@RNSTEIN, 481.—The Metric System nor Weights and Measures, BaR-
NaRD: Die Naturgesetze der Fiitterung der landwirthschaftlichen Nitzthiere,
bdo GoHREN, 482.— Pocket-book of Mechanics and ig gps NysTRoM,

—An Eleme entary Manual of Chemistry, oo Popular Science

Monthty, 484,— Obituary.— William Stimpson,

neat,
ng ii, p. 408, title, for J. P. Soutuwi read R. J. SouTHw
ii (March, roto p- 198, line 22 ie top, for 80 by 110, prin ‘80 by 60.

Suzbanp, Sr.,..2. ...-- 438 |

*

AMERICAN

JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS.

[THIRD SERIES]

Art. L—On Alpine Geology ;* by T. Sterry Hunt.

in Savoy and the adjacent parts of Piedmont and Switzerlan

*

embracing Mont Blanc and its vicinity. It is now twelve years

in his memoir Sur ains liassqu nm de la Savoie,
ublished in 1859. Since that time the views then maintained by
avre, have, in spite of much opposition, gained ground, and are

* Recherches Géologiqner dans les parties de la Savoie, du Piémont, et de la
Suisse voisines du Mont Blane, avec un Atlas de 32 planches, par Alphonse Favre,
esseur ie 4 smi o. Paris, 1867.

AM. Jour. So1.—Tuirp Series, Vou. III, No. 13.—Jan., 1872.
1

2 T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology.

its pages to present a condensed summary of our present know- |
ledge of the structure of Mont Blanc and the adjacent regions. —

The crystalline rocks of the Alps, as first shown by Studer,
do not form a continuous chain, but appear as distinct masses,
separated from each other by uncrystalline sedimentary de-
oa generally fossiliferous. According to Desor, there are

etween Nice and the plains of Hungary not less than ah
four such areas, standing up like islands from out of the sedi
mentary rocks, and presenting for the most part a fan-like
structure (en eventail). these masses of crystalline rock,
Mont Blanc is the most remarkable, and is described by Elie

de Beaumont as “rising through a solution of continuity in the —

secondary strata, which may be compared to a great button-
hole.” The length of this area of crystalline rock, measured
from the Col du Bonhomme on the S. W. to Saxon in the
Valais on the N. E., is fifty-nine kilometers, while its breadth,
from Chamonix on the N. W. to Entréves near Courmayeur

on the S. E., is fourteen kilometers. The length of the central —
mass of protogine is, however, only twenty-seven kilometers. Of 4

the numerous peaks in this area the highest attains an elevation
of 4810 meters above the level of the sea, being 8760 meters
above the valley of Chamonix and 3520 meters above the val-

ley of Entréves. This great mass is described by Favre as sup- —

ported at the four corners by as many buttresses rising from
the surrounding valleys, and known as the Cols de Balme, de
Voza, dela Seigne and de Ferret. The distance between the
two valleys just named is only 18,500 meters, and the bold-
ness with which the mountain rises from them is strikingly
apparent if we take the Col de l’Aiguille du Midi and the Col
du Géant, which are about 3460 meters above the sea, and dis-
tant from each other 5,000 meters, giving a slope of about 30°.
A still greater inclination is obtained if we choose, instead of
these, the summits of the Aiguilles which bear the same names,
and, although now isolated, represent portions of the former
mass of Mont Blanc.

at the Grands Mulets (4666 meters), the rocks are taleose and
quartzose schists with graphite, hornblende, epidote, talc, and
asbestus, and similar rocks and minera found
to the summit. The protogines themselves, according to the
evidence of nearly all who have studied them, are stratified
gneissic in structure, and pass in places into more schis-
tose varieties, though Favre regards the distinction between
these and the erystalline schists proper as one clearly marked.

SN ee

T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology. 3

crystalline rocks of the Alps are various talcose and chloritic —

quartzose, and holding garnet, staurolite and cyanite, are also
met with among the crystalline rocks of the Alps. A great
belt of serpentine and chloritic schists, traced for a long distance,

schists of the Alps have close resemblances with those of the
Urals, and as Damour has shown, contain a great many mineral
species in common with them. Favre has moreover re-
marked the strong likeness between the chloritie and talcose
schists and the mica-schists with-staurolite of the western Alps
and those found in Great Britain.

Granite, though not abundant in the vicinity of Mont Blanc,
occurs in several localities, the best known of which is Valorsine,
where a porphyroid granite with black mica forms considera le
masses, and sends large veins into the adjacent gneiss. These,
with others found at the Col de Balme and in the Aiguilles
Rouges, appear to be true eruptive granites. Numerous small

+ T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology. ‘
The unerystalline strata in the region around Mont Blane

include representatives of the carboniferous, triassic, jurassic, —
cretaceous and tertiary. The existence of an ap-

of some Alpine geologists. '
ew questions in geology have been more keenly debated, —

i him estimated —
. have a thickness of from 25,000 to 30.000 feet, and included —

tions of the anthracitic system. TO this was added in 1860 the

T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology. 5

discovery by Pillet of nummulitic beds intercalated in the same
series near St. Julien in Maurienne. is fact was, however, in
accordance with the conclusion previously reached by Sismonda
from an examination of Taninge, that “the plants of the car-
boniferous period were still flourishing while the seas were de-

coal-plants. In 1861, the Geological Society of France held its
extraordinary session at St. Jean in Maurienne, and there also
the succession was made clearly evident, as follows: nummulitic,
liassic, infra-liassic, triassic, and carboniferous; the last resting

“the illusions without number to which a purely stratigra hical
study of the Alps may give rise.” To this we ~~ add the
in di inverted

6 “-T & Hunt on Alpine Geology.

These conclusions were not, however, admitted by Sismonda,
who in 1866 presented to the Royal Academy of Sciences of Tu-
rin an elaborate memoir on the anthracitic system of the Alps.*
In this, while admitting at Petit-Coeur the existence of evidence
of more or less contortion, rupture and over-riding (enchevauche-
ment) of the strata, he still maintains that the anthracitic system
of Maurienne and Tarentaise is one great continuous series
of jurassic age, from the fundamental gneiss and protogine,
upon which it immediately rests, to the upper member in whic

ov

occur thick beds of anthracite with an abundant carboniferous

ora; which he assigns, however, to the middle oolite (Oxfor-

dian) ; the great mass of strata below being referred to the lias.

He then particularly indicated the line of the great Mont Cenis

tunnel, which, commencing in the upper anthracitic member,
should pass downward through the quartzites and gypsums,
thence through talcose schists and limestones, as far as Bardon-
necchia. These schists and limestones, according to him, are in
‘‘a very advanced state of metamorphism,” and include eruptive
ee (ey with euphotide, steatite and other magnesian rocks.

(about fifteen miles to the southwest of Mont Cenis), a distance
of 12,220 meters. The direction of the tunnel is N. 14° W.,
and the dip of the strata throughout nearly uniform, N. 55° W.
at an angle of about 50°. From this we deduce by calculation
that the vertical thickness of the strata is equal to nearly 60
~ cent of the distance traversed, or in round numbers about

000 meters. Of this not less than 5831 meters, beginning at the
southern extremity, are occupied by the lustrous more or less
talcose schists with crystalline micaceous limestones, often cut
by veins of quartz with chlorite and calcite. Above there are
515 meters in thickness of alternations of anhydrous sulphate

nating with greenish talcose schists, and enclosing veins and

. . _
of specimens above this, but for the distance of 1707 meters
. from the northern entrance to the tunnel, corresponding to a
vertical thickness of 1024 meters, we have principally sand-

* Memoirs of the Acad., 2d series, xxiv, 333.

sl oaeigiey et gee ar Aan Le a nk, tie Sr

T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology. 7

stones, conglomerates and argillites, occasionally with anthracite.
The serpentines and euphotides which appear among the crys-
talline schists at Bramant, near the line of the tunnel, were not
met with, nor was the underlying gneiss encountered.

work terminated at Bardonecchia among the crystalline lime-
stones.

According to Sismonda and Elie de Beaumont, there is
throughout this entire section no evidence of inversion, disloca-
tion or repetition in the series of 7000 meters of strata, a conclu-
sion which they support by very cogent arguments. Lory, on

the contrary, while he agrees with the observers just mentioned

geological age of these crystalline schists and limestones, appear
o us untenable in the light of Sismonda’s investigations. If
we admit with the latter that the whole section of the tunnel
represents an uninverted series, and with Favre that its upper-
most and uncrystalline portion at Modane is truly of carbonif-
erous age, it is clear that the great mass of crystalline schists
which anderlie the latter should correspond more or less com-
pletely to the pre-carboniferous crystalline strata to the north-
west of Mont Blanc. Among these latter, in fact, as observed,
by Favre, there occur at Col Joli and Taninge crystalline lime-
stones and talcose schists like those of Maurienne. Accord-
ing to this view, which harmonizes the conflicting opinions, and
makes the crystalline schists and limestones of the southeast

8 T. 8. Hunt on Alpine Geology.

jh 4
ondary and older crystalline rocks to tertiary is explained by —
Murchison, in accordance with the suggestion of H. D. Rogers,

Geneva, shows at its base tertiary overlaid
cretaceous rocks, upon which jurassic strata are superimpose

Al

)

examples with that of the gneisses, chloritic and micac
schists which in western Scotland, according to Murchison,
overlie fossiliferous lower silurian » and are by him re-
garded as younger. This, upon the authority of Murchison,

Similar phenomena are met with along the north side of the —

T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology. 9

enis and Pelyoux, and much of the mountains on the frontier
of Piedmont and in the Valai

*T. Sterry Hunt, Address before the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science, 1871, page 30.

i

10 T. 8S. Hunt on Alpine Geology.

and mica-schist, and of quartz veins holding tourmaline. The ‘
paste, which is reddish, talcose and micaceous, seems identical :
with many of the pebbles, so that it is sometimes difficult to :

distinguish these from the matrix. A thin fibrous envelo

often surrounds the pebbles (§$ 521). Although the alternation :

lower limit of this formation on account of the great resem-

less we take care we run the risk of being deceived

PPM ae a SE eT ee ee ee Sd

confounding it with gneiss,” while elsewhere similar rocks
ass

ume the aspect of granite from the predominance in them of ©

enclosed pebbles, appears according to Favre to have undergone

.. See Favre, Terrains liassique et keuperien, etc. (1859), pp. 78, 79, to which in
his work he refers the reader for further peta on tei pain :

T. S&. Hunt on Alpine Geology. P 11

a certain re-arrangement, so that the beds of these “ pretendus
schists crystallins’ of the carboniferous are with difficulty dis-
tinguished from the “ vrais schists erystallins ” upon which they
rest unconformably. I insist the more upon these details, be-
cause in the earlier notice of Favre's investigations I erroneously
represented him as including in the carboniferous a great mass
of the older crystalline schists.

In this connection we may cite the observation of Sedgwick,
who cites similar cases of recomposed rocks in Seotland, “which
it is not always possible to distinguish from the parent rock,”
and remarks that “‘a mechanical rock may appear highly crys-
talline because it is composed of crystalline parts derived
from some pre-existing crystalline rock.”* Emmons also has
called attention to the existence of secondary or recomposed
beds of talcose, chloritic and micaceous schists in the Taconic
hills of western New England, which, according to him, have
been confounded with the older parent rocks. It would hardly

ag
gates also noticed Oy Saussure as closely resembling the older

* Geol. Transactions (1835), iii, 479. + Ibid., iii, 334; Geol. Journ, v, 210.

12 T. 8S. Hunt on Alpine Geology.

north of Mont Blanc.

by nearly all observers since the time of de Saussure, and cor-
rectly represented in the sections published by Studer in 1851,

by Lory in 1860.+ He supposes
that the underlying crystalline rocks forced, by great lateral

pressure, formed an elevated anticlinal arch, which, breaking 0D
the crown, fr

t , rom the excess of curvature, shows the lowest rocks”
in the center of the rupture, flanked on either side by the over-
lying strata. These, in their upper part, are subjected to a

comparatively feeble lateral pressure, while the deeper portions

oh forcibly compressed by the smaller folds on either side, from

Wich results the fan-like or sheaf-like structure of the beds. The
newer strata in the synclinals are by this process arranged
troughs, and are more or less overlaid by the older rocks. Such a
* Terrains liassique et rien, 17.
t Lowy, Gnbetinea, receipe Dauphiné, p. 130

however, Sismonda be correct
in: placing them below rocks which are, according to Favre,
true coal measures, these serpentines and steatites, with thell —
accompanying schists and limestones, are, as we have already

shown, in the same horizon with the crystalline schists to the

L. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology. 13

synclinal exists inthe valley of Chamonix, between the two rup-
tured and eroded anticlinals represented by Mont Blane and
the Brevent. In illustration of this structure Favre has given
a grand section commencing to the northwest in the mountain
known as Les Fiz, which, overlooking the Col d’Anterne, rises to
a height of 3180 meters and displays all the Alpine formations
from the sandstones of Taviglionaz, overlying the nummulitic
beds, down to the carboniferous, which is seen resting on the
crystalline schists) These appear in the height of Pormenaz
and in the Brevent, at the northwest base of which the carbonif-
erous rocks are arranged in a sharp fold dipping beneath the
crystalline strata. The latter to the northeast rise in the Ai-

* See in this connection Hebert, Bull. Soc. Geol. de Fr., 2, xxv, 356.

14 T. S. Hunt on Alpine Geology

this structure, the summits of al] of these being composed of ,
newer strata, beneath which, on either side, dip the older for-
n, therefore, geologists of authority from iI

of the valleys on either side, and even declared them to be
ltered sediments of the tertiary period, it was difficult to.
regard Mont Blane as any thing Sa than a synclinal moun- ©

ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Nee

F. B. Meek on the Genus Lichenocrinus. 15

tain similar in general structure and origin to those just men-
tioned. Hence it was that in 1860 (this Journal, I, xxix, 118)
I remarked ‘the weight of evidence now tends to show that
the crystalline nucleus of the Alps, so far from being an ex-

mass of so-called primitive rock, is really an altered

trious countryman de Saussure commenced,

Arr. IL—Supplementary Note on the Genus Lichenocrinus ; by
F. B. MEEK.

SINCE writing the remarks published in the October number
of this Journal (p. 299), I have received from Mr. Dyer a very
this curious type. One of these specimens seems almost to
or so-called proboscis of crinoids. This specimen is a small

individual of Z. Dyert, only measuring 0°22 inch in diameter
‘across the disc ; yet its column-like appendage measures near

J. H. Kloos— Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley. 17

lamine of the interior would seem fo preclude the possibility
of such an adjustment by flexibility.*

t is ana safes? necessary to add, that the irregular
arrangement the plates composing the disc of this s type,
without any tendon to arrange themselves into radial and
interradial series, together with its general habit of growth,
show that it belongs to the Cystoidea, and not to the PN ge
group of Crinoidea. Its want of arms and pinnule also a
proximate it to the Cystordea, in which the arms are va y
in a more or less rudimentary condition, or the former
cases, even entirely wanting. In its apparent entire seis of

oth arms and pinnuls, and especially in its want of visible
openings, gid the possession of a system of internal radiating
lamine, it is entirely peculiar, and unlike any other known type,
either of the typical sites tine or Cystoidea. How the respiratory,
reproductive, and nutritive functions, of such a being as it
appears to be, could hage been performed, remains a mystery,
and hence it is evident that Sie ae yet remains to be learned
in regard to its structure.

f course, such a form cannot be properly ranged in fore of
the recognized families of the typical Crinordea or of the Cys-
toidea, but should be regarded as the type of a new family of
the latter, under the name Lichenocrinide.

Arr, IIL—A Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley, Minnesota ;
by J. H. Kioos.

ne oO ‘
to Red Rock, the eastellated bluffs consist entirely of magne-
sian limestone, and give a peculiar character to the scenery ;
the sandstone, nator in the gradual and hardly percep-
tible northern dip of the strata, having disappeared under the
level of the water. At Red Rock, k, St. Peters sandstone and
* One ee from Mr. er’s collection, is seen lying in the
de ntier as to exnoce the detached under side of the disc; while
one of its edges is curved and folded upon itself. As none “4 ig plates, however,
is broken or displaced, nor any of the sutures between them gaping along the
folded edge, I cannoi believe this folding due to cerning but that some peculiar-
ity of its station caused this individual to 0 grow wa
Am. Jour. 8c1. as Sentes, Vou. III, No. 13. ha ‘1872,
a

18 J. H. Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley.

Trenton limestone take the place of Potsdam and Calciferous,
continuing to St. Paul and St. Anthon

mation.* I have not yet succeeded in finding the crystalline
limestones of the Canadian Laurentian, though at several places
west of the Mississippi I have met with large limestone boulders,
which I refer to this period. At St. Cloud, Sauk Rapids and
Watab on the Mississippi, the rocks of the Laurentian ridges are
quarried and are commencing to be used extensively for fronts
of large blocks and government buildings at St. Paul, Chicago
and even in cities lower down the Mississippi Valley. Some of —
the syenitic and dioritic varieties form a splendid material for —
ornamental work and monuments.

Leaving the Mississippi at St. Cloud and going westward up
the Sauk Valley, we cross the belt of Laurentian rocks at right
angles, and remain among the low granitic hills for 25 miles.
There is no continuous ridge or uplift; at several places we
find ledges of granite, syenite, granitoporphyry, hypersthevite
and diorite, either exposed at the water’s edge or cropping out

e€ prairie. e river, however, has not cut deep enough ©
into the solid rock to show the continuance of the ledges, and
the glaciers and icebergs of the erratic period have swept over

* Sauk Centre, 40 miles west of the Mississippi, is the only place where I found
ee agg of gran to have a somewhat gneissoid odurdinced Tt is here associated —
a

J. H. Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley. 19

the whole country, levelling the surface, and leaving only the
highest uplifts of the older formation exposed to view.

The first rock we met with after crossing the St. Cloud prairie,
is a red feldspathic granite, protruding from the drift at the
point where the Rockville road reaches the Sauk. Like all the
granitic and syenitic rocks which I observed in this part of the
State, it contains, together with the common feldspar or ortho-
clase, an albite or other oligoclastic feldspar with well defined
striated cleavage planes.

Eight miles from St. Cloud on the bank of the river, I saw
the first boulder of an exceedingly course granite, different

and grass had taken root.
ese huge masses of granite have not been transported far.

At Rockville the same rock forms a distinct ledge, running from
the range of hills toward the river. The cliffs of the outrun-
ning ledge show the same outlines as the boulders.

ear Cold Spring we come to another exposure of granite,
the intervening four miles forming quite a broken praine, tra-
versed by erratic hills covered with timber. Here the river
takes a leap over the ledge of rock and forms a good water-
power, which is used for manufacturing purposes. A porphyri-
tic granite, not distinguishable from the same kind of rock on
the east side of the Mississippi, rises in beautiful clifis above the
water, and crossing these we reach another extensive ex
of the above described coarse granite. Both cross the Sauk, and
the line between them is marked by a depression, in which a

the prevalent rock. Several ridges are distinguishable, crop-
ing out on the slightly rolling table land, and their presence 1s
marked on the surface by a coarse grit of feldspar and quartz.
They are seemingly in range with the line of hills at Cold
Spring, bearing generally east and west. Bu ;
Richmond itself is built on a high level pes entirely
covered with farms, but having rather a sandy soil. To the

20 J. H. Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley.

est. ope soon to have an opportunity to compare them with
similar rocks, which in Germany have been the subject of elabor-
ate chemical and mineralogical investigations, and expect to ~
come to very interesting results. As yet I have had no occasion to
determine the nature of the feldspar and the species of pyroxene, —
though I expect to find labradorite, anorthite and hyperite, with
hornblende, mica and perhaps protobastite the principal con-
stituents. :
The Sauk river cuts 30 feet deep into the prairie at Rich-

decomposed granite of a white and light-reddish color. At
another point on the river, a thin seam of iron ore, impure
peroxide of iron, runs through the strata, and a few feet above »
the conglomerate a thin seam of an impure lignite can be seen.
All these strata lie apparently horizontal. They belong to an
older period than the Drift formation, and, as I will show further
on, are part of the eastern extension of a Cretaceous basin in the
old crystalline rocks, which extend south and west, and is prob-
ably connected with the Cretaceous basin of Dakota, so exten-
sively developed on the Missouri river.

The banks of the Sauk river do not throw much light upon
the age of the strata, the plastic clay having only furnished me
the small tooth of a Carcharodon. The shaft and borings,

found in the Benton group, but the development and nature of
the deposits are entirely similar. In both localities they con-

J. 'H. Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley. 21

suddenly after a heavy rainfall and filling his drift. He after-
fund coal three miles north of Richmond among the

and yellowish plastic clays, with few boulders and some shale.
There must have been a heavy covering of drift and gravel to

22 =o. A. Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley.

be traversed before the clay was reached, the opening of the —
shaft lying considerably above the plateau or level prairie on
which Richmond is built, but I have no means of ascertaining —
the thickness of the different strata. This boring has since —
been abandoned at 180 feet, when no more coal had been
encountered than what the old drift had brought to light.
earer the river another shaft and boring had been sunk.
Here I found several fragments of shale containing scales of
cycloid-fishes, which had been met with near the surface.
oring was afterwards continued to a depth of 112 feet, when
the borer struck a hard rock, which proved to be granite.
was drilled for eight feet, and the fragments brought to light by
the pump consist of feldspar, quartz and pyrites, such as are
found in varieties of pegmatite or graphic granite, which I also
found at the nearest outcropping ridges of the crystalline rocks.
The profile of the strata on a line running nearly northeast
and southwest, going through the different points where investi-
gations have been made, would show as in the annexed wood-
cut :

x 4 oe
- Sa}. | ~—6 Ve
a —— AGEN TEES r= =F ae
——— — —— —
$3 3SS])Y0]u'’vUime Se Ve ,
a = a Sag ee
—=} +

a go as ae a
ey NN \ yet ae ee
ee tN sok 5 < oe
aks Fd eS ~~
ane, ES ee ea oe a et oe a
ee Ge ee Aenea POF -\ \ I

1, drift 60’ long; 2, 3. shafts 112’ and 180’ deep, a, a, granite; 6,b, kaolin; ¢, ¢,
plastic clays and shales of the Benton group Cretaceous ; d, d, drift.

Having heard that fossils had been found in digging wells on
some farms situated on the timbered hills south of Richmond,
I extended my investigations in that direction. There are no
further exposures on the surface, which is exceedingly broken
but entirely shaped out in deposits of a Post-tertiary age. Two
miles south of Richmond I came to a farm, where a well had
excited “the wonder and curiosity of the neighbors. This well
was 30 feet deep, from where a hole had been sunk a further
distance of 10 feet. Ata depth of eight feet the blue clay (c. c. of

e profile) was struck, passing into shale near the bottom of
the well and containing a number of fossils. The water of this
well was strongly saturated with sulphureted hydrogen, but lost
the taste and smell almost entirely after having been exposed
‘for some time to the atmosphere. When at the place, I was
not able to obtain more than fragments of the shells, which I
had, however, no difficulty in recognizing as belonging to the
genus /noceramus. Afterwards the well was dug down further,

J. H. Kloos—Oretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley, 23

and I obtained some pretty fair casts and parts of the shells,
which will be mentioned farther on, in a note by Mr. Meek.
When last heard from, the well had a depth of 55 feet, and a
boring had been sunk to a further depth of 25 feet. The fol-
lowing section is a nearly accurate description of the strata
traversed
8 feet gravel and sand.

30 “ dark blue laminated clay. Fragments of Inoceramus pro-
blematicus and crystals of gypsum.

8 “ clay and hard sandy shale of alight blue color, with pyrites,
mica and fish scales. Cast of Znoceramus, At 40 feet
a thin seam of lignite.

10 “ same clay with more shale 3 to 4 inches thick. Shells of
Inoceramus and Scaphites in the shale having retained
their original color and pearly luster. In 50 feet an-
other seam of lignite.

15 “ dark blue clay without shale; color darker than the clay
above and turning almost black. At 65 feet a hard
shale of a grayish black color had to be drilled through.

10 “ clay with thin layers and seams of pyrites.

As this boring is commenced at an elevation of 80 feet above
the leve] of the base, communicating with the Sauk river, we
are on nearly the same level with the prairie at Richmond. —

a slough, having an outlet to the lake, at the foot of the hills,
the blue clay lies near the surface.

The locality which furnished me the fossils is two miles
south of Richmond, in continuation of the line of our profile.
The formation here has probably a thickness of several hun-
dred feet. :

The following note in regard to the fossils already mentioned,
is from Mr. F. B. Meek, to whom they were submitted :

Mr. Kioos—Dear Sir: The specimens sent by you from near
Richmond, Minnesota, were duly received. consist of casts
of Inoceramus problematicus, impressions apparently of Ammo-
nites percarinatus, scales of fishes and a small shark tooth allied
to Corax or Galeus. Among the drawings also sent by you,
there is one of the inner volutions of Scaphites larviformis, or

Missouri; and it is very desirable that the eastern pecniat O
this group of rocks should be traced out as accurately as possible,

24 J. H, Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley.

through Minnesota. Owing to the heavy deposits of Drift there,
however, this will be a difficult task, and can only be done by
careful observations of all that is revealed by deep wells and
other excavations. Consequently it is important that all the facts,
brought to light in this way, should be carefully noted and
published.

nown in regard to the Cretaceous series of the Upper
Missouri, it is also exceedingly improbable that even lignite of
sufficiertt purity, and in proper quantities to be of much practical
value, will ever be discovered in the region mentioned.
F

ery truly yours . B. MEEK.
Washington City, D. C., 1871. :

White Bear Lake, in Pope county, near Glenwood, a village

ichmond, and seventy-five
miles west of the Mississippi. Here it makes its appearance
under a cover of drift, which must be at least 200 feet thick

In the southern part of the State, on the Cottonwood river,
Professor James Hall has traced the beds of lignite with friable

the surface. These fragments are now in the possession of Dr.
Sweenye, President of the Academy of Natural Science at St.
Paul, and seem to indicate the occurrence of the highest beds of
the Cretaceous series in Minnesota.

* Notes upon the Geology of some portions of Minnesota, from St. Paul to the
western part of the State (Trans. American Phil. Soc., vol. xiii, pp. 329).

eS ares a st ee ee

B
%

J. H. Kloos—Cretaceous Basin in the Sauk Valley. 25

Though all these localities are fully 250 miles east of the
Missouri, there is nothing in the configuration of western
Minnesota and eastern Dakota to forbid the thought of a con-

nowhere met with any rock in place. These hills are from six
to ten miles wide, and consist of parallel ranges, extending
nearly northeast and southwest. The slopes are everywhere

and subsequent groups being several hundred feet thick and of a

decidedly marine origin, it is more likely that one large sea has

t the present time, all signs of the presence of older deposits
under the accumulation of drift have almost entirely been
_ obliterated, and it is impossible to get a correct idea of the
position of the strata. The State Geologist, Henry Eames,
Visited this locality in 1866, when three little shafts were sunk
by the discoverer of the lignite. He describes the strata to be
inclined under an angle of 65°. There seems to have been en-

26 U. P. James—New Species of Fossil.

countered three separate seams of lignite in short distance under —
each other, and separated by clay and shale. Hames assumes
that they are fragments of the same bed having been brought
into its present position by a great slide.*

Whatever may be the position of the strata in this locality,
there can be no doubt that the granitic ledges of the Laurentian
belt crop out in the vicinity, and that they are covered oy
heavy timber. At Sauk Center, a village situated on the Sa
river, forty miles west of the Mississippi, I found granite and
diabase in parallel ledges, cropping out on the prairie. This
place is only a few miles north of a line drawn from Richmond
to Glenwood. The present bed and valley of the Sauk river
can therefore safely be taken as nearly defining the northern
limits of the basin.

Further researches, to define the eastern and northern bound-
aries of the great Cretaceous sea bordering on the Rocky Moun-
tains, will be of great interest for the geology of the interior of
the American continent. The future will probably show that
Cretaceous strata are spread over a great area in Minnesota,
resting on Laurentian, Huronian and Silurian rocks, and cov-
ered partly by Tertiary deposits.

St. Paul, Minnesota, October, 1871.

Art. IV.—On a New Species of Fossil from the Lower Silurian ;
by U. P. Jamzs.

CYRTOLITES cosTaTuS. Body of shell nearly cylindrical:
volutions about three, barely contiguous, enlarging rapidly ;
aperture nearly circular, slightly expanded; surface marked
by strong longitudinal costz, smaller costes coming in at dif
ferent stages of growth, so that as they approach the aper-
ture every third one is stronger and more elevated than the two
between; strong transverse ribs or lines of growth at irregular
intervals, with fine strie between; umbilicus large and deep;
diameter of disk eight lines, but in this respect individuals of
different ages must vary, as well as in the number intermediate
costee.

This species may be readily determined by the strong longi-
tudinal coste and deep aatbttiewk :

‘tion and locality.—Lower Silurian, Warren county, Ohio,
about the middle of the Cincinnati group. Found September,
1871. My cabinet. :

* H. Eames, Geological Reconnoissance of the Northern, Middle and other Coun-
ties of Minnesota, in 1866, St. Paul, 1867.

J. De Laski— Glacial Action on Mount Katahdin. a7

Art. V.—Glacial Action on Mount Katahdin; by Joun Dz

Laski, Carver's Harbor, Maine

Ow the twenty-first of September last, in company with Mr.
George E. Bird of Portland, a graduate of Harvard College, and
a guide from Sherman, the next town south of Pattern, I ascend-
ed Mount Katahdin, the highest land in Maine, on the south side
by way of one of the “slides.” The weather was fine, wit
few clouds in the sky till late in the afternoon. This slide
I take to be the same by which Prof. Charles H. Hitchcock and
party ascended to the top of Katahdin ten years ago.* On this
route, after crossing Avalanche Brook at the base of the mount-
ain—the stream of which is fed by springs up toward the top
of Katahdin—we found fossiliferous rocks at various heights in
our path. Boulders of this character were met with well up
toward the “ Horseback” ride, and I judged the highest place
of their occurrence to be seven hundred feet below the “ Chim-
ney” top. This is the highest peak in the region except Po-
mola, the apex of Katahdin, which according to Dr. Young,
with whom J visited the mountain twenty-four years ago, is
five thousand three hundred feet above the sea, and according
to Prof. Hitchcock, eighty-five feet higher.t Ido not think the
“Chimney” top is more than three hundred feet below the top
of Pomola, and probably two hundred would be nearer the truth ;
and if this is added to the seven hundred feet, and the amount
taken from the height, we have four thousand three hundred
and eighty-five feet for the height of the fossils above the sea ;
and if we call the foot of the slide three thousand feet above
the ocean, we have nearly fourteen hundred feet above the foot
of the slide for the locality of the upper fossils.

n connection with these Devonian fossils—all of them im-
pressions of shells of Oriskany beds—we found small boulders
of micaceous sandstone and arenaceous schist, and a specimen of
a eed and Mr. Bird found a specimen of flint, undistinguish-
able from chalk flint, higher than the localities of the foreign
boulders found by me. I should judge his specimen to have
lain five or six hundred feet higher than the boulders contain-
ing fossils, The mass of flint would weigh a pound or more,

d was water-worn. :

Now the question presents itself, how came these erratic
boulders—fossiliferous and non-fossiliferous— on the south side
of Katahdin? ‘The entire mountain so far as I saw it—and
have also been up it by the way of the north side to the top,
and down that of its eastern As gen syenite, like that of the
“granite” of Vinalhaven, but generally of a coarser texture.

* Report of Scientific Survey of Maine for 1861, p. 397 = ¢ Ib., p., 308.

28 J. De Laski— Glacial Action on Mount Katahdin.

I am not able to agree with Prof. Hitchcock in regard to
the manner of the deposit of these fossiliferous boulders.
He suggested that “they came round the west side of the
mountain.”* If we admit the iceberg theory—for the last
few years considered nearly extinct, and which. Mr. Hitch-
cock advocated at the time of writing the sentence above,
ten years ago—there is the smallest possibility that those

s

from fifteen to thirty five miles, and dropped on the south
side of the mountain. The Oriskany beds are three thousand
feet lower than the locality where the fossils were found on the
shoulders of Katahdin.

myself. Furthermore, could these fossils, originally in situ not
far distant from Katahdin, on low-lying lands, have worked
themselves, during their short journey, from the bottom of a
glacier to a position fourteen hundred feet higher into the
body of the ice-cap? Though large boulders do sometimes

“slide” is everywhere a plain of eee sand and gravel,
whose material has a constant tendency to descend.
* Report of Scientific Survey for 1861, p. 395.

J. De Laski—Glacial Action on Mount Katahdin. 29

Along the “ Horseback” lie boulders so perched upon one
another that we are sure they were not piled up by any frosts
to which the mountain has been exposed in modern times; in
fact, no frost agency could have put them in their present
position. The ridge is narrow, and drops at an angle not dif-
fering much from forty-five degrees. We can safely presume
that snow never accumulates on this ridge to any considera-
ble depth. This locality is the very focus of winds at all sea-
sons of the year, and especially during the winter months.
What snow falls there is probably transformed into ice, and
would not have much downward movement over the narrow
ridge as ava:anches. These boulders I consider to have been

structed with granite boulders, generally angular, and some of
them from ten to twenty feet square. The great blocks are
heaped upon each other without order and to such a height
that it is exceedingly difficult to climb over them.

I believe the top of Katahdin to have been overridden by
the glacier, and that the ice-cap has everywhere degraded its
summit, though, like Hitchcock, I saw nothing of the glacier pol-
ish and scratches there; nor should we expect to find them
on so high an eminence composed of coarse granite, where no
soil can accumulate to protect them from the eroding action
of winter frosts. Prof. Hitcheock thinks that the northern sides
of Katahdin at any considerable height have not been stos-
sed by the drift agent.* I can say with great confidence, that
the northern side of the mountain just below the “Monument,
which is three thousand five hundred feet above the Wassatta-
cook, washing the base of the hill, really “appears like one
great stoss side,” and is a glacially degraded wall, just as all
our hills in Maine are, at all heights below that of Katahdin.
We see boulders with rounded corners lying in place there,
and wonder why they have not been topp ed down the mount-
ain by the winter frosts. ; ;

Furthermore, we have the fact of the disruption of the
top of Katahdin into “strata,” as Mr. Hitchcock designates

On the south side of the mountain, just under the
“Chimney,” this disruption is very marked, apparently hori-
zontal, though the sheets probably dip toward the south. Now

* Report of Scientific Survey for 1861, p. 396.

ae J. De Laski—Glacial Action on Mount Katahdin.

the case is that the strata everywhere slope from the shoulders of
the mountain downward. On the north side, the dip is toward.
the north; on the east, toward the east ; on the west, toward the
west; and on the south, generally toward the south. This is the
case with all the “ granite” hills of Maine, and is referable to the
action of the great glacier over them. This structure has not
been superinduced by superficial changes of temperature,” as
Dr. Hunt conjectures, in Silliman’s Journal, July, 1870, p. 88.
Among all the quarries of Vinalhaven, the surface is broken

the quarries wholly exclude the idea of tHeir origin being refera-
ble to variation of atmospheric temperature, or to any other
cause, I think, than that of glacial action.* The first suspicion
I had years ago of the enormous thickness of the great gla-
cier, was suggested by these remarkable fractures. In the
locality under the “ Chimney,” which I have just mentioned,
where the formation is in sheets, and which is more than four
thousand five hundred feet above the sea, quite a stream of
water runs out of the fracture and falls into the “ Avalanche
Brook,” which also, probably, has a similar origin. Wher-
ever, therefore, the bare front of Katahdin is open to view, I
think it will be found to be shattered as I have described; and
in my judgment these effects must be referred to glacial action.
Now the glacier could not have broken up the top of Katah-

in, unless the ice-cap had been several hundred feet in

to great ee Iam therefore not disposed to estimate the

istory.

I add a word on the route to Katahdin.

Of the different routes to Katahdin taken by tourists, one
is by way of the West Branch of the Penobscot, either down
it by the way of Moosehead Lake, or up it from its junction
with the Kast Branch ; and by the way of Sherman to the
Hunt Farm, and the Wassatacook Stream. On this route, the

* May not the origin of this structure antedate both the ice and the action of

cial temperature ?7—Eps.

C. Abbe— Computation of Relative Altitudes. 31

path is generally taken to Katahdin Pond, and south to the
mountain, though I should prefer the route up the Wassata-
cook to the place where Katahdin comes down to this stream,
and so up the mountain from the north, where it is easier of
ascent. Before the summit is reached in this direction, there is
a chance to camp in the mixed growth of trees; and startin
early, you can get over the top of the mountain without that
exhausting labor which attends ascent by the other routes.
The magnificence of this mountain is not appreciated without
a visit to it. Its base above the surrounding country running
north and south must be nearly ten miles. long, and its top in
this direction not far from six miles) The summit is in
general flat, though having several peaks.

*
Art. VIL.—Table for the Computation of Relative Altitudes; by
CLEVELAND ABBE.

su
published by Diffe in Schumacher’s Jahrbach, and be b

measure common y used in the United States. I have not
altered the contents given in the Smithsonian edition, but have
extended the tables to @frange sufficient to cover several extreme
cases that have come to my notice. The daily use of the baro-
meter in this country for hypsometrical determinations, leads
me to think that the tables here presented will be as convenient
to others as they have proved to myself.

he directions for the use of these tables are not different
from those eve on pages 54-57 of Section D of the se

log A=log u+Atete?
where u=log b—log b'
and ¢ and c' are the small corrections for the change in the
force of gravity with the latitude and the altitude respectively.
Washington, Nov., 1871.

32 C. Abbe— Computation of Relative Altitudes.
TABLE I,
t+?’ t+?! t+t t+t/
FAHR. A FAHR. A FA AR, a RAR. -l
—120) 468081 —60| 4°71583 0} 4.74825 + 60) 4°77842
1i9, 141 5 59 639 cs 4 877 He 61; 891 v
118) 202 ¢, 58 695 2. 2 929 55 62 939 75
117 263 65 57 751 26 3} 4°74981 25 63| 477987 49
116 323 65 56 807 Fe 4) 475033 25 64} 4°78036 49
115 383 6) 55 863 2. 5 085 25 65 085 45
114 444 6 54 918 2a 6 136 2 66 133 45
113 505 go 53) 471974 2 7 188 75 67 181 45
112 565 ¢ 52| 4-72030 5. 8 240 71 68 229 75
111 625 £6 51 085 32 a 201 2 69 277 49
416 684 || —50 140 2 |] +10 343 5) ||+ 70 326 49
109 744 65 49 195 7e 11 394 7 y 7] 374 43
108 804 66 48 251 55 12 445 50 72| 422 49
10 864 eo 47 306 5. 13 497 25 13 470 44
106 924 £4 46 365 2 14 648 2 74 Git 7
105} 468983 ¢) 45 416 52 15 599 » 15 565 4g
104| 4°69043 2, Ad 471 2. 16 650 5) 16 613 gy
10 102 £5 4 526 5° 17 701 25 TT 660 49
102 161 po 4 581 2. 18 752 By 78 708 43
101 221 Fo 4 636 2 19 803 2) 79) 756 45
—100 280 25 || —4 691 2, || +20 854 27 ||+ 80 804 jn
99 339 55 3s 745 7 2 905 » 81 851 4g
98 398 25 EY: 800 2° 22 5956 7) 82 899 fy
97 457 25 37 855 24 23) 4.76007 5 83 946 4
96 516 25 3 909 - 24 057 5 84) 4-78993 47
95 575 23 35) 472963 °F 25 107 7) 85) 479040 4,
94 633 23 34) 473017 27 26 158 » 86 087 4g
93 691 25 33 071 7 27 208 5 87 135 gy
92 750 29 32 126 54 28 259 Fo 88) 182 jy
91 809 23 31 180 2 29 809 5 89 229 in
axe 00 867 23 || —30 234 57 || +30 359 5) ||+ 90 276 an
89 925 25 29 288 77 31 410 35 91 323 jy
. 88} 469984 20 28 342 Fi 32 460 25 92 370 iy
87} 4°70042 2. 7 396 33 510 25 93 417 jn
86 100 23 6 450 53 34 560 25 94 464 4,
85 158 7 ; 603 oY 35 610 25 95 51] j¢
84 216 27 2 537 53 36 660 2, 96 557 an
83 273 24 ‘ 610 74 37 26 F 97 604 fn
82 331 23 ‘ 664 2 38 760 fy 98 651 yy
81 389 2 ‘ 718 2 39 809 - 99 698 46
— 80 447 23 || —2 771 53 || +40 859 55 || +100 744 46
79 505 2 1 824 5 4 909 £5 || 101 790 46
18 562 7» L 878 53 42) 4-76959 © || 102 836 an
TT 619 73 931 5 43] 477009 7, || 103 883 47
16 677 20 4°13984 52 4 058 5 104 930 ay
75 734 27 474037 > 45 108 49 || 105) 479977 46
14 791 2. 090 7 46 157 4g || 106, 4:80023 42
13 848 5 1: 143 0 47 206 = || 107 069 46
72 905 24 12 195 Fo 48 256 4g || 108 115 46
71) 470962 2) 11} ' 248 7 49 30545 || 109 161 ae
i 9G 1019 2 || —1¢ 801 25 || +50 354 gq ||+110 207 48
6 076 -. : 354-5 51 403 4 || 111 252 46
68 133 6 § 406 55 52) 452 49 || 112) 298 46
67 189 7. ’ 458 7 53 501 45 || 113 344 46
66 245 20 f Bil Fo 54 550 4g || 114 390 46
65 802 26 Z 563 53 55 599 4, || 115 436 46
64 358 2 4 616 55 56 647 4 || 116 482 46
63 415 26 : 668 73 57 696 49 || 117 528 45
62 471 56 ‘ 131 55 58 745 49 || 118 573 46
61 627 ee || — 2 113 50 59 794 4g || 119 619 45
— 60! 471583 0! 4°74825 +60! 477342 +120! 4:80664

C. Abbe—Computatiun of Relative Altitudes.

TABLE J—Continued.

| |
+t) t+2"| eon t+? |
PAHR.! = FAHR.| “ PARR, = FAHR., =
+120; 480664 o +150 482010 44 || +180) 483315 ,, ||+210, 4-84583 ,,

121) 710 4g || 15l, 054 4, || 181 358 43 || 211) 624 45
122) 756 4, || 162) 098 44 || 182 401 4 || 2121 666 4)
123, $01 4s || 153) 142 4}; 183 43 || 213 107 45
124! 816 ge || 164 186 44 || 184 487 75 || 214 749 7)
125| 891 a 155) 230 44 || 186 530 45 || 215) 790 49
126 937 45 || 156 274 7) || 186 B72 45 || 216 832 4)
121 80982 157| 318 4, || 187 614 45 || 217 873 45
128) 4:81027 a 158! 362 44 || 18 657 75 || 21 915 45
129 073 44 159) 406 43 || 189 700 45 || 2 me

4 130 117 4g || +160) 449 7 || +190 742 45 || +220) 4°84998 4)

131 163 44 || 161) 493 4, || 191 784 45 || 221) 485039 4
132 207 4, || 162; 537 44 || 192 82645 || 222| 080 44
133 252 € 163) 581 4, || 198 869 45 || 223 120 45
134, 297 45 || 164] 625 4 || 194; 911 Gs || 224 162 4)
135 342 - 165 668 44 || 195 4 io 225) 203 4)
136 387 45 || 166 712 45 || 196 483996 4 22 244 7)
137 43275 || 167 75444 || 197) 484038 45 || 227 285 43
138 477 4, || 168 798 45 || 198 080 45 |] 228 326 4,
139 621 4. 169 841 199 122 | 229 367 4)

+140 566 : +1701 885 4, || +200 164 45, || +230 408 4)

141 611 - 17 928 f. | 201 206 4) || 231 449 4
142 656 44 || 172) 482971 45 || 202 248 45 || 232 490 4)
143 700 45 || 173) 483014 43 || 203 290 49 || 233 531 45
144 145 17 057 43 || 204 332 7 || 234 671 41
145 ng9 ** || 17 100 {3 || 205 374 45 || 235 612 4)
146 833 oy 176 143 47 || 206 416 45 || 236] 653 4,
147 877 177 187 207 458 4 || 237 694 45

g21 ** || 178 230 Pe 208 4994, || 238| 134 ay

149| 4-81966 ry: 179 273 45 || 209 B41 49 || 239] 775 49

+150) 4-82010 +180! 4°83315 4210! 484583 4240! 485815
Il.— Correction for Latitude.

Lat.» C. Lat. Lat. c Lat. M aes
0° | +113 23° 78 45° 0 68 —8l
Bo 113 4 15 46 wl 69 84
| a 112 25 +72 47 8 70 —86
Bo] 26 69 48 12 11 89

112 "
% 11 27 66 16 72 “A

+111 28 63 50 —20 73
6 | 11 29 60 51 23 14 96
es 109 30 +56 52 27 15 | —98
8 | = 53 53 31 16 100
9 | =f Pe 54 35 "7 101
hcg! 107 32 49 : ’

10 +106 33 46 55 89 a 7
11 104 34 42 56
12 103 35 +39 57 46 80 | —106
13 101 36 35 58 49 81 107
4 31 59 53 82 108
15 me 2 27 60 56 83 109

3 —

16 : —F m4 23 61 60 4 i

ee ees ee
| 91 41 1 '
> | 89 42 12 64 37 112

le 43 8 65 —72 | 88 112
21 84 44 4 66 89 113
22 81 45 0 | 67 78 90 | —113
23 + 18 ) 68 —8l

Am. Jour. saga Series, VoL. III, No. 13.—Jan., 1872.

34 R. Emery—Relative proportion of Iron and

Iil.— Correction for Altitude.

Difference of altitude. of | Diff faltitud c.
0 feet to 240 0 || 5050 feet to 6531 +11
a . +1 5531 =“ 6012 12
“1203 2 6012“ 6493 13
1203" «1683 3 6493 6974 14
1683“ 2164 4 6974 7455 15
2164“ 2645 5 | = 745B 7936 16
2645 “ 3126 6 7936 8417 17
3126 = 3607 7 8417 “ 8898 18
360T “ 4088 8 8898 ‘ 9378 19
4088 “ 4569 9 9378 “ 9860 +20
4569 “ 65050 +10 ‘9860 = 10341 2

Nore.— and c’ are given in units of the fifth decimal place.

Art. VIIl.—On the relative proportion of Iron and Sulphur in the
‘* Pyrite” contained in several specimens of lowa Coal; by —
Rusu Emery. 3

pounds remaining. This solution was vibe gigs: to dryness ;

decomposition. In Nos. 1, 2, 5 and 10, large amounts of Ca
were found; in No. 3, a very small quantity; none in the

Sulphur in the Pyrite of Iowa Coal. 35

others. Jn all of the cases where Ca was found, CO, was also
present, and especially in the first four named. It is believed
that what is frequently regarded as gypsum in coal deposits, is
in many cases a mixture of calcium carbonate and sulphate.
In a large number of examinations of Iowa coals, made by the
writer in connection with his labors as chemist of the late Geo-
logical Survey of that State, there were but few cases where
the application of the test failed to show the presence of CO,,.

(2) The insoluble—by treatment (1)—iron sulphide was
thoroughly digested with HC] and KCIO,: the solution thus
obtained, after being boiled to expel Cl, was divided into two
yon: Fe,O, and BaSO, determined successively in each ;

e and S calculated ; and the means of the two analyses taken.
See columns 4 and 6.

It was also found by carefully testing the filtrate from the
precipitate of Fe,O,, that Ca was present in but three cases,
and then in very small amount.

The samples for analysis were selected with a view of obtain-
ing the largest possible quantity of visible sulphide, while not
excluding that which existed in a form invisible to the eye and
disseminated through the coal.

he results of this investigation are given in the following

Table of Analyses,
| 3 Sb #22 | seve be soa
a1) Be | epee cape | bee | Sem,
8 of BB yo] RBH | wees oe | Bees | gad
So Ont ° ae) S i
4) b | Bae | peso | pees | 2 | bl? | 38sce
Ste Be a jo Bio) bee 4 BRB fee} kd 4 oe oeeee
2| s3 | aso. | 282 | Bees? | ge | fede | gs28t
a es | os GBSF | Gorse | Cf BESS — ASasn
1/19°479| 3-388 | -192 219 | "158 | D.-061 | 45-14
2|11-722| +785 | -106 121 | 186 | E.-065 | 63-70
3/11°356| 484 | -19 25 | 278 | E.-053 | 58°53
4 12°095| -396 | -106 121 | 168 E.-04% | 61°31
5 | 19-802; 2-767 | -362 414 | 409 D.-005 | 53-05
6|17-290| 3-819 | B64 645 | 642 D,-003 | 53:23
7}12°015; 480 | -224 256 | 262 | E.-006| 63°91
8/15°611/ 1579 | 244 279 | -429 | E.:150 | 63-74
9 | 22°767| 1-703 | -396 “453 | 407 | D. 046 50°68
10 /17°693| 1532 | -250 “286 | 284 D. 002 | 53°18

It will be seen by the sareaes.* table, that in Nos. 5, 6, 7

1 i e and S correspond nearly

marked excess of S; while Nos. 1 and 9 give the unexpected
result of a marked deficiency.

tis a source of regret to the writer that other duties have

_ Prevented the making of a larger number of analyses; but it

36 G. E. Moore—Amorphous Mercurie Sulphide. :

is to be hoped that others may contribute to the investigation —

of this subject. |
The samples for analysis were furnished through the kindness —

of Dr. C. A. White of Iowa City, late Director of the Iowa

Geological Survey.
Genesee Agricultural School, Lima, N. Y., Oct. 31st, 1871.

Art. VIIL—On the Occurrence in nature of Amorphous Mercurie
Sulphide ;* by Dr. GipEon E. Moore.

it might possibly, on investigation, turn out to be an isomor-
phous mixture of mercuric sulphide and selenide, analogous to
the Onofrite of Haidinger.
I undertook the investigation, in conjunction with other items —
of analytical work, for the California Geological Survey. ;
however, the issue of the reports of this institution has been
temporarily delayed, and as the results of the investigation —
ave proven to be not without interest, I have decided, with -
steer Whitney’s kind permission, to make them at once
public. |
The mineral occurs lining fissures and cavities in a peculiar
siliceous veinstone, and is associated with crystallized and mas-
sive iron and copper pyrites, and very small brilliant ruby-red
erystals of cinnabar. |
The latter, which are of prismatic habitus, show the com-

reflections. The measurements therefore, which could 1.

Found. Calenlated.
FAY 186°12 120°
IA 4 187° 49’ 136° 36’.

_ In most of the specimens the minerals were arranged in the
following order, |
First, a layer of pyrites of moderate thickness, lining the
walls of the cavity, then a proportionately thick layer of the
* From the Journal fiir prakt. Chemie, neue Folge. )

My ee eee

G. H. Moore—Amorphous Mercurie Sulphie. 37

cult to determine exactly on account of brittleness. Specific
gravity 7-701 to 7-748, varying somewhat in different specimens,
owing to intermixed cinnabar.

_ Pyrognostic characters those of cinnabar. In the closed tube
it sublimes totally except a slight residue of quartz and ferric
oxide. The black sublimate yields a vermilion red powder
when care has been taken, that, during the sublimation, the

experiment suceeds best in vacuo; the residue is then not oxide
but sulphide of iron.

A qualitative analysis showed the presence of mercury and
sulphur, with very small quantities of iron and silica. The
quantitative analysis was made in duplicate, as follows:

* In all of the six or seven specimens which I had examined previous to the
publication of this paper, the mineral occurs, as stated, without a vestige of crys-
talline structure. r. Emil Durand, of San ncisco, has, however, rvered
Specimens in which minute black crystals occur, and published a notice of his dis-

in the San Francisco papers. —

Through the kindness of Prof. Geo. J. Brush, I have had the privilege of ex-
ini , i stals are quite small, very irreg-

sim

pear to be aggregates of minute crystals. e habit is frequently almost | A
and strikingly different from that of the long prismatic crystals of cinnabar
which occur intermixed with and often implanted on them. :

Unfortunately none of the specimens are sufficiently perfect to permit a deter-
mination of the crystalline form. The difference in habit is. however, sufficiently
= ne to warrant the supposition that they are probably not isomorphous
Cinnabar,

38 G. FE. Moore—Amorphous Mercurie Sulphide.

I. (a) 1:4065 grm., decomposed by Woehler’s method with chlorine
gas yielded BaSO, 1°4130 grm., insoluble matters (quarta) —
00036 grm. (4) 0°8310 grm. yielded HgS 0-8290 grm, Fe,0, ~

II. (a) 14893 grm., oxidized with chlorine gas in solution of
0°0040 grm. Ae
caustic potash, gave BaSO, 1°5010 grm., quartz 0°0035 grm.—
(8) 12365 grm., oxidized with nitro-hydrochloric acid, yielded —
HgS 1-2320 grm., Fe,O, 0°0081 grm. 4

These.figures correspond to the following percentage com> —

.

position

z: i Mean.
S 13°79 13°84 1882
Hg 85°69 «=: 8589 = 8579 :
Fe 0°33 0°45 0°39 4
Quartz 0°26 0°24 0'25.. :
gee 100-25 :
which in its turn corresponds to: ee
HegS 98°92 containing 13°64 S. |

Fes, 0°83 « 0-44 S.

Quartz 0°25 meee
100.00 14°08 §.

the color is not due to the small amount of iron pyrites 18
evident; Bealey,* for instance, found in his analysis of a beauti-
ful red cinnabar from California as much as 1°40 per cent of
tron. The only volatile matters which might be supposed capa
ble of producing such a coloration are selenium, tellurium (’),
arsenic (?), antimony,f and lastly bituminous compounds, suc!
mialite owes its dark color, The large

quantity of sulphureted hydrogen precipitate obtained during
the analysis might easily have concealed traces of the first
named substances, while carbon compounds would naturally
only reveal themselves to special tests, therefore : le
he barium sulphate, obtained during the analysis, was 1
nited in a current of hydrogen, as in the quantitative separation
of selenium from sulphur, whereby a very slight reduction to
barium sulphide ensued. The powder evolved a trace of sul-
* Quart. Jour. Chem. Soc., vol. iv, p. 180, and Jour. fiir prakt. Chem., Iv, 234

+ Wehrle Ann. Chem. Pharm., viii, 181,

G. EH. Moore—Amorphous Mereurie Sulphide. 3

phureted hydrogen with hydrochloric acid, but did not lose
appreciably in weight. Furthermore, 3 grams of the mineral
were fused with sodium carbonate and potassium nitrate; the

hree grams were fused with sodium carbonate and potassium
nitrate. The result, when treated after the usual routine of a
qualitative analysis, gave no trace of arsenic, antimony or any
other impurity.

The powdered mineral yielded no bitumen to ether. 2,1751
grams were, therefore, burned with lead chromate as in an or-
ganic analysis and the resulting gases, after passing over a
stretch of ignited metallic copper, conducted into baryta water.
No precipitate was formed until, toward the end of the opera-
tion, a current of air was passed through the apparatus. The
trifling precipitate, which then came down, was quickly filtered
off, washed and dissolved in hydrochloric acid, to which some
chlorine water had previously been added, to oxidize any sul-
phurous acid which might still be present. After standing
some time, the fluid was filtered from the traces of barium sul-
phate, which had precipitated, and the baryta thrown down as
carbonate. The precipitate weighed 00155 grms., correspond-
ing to carbon 0-0010 grms., or 0-04 per cent of the original min-
eral, a quantity so small that it may be safely ascribed to the
imperfect purification of the air used in the combustion.

o chemical reason for the peculiar difference in properties
from cinnabar could, therefore, be detected. fe

Mercuric sulphide, as prepared in the laboratory, exists in two
forms, which were first recognized by Berzelius as distinct iso-
meric modifications, The first of these is the black precipitate
produced by sulphureted hydrogen in solutions of mercuric
salts. The second, obtained from the first by long continued
agitation, treatment with alkaline sulphides, etc., is the crystal-
lime red powder, vermilion. Only the latter variety, under the
name of cinnabar, has hitherto been recognized in nature. The
assumption lay near that I had to do with the one first named,
especially, as the very low specific gravity could not be ac-
counted for by the presence of traces of impurities. The nat-
ural cinnabar has a specific varying from 8-0 to 8:2, in the mean
81. Taking the latter number as a basis, the specific gravity
calculated for a mixture like the one in question would be

0165, whereas it is in fact 7-701.

40 G. E. Moore—Amorphous Mercurie Sulphide.

The most convincing proof of the correctness of this supposi- —
tion was afforded by the direct conversion of the mineral into
the red modification. A small portion was triturated with
water to the finest powder, sealed in a tube with solution of
ernie pentasulphide, and exposed to the temperature of —

iling water. The powder, which was pure black at first, —
showed on the morning of the third day a decided tinge of red.
As soon as no further change could be perceived, the tube was —
opened. - The powder then showed a brownish red color, not of —
course to be compared with vermilion, but still quite satisfac —
tory to one familiar with the refinements of manipulation re |
quired to produce the finer shades of color in the latter sub-
stance, and, perhaps, all that could be expected, in view of the
great difference in susceptibility to chemical action usually
existing between a native mineral and an artificial precipitate. —

It was still desirable to compare the specific gravity of the
mineral with that of the black precipitated mercuric sulphide. —
As, however, I have been unable to find any recorded deter-
mination of the latter, it was necessary to determine it myself —
This was at first no easy matter. The precipitate possesses 10
an eminent degree the annoying peculiarity of retaining, with
great tenacity, a coating of air, which makes a perfect admix-
ture with water well nigh unattainable by ordinary means —
When boiled, the mixture spirts with almost explosive violence, —
and forms in addition a greasy-looking scum, which cannot be —
made to sink. Attempts to use the air-pump in the ordinary —
manner were likewise unsuccessful, on account of the strong —
foaming which ensued. I was, therefore, obliged to have —
recourse to an expedient of which, as it may perhaps be useful —
to others in similar difficulties, a detailed description may not —
appear superfluous.

ure mercuric sulphide was prepared by the action of sul-
phureted hydrogen on solution of mercuric nitrate. Every
care was taken to insure perfect saturation, and, after thor-
ough washing and drying, the mass was repeatedly digested
with pure carbon disulphide, until all free sulphur had been
removed.

After careful drying, a weighed portion was placed in @
weighed specific gravity flask of the ordinary pattern. This —
was connected with a Bunsen’s pump,* by means of a triply
bent tube, fig. 2, whose middle part had been widened out into —
a bulb of about equal capacity with the flask itself, the com-
munications between the bulb-tube, which was filled to three

fourths with water, and the flask being made air-tight by means”

* As Bunsen’s pump is not alwavs to be found so perfect in construction as t0
permit the attainment of the maximum degree of rarification, it may be pre:

ee ee et ee I ee ae eee

f th
ble in most cases to use Sprengel’s mercury air-pump.

G. EH. Moore—Amorphous Mercurie Sulphide. 4}

of a moist rubber collar. As soon as the manometer of the
pump indicated the maximum of rarification, the apparatus was

inclined, whereby the water ran quietly from the bulb into the
flask, penetrating every pore of the mass within it without form-
ing a particle of scum. It was only necessary to remove from
the pump, fill up with water, and, as soon as the temperature of
the balance room had been attained, to weigh.

Three determinations made in this manner on respectively
19750, 3:8337 and 3°1155 grams, gave for the specific gravity
the numbers 7-552, 7-551 and 7°553, in the mean 7552 com-
pared with water at 15° C.*

that calculated from the specific gravities of the ingredients. Accepting as a basis

- A still more perfect accordance is the result when we employ the specific
gravity of monoclinic sulphur, 1°982 (M.&S.); we then obtain the number 7*5188.
t Pogg. Ann. xxxi, 581.

42 G. E. Moore—Amorphous Mercurie Sulphide.

To facilitate comparison, I have arranged the properties of
the native red and black and the artificial black mercuric sul- |
phide in the following table :— 3

ed (native). | Black (native). | Black (artificial),
Always crystallized or crys- Always amorphous.
Hin:

Cleavage, perfect. Totally destitute of cleav-| sure high polish and
age. | metallic lustre. Obtain-
Lustre, adamantine, incli-|Lustre, metillic. ; ed by sublimation as 4 —
ning to metallic in the black amorphous mass,
darker varietie wit etalli lustre.
(Fuchs, loc. cit.)

Color, cochineal red, incli- Color, grayish black.
ning to brownish and
lead gray.

Streak, scarlet. Streak, black.

Specific gravity, 8-0—8-2. |Specific gravity, 7-701. ‘Specific gravity, 7-552.
The difference between the two minerals seems to me

greater than that between two varieties of the same species. I

}

C. H. Hitchcock—Labradorite Rocks in New Hampshire. 48

At its locality* the mineral occurs in considerable abun-
dance, and, according to the statement of the president of the
company, H. P. Livermore, Esq., of San Francisco, to whose
kindness I am indebted for the material for this investigation,
constitutes the most abundant and valuable ore of the mine.

Art. IX.—Norian Rocks in New Hampshire; by C. H. Hircu-
COCK, State Geologist of New Hampshire.

ore have been brought out to enable us to form some
idea of the different groups existing in this terra incognita.

structure of the whole State. I refer to the discovery of mas-
sive labradorite and the associated minerals of the Norian or
ipper Laurentian Group. These cover an area of several
Square miles in Waterville and Albany, adjoining towns, and
probably occur in other parts of the State also. Whether the
various gneisses, granites, felsites and jaspers in this part of the
mountains, all differing from anything found elsewhere in the
State, are to be assigned to the same series, remains to be proved.
The occurrence of the labradorite in a new locality is of special
interest at this time, when scientists are discussing the funda-
mental question, whether certain predominant minerals in me
tamorphic formations may be employed like fossils to indicate
difference of geological age. :

t the Montreal meeting (1857) of the American Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science, Sir W. E. ogan an-
nounced+ that the Laurentian rocks could probably be divided
Into two groups, dependent upon the species of feldspar present,
the potash feldspars characterizing one, and the lime and sod
feldspars the other portion. This position is not discussed in

* The “ Redington Quicksilver Mine,” Lake Cousty, Calfornia.
¢ Proc. Amer. Assoc, Ady. Sci., 1857, p. 47.

44 ©. H. Hitchcock—Labradorite Rocks in New Hampshire.

Recently* Dr. T. Sterry Hunt has briefly described the various
localities where these rocks occur, and proposed for them the
designation of Norian, after Norite (from Norway), a name
early used for a labradorite rock in Norway ; presenting also —
further evidence to show the unconformable superposition of —
the Norian upon the Laurentian.

The most easily accessible locality is in Waterville, a small
mountain hamlet in the southern part of the elevated district,
about twenty miles northeasterly from Plymouth. For the
convenience of those who may wish to visit this place, it may
be said that a daily stage runs from Plymouth, the head quar —
ters of the Boston, Concord and Montreal Railroad, to Greely’s
Hotel, a house kept open during the summer months. The —
accommodations are good, and the house is less than two miles —
distant from the first of the labradorite exposures, the route —
being by a footpath through the woods, passing a picturesque —
cataract. Inquiry must be made for the “slide upon Mount —
” As soon as the end of this so-called slide 18 —

:
‘
fi
7
¢
z
:
.

Oct., 1869. The facts concerning this great “wash-out,” have been
well described by Dr. G. H. Perkins, to whose description the —

those I had previously entertained.
et coming down from the south side of Mount
Passaconnaway, or the most southern of the “ Tripyramid,” has
exposed many ledges that would otherwise have remained con-
- * This Journal, IL, vol. xlix, p. 180. + Do., p. 158 :

C. H. Hitchcock—Labradorite Rocks in New Hampshire. 45

cealed, on account of the easily decomposing character of the
labradorite. The first rock seen is a gneiss with nodular ortho-
0° W

clase, dipping by compass about 80°, S 7 . The strata are

strata, cipHing E. 15° S. and EH. 85° N. The surface is almost

* Proc. Amer. Acad. Sci., Philadelphia, 1860, p. 363.

46 ©. H. Hitcheock—Labradorite Rocks in New Hampshire.

Mica is abundant, and some specimens show hornblende in its
pla e rock has a syenitic aspect, and it also contains the 7
same geodes as the rocks below, with actinolite, amethyst and |

the lowest stratigraphically. With our present knowledge, noth-

through Massachusetts, sometimes fifteen miles wide. To the —
north of Norway Brook no very satisfactory explorations have —
been made. e specimens obtained were of nodular gneiss —
To the north-east and east, the information is much more satis:
factory. The whole of Passaconaway seems to be syenite —
"np facts are thus stated by J. H. Huntington, Assistant —

eologist : Me
“On the east side of Tripyramid Mountain, and west of —
Sabba Day Brook, a branch of Swift river, the labradorite is —
so distinctive in its characteristics that it is easily recognized, —

C. H. Hitchcock—Labradorite Rocks in New Hampshire. 47

gee Lake, and also occur in connection with porphyritic gneiss.
Red Hill in Moultonboro is also composed of a similar syen-

tension into New Hampshire, in Seabrook, is accompanied
yY porphyritic gneiss, with crystals of feldspar less conspic-
uous than usual.

Rocks in this mountainous district recently brought to light,
and possibly related to the Norian or Huronian, are the jas-
ers of Albany and Twin Mountain, and extensive deposits of
felsite capping Lafayette, Flume, Liberty, Twin, and other
mountains. Chemical examination may show them to be rela-
ted to the lime feldspars. They will be analyzed in due
time.

me.

There is an abundance of material afforded by these facts
for speculating upon the ages of the metamorphic rocks in

w Hampshire and Massachusetts. One cannot avoid form-
ing conclusions as fast as new facts present themselves; but
as I hope to be able to make further investigations in this field,
it will be best to reserve our inferences for some other occasion,
_— additional information may afford more satisfactory re-
sults.

rock js chrysolite. Mr. Dana has consented to publish his
results in an article following this.
Hanover, N. H., Dec. 1, 1871.

48 ES. Dana—Labradorite Rocks of New Hampshire.

Art. X.—Contributions from the Laboratory of the Sheffield
Scientific School. No. XXIIL-—On the Composition of
Labradorite rocks of Waterville, New Hampshire; by EK.
DANa.

THE specimens of labradorite rock, which I have had under
examination, were obtained by Professor Dana last September,

some minute grains of a magnetic ore of iron, and also a very
little of a black mineral, probably hornblende.

he feldspar has a dark smoky color, without iridescence,
and is beautifully striated. It fuses B. B. with somewhat less
readiness than ordinary labradorite, and is scarcely attacked by
acids. It was picked out as carefully as possible, and analyzed
with the following result :

T. TI. Til Mean.
04 51°02 sap 51°03
Al,O, (TiO,) 26°34 26°07 sien ss 26°20
" 79 5°13 is 4°96
14°09 14°23 oe 14°16
NaO Bs vie 3°44 3°44
KO es eee 58 58
100°37

minute grains of an iron ore, from ;';th to ;},th of an inch in di-

200

matter. The peculiar dark-smoky color of the rock is doubt
less to be explained by the presence of these particles of iro?
or :

e. :
_ This magnetic iron ore, a sufficient amount for the test hav
ing been picked out by the magnet, gave a decided reaction for

LE. §. Dana—Labradorite Rocks of New Hampshire. 49

titanic acid. It is, therefore, probably a very magnetic titanic
iron, though it was impossible to obtain a sufficient amount of
the substance for a quantitative determination of the titanium.
The absence of any octahedral faces or isometric structure in
the grains is in favor of their being titanic iron.

n consequence of this impurity, which could hardly be re-
moved, it is not to be expected that the analysis shoul give a
satisfactory formula; the result obtained, however, is sufficient
to prove that the feldspar is unquestionably labradorite.

e analyses of the mineral, supposed to be chrysolite,
occurring in yellow, glassy grains, afforded :

if Mean

SiO, 38°82 38°88 38°85
Al,O, tr. r tr

FeO 28°00 28°15 28-07

MnO Lag 1°36 1°24

MgO 30°88 30°36 30°62

“26 1°60 1°43

100°08 100°35 100°21

The oxygen ratio of the bases and silica afforded is nearly 1:1,
and of the iron and magnesia about 1 : 2; w ence the formula

(;Fe+3Mg),§. This is then a chrysolite containing an un
usually large per-centage of iron (here a constituent of the

mineral, and not owing to the presence of impurities). The
amount of iron is not strange considering the fact that the
rock contains diffused throughout it so much free iron ore. _
his chrysolite has the same ratio deduced for hyalosiderite,
bnt still differs widely in fusibility and other characters. It is

his rock, consisting of labradorite with grains of ore

feldspar, here in Aa cleavable masses, often half an inch
long, and a dark mineral, the angle of whose cleavage planes
proves it to be hornblende, form the mass; together with these
Am. Jour. Sct.—Tuatrp Series, VoL. III, No. 18.—Jan., 1872.
i

50 The recent German Arctic Expeditions.

are associated a magnetic titanic iron in segregated masses i
b

some size, very little of a dark brown mica, and a green min

eral, “probably epidote. There is no chrysolite

This feldspar has a grayish-white color, is deatieace! of irides: | :

cence, and only careful searching reveals any striations

‘Two analyses afford

E il dade Mean

Sid, 52°15 52°36 eke 52°25
Al,O, 27°63 27°39 Stas 27°51
Fe,0, 1:09 1:07 a 1:08

g 92 106 oc. 99
CaO 13°10 13°45 sae 13°22
NaO sees Sr 3°68 3°68
KO Sees a arace 2°18 2°18

00°91 7
Both analyses show that the labradorite of re region is
remarkable for the large proportion of lime present.

ArT. XI.—Recent German Arctic Explorations.

1. Letter of A. Perermann, dated Gotha, Oct. 9, 1871.

It will be remembered that the eee polar exploration bbs first
agitated on this account ; that Captain Osborn, R. N., almost

seven years ago, proposed a ne Ww English expedition which epee in
view to explore the oe on region, and to reach the No ree .

ditions, ‘tide the command of Oaytnin Kale
Besides this, at the same time extensive ve orations, in the
direction recommended by me, were set on foot by Dr. Dorst + and

Dr. Bessels in ships from Rosenthal, and by Guliet Zeil and Herr

von Heuglin out of their own means, and important results were

BA ate aah aes ee ee, hy Nee ear Man

The recent German Arctic Hepeditions. 51

attained. The ice-sea fisheries have taken an important advance,
so that Norwegian fishermen have gained a revenue which realized
a dividend of 57 per cent., and in addition most valuable scien-
tific observations and discoveries have been made.

Captain Koldeweg has lately expressed himself publicly that
he was quite of Capt. Osborn’s opinion in regard to a North-polar
expedition, he believing the route through Smith’s Sound altogether

he b ut I do not think that he will obtain from anyone the
money for a German expedition, which is to be prosecuted accord-
ing to an English plan, abandoned by the English themselves, and
for which he nevertheless considers two steam vessels and an

Contrasted with the last expedition led by Koldeweg, the cour-
ve

been recognized, even if they had had little success, because they
set out with the most scanty means and merely a little hired Nor-
Wegian sailing vessel, while Koldeweg started with two fine ships
elegantly fitted up. The latter, with steam vessels, in two sum-
Mers, merely reached to 75° 31’ N, lat., only 4° farther than Clay-
ering 47 years before, and with sledges to 77° 1’ N. lat., while
Payer and Weyprecht with the little sailing vessel, in that formid-
able sea, sailed to 79° N. lat., a distance, compared with their prede-
cessors in that search, which exceeded at least tenfold those with
Koldeweg.

The telegram which announced the return of Payer and Wey-
precht from the extreme north to Trompsoé on the 3d of October,
reads literally : “ September offenes Meer von 42° bis 60° Oestlicher

* Hansa, 1871, No 10, §. 92.

53 The recent German Arctic Expeditions.

Linge von Greenwich tiber 78° N. Breite verfolgt. Grdste Breite
79° N. Br. auf 43° Oestl. Linge, hier giinstigste Kiszustiinde gegen
Nord wahrscheinliche Verbindung mit Polynia gegen Ost, wahr-

scheinlich giinstigster Nordpolweg.”
ast part of the telegram is unintelligible, but I have rea-

at the South pole. In my chart (published J une, 1870), in regard

Bessel, made in the Rosenthal steamship “ Albert,” of 1869, mark-
ed the Gulf Stream between 75° and 76° N. lat., which there*

sten Kiszustinde gegen Nord der wahrscheinlichen Verbindung
ore der Polynia gegen Ost, den wahrscheinlich giinstigsten Nord-
polweg.’

T have almost ready a very interesting nets fe Chart, which will

ung

2.—Letter of Lieutenant Julius Payer, of the recent German —
Expedition. |

This expedition has achieved a result for the exploration of the ]

sea between Spitzbergen and Nova Zembla surpassing alle

ations, and from which a greater undertaking will follow next —
* Such a temperature as has never been observed in the Northern or SoutherD

hemisphere.
t Geographische Mittheilungen, 1870, Tafel, 12.

i in sean
Bireee

a ;
be published in the next volume of the “Geographische Mittheil- —
en, s

The recent German Arctic Expeditions, — 53

was observed by the mariners Simonsen, Mattiesen, ete., this year,
as too before, as almost completely free from ice, and when the
i succeed in di ing i

fo not su in discovering in the neighorhood of
the White Island the ice on which the capture of the walrus
depends, yet in the autumn the connection of the open Nova Zem-

n ¢
bla sea with the Polynia of northern Siberia has been as good as
proved. But with this discovery, an imme
appears from our charts. It will certainly be represented that the

unusually unfavorable” years. But throughout Norway the
walrus-hunters and fishermen unite in ealling the past summer
absolutely the worst which has been known for a long time. If

age here in Norway, to the very deficient fitting of the Germania.
well
Sive this ship, which, however, belongs to 1869-70, an impartial
oop

' D | oting
former ones, The solution Of the riddle lies simply in this fact,
that almost all expeditions to this region of the sea have started

54 Seientific Intelligence.

too early and returned too early, since the most favorable time for
the navigation comes in the autumn.

All of these expeditions, too, have hugged too closely, either
the coast of Nova Zembla or of Spitzbergen; while it seems to be
the case that the portion of the Nova Zembla sea most favorable
for reaching the north lies between the 40th and 42d degrees of
longitude. We have here, without trouble, reached almost to 7 9°
N. lat., and nothing, except want of provisions, prevented our
penetrating farther to the north.

mals, ete. It appears, then, that in the commencement of autumn
the Gulf Stream leaves the coast of Nova Zembla, and advances
westward, but that then it extends over a broader surface. 1s
layer of warm water is of unequal depth, and diminishes in strength
to the north.

An economical result of this expedition is the discovery of the
enormous richness of the hitherto quite unexplored Nova Zembla
sea in walrusses,

imps currents in a double

Coast of Norway, on board the Harald Haarfagr, Oct. 9, 1871.

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE:
I. CHEMISTRY AND PuHysics.

1. On a new method of nickel-plating—Within the last few
be a process of nickel-plating by electrolysis has been invented
y Mr. Isaac Adams of Boston, and is now employed to a con-

erabl : r. A
which is patented, involves the employment of a bath of double
sulphate of nickel and ammonium and of an anode of cast nickel.

Chemistry and Physics, 55

be of cast or wrought iron, steel, copper, brass, zine or lead.
They must be completely immersed in the liquid used for plating,
and their surfaces must be perfectly free from fat and rust. Iron
vessels may be cleaned by treating with a solution containing 3 or
4 per cent of chlorhydric acid. A sufficient quantity of a concen-
trated solution of chloride of zine is now poured into the plating
vessel, and from once to twice its volume of water added. The
Solution is then to be heated to the boiling point, and chlorhydric

mportant to remark th may be employed
repeatedly for nickel-plating, especially when chloride of nickel is
employed. The same process applies to cobalt, but the coating
With this metal, besides its cost, possesses no practical value.—
Polytechnisches Journal, cei, p. 145 (July, 1871). = Ww. G@

2. On the direct oxidation of carbon to mellitic acid.—At the
recently held 44th meeting of German scientists and physicians, at
Rostock, Prof. Schultze exhibited to the chemical section his beau-

“process for the oxidation of carbon by hypermanganic acid,

56 Scientific Intelligence.

in an alkaline solution. Pure wood charcoal, ignited in a curren

der Deutschen Chem. Gesell., Band iv, 1871, p. 801. Ww. G.
Gmelin-Kraut: Handbuch der Chemie—All chemists will

0k, the inorganic portion of whic s long been behind the
science of the day, though still often consulted and never supet-
us th

t
of its former thorough and conscientious exhaustion of every topi¢
G

to
umes. e type is much smaller than that employed in the first
d dsom:

ugh, h
cal literature, but it is earnestly to be hoped that its publication
will be pushed forward with all possible energy, and that, asin the —
earlier edition, the first volume will not be out of date before the
last is begun. w

Il. Gooey anp Naturat Hisrory.

Geology and Natural History. 57

and affords a fine example of a comprehensive type. The bones
are all well preserved.” The femur is very short, but the other

| EMEJEW
ains, near Slatoust, v. Jeremejew has observed diamonds of varyin

hexa-tetrahedron 3-3, combined with the tetrahedron, the faces of
the first form being distinctly convex, those of the latter fiat [like
fig. 59 in Dana’s Min., p. 21, except that there are also small flat

ey are sym-
metrically disposed in the matrix, their trigonal intermediate axes

plates of this mineral, nearest the rounded masses of talcose slate

to the rocks. He has a communication on the subject in the Pro-

4. Geological Survey of India.—Volume III, Nos. 1 to 8, of

Po contains an account of the Cretaceous Pelecypoda of India,
by Ferd, Stoliczka, Paleontologist of the Survey; the plates, 28
mhumber, are full of gures. Vol. IV,

Poa agg by Prof, Huxley, on the Vertebrate fossils of the Panchet
TOocKs, ‘

Volume VIL. of the Memoirs of the Survey (8vo) treats of the
Vindhy an Series in the N. W. and Central Provinces, by F. R.
Mallet ; of the Mineral Statistics of India, by Thos. Oldham, the
‘Director of the Survey; Geology of the Shillong Plateau, by

6

58 Scientific Intelligence.

HH. %. Medlicott; and on the Kurhurbari, Deoghur and Karan-
pura Coalfields, by T. i. Hughes
The Records of the Survey “which have appeared once in three
months, contain many valuable papers on the Geology and pro-
ductions of India, some of them illustrated by maps.

5. Friderici Welwitschii Sertum Angolense. to, pp. 94, tab. 26.
Part 1 of vol. xxvii of the Transactions of the Linnean ‘Society,
1869.—The most remarkable pan of a truly extraordinary flora
is that which commemorate s discoverer, the Welwitschia mita-

and the excellent one are sg drawings by Fitch. Tipon
some of the plates the aspect of the whole plant is delineated,
e. £5 Feit, odes Lealit and Sesamothamnus Benguellensis
which, with some most bizarre species of Vitis and _ wit
Wenolischia itself make oP principal part of a queer pigmy-
tumid arborescent grow in a region too arid tor ordinary
vegetation. Another Sie Acanthosicy Yos lite is a Cucur-
bitaceous shrub, spiny and nearly leafless, with somewhat the

indigenous to a long stretch of tropical Africa ;
informed that our Brasenia peltata, ater been found already —
in Oregon, Japan, N. E. India and Australia, has been detected

fe YP :
pectedly found to have an African tokeeeuatie: in Brunnichia
Africana, discovered at a cataract in a wooded district, less than

multitudes of eee uel &e., eohot the long ay :
season. The force of Linnzus’ remark, that there was always
something new and strange coming from Africa, is not rey ae
—

mig Icones Plantarum. Third Series, vol. 1, part .
Ja in 71.—This completes the first volume of the pa :
Tcones hanticae, of which ten volumes (a thousand plates) es

Geology and Natural History. 59

published by Sir William Hooker. We received and duly noticed
the first two parts of the new issue. The third part, by som

=e
fo)
=)
wm
ie}
eal
YS
4
ie)
—
=
=
SS
—
&
=)
™m
a
>
fe")
B
&
5
oe
5
er
ia]
ar}
ia")
m
et
pe
=}
gg
Bo.
—
pss]
=)
oad
m
g

Phyllacanthus Grisebachianus Hook. f, the plant of C. Wright’s
Cuba collection named by Grisebach Catesbea phyllacantha.
Brackenridgea Zanguebarica Oliver, a second species, so Ta

confirming the genus. A. G.
1. Structure of the Pistil in Primulaceew.—V an Tieghem, upon
his first study of the ovary of Primula, &e., finding that the vas-
cular bundles of the free central placenta were disposed in a circle
in a homogeneous parenchyma, adopted the apparently prevalent
view that this placenta belongs to the axis and not to the carpels,
this arrangement being that characteristic of stems. But further
and more scrutinizing observations show that this conclusion does
not follow. Without known exception, the vascular and woody
bundles of stems have their spiral vessels on their inner face, their
liber or bast cells on the outer face, i. e., presented to the circum-
ference of the stem. Now Van Tieghem finds that the bundles
' the placenta of Primula and other plants of the same order (as
e in Oaryophyllacew, &c.) present their liber-cells inward,

ewis
“ae Spiral vessels outward, contrary to the manner of vascular -
] .

duce an accessory piece or appendage

base, such as he yesuls of pape 8 of Oleander, the crown of

the perianth of Narcissus, the stamens obaca, &e

these the vascular bundles of the internal appendage or crown

equally have their liber-cells facing toward the axis of the flower,

cludes that, as these accessory pieces are appendages or rend
fre ntral or basilar

s e
Placenta consists of internal appendages or deduplications of the

==

60 Scientific Intelligence.

carpels; also that each ovule answers to the lobe of a leaf. See
Ann. Sci. Nat. for 1869, published in 1871. Ina following paper,on |
The Anatomy of the Flower of Santalacew, Van Tieghem dem —
flower of Zhesium and —
Osyris, and draws the conclusion that each ovule, one for each of
)

talon of a carpel. From a corresponding study of the vascular —
bundles of the sepals and superposed stamens, he likewise infers

being here a separate and special lobe of the carpel. Thus, he

concludes, disappears another example of so-called axile placents
tion, as it falls under the general law which he expresses esse

tially as follows:—The embryo-sac is always a cell of the pare
chyma of a carpellary leaf; the ovule which contains this sa¢ 8 —
always a lobe or part of the tissue of this leaf—more or less trams
formed, more or less separated from the rest of the leaf. A. @
8. Tieghem, Comparative Anatomy of the Cycadacee, Conifa®, —
and Gnetacew.—The principal results of this investigation (com
e ;

examined the distribution of the vascular bundles, in

universal plan are the following. :
This axillary branch reduced to its first leaf, and ovuliferous, ®
commonly of the second generation; but sometimes of the third
( co and Zasus), or even of the fourth generation (Tor
The carpellary leaf bears the ovules either on its base (Z#w%
Cupressus, &c.), or on its middle (Pinus, Sequoia, &c.), or tow: ard

Geology and Natural History. 61

its summit (Cunninghamia, &e.); the ovules thus correspond
each to the lobe of a leaf. In other cases the ovules terminate
the leaf; then each half of the blade may be transformed into an
ovule (Ginkgo, Cephalotaxus), or the whol blade may be trans-
formed into a single ovule (Zawus, Phyllocladus Podocarpus) ;
sometimes the petiole is much lengthened (Ginkgo), but oftener it
is very short, and the carpellary leaf is then wholly transformed

into two ovules ( Cephalotaxus), or into a single one (Podocarpus).
as sta ‘

? .
have a free or superior, others an inferior or adherent ovary. |
It follows that Coniferw form one indivisible natural family,—

8
Sucli are the principal features of a view which throws new light
upon the morphology of the Gymnospermous plants, vindicates

9. Van Tieghem, Anatomy of the flowers and fruit of Mistletoe
(Viseum album).—Upon this subject the distinguished Dutch
Vegetable Anatomist has published in Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 5, t. 12,
an elaborate and interesting, albeit considerably theoretical, paper,
ote up the line of research, and the ideas which he had pur-
ora

fecundation: that in Viscum this ovule is reduced to the greatest
possible simplicity, viz: to its essential part, the embryo-sac. His
main conclusions are,— :
_ (1.) That the male flower consists of four simple leaves only, that
18, of two decussate pairs, each polliniferous upon the superior or
inner face, and not of 8, as before supposed, 1. e., 4 sepals and 4
stamens superposed to and connate with them.

62 Scientific Intelligence.

(2.) In the female flower the ovule is reduced to an embryo-sac,
which is a cell of the parenchyma of the base of the uppers? i of
the third pair of bracts, i. e., the carpels.

10. Clarence ae 8 Geological Exploration of the 40th Pari
Botany, by SzrENo Watson, aided by Prof. Danien
and others, itanesied by a map and 40 plates. Washington
Government Printing Office, 1871. pp. 525, 4to.—We propose to
notice this volume particularly : indeed it well deserves a more
t se? sas pee and more extended review than our time

as one of the Gncinake Corps series, has been car htly edited He
beautifully printed, so that the volume is every way an attractive
one. Errors of ne press are to be found, but they are appar

is a notable rae hese The awd Hates filled with =

is new to this clas wus ork, we believe), Mr. : H, See of
Salem, ies shold properly tA been appended to
The Gene eport, of 53 pages, forms a coperats aaa

introduction. 2 the Cilelog ue,” as itis termed, “with excessive —

modesty, i. ¢., the systematic peas of the age collected, vie

poe Basin, its cold winters, and hot summers, The bgrws on the
general character of the CRE picture to us the botanical

diameter showed from 400 to 486 annual rings. The “ pant
ing sage-bush,” Artemisia Pe are displayed 65 Aye ous
section 8 inches in diameter, 37 upon 4 inches, &c. Tunipaus —

occidentalis 12 inches in diameter showed 250 i Cercocar

Geology and Natural History. 63

pus ledifolius, it appears, may form a trunk of 2 feet in diameter,
with 160 rings. ‘The alkaline species, aquatic and meadow species,
those of the drier valleys and foot-hills, the mountain species, &c.,

i i 30 in

adapted for grazing otia lanata and a few other chenopo-
diaceous plants are eaten by sheep as a substitute for gra
r son raises the question whether—considering the

2 ome mo
the climatic conditions, may not be turned to some. profitable
e

e
| finds that the present plants on the whole are not lacking in expan-
Sion of foliage or succulence, at least that the more prevalent
plants had an average of from 55 to 80 per cent of foliage or

Working surface; and a series of rough, but seemingly well de-
-Vised experiments demonstrated that they give off by evap-

water is rarely t

Make good this loss. o be
00 feet, often not even at that depth. The

depth of 100 to 3

64 Scientific —--

porous soil must allow of the free upward ee of moisture,
also = — -sainiogs of the roots from a

cellent is given, exhibiting es, ‘district from above
the 424 pattllel rm ook the 39th, on which ed nia of the three
several years are traced in colored lines, and the mountain ranges
with the general” configuration of the surface represented We
ei endeavor hereafter to review the systematic part 0 be:

ort, * Prof. Oliver's Flora of Tropical A yee, vol. ii Gteansd & Gus
London, 1871), has just been received. It comprises the Polypet-
alous orders from m Leguminose to Ficstdews inclusive. The first
of these orders fills over half of the volume; the Papilionaceous
portion is by Mr. Baker, the other suborders, both largely and
interestingly represented, are by Prof. Oliver himself, Of Cosal-
pinier in Lavigne re r there are several remarkable and peculill
sia . Oliver sao: elaborated the Rosacew and Damm ra-

K
to the British SPL has done the Crassulacew ; 4 Professot
Lawson of Oxford, the Combretacee and the few Myrtacee:
Dr. Hooker, the Melastomaceew, which are printer? Mr.
Hiern of Ca ambridge, the Lythracew ; ; Dr. Mas the Samy-
_ dacee and Passifloree ; Dr. Hooker, the convineens which are

dander ater Band mit 59 eta 4to. (Winterthur, W irrter
Co., 1871.) This second volume of Heer’s Arctic Fossil Flora is @
collation (with title page, statace and index) of the following

the
same ig fd 5 Transitions, 1870: in German and Latin. The

The very sibscaakion: results which these — contain —
already been brought to our notice in this Jou A.

Geology and Natural History. 65

13. On Kansas Vertebrate Fossils.—Prof. EK. D. Cope has given

a brief account, in the Proceedings of the Philosophical Society of
Philadelphia, October, 1871, 0 of some fossil vertebrates in ‘the
collections of the State ph ete College of Kansas. They
include the following species

jodon dyspelor Cope, now for the first time announced as a

Kansas species; a species of Liodon near L. proriger Cope, and
another near L. ictericus Cope; Liodon latispinus Cope, a new
species of large eine, ee equalling the L. mipeipscneti that is 40

rium Cope ; Cehinerodected near J. etenodon Co e%
contractus, a new genus and species, near Ichthyoe dectes in the
ing lateral grooves, but like those of Suwrocephalus

by himself on an excursion in “thie valies of ‘Smoky 1 iver, in
Kansas, On Butte Creek a large part of the skeleton of a monster
saurian, the Liodon dyspelor Cope, was exhume n the same

bluff another Liodon and a Clidastes were discovered, with s
— fishes. In neighboring bluffs, bones supposed to be hole

a Pterodactyl, of two species of Clidastes , a ae a
acorn: and of numerous fishes were brought to

At a similar ot ome on Fox Creek, M. V. Hartwell found the
skeleton of a very large fish, with “ uncommonly powerful offen-
sive dentition, i. probably of the Saurodonts. He names this Cre-
taceous +e ies Portheus motlossus. In the same region t the 2

others of several species of Clidas Near Russel Pipers; on

the Smoky Hill, twenty-six miles ‘alti a large Clidastes was

found, also bones of Liodon ictericus and of two new Clidastes.
Prof, Cope adds that oe giants of this Cretabeons sea were the

Liodon proriger Cope, LZ. dyspelor Cope, Polyecotylus latipinnis

sas and Hlasmosaurus platyurus 3s Co Of these, the first was

apparently the most abundant; the second was the longest, ex-
ceeding in length perhaps any other known reptile; the la
named had the most a body, and oxhibined an extraordinary

eck.
es Illustrated Oardigus ibe the —- of “cs pdm mt

IY. - IV. Deep-Sea Corals L.
bridge 1871. 93 pe. uart ise eight ree in vitor —In
n

lly described, and most of them are beautifully ‘seas The
Work is not only the most complete account aug has yet appeared
AM. Jour. Sot.—Turrp Series, Vou. III, No. 13.—dax.,
5

66 Scientific Intelligence.

of any group of deep-sea animals, but is also a very valuable —

contribution to the history and classification of corals. A large
number of new forms, both of genera and species, are described,
and important points in the structure and affinities of certain gen-
era and species are discussed at length. It is accompanied by
tables of the distribution of the species in depth, and the appen-

ix contains an enumeration of the shallow water and reef-corals
of Florida, with valuable notes upon their synonymy, modes of

along the several lines of soundings and dredgings
The wh

le number of corals obtained from deep-water is 48, of

has shown the necessity of uniting the Cladocoraces and Astra: —
gracez into a single family, the distinctions being hardly of ge?
eric value, and yet they are still kept apart by Mr. Pourtalés. —
The family Stylasteridz Gray (emended), is fully discussed on Pe E

32, and some additional facts of importance are given in rega t

very characteristic of the Madreporacee. The polyps are still wr
known in all the genera of this family. Although agreeing Wit
Mr. Pourtalés in regarding the Eupsammide as a group of full

* Transactions Connecticut Academy, vol. i, p. 535, 1870. te

e)

Fi
iH

-

Astronomy. 67

synonym, on the grou nd that it is not the Astrea pid Dana.
ae latter identification is, however, correct, and was made after a

reful examination of Dana’s type. ‘which had the septa and walls
cucdueably-w orn. Ellis and Solander are given as the authority
for Meandrina jectonere Verrill, but their name was Madrepora
clivosa. The name Astrea should be adopted instead of Fuvia
(p. 75), for A. ndieadods was made the type of the genus b
Lamarck in 1801 when it was first proposed, and he mentioned
only one other species (A. radians) which he referred to a second
division of the genus and which now Biron — type of the genus
Siderastreea, belonging among the Fun We see no reason

whatever for supplanting the oldest name coe diss igs rt bore (8.
rian) - a later one, as has been done by Mr. Pou

ong the genera now first made known as paodginy to the

fauna of Florida and the West Indies are Fungia, Dendrophyliia,
cata and Colangia, the last a new genus allied - of
angia =

Ill. AstTRoNoMY.

1. On the mean motions of the four outer Planets. (Extract
from a letter of Prof. Bensamin Purrce to Prof, Newton, dated

ni nee
“anna
sn" + BnVi— nv
Of the fixedness of the first of these equations I have no doubt;
and am almost equally certain of the second, but feel rather more
doubt concerning the third. Their reception involves a laborious

n* Laamaie 719 (1+4)

ni = 44001'-8054(1-+44)

ni — 15428'°1822(1+4)

mili 7871'°5215(1+4)
in which 4 is a correction to be ascertained after the revision of the
theories,

68 Scientific Intelligence.

If the third equation is rejected, the other two will give the
mean motions of two of the planets when two are known. I have
‘found in this case,

n* =109256""719-+-2491
vi = 43996"°127 2491'
mii — 15425'°172— 18441320’
nvili— 7868"-694— 32441241’
in which 4 and #’ are corrections to be determined after the revis-
ion of the theories. I presented my argument concerning the es
tablishment of these equations to the American Academy last
evening. Even if they should be finally rejected, it is evident that
in the present uncertainty, the corresponding planetary inequalities
are so exceeding long, and of such uncertain length, that it wi
necessary to present the corresponding perturbations in the same
they were exact
R Eclipse.—The telegraph informs us that the eclipse ob-
servations on the 12th of December were successful, the weather
being very favorable.

The expedition from England under the charge of Mr. Lockyer
was destined for Jaffua in the island of Ceylon. It was join
upon the way by Jannsen and Respighi, from which we presume
that the original design of the former to go to Java was given up.

It was expected that East Indian expeditions would occupy
one or two stations near the Malabar coast, and one near Trichmo-

oly. Also expeditions from Australia to the line of the eclipse
across the northern part of that continent were projected, and

3. Star Maps—Suggested Improvement ; by E. 8. Mantis,
Wilmington, N. C. (Communicated.)—All those who use star maps

The following method is suggested as, in a measure, capable of
remedying the trouble. Instead of stamping the stars on the

and if the map is placed at or near the instrument, one eye MaY

4

Astronomy. as 69

threads may be stretched across the hole in the paper, and thus fur-
ther assist the eye in the comparison of the map with the heavens.
The writer has himself profited much by this arrangement, he
having punctured a common star map for the purpose.
4, €

isconsin Meteorite; by I. A. Larpuam.—Two addi

first four days.

T=Dec. 20°1155 mean Berlin time.

no 92" 96 G0"

{145° 19’ 53” | mean eq. 1871.

i=102° 7' 40”

log g=9°87628
The resulting ephemeris gives a south declination of 37° 4’ on

the 5th of December.

cause it.
Professor Airy writes: “The day was one of magnetic disturb-
ance, but it does not appear that any remarkable movement coin-
cided with the beginning of your observation. There was a sudden
movement nearly at the end.” :
About 24 hours after the “explosion,” the magnetic storm
A which developed into the beautiful aurora of that evening.

* Vol. xlvii, p. 271, March, 1871.

70 Seentific Intelligence.

our magnetometers than certain other actions which are less con-
spicuous

Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
Magnetic changes, Sept. 1, 1871, from 2h. to 10h.

Hours. Greenwich Mean Solar Time.
2h. 3b. 4h. 5h. '? 6h." 7h. i .8h. 9h. 10h.

19°25
r=
Bo)
3
A=!
cs}
Yo
=)
=|
=~
oe
3 1905
=
0-100B&
1018
5 102m
So . “108
= 10m
S “105
g 1068
& ‘101g
a] 10:4
. 0!
— . 0710/8
So
Se
BO
Se

oh iis 10.10 11.10 12. 3. 40 4.10 5.10
Hanover isa | Solar Time

The baits dotted line indicates the probable time of the explosion, 12h. 40m
Hanove

Vh = “thar can be no possible doubt that there is a close con-
nection between the condition of the solar surface and Bega ee
disturbances on the earth, much further investigatio
required to ar seas the matter. — Boston Journal of Chemistry,

ecember, ae

i. The e firs t Appendix to the Washington Observations for
1869, being Reports on observations of the total solar eclipse of
Dec. 22 d, 1870, by ‘the observers of the U. 8. N. Observatory, has
just been published. Prof. Newcomb arranged to observe at
Gibraltar the transits of the sharp cusps of the solar crescent

across the wires of a telescope, in order to obtain materials for cor-
recting the lunar nine The telegraphic determination of the

longitude of Gibraltar, which is necessary na the completion of his
purpose, was not possible at the time owing to an unfortunate
break in the cable. Profs. Hall, Harkness aa Eastman, at Syra-
cuse, made successful and detailed Sigg onal oe time, and upon
the nature of the light of the corona and inences.

rof, Harkness concludes an extended ose ussion by proposing
this os of the corona, “ When seen in a clear sky the coron@

Miscellancous Intelligence. 71

is a purely solar phenomenon, produced by a vast body of self-
luminous gas,—not improbably incandescent vapor of iron,—which
envelopes the sun and is erupted from it in the same manner as
the red prominences.”

The observers were aided by Capt. Tupman of the British Navy,
whose report is also given.

8. Annals of the Dudley Observatory. Vol. I1—This second
volume of Annals of the Dudley Observatory contains the descrip-
tions of the several self-reeording meteorological instruments con-

structed by the Director, Mr. Hough, a series of hourly observation

1867, &c., and the several annual reports of the Director to the

Board of Trustees. Thirty-six charts are added, exhibiting the

changes from day to day of the meteorological phenomena during
the years 1868-70.

9. Astronomische Tafeln und Formeln ; by C. F. W. Purers,

71. (W. Mauke.) 8vo, 233 pages.—This series of

ments, and for general astronomical computations. It consists of
nearly forty numerical tables, followed by a dozen pages of trig-
onometric and astronomic formulas. Some of the tables are
like those in Warnstorff’s edition of Schumacher’s Hulfstafeln,
but there are many new ones, and most of the old ones are recom-
puted or enlarged. The volume includes tables for conversion of
mean into sidereal time, arcs into time, degrees, wc., into arcs;
tables for computing parallax, nutation, aberration, figure of the
» me

, up to 10,000, for use in the method of least squares,
a table of natural sines, tangents and secants, to five decimals tor
each minute of the quadrant, an interpolation table for use when
2d, 3d, 4th and 5th differences are employed, and tables for reduc-
tion of barometers of various scales.

10, The American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanae for 1874
18 Just out, two years in advance.

IV. MIscELLANEOUS SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.

1. Masses of Meteoric Iron.—At the meeting of the Geological
Society held on the 8th inst., th d

° a -
holm, where he had the opportunity of examining these remark-

He ead )
re Recae e:

72 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

than twenty additional specimens, ich two were of
enormous size. The largest, weighing more than 49,000 Swedish

fragments of the basalt. As the chemical composition and min-

eralogical character of these masses of native iron are quite dif-

ferent from those of any iron of terrestrial origin, and altogether
i Nord

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 73

absolute alcohol. He considered it probable that a meteoric mass
falling with immense velocity might so shatter itself as to cause
some of its fragments to enclose fragments of basalt, aud even to
impregnate the neighbouring mass of basalt with minute particles
of the metallic iron: but he considered the question of meteoric
origin could only be decided by examining the same mass of
basalt at some greater distance from the stones themselves, so as
to prove whether the presence of such metallic iron was actually
characteristic of the entire mass of the rock.— Chemical News,

ov. 17.

2. On the Phosphorescence of the Eggs of the common Glow-
worm ; by M. Joussrr.—On the 16th of July last, in very warm
weather, I collected in the part of the Chateau de Monjay two
glowworms which shone brilliantly. These two females were
coupled, and escorted by a supplementary male. I carried them
to Paris in a glass tube; and the next day they laid about sixty
eggs, of the size of a pin’s head, which is very large in comparison
with the size of the insect.

s is so delicate that they cannot be touched
without breaking it. he micropyle is very apparent ; and their

ys.
_ Icould not continue the observation any further, because, hav-
ing left the tube containing them open, I found them dried up.

Agassiz, to Prof. B. Peirce, Superintendent of the Coast Scag

the success in this direction has been regarded as their greatest
triumph. In view of this success, Prof. Verrill observed, in

J

74 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

OBITUARY.
Cuartrs Bassacsr, the author of the “ninth” Bridgewater —
Treatise, inventor of the calculating machine, and author of vatr —
ous memoirs on mathematical and physical subjects, died on the —
20th of October last. ;
There is no fear that the worth of the late Charles Babbage —

among the few greatest men who can create new methods or re
form whole branches of knowledge. Unfortunately the works of
a

publications are short papers, often only a few pages in length, —
published in the mel eet of learned salekiok Those to which
we can apply the name of books, such as “The Ninth Bridge —
water Treatise,” “The Reflections on the Decline of Science,”
“The Account of the Exposition of 1851,” are generally incom —
plete sketches, on which but little care could have been expended. —

e have, in fact, mere samples of what he could do. He was —
essentially one who began and did not complete. He sowed ideas, —
the fruit of which has been reaped by men less able but of more —

It was not time that was wanting to him. Born as long 4g as
the 26th of December, 1792, he has enjoyed a working life of nearly

tellectual powers see

Oe ne eae

Miscellaneous Bibliography. 75

with the preface to the Transactions of the Analytical Society, a
small club established by Babbage, Herschel, Peacock, and several
other students at Cambridge, to promote, as it was humorously
expressed, the principles of pure D-ism, that is, of the Leibnitzian
notation and the methods of French mathematicians. Until 1822
Mr. Babbage’s writings consisted exclusively of memoirs u

position, but because they display the deepest insight into the

rinciples of symbolic methods. His memoir in the “ Cambridge

hilosophical Transactions” for 1826, “On the Influence of Signs
pe

uman mind,

As early as 1812 or 1813 he entertained the notion of calculating
mathematical tables by mechanical means, and in 1819 or 1820
began to reduce his ideas to practice. Between 1820 and 1822 he
completed a small model, and in 1823 commenced a more perfect

metallic wheels and levers. It was to be capable of any analytical
Operation, for instance, solving equations and tabulating the most
re isla formule. Nothing but a careful study of the pub-
is ; i

abbage asserted to be possible would have been theoretically
possible. The engine was to possess a kind of power of prevision,
and was to be so constructed that intentional disturbance of
the loose parts would give no error in the final result. :

Although for many years Mr. Babbage entertained the intention

76 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

The d

of skill and industry; cabinets full of tools, pieces of mechanism, —
and various contrivances for facilitating exact workmanship, were —
on every side now lying useless. ee

tr. Babbage’s inquiries were not at all restricted to mathemati-
cal and mechanical subjects. His work on the “ Economy of Man- —
yfactures and Machiner ,” first published in 1832, is in reality a 2
fragment of a treatise on Political Economy. Its popularity at the —
time was great, and, b

years passed before people generally had any notion of the value —
of Mr. Babbage’s inquiries
)

is clearly put forth. That Power which can assion laws can

Miscellaneous Bibliography. 17

October last, at the age of 48. Mr. Swan has been long known
among his New England friends for his love of natural history and

friends by personal qualifications of the rarest merits —X., im
Harper's Weekly.

V. MisceLLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. A Report of Surgical Cases treated in the Army of the
United States from 1865 to 1871. Circular No 3. Surgeon
General Office, Washington.—The reports of the medical and
surgical cases occurring in the army, and presenting the con-
densed tabular statements of the results of each five years, have
always been looked for with interest by the profession, and more
-Or less carefully read. The report of surgical cases, however,
which has just been issued as Circular No 3, is of more than

78 Miscellaneous Bibliography.

usual importance. Instead of the statistical tables of former
more than a thousand —

furnished the occasions for the earliest recorded triumphs of mil —

various kinds that had perforated and lodged in the bladder; one

contribution to surgical literature, besides being creditable to the —
kill of our army surgeons.

5
ks
:
3
~™
=
S
oe
i)
Ss
S
Las)
a
g
be}
—
(oa)
~T
So
es
°
i)
—
2
LS

:
a
:
:
:

an intelligent and comprehensive manner, upon the important dis —
coveries and researches made in various departments of science. —

©
2)
z
SPI
pe
:
fs)
ot
>
@
<)
ie)
5
i=)
oi
&
mS
(a>)
mM
iY)
So
foe)
a2}
mM
©
:

Italy, and the census of the U. States for 1870, naturally occupy?
large space. These annual volumes form a permanent and most —

3. Boston Journal of Chemi try: James R. Nicuors, M.D. ,ka-
t J. Ronre, A.M.—This monthly was estab- —
lished in 1866, and has now reached its 6th volume. It is “ devoted

: life, th
and its contents, presented under these heads, are interesting an¢ —
instructive to a large class of readers, It numbers among lt ”
niginal contributors some of our first writers, who do good set —
essing, on matters of current interest in science, a larget
body of readers, than is reached by any other American jo

also that on a precedin pa:

i

Miscellaneous Bibliography. 79

4. An Elementary Treatise on Heat; by BaLYour Srewart,
LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy at the Owens Col-
lege, Manchester. Second edition. 12mo, pp. xx, 415. Oxford,
1871. (Clarendon Press. New York: Macmillan & Co.)—We be-

o the times, therefore; and in saying this, we have in mind the
fact that its author is one of the foremost thinkers of the day in
the department of the conservation of energy. e find conse-
quently in the book a wealth of thought as entirely original as it
is invaluable. The chapter on the Theory of Exchanges is incom-

e

why the magnetic poles are so distant from the

eto
Hon. de la Faculté des Sciences de Dijon. | p. 8vo.—Py
Perrey continues his valuable labors in connection with the subject

°
mn

80 Miscellaneous Bibliography

of earthquakes, and here presents a a i of the — Pg to
the great Hawaian earthquakes of 1868. The memoir was pr
sented to the Soc. Imp. d’ Agriculture “of Lyons in Febeatone 1860.
Besides the above, Prof. Perrey has also seen * Note sur
les Trem blements de terre en 1868, avec Suppléments pour les
années antérieures de 1843 E Nets in the Procueding’ of the Bel-
gian Academy, Febru

7. Uebersicht der seit a _furtgeadaten pata aber
das von ie Atmosphdre unsichtbar getragene reiche organische
Leben, von CuristiaN GOTTFRIED te NBERG. 150 pp. 4to,
with two plates. Berlin, Abh. d. K. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin,

zerland in 1
sitios i ube hiabaa borealia et arcticu, Auctore AXEL
. 8vo.—A prodromus in Latin of the lar arge work,
be

illustrated with 32 plates, soon to published by the author
e ipod Crustaceans have their greatest diversity of
forms in the cold latitudes of the be; and hence, a wor

lobe; and |

Arctic and_ boreal species has a special interest. This prodromus
contains full descriptions of all of the species, and a complete
eyueny iy:
9. Hibthalgebirge in Sachsen, von Dr. Hanns Bruno GEINITZ.

—The second number of the first part of this fine work has been
just issued. It treats of the corals of the Lower Quader Sa
pats, Mie Naiesedn and is illustrated by three excellent
plates,

tous 4th alared éaition 272 pp. 12mo, esl five plates.—

11. Roos de Géologie pour les années 1867 et 1868, yar

A. Derxesse et M. ne Lapparrenr. 372 pp. 8vo. 1871.

(Dunod, Editeur).—This is the seventh volume of this S valoalil
m

Was interrupted, as the preface says, by the two sieges 0 aris.
It treats at considerable length of pd — — metallic con
tents, reviews also the more impor on histori

geology, and ia, in the last shana @ on Pianned oak eo

Die Reptilfauna der Gosau-Formation in der neuen Welt bei ae* Neustadt;
von Dr. Emanuel Bunzel. 20 pp. 4to, with 8 plates. Abh. d. K. K. g Reich-
r. Heftl. Vie 1871.

Die Cephalopoden-Fauna der oo ~ aang bei Krakau; von Dr. M. New

mayr. 54 pp. 4to, with 7 plates. Ib.,

THE

AMERICAN

JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS,

[THIRD SERIES]

Arr. XIL—Observations on Encke’s Comet at the Dartmouth
College Observatory ; by Prof. C. A. Young.

THE spectrum of this comet was observed on Dec. Ist, 2d,
5th and 6th, and found to consist of three bright bands, of
which the central one is by far the most conspicuous. The
bands are pretty sharply defined at their lower (i. e., less refran-
gible) edge, but fade gradually toward their upper limit.
There was no indication of resolvability into lines, but the
light was too feeble to allow the use of great dispersive power,
or of a very narrow slit. I think that with the power and
adjustment employed, no lines nearer to each other than Ji and
bv could have been distinctly separate

Yo continuous spectrum could be detected, nor any differ-
ence, except in brightness, between the spectra of different por-

ted the comet. as :

fter trying several arrangements, with dispersive powers
Tanging from ie to five eal it was found that the best

In this instrument the eye-piece is provided with a b:
crossing the center of the field of view parallel to the:slit, while
the telescope itself can be moved by a tangent screw so as to
bring any portion of the spectrum to the edge of the bar.
There is also the ordinary scale viewed by reflection from the
surface of the prism. ;

The observations were made in the following manner: By
Means of the tangent screw, the bar was so Pp aced as to hide

Am, Jour, Sct.—Turrp Series, VoL. III, No. 14.—Fxs., 1872.

6

82 C. A. Young— Observations on Encke’s Comet,

measures. ‘I'he numbers given relate to the bright, compara
tively well-defined, less refrangible edges of the bands.

Kirchoff’s scale. | Angstrom’s scale.

Date. Istband. | 2d band. | 8d band. | istband. | 2d band. | a
Dec.1,-| 1295 | 1645 | 9970 | 8593 5174 | 4698
Dec. 2,.] 1240 | 1650 ee 5575 5173 ae
Dec. 5,.| 1245 | 1640 2265 5569 5178 fir
Dec. 6,| 1250 | 1645 2260 5563 5174 ae
Means,_| 1240 | 1645 2265 || 5575 | 51745 | 4702
a ee OS ae =

Spectrum of Encke’s Comet.

ene es eee aT
Kirchoff’s scale. 211 2|0 1:9 ioe 14 1|3_ 1/2 J

| og !

4\9 bu LZ BSBA HJo 9/6 OIE
Angstrom’s scale.
‘ : m
The figure * gives an idea of the appearance of the spectru
and the position of its bands,
* The irregularity observable in the spacing of Angstrém’s scale at the bone
of the diagram is no fault of the draftsman or engraver. but ap scans ‘hel
The irregularity, however, is really in the scale of Kirchoff, the prisms 0

fas

C. A. Young— Observations on Encke’s Comet. 83

The spectrum of this comet appears to be the same with that
of comet IT, 1868 (Winnecke’s comet), described by Mr. Hug-
gins in the Philosophical Transactions for that year. No data
are given in the paper by which to refer the scale of his instru-
ment to that of Kirchoff, except such as can be deduced from
inspection of the figure. The scale appears, however, to be the
same as that used in his observations of star spectra (see Philo-
sophical Transactions for 1864, p. 485). If so, D corresponds
to 1000, E to 1252, & to 12975, and F to 1483. Assumin
these numbers, I find that the relation of this scale to that of
my own instrument is very closely represented by a straight
line, and that the readings 1094, 1298 and 1589, corresponding
to the lower edges of the bands observed, give respectively wave-
lengths of about 559, 517 and 469 millionths of a millimeter.

r. Huggins considers that he has satisfactorily identified

this spectrum with that of carbon.

_ The brightest line falls in the 6 group, where also a strong
line appears in the spectrum of common air under the influence
of the electric spark ; although quite probably merely accidental,
it may also be worth noting that the principal line of the aurora
spectrum (wave-length 5568) very closely coincides with the
lowest band.

On the evening of Dec. Ist, at 6" 04™ Pp. m., Hanover mean
time (5% 45™ Washington time), the comet passed centrally over
a star of the 9th magnitude.

My attention was called to it by the sudden appearance of a
bright, narrow spectrum running longitudinally through that

instrument appear to have been several.times disturbed and adjusted during the

series of observations embodied in his map. I subjoin a table, which I have often

—. convenient, coordinating the two scales, derived from direct comparison of
€ maps.

Comparison of the Scales of Angstrom and Kirchof.

Ang. K. Diff. ! Ang. K. pitt, || Ang. x. | Dim

ee! _—<$<———$ —
69

4300 | 2867 5100 | 1747 ot 5900 | 1000 | Fey

4400 | 2693 | 174 || 5200 | 1611 | j59 || 6000

4500 | 2537 | 156 | 5300 | 1489 27 || 6100 895 | 5p

4600 | 29397 | 14° || 5400 | 1392 97 || 6200 84

4700 | 2268 | 129 | 5500 | 1304 8 || 6300 noo | 49

4800 | 2147 | 12111 5600 | 1219 | yy o | 767

4900 | 2030 | 117 || 5700 | 1142 v3 || 6500 1 |. be

1s92 | 138! sg00 | 1069 ‘|| e600 680?

oa td C (694 K) no accurate coérdination of the scales seems possible, as only
Ty lew lines are recognizable on Angstrém’s map. é
There is very great need Bg new map of the solar spectrum equally minute
and faithful in detail with that of Kirchoff, but constructed hout on a con-
Sistent scale; and for this purpose I am convinced that a scale of a

, a8 already proposed by Herschel and Stoney, would be incomparably
Most convenient for practical use

84 J. D. Whitney on the “ Primordial Fauna” in Nevada.

of the comet. On looking into the telescope with a power of
200, the star was for about thirty seconds of time so near the
center of the comet that I should certainly have mistaken it for
a nucleus but for the spectrum.
The star did not appear to be dimmed in the slightest degree,
On this night, and also on Dec. 2d, the comet appeared as a
nebulous mass about 5’ or 6’ in diameter. It was much

The comet was barely visible to the naked eye.

On the 5th, at 6 P.M, 1
detected a tail about 25
long, of singular, one-sided
conformation, which I have

well-defined, a rectilinear
streamer of light directed at
a position angle of about 43
(i. e., N. 48° E.) from the cen-
ter of the comet. The other
edge was curved in the usual parabolic form, but was very faint,
indefinite and difficult to trace. On the 6th, the straight streamer
could still be faintly seen, but the comet was so low and the alt
so hazy that nothing further could be made out.

The telescope employed in the above observations has am
aperture of 9°4 inches,

Dartmouth College, Dec. 8, 1871,

Art. XIII.—WNote on the occurrence of the “‘ Primordial Fauna”
mm Nevada ; by J. D. WHITNEY.

AN interesting locality of fossils has recently been discovered
by Mr. J. E. Clayton, and specimens have been placed in MY
hands for examination, through the kindness of Profess0!
ria LeConte. These fossils indicate most unequivocally

J. D. Whitney on the “ Primordial Fauna” in Nevada. 85

belong to the genus Paradowides. The class of brachiopods
is represented in these specimens by two or more genera, all of
the family of Lingulide. Among these I think that I am able
to recognize the genera Lingulepis (Lingula) and Obolella. At
all events, the character of this assemblage of fossils is thor-

his is an interesting discovery, since it carries the Primordial
fauna much farther west than it had been found before. The
most western locality of Potsdam sandstone fossils’ previously
described, is that in the Big Horn Mountains, at the head of

the lowest subdivision of the fossiliferous series, and which has
been found recurring at so many points over the vast area of

ceous shales; throughout the United States, from New York to
the Rocky Mountains, in the “Potsdam sandstone, or 1m shales

we have already a pretty fair representation of almost all the
groups from the Triassic down to the “ ,
The report of the 40th Parallel Survey will, no doubt, throw a
great deal of light on the stratigraphy of the various formations
existing in the Great Basin, of which we now know hardly
anything more than the bare fact that they do occur in that
extremely interesting region.

86 Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt.

Am

pieces a mottled buff and gray limestone, filled with frag.
ments of minute trilobites and brachiopods, and from a locality
on Schell Creek, seventy-five miles northeast of White Pine,
not far from lat. 40°, lon. 115°. These specimens also clearly
demonstrate the existence of the Primordial fauna at that
locality ; but the fragments are so imperfect that I will not
attempt to name any of them, unless it be one, which may be
either Agraulos Oweni, or another species of the same genus —
closely resembling this. There are also many very minute
brachiopods hardly 0-15 of an inch in diameter, which havea
form not much different from that of Lingulepis prima.

Art. XIV.—Notice of the Address of Prof. T. Sterry Hunt before
ne American Association at Indianapolis ;* by James D.
ANA.

1. That, while accepting the ordinary views with reg nd ;
most “pseudomorphs by alteration ” (crystals chemically al :
j t

crystals of serpentine having the form of chrysolite, pyroxene, ‘
dolomite, etc., are pseudomorphs; and the same of those of
steatite, having the form of hornblende, pyroxene, spinel, a ce

of those of pinite having the form of nephelite, scapolite, et; —

g prop
erties, and no other interior features or qualities conforming - :
the external form ; that (2) the crystalline forms are just WG.
presented by the species after which they are supposed to ,
pseudomorphs, and the idea of their being real forms of a simg™
polymorphous species is wholly inadmissible, as pronounced ;
every crystallographer who has written on the subject; that\)
the pseudomorphs show all stages in the process of change eee
“i* Prof. Hunt’s address has been published in the American Natori re &
September, and, since then, in part, in “Nature.” Those who would sae
fully the criticisms here offered can, therefore, easily obtain a copy.

Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt. 87

incipient to complete alteration, in the latter case not a trace of
the original mineral remaining.

In his assumption, for it is little better, he opposes the views
of every writer on pseudomorphs, excepting one—Scheerer ;
and Scheerer’s chemical speculations, which are at the basis of
his opinions, he rejects, like all other chemists.

is unwarranted assumption has a profound position in the
system of views on metamorphism which Professor Hunt holds,
ok gives shape and intensity to his opinions of the views of
others.

. That, in commencing a paragraph with the sentence, “ The
doctrine of pseudomorphism by alteration, as taught by Gustaf
Rose, Haidinger, Blum, Volger, Rammelsberg, Dana, Bischof,
and many others [meaning thereby other writers on pseudo-

mmelsberg, Dana; and that he completes the caricature in
the closing sentence of the same paragraph, in which he says,
“In this way we are led from gneiss or granite to limestone,
from limestone to dolomite, and from dolomite to serpentine, or
more directly from granite, granulite or diorite to serpentine at
once, without passing through the intermediate stages of lime-
Stone and dolomite ;”—part of which transformations, I, for
one, had never conceived; and Rose, Haidinger, Rammelsberg
and probably Blum and the “many others,” would repudiate

em as strongly as myself. Next follows a verse from Goethe,
that is made to announce his personal vexation with their
“ sophistries ;” alias absurdities, as the context me

Professor Hunt's rejection of established truth alluded to
under §1, here manifests its effects in leading him to misrepre-
sent—although, unintentionally—the views of writers on pseu-

access to great beds of rock. Haidinger, the eminent crystallo-

most prominent writers on pseudomorphism, never wrote upon
the subject of the alteration of rocks at all, and this is true of
others against whom the above charge is made by Mr. Hunt.

With a little clearer judgment, part at least of that vexation of
spirit, which required the help of a great German poet, and the

88 Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt.

German language, adequately to express, might have been |
avoided.

into this mineral by a method analogous to that which takes
place in pseudomorphism. Had Mr. Hunt’s statement be |
made a special one, restricted to this case, I should have had

10
this view. e
Professor Hunt’s opinion on this point in 1857 he thus ee
pressed in a letter to the writer, sent for insertion in this Journ®)
where it appears in volume xxiii (1857), at page 437, a8 @ ba
clusion to his brief statement : o

Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt. 89

“Suppose a solution of alkaline silicate, which will never be
wanting among sediments where feldspar exists, to be diffused
through a mixture of siliceous matter and earthy carbonate,
and we have, with a temperature of 212° F, and perhaps less,
all the conditions necessary for the conversion of the sedi
mentary mass into pyroxenite, diallage, serpentine, talc, rhodo-
nite, all of which constitute beds in our metamorphic strata.
Add to the above the presence of aluminous matter, and you
have the elements of chlorite, garnet and epidote. We have
here an explanation of the metamorphism of the Silurian

a

altered rocks, will appear in the Report of Progress of the

It should be added, that Professor Hunt acknowledges his
change of opinion in his address. But, in view of it, some
moderating of his positiveness of assertion would have been

ble.

reasona

4. That he attributes the origin of beds of serpentine and
steatite—here following nearly Delesse,—to the alteration of
beds of different hydrous magnesian silicates related to-sepiolite
(meerschaum), formed in the surface waters of an era—Paleozoic
or earlier—while fossiliferous rocks’were in progress :—when,

dients from any external source, like most other eee re
instead of through the agency of outside ingredients.
eae

90 Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt.

5. That he attributes an origin similar to that for serpentine
and talc to beds of chlorite and hornblende :—notwithstanding —

the fact that chlorite schist and hornblende schist—the purest
forms of any large beds of these minerals—are always more or
less impure, and often graduate into clay slate on one side, and
mica schist on the other; and, that these schists are thus so
involved with others, that if one is derived from ordinary sedi-
mentary beds, all must be.

6. That he devotes some pages to a “ theory of envelopment”
as a method of accounting for the silicate pseudomorphs 1
ferred to—beginning a paragraph with the sentence:

the greater number of cases on which this general

ar
theory of pseudomorphism by a slow process of alteration in

minerals has been based, are, as I shall endeavor to show, examples
of the phenomenon of mineral envelopment, so well studied by
Delesse in his essay on Pseudomorphs :”

and then gives a long list of admitted pseudomorphs, including | q
in it nearly all kinds go recognized by~other authors, and - 4
that affect the question discussed by Prof. Hunt; serpentine —

occurring in the list as forming pseudomorphs after chrysolite,
hornblende, garnet ; steatite after pyroxene, hornblende, epieom
is

pentine, etc.

=
nA

Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt. 91

8. That he cites Naumann as sustaining the “theory of envel-
opment :”—when this learned crystallographer and mineralogist
has only commended Delesse’s chapter on the envelopment of
minerals in crystals, and presents in his Mineralogy (the last
edition of which, that of 1871, is now before me) the subject of
pseudomorphism in the usual way, with nothing whatever on the
theory of envelopment ; and, under the-description of the species
serpentine, he speaks of “large pseudomorphous crystals o
serpentine from Snarum which still contain a nucleus of un-
altered chrysolite.”

There is hence no foundation for Mr. Hunt’s statement that
his views are “ably supported by Delesse,” or any occasion for
the ‘‘no small pleasure ” he derived from Naumann’s letter; or
any warrant for the remark (p. 47) that Delesse and Naumann
hold the “view ” “that the so-called cases of pseudomorphism,
on which the theory of metamorphism by alteration has been
built, are, for the most part, examples of association and en-
velopment, and the result of a contemporaneous and original
crystallization.” These men of science are not to be counted

friends, it has not been their fault, as they have always stats
Be yt

announced opponents, with one or two exceptions, hold the
views which Prof. Hunt has attributed to them in his address.
We are glad to know that this is not the usual American:

method of dealing with authorities.

9. That while setting down the Taconic rocks, and rightly,
as Lower Silurian in age, he denominates the micaceous gneisses,
diorites, epidotic and chloritic, steatitic and serpentinous rocks,
talcoid mica schists, quartzites, and clay-slates (which are always
without staurolite or andalusite), in fact, the whole range of
metamorphic rocks, with small exceptions, between the Connec-
ticut river and the great limestone formation of the Green Moun-
tains (admitted to be Lower Silurian), as the Green Mountain

es, and makes the whole “pre-Cambrian” in ag

ug
ere are gneisses, mica schists, and chloritic taleoid (or mica)
schists in the Masoud series, and therefore of admitted Lower

92 Notice of the Address of T. Sterry Hunt.

Silurian origin, which are closely like those of his Green Moun-
in Series.

tain Se

10. That he denominates, in like manner, the gneisses, mica
schists (said to be richer in mica than those of the Green Moun:
tain Series), hornblendic gneisses and schists, micaceous and clay:

limestones, existing east of the Connecticut river, as a While

slates containing andalusite, cyanite, or staurolite, and certain —

Mountain Series, and makes these a newer “ pre-Cambrian” than —
the Green Mountain Series :—when there is the same want of —
stratigraphical evidence as to age as in the former; and when —
Prof. C Hi

itchcock’s discoveries of Helderberg corals (Lower
Devonian, according to Billings, or else upper beds o

Upper Silurian) at Littleton, not far north of the western ex:

tremity of the White Mountains, makes it more probable that —
part of the White Mountain Series of beds are of Helderberg —

age rather than pre-Silurian; and his discovery of labradorite

rocks on the southwestern margin of the White Mountains, —
wholly unlike any of the so-called White Mountain Series
shows further that a vast amount of study in the field is needed —
before the dictum of any one respecting the age of New Hamp —

h. Zh

shire rocks is worth muc

When observation has given positive knowledge, we may thet :

have several ‘“ White Mountain Series.

2

:

fe)

R. Irving—Age of the Quartzites, ete. 93

fully tested by stratigraphy. A fossil is proved, by careful
observation, to be restricted to the rocks of a certain period
before it is used—and then cautiously—for identifying equiva-
lent beds. Has any one proved by careful observation that
crystals of staurolite, cyanite, or andalusite, are restricted to
rocks of a certain geological period? Assumptions and opin-
ions, however strongly emphasized, are not proofs.

It is no objection to stratigraphical evidence that it is diffi-
cult to obtain; is very doubtful on account of the difficulties ;

nown. Until then, lithology may give us guesses, but noth-
ing more substantial. ;
r. Hunt's arguments with reference to the White Mountain
Series, as urged by him in 1870, will be found in this Journal,
i, ; 83. Both there, and in his address, may be seen the
n

?

Strata that are part of, because conformable to, these Helder erg
beds. Had he studied up these stratigraphical relations with
the care requisite to obtain the truth, and all the truth, perha
he would not longer say—it is “contrary to my notions of the
geological history of the continent to suppose that rocks of

evonian age could in that region have assumed such litho-
logical characters.” Notions often lead astray.

Art. XV.—On the Age of the Quartzites, Schists, and Conglom-
erates of Sauk County, Wisconsin ; Peat atl Irvine, M. E.,
Professor of Geology, Mining, and Metallurgy at the Univer-
sity of Wisconsin.

_ Turoveu the central portion of the county of Sauk, he
west trend, and a height varying from a mere rise above the

n th
general prairie to an altitude of five hundred feet. The width
from north to south never exceeds three or four miles, and in

94 R. Irving—Age of the Quarizites, Schists and

places is much‘ less than one mile. The total lengths from east —
to west, or rather, the exact points at which the peculiar rocks —
which make up the ridges give place to the otcianae county —
rock, are not as yet accurately known. These lengths, however, —
seem to be from fifteen to twenty miles.

e rock material of the ridges is mainly a hard dark-colored
quartzite; with this in some places are siliceous and taleo-silice-
ous schists, and two or three kinds of conglomerate. The dip
of the strata, which, though iri some places obscure, is in others
very marked—and can everywhere be determined by careitl
observation—is uniformly toward the north. The angle varies —
from 20°-25° in the south range, to 75°-80° in the north

The occurrence of these bold ridges in the midst of a praine
country, together with the marked contrast between their up

Do they, or do they not, antedate the Potsdam period? Are
they the results of local metamorphism on the Potsdam sand-

The facts recorded in the present article are the results of @
series of visits made to the localities by the writer, during We
months of September, October and November of this :
(1871), and they will, I think, be seen to prove beyon al
doubt or cavil, that the quartzites and schists antedate entirely
the Potsdam epoeh, i.e., are either Huronian or Laurentian 10 a

Of all of the notices mentioned, none are more than bri

nesota, makes the first mention of the quartzite. He abe a
ose _Dr. James G. Percival, in the report of progress 0 1
isconsin survey for 1856, refers again to the quartzites, cally

they result from a change on the Potsdam sandstones. Mr.
James Hall, in his report of progress to the governor of We
consin for 1860, gives by far the most accurate desefl ame
have been able to find. “ He refers the quartzites unhesitatinglY
to the Huronian—but gives no proofs whatever. His pam

Conglomerates of Sauk County, Wisconsin. 95

phlet did not fallinto my hands until after my own investigations
were entirely completed. In the first volume of his e
ort, Mr. Hall again mentions the quartzites, but still more

rock shows readily the reason for its not becoming saline.

The great exposures of cliff at this locality, and the deep rock
cuttings on the newly-opened railroad, afford most excellent
Opportunities for study. The change of direction, too, of the
valley, gives facilities for approaching the rocks from different
sides, not elsewhere easily obtainable.

96 R. Irving—Age of the Quartzites, Schists and

The rock here is mainly a hard, dark-colored, very compact
quartzite, though the colors vary from a very light grey in
° d ° . ¥

ing to an old anticlinal axis, but the uniform dip of the strata
throughout its length proves of course that this is not the case,

SEcTION 1.—Nortb and South through the south range on section, line 1 of map. A,quartzites; i
7m i quartrites with some schists ; ce conglomerate; $ P, Sauk Prairie; B V Baraboo Valley;
, level o: e. :

fifty or sixty different localities, I found to be uniformly )~
and 8.W. and S.E. and N.W., the variations in a few plat
being evidently due to local displacement. On the cliff side
and more especially about the lake, these joints, together Wit
the bedding joints, have so cut the rock into separate blow
t these have from time to time been thrown down the bl
by frost and atmospheric agencies in huge rectan

weighing by calculation from seventy-five to two undred.
apiece. 4

—p
ne <

Py, rip
PN RTE
Hi ee Diy Pe

1

RANGE

NS
yyy NNER r saw
|i oC ink (ALA

ERO

bis s 5 t

|
¥ wil lity,

ati

\s

P
\ A
SS

|

S
K

8 ooveo a

; VA
=
50
Saul]
oe et
a ies

Conglomerates of Sauk County, Wisconsin. 97

Orthis Barabuensis Hall, Delphinocephalus Minnesotensis Owen,
&c. I have examined a collection of these fossils from the
above locality in the possession of Dr. Lapham of Milwaukee,
and have seen the fossils and quartzite pebbles in the same
fragments side by side.

Il. The observations on the North Range were made about
the Lower Narrows of the Baraboo river and westward
from there about half a mile. This north range seems to be
less continuous both as to elevation and as to the character of
its rock material. I am told by Dr. Lapham that it seems
rather to be made up of detached masses of metamorphic rocks.
The rising ground, however, never entirely disappears, and the
-ngiaans seems to be found as far to the east and west as in
the south range. At the Baraboo Narrows the metamorphic
rocks are in great force, the cliffs on either side the river, which
here makes a direct cut through the range from south to north,
being as much as four hundred feet in height. The body of
the bluff on the west side is made up of heavy beds of quartzite,
with, in places, intercalated beds of a metamorphic conglomerate,
and of a talcose schist like that in the south range. These bedsall
stand at a very high angle, between 75°-80° from the horizontal,
the dip being north with possibly a slight inclination to the
east. At the bottom of the hill on the south side is an ex-
posure of a peculiar light-colored siliceous schist, entirely dif-
ferent from any of the other rocks of the series. old sha
sunk some thirty feet on the schist, affords most excellent op-
portunity for examination. The total thickness seen was about

schist, I found a horizontal undisturbed sandstone, laid open
for some distance by quarrying. The beds are generally a foot

Am. Jour. Sc1.—Turrp Series, Vor. III, No. 14.—Fss., 1872.
7

98 R. Irving—Age of the Quartzites, Schists, etc.

"
:

iferous nature of the sandstone in places to which we did not
have time to go. The sandstone is, of course, the Potsdam of —
the surrounding valleys. Section 2 will serve to give a clear
idea of the structure of this bluff.

’

\

SECTION 2.—Through North range at W. Bluff of Baraboo Narrows. A, thick-bedded dark col- |
ored quartzites, with some talco-siliceous schist; B, siliceous schist; C, horizontal sandstone: —
BY, Parapoo Valley.

tween the ridges, and in close proximity to them.

The occurrence of rounded pebbles of quartzite m the oid :
glomerate on the north side of the south range. To suppose tis
conglomerate, which by its fossils is unmistakably Potsdam, ©

and the rounding of the pebbles by beach action, b: ork
formation of the conglomerate; not to speak of the time ® 4

2 /

W. Mathews on Glacier-motion. 99

University of Wisconsin, November 18th, 1871.

Art. XVL—On Canon Moseley’s views upon Glacier-motion ; by
ILLIAM Maruews, President of the Alpine Club.*

THE argument by which Canon Moseley attempts to prove
that the descent of glaciers by their weight alone is a mechani-
cal impossibility, as contained in his communication to the
Royal Society, read January 7, 1869, may be stated in the fol-
aes propositions :—

_ 1. In every transverse section of a glacier every particle of
ice is, at the same moment of time, moving over and alongside
its neighbors, :
_ 2. The absolute motion of any point in the surface of a glacier
is proportional to its distance from the nearest side, and to its
height from the bottom of the channel.

* From the L., E. and D. Phil. Mag., Dec., 1871.

100 : W. Mathews on Glacier-motion.

3. This differential motion can only take place by the process
which, in mechanics, is known by the name of shear.

e resistance which ice offers to shearing, or its shearing.
force, as ascertained by experiment in the shearing-apparatus
devised by Canon ve a is not less than 75 lbs. per squareinch, _

5. But in order that the Mer de Glace may descend by its
own weight, at the rate at which Professor Tyndall observed it
descending at the Tacul, its shearing-force per square inch cal: —
not be more than 13193 Ib.

I propose in the present communication to examine thee —
propositions. :

he first has been challenged more than once in the coutse

of the controversy, without eliciting any rejoinder from Canon —
Moseley, no doubt from the absence of any materials available
for the support of the hypothesis. The fact is, that while we
ave numerous observations of the absolute motion of various —
ao of the surfaces of glaciers, observers do not ee :

’

;
‘
‘

q Le
which might safely be disregarded in a determination of aver’
age daily velocity becoming serious when relative and not abso-

the glacier has melted away from the stakes, and from the con
stant tendency of the stakes to heel over to the southward
consequence of their heated faces enlarging the holes ©" —
direction of the sun. 01

During a short tour in the Alps in the autumn of Ee
attempted, in concert with my friend, Mr. A. A. Reilly, t0 ‘te
some observations upon differential motion, and selected, Te :
side of the Great Aletsch Glacier as the field of our operation’

By means of a well defined station on the right b :

was eleven yards from 1; and the remaining four stakes Ve
p ne

W. Mathews on Glacier-motion. 101

between 0 and 1 was staked out into nine subdivisions of three
feet each, and the space between 5 and 6 into five subdivisions
of six feet.

Our work was completed in the afternoon of Monday, the
22nd of August; and the line was re-examined on Wednesday,
the 24th, after an interval of forty-eight hours.

In the first place, the spaces between the stakes were carefully
remeasured, with the following results :—

Number August 22. August 24.
of stake. Distances. Distances.
0, in, ft.

Se cde Ce 27 0 26 10
Sige toting peep 33 0 $3.0
} Regen 30 0 30 0
elie pe ye. 30 0 30 4
Bee Ts Oe 30 0 30 0
6, 30 0 30 0°5

180 0 160° 20

subdivisions. The elongation of the space between 3 and 4 was
ue to the widening of a crevasse which crossed the line
obliquely in that part.
The following are the absolute and relative motions of the
stakes during the two days’ interval :—

Number Absolute motion. Relative motion.
of stake. inches. inch,
GO, Sotieuses ca 8
i, 3°00 0°50
So a ae 4°00 1°00
3, 5°25 1°25
P tale 3°50 —1°75
Boe a es 4°50 1°00
Gyircehs & sions oe 5°00 0°50
These figures show an increase of differential motion in pro-
ceeding from the edge of the glacier to a point about thirty
yards diane and a subsequent decrease in proceeding toward

hours in points one inch apart. Between 5 and 6 it is only y4'¢2
of an inch for the same time and space.

The displacements of the stakes intermediate between 0 and 1
aad 5 i 6, were also determined. Each intermediate stake
was found to share in the differential motion.

102 W. Mathews on Glacier-motion.

The measurements were confined to a breadth of 60 yardsin —
a part of the glacier where the distance from side to center —
was not less than 600 yards, and consequently only exhibit the —
deportment of the side ice. It was important to supplement
them by examining a glacier in the central portion of the stream; :
and, I being obliged to return home, Mr. Reilly devoted three
weeks to this purpose, and has generously placed his notes at —
my disposal.

ture,” the remaining 120 yards being ordinary glacier-ice.
Mr. Reilly bored the first hole about 70 yards from the ‘i f

exhibited in parallel columns, the negative signs indicating

Right moiety. | Left moiety. ae
Stations. Saat | aes | Stations. ie | eeton
if Teepe eae ft. in.
0, | 11 650
1, | 10 11°60) ~6-90 | |
2, | 11 4:25; 4°65
8, | 11 3:00! —1-25 17, | 11 0°50 ?
4, | 11 7-05] 4-95 16, 1.11 9°00|. 3 :
5, 11 6°75| ~—0°50 ib, | 31. 4 ey
6, | 11 525] —-1:50|| 14, | 11 650| -000 497
7, | 11 650] 1-95 18, | 11 #60) a
8, | 11 6-00! —0-50 12, | 11 7°50 ee :
% | 11 9-00) soo} 11, | 11 7-00) =OR8.
|__10, | 11 10-00] 1-00l] 10, | 11 10°00] 300

Here we have a superficial area of ice 170 yards 1D ee :
moving through a space of nearly 12 feet in twenty wee :
an advance of the center during that interval only 10 mob"

rches, and at the center 1 inch in a width of 360 inches ©
that two points an inch apart would in twenty-four hours aa

W. Mathews on Glacier-motion. 108

past each other to the extent of a little less than the ;,';; of an
ich at the sides, and the ;;';, of an inch at the center of the
area under consideration.

Mr. Reilly has not supplied me with any note of the motion
of the edge of the glacier during the interval; but as the edge
of the Great Aletsch was found to move at the rate of only an
inch and a quarter in twenty-four hours, it probably did’ not
exceed 2 feet. We shall therefore be justified in saying that
while, in the right-hand moiety of the glacier, a differential
motion of 10 inches is distributed over a width of 100 yards
from the line of maximum velocity, a differential motion of at
least 100 inches must be distributed over the remaining 70 yards
up to the edge of the glacier. th

Two of the thirty-feet spaces were staked out into subdivisions
of 2 feet each. Hach of the intermediate stakes exhibited a
differential motion, with occasional negative signs—the greatest
relative displacement observed being 2°25 inches in the twenty

ays, equivalent to the ;!; of an inch in twenty-four hours for
points 1 inch apart.

During the intervals of his labors on the Glacier of Bionassay,
Mr Reilly ranged a line across the Mer de Glace, on the Cha-
mouni side of the Montanvert. His measurements on this
line during a period of nineteen days indicate a motion very
similar in its character to that of the Glacier of Bionassay.
The length of this line from the left-hand edge of the glacier
to the point of maximum velocity was about 1000 feet. The
central 500 feet had an absolute motion of 18 feet 7°75 inches

motion to distribute over the lateral 500 feet of the line, or six
umes as much as that of the central moiety.

the observations above described is not new. It appears clearly
from the measurements made by Professor Tyndall on the Mer

read May 20, 1858, and published in vol. exlix of the Philoso-
phical Transactions, But nowhere is it brought out with more

104 W. Mathews on Glacier-motion.

consecutive years, of a series of points originally in a straight
line, are plotted to scale. The diagram exhibits the very small
motion of points close to the side, whence the curves extent
with their concavity downward as far as the point of maximum —
differential velocity, where they become convex, and gradually |
increase in curvature up to about one-fourth of the width of the
glacier, whence they sweep across to the corresponding point on —
the opposite side in a curve so flattened as to be scarcely distin
guishable from a straight line. Cr
he above considerations lead to the following conclusions
upon the five fundamental propositions of Canon Moseley. |
1. It is probable that every molecule of a glacier moves Wilh
a very slow differential motion, which, whenever the ice 1s co
tinuous, is continuous from molecule to molecule, and fom
moment to moment of time. : :
2. The hypothesis that the differential motion 1s uniform

.

from center to side is wholly contrary to fact. The sea

theory and fact greatly strengthens his position ;
made good this part of his case.

tions above described, to range for
inch apart, and an interval of twenty-four hours, from
to the 5,55 of an inch.* ; rents
5. On the other hand, the slow continuous le gear
the molecules of a glacier are undistinguishable in ee
displacements of the molecules of an ice-plank, suppoh™
extremities and allowed to subside under the 10 uence
weight, displacements which require for their eae 87
have shown in the Philosophical Magazine for November
a force considerably less than 1} Ib. per square inch“
fore, than the very force which the Sanit considers Suh.
shear the Mer de Glace if it descends by its own grav"

* This objection has been f in the Phil
zine for July, 1870, een forcibly urged by Mr. Ball in

actual glacier,—the latter having been shown, 1 of a

F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers. 105

Art. XVII.—The Hot Springs and Geysers of the Yellowstone
and Firehole Rivers; by F. V. HayDEN. With maps.
(Published by permission of the Secretary of the Iuterior.)

WE shall not attempt in this article to do more than to give
a brief description of the hot springs and geysers of this
wonderland. Their origin does not differ from that of similar
springs which have been so often described in Iceland, New
ealand, and on a small scale in other portions of the world.
ut it was not until comparatively recent date that it was
known that such a wonderful region existed in our own coun-

e party under the command of Col. Wm. F. Reyno s, U.
Engineers, in 1859 and ’60, endeavored to enter the Basin by

Before entering upon a description of the hot springs. it
may be well to present a brief summary of the principal geo-
logical features of the Yellowstone Basin. We may remark
at once that nine-tenths of the area is covered with volcanic
material in some form. The basis rocks are the usual metamor-

i rt
It is doubtful whether any unchanged rocks older than the Car-
niferous occur there. The Triassic is probably wanting. The
Sedimentary rocks occur in patches, covering very r te
areas, yet presenting evidence that, up to the period of the Eocene

have existed during the Pliocene period. Below the first cafion
near the mouth of Shields river, there is one of these basins ten

106 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

miles long, and on an average four miles wide. Between thef
and second cajions there is a basin about 20 miles long, and
an average four miles in width, with the modern Pliocene mar
and sands covered by a floor of basalt in some places. The
was a continuous chain of these lakes, of greater or less size, 0

and second was fast decomposing, and the springs were
extinct. One only Ate a “ip of 140°.
ascending the hill among the pines, about three-fourths of #
mil m the river bottom, we came suddenly upon one of
most remarkable exhibitions of the hot spring deposits
we have seen in this land of wonders. In the distance
looks like a vast glacier of snow and ice, and on that ac
we have named it the White Mountain. Indeed the different
terraces can be compared for their wonderful beauty only .

OS

UPPER GEYSER BASIN
FIRE HOLE RIVER

WYOMING TERRITORY |

( sea eae *.
¢ (@SadaGeyser”* 7 =
&

Sumeyed by the Party in charge of |
| _ FNM AAYDEN,

| US Geologist,
" 1871

Scale of Feet
oO 40009

-Maenetic Meridian.

$00 4 3 2 4 9 Apoo 2900 2500

Fag,
<5,
x, "by
iA

eer : Geyser 3
ae HE Megat
“4 “ag

f> Ss

= Atl

5s ESS

Lo

CZ
ny
S

pee Ys

ve A Nbiising it 5 ¥ Uy : CD, MEA

2 MT : at i 4 Loy Has ; WR Mfr Bg my, = Pe
LO Nee : : y Wii} is : ,, Ti f He th PEL MEG Hahingh NW,
; 500 ae inane ;
gs nite e Giant)
Pyramid
“Gg t* aad
a ee
‘whe
vs R
AN
\Y
i

A
AY)

AN
AN

\\

\\\

ii
mT

NY
@é »))) >
y

ni
SS)

KK
~
5)

/ :
py iii

Lb fh le
Af

Yi
Para)

Wide se
PLL iiye

My) minty
Be eres Alfie

Lf

saoecgh BIE.
182"
eS MR

sal Py, a
* ees ae aN pea
ee sy ef ode e* 4 4 WYSA SS tae g x Abbrevietions

* Ee VS A ange

«x Lae at tx Png”

S for Spouting. for Boiling, M.for. Wud
Ofor Geyser:

re
; x
are
vagy SY, My Whee ee as ee ha
HAL 4 Myers ax 3% a Ae
x

MT

tly»
i,

>

Punderson & Crisand,NewHaven, Ct.

(PLATE I.)

WHITE MOUNTAIN HOT SPRINGS

ok
GARDINER’S RIVER rae
a
1871. etn } Hig a“ Wy

: eT
¥

}
1 Ha
Sh Uy)

li We
Sea oy:
= My yp sn Me
¥ : te: ge
Le Shy ee F r re 4

ms eed um
ee

+
i M,

* x
esa V4 “ug”
\

At’

ww
SY ee.
x

iy
iy,
Hie hay
7:
SY YY
0, Me

nude

*
*

wt
mig

Oy

HG wW
iin, 7 Ve oF
SS ah Vile
\ ee te,
veretbdeg, Cy

iy ys
& Mig

SS NN
SS
act r ae
Ta it) ion A
AN N
ay ae " pe a
Ni
) Sf N Ys
i oo ie
yyy Ys

By
mE
SS a

“1 fh
Vile a?
Sgt
Me

\\

\ } . Ul E
. aay a
Wy} Ne

=

Spm . ‘
ne 2 KC Hi Lp yf \“ \

\\ cee i Wy
Hi “i 4) moe

3 \ \ AALLY Lf, ‘

==

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 107

surface. These continue for about fifty yards, gradually ascend-
ing, when we come to an abrupt declivity of about one hundred
and fifty feet, rising in steps formed of these exquisitely

e water flows from the basin down the declivity from one of
the beautiful pools to the other, it loses a portion of its heat,
and one may find a bathing pool with any lesired temperature.

These beautiful rims are higher in proportion to the steepness
of the descent, and the architecture is consequently varie and
attractive. Upon this lower terrace, springs are continually
dying out and others are breaking out anew, and during the
past summer one of them burst through the crust and now has
a basin about fifteen feet in ae There are also glared
tinct geysers, or more properly speaking, springs once spouting,
whi a this time ass ouele BE One of these curious
cones we called the “Liberty Cap.” It is a circular deposit of

bo

reached a certain height, when that fore
itself up at the top 2g ‘ cone-like point. The water then con-

108 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

tinued to flow through apertures in the sides until it ceased —
entirely. There are many examples of these rounded cones

Upon the terrace, down about midway on the side of |
the mountain covered with this deposit, the principal por —
tion of the active springs are now located; and heres —

then also various shades of green. All these colors a —
rendered very vivid by the water. These springs also are
full of a kind of vegetation, which under the microscope prove
to be composed of Diatoms, among which Dr. Billings discov’ :
ers Palmella and Oscillaria. There are also in the quiet springs,
and in the little streams that flow from the boiling springs
great quantities of a fibrous silky substance, apparently vegeta:
ble, which vibrates at the slightest movement of the water, and
has the appearance of the finest quality of cashmere wool. —

I have mentioned only a few of the attractive features about
these springs, which so charm the visitor. There is neither :
time nor space in an article of this kind to describe all. a

Above this middle terrace are one or two other localities about
three hundred feet farther up on the sides of the mountalb,
Here most of the springs have become extinct, a few occult of :
here and there on a small scale, where they formerly existed
the largest size. Now the surface is covered with the remains
of an exhibition of natural architecture that must have pp

; 0: .
others. Here we find a splendid series of those semi-cire —
basins, rising in steps to the very summit; but the rich pom

ise
4
c

lo “ he
dently a mixture of lime and sulphur, covering the sides of the

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 109

declivity, over which the water flows with this brilliant coat-
ere are also a number of chimneys, with walls from
four to ten feet in height. Some of them are nearly circular at
base, with an aperture at top of a foot or more, lined inside with
a coating of carbonate of lime, which is hard, smooth and like
porcelain in luster. The oblong mounds vary from a few feet
to one hundred yards in length, ten to twenty feet in height, and
fifteen to twenty feet around the base. These generally have a
fissure along the summit, in some of which the waters can be
heard seething and boiling like a cauldron. These fissures all
have the same beautiful white porcelain lining, and in some of
them the brilliancy is greatly intensified by the precipitation of
vivid yellow sulphur in acicular crystals, but so delicate that
they disappear at the touch. On the east side much of this
deposit has been reduced to a fine powder, so that the surface
is as white as snow. A qualitative analysis made at the springs,
shows that the water contains sulphuretted hydrogen, lime, soda,
alumina, and a slight amount of magnesia. Carbonate of lime
predominates over all other elements in the deposits, and they

rai 4 be divided again into intermittent, boiling and spouting,
and quiet springs. Those of the first class are always above
boiling point during the period of action, but during the inter-
val the temperature lowers to 150°. Those of the second are
always at the boiling point, and some of them throw the water
up two to six feet, by regular pulsations. The springs of the
third class may have once been geysers, but are now quiet, and
have a wide range of temperature, from 188° to 80°. ‘Where
the temperature is reduced below 150°, great quantities of the

our present peri e center of activity may have whaeral
and statood ts its

110 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

From such evidence as I could gather, I should estimate that
under favorable circumstances, at least six feet of the deposit
have been precipitated within the space of one century.
There is another interesting feature connected with these
hot spring deposits, and that is the great antiquity as wellas —
compactness of some of them. Upon the summits of mountains
1500 to 2000 feet above the river, and having evidently been
lifted up by the forces that elevated the whole range, is a bed
of regularly stratified limestone, varying in thickness from 5) ~
to 150 feet, very hard, white and yellowish-white, and appear
ing in the distance like very pure Carboniferous limestone
It is evident that this bed of limestone extended over a large
portion of the valley at one time, for immense masses have broken
off and are senctaeed. all over the sides of the mountain, even down
to the river. Near the margin of the mountain there isa belt
a mile long and a fourth of a mile wide, covered with the
masses of limestone broken from the main bed. This rock 8

the hot springs, there is a bluff extending about six miles com
Secs of 1500 feet, in the aggregate, of Upper Cretaceous and
ocene Tertiary strata, with some irregular intercalated beds 01

are} by the hot springs. Underneath the hot spring @ .
ds of older date incline in the same direction, the angie

elevates the temperature of the waters of these springs is as 40°?
seated as is generally supposed, then the heated waters have

upper
springs are nearly a thousand feet higher upon the sides of the

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 111

mountain than those along the immediate margin of the river.
Near the head of the East Fork of the Yellowstone there are
two or three localities where these calcareous deposits cover
limited areas. At one locality near the margin of the stream,
there is a very instructive mound, about fifty feet high, with a
broad base of 150 feet, rising more gradually to the summit,
which is broad, mammiform. The deposit was originally made
in thin layers overlapping each other like a thatched roof.
This was undoubtedly at one time a spouting spring. It com-
menced with a very moderate force, nearly overflowing its basin,
and building up about 10 feet in thickness of thin, nearly hori-
zontal layers; then it commenced gradually rising until it
reached a height of about 50 feet, when it closed itself up at
the summit and died out. There is not a sign of water in it at
the present time, and none of the springs in the vicinity are
above the temperature of ordinary spring water.

We must omit an account of the basaltic columns ex

pai and white; much of the deposit 1s as w ite as snow.

rendering it oppressive with sulphurous odor. This group ex-
tends oo. sia Sadia to the eastward for several miles.

“112 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

(PuaTE IT.)
SULPHUR AND MUD SPRINGS
CRATER HILLS

Yellowstone River, 8 Miles below the Lake

ee
ayes
re Ee

a
*

a- *
a Oa
i] Tx » Png

.
2
=

ree
IWS

ne
BZ OG Mind Vol
Z 2,

-
a

&

Fs
»

Hy

+t
Wy ;

i
TNS
Gil

ij} D
Zi

Th

\

SteamJet

\

Gag,
ig

&

\

i
ar,”

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 113°

The springs, which are now in active operation, are only a few
out of hundreds which once covered the entire area, but which
are now dead or dying ou

e two groups, which I will notice next, are called the Sul-
pee and Mud Springs (see the accompanying charts). The
argest group is found on the east side of the Yellowstone, at
Crater Hills, eight miles below the Lake. This district covers
an area of about half a mile square, and is sometimes called the
“Seven Hills,” from the fact that there are here several mounds
of siliceous deposits from extinct springs, varying in height from
50 to 150 feet. The old craters of dead and dying springs, and
the immense quantity of the siliceous deposits, show that the pre-
sent active springs represent only the last stages of what must
have been at some period in the past a magnificent group. Even
those which now remain excite int tonisl t l around
the base and high up on the sides of the hill are numbers of
vents from which steam is constantly issuing, and around the
edges and inside the orifices a layer of sulphur of the most
brilliant yellow color has been precipitated. On the west side,
one of these jets produces a sound like that-of a locomotive, whic
can be heard for a long distance. The surface is fairly riddled
with little steam vents, and the crust sends forth a hollow sound
beneath the tread; and on removing this shelly covering at an
point, hot vapors come forth, while its under surface is encrusted

spring is a marvel of beauty. It is composed of silica, but
scolloped and covered over with the most delicate bead-work,
and upon the pure white silica is deposited a thin layer of sul-
phur of the most delicate cream color. One large quiet turbid

wi
stream that flows from this group of springs is called Alum '
Am. Jour. Sct.—Turrp Series, Vor. II, No. 14.—Fss., 1872
8

114 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers, ete.
(Puate III.)

SULPHUR AND MUD SPRINGS

Yellowstone River. 6 Miles below the Lake

Lal * * Be: “

a Cam < 7” ra
ter. “PF Le Sareea Fs *
etn Be % meeA LS * ; =

T. Sterry Hunt on Granitic Rocks. 115

creek. In the valley of this stream are hundreds of little mud
or turbid water vents, which keep up a simmering noise, show-
ing the nature of the earth beneath the crust. Several of our
party broke through the thin covering, and were severely scalded
by the hot mud

Two miles above, on the same side of the Yellowstone, is

water; suddenly immense columns of steam shoot up with a
rumbling noise, the water overflows the basin, and then a

tion, with a noise like distant thunder. The ground as well as
the trees for a horizontal distance of 200 feet around were
covered with the mud which had been ejected at some of its
periodical outbursts. It would require a volume to descri
these springs in

[To be continued.]

Art. XVIIL—Notes on Granitic Rocks.—Part III; by T.
STERRY T.

(Continued from vol. i, p. 191.)

VONTENTS of Sections.—§ 32, Laurentian gneisses; § 33, Pyroxenites and limestones;
= Lbsence of mica-schists; § 35, Clas Granitic veinstones ;

Noite ion ri banded (piece Ee

eleton-crystals; § 42, Rounded crystals; , Qua

veins; § 44, read of veinstones; feldspathic ; $45, Calear

§ 46, Order of succession of minerals; § 47, Attitude of —— is 48, Caleare-
e

§ 32. It was mentioned at the close of the second part of this
paper that the third part would be devoted to the consideration
of the granitic veinstones found in Laurentian rocks. The stra-
tified rocks of this ancient gneissic series, as I have elsewhere
pointed out, differ considerably from those of the White Moun-

136 - T. Sterry Hunt on Granitic Rocks.

in the second part of this paper, § 16—§ 23.*

urentian series, the Lower Laurentian of Sir Wilham —
Logan, as studied by him in a region to the north of the Ottawa,
the only area in which it has yet been examined in detail, —
appears to consist of an alternation of conformable gneissic and
calcareous formations. The latter are three in number, each

tain series, which, with their veinstones, have been treated of —

occasionally with a white triclinic feldspar. They are often
hornblendic, and sometimes contain small quantities of dark-
colored mica. A white granitoid gneiss, composed chiefly of
orthoclase and quartz, sometimes contains an abundance of
iron-garnet. The latter mineral is often disseminated, or forms
subordinate beds in the quartzites of the series.

§ 33. With the crystalline limestones of the calcareous paris
of the series are often found strata made up of other minerm®
to the entire exclusion of carbonate of lime, by an admixture of
which, however, they graduate into the adjacent limeston®
These generally consist of pyroxene, sometimes neatly
pure, and at other times mingled with a magnesian mica,
with quartz and orthoclase, often associated with hornblende,
serpentine, magnetite, sphene and graphite. These pyran
rocks are generally i ture,
sometimes very coarse-grained. They occasionally assume @

e limestones often include serpentine, pyroxene, hornblende,
phlogopite, quartz, orthoclase, magnetite and graphite; 5°
;

* A good example of a large vein of this kind of intersecting rocks, , Ee
™: i fi
the city of New York. Its place is marked by a great erratic block perched

- structure described in § 21 is well shown in a narrow 8" "0 Rock
which I owe to Prof. Haughton of Trinity College, Dublin, got from ~_— some
Mountain near that city. It consists of white orthoclase, with quartz amy 7
mica and garnet, and exhibits near the middle two bands of prisms of lin
see pointing towards the centre, which is filled with a coarsely :

T. Sterry Hunt on Granitic Rocks. 117

These strata, marked by the predominance of calcareous and
magnesian silicates, appear, so far as known, to accompany
each of the limestone formations of the Laurentian, sometimes,

series, at which also occur the most numerous veins and the
— minerals of economic value. It is also along these
orizons, marked by softer rocks, that the valleys and the arable
lands of the Laurentian areas are chiefly found, and for this
reason, also, the mineralogy of these parts is better known than
that of the harder gneissic portions. The above observations
on the lithological character of the stratified rocks are 1mpor-
tant on account of the relations between these and the included
veins, in which the characteristic minerals of the gneissic and
calcareous rocks are often found associated.

§ 35. The history of these veins, as seen in the Laurentian
rocks of the Laurentides in Canada, the Adirondacks of northern
New York, and the Highlands of southern New York and New
Jersey, has been discussed at length by the author in an essay
on The Mineralogy of the Laurentian Limestones, in the Report
of the Geological Survey of Canada for 1863-69, pages 181-

calcite, sometimes with barytine and fluorite : these, which are
of Paleozoic age or still younger, cut the Potsdam sandstone,
the Calciferous sandrock, and probably also the overlying Tren-

d ke bic veins with muscovite,
tourmaline, zircon, etc. These veins I have describe as pass-
ing by insensible gradations into the third class, in which calcite
and apatite, with pyroxene, phlogopite and other calcareous and

* This essay is reprinted, with some additions, in the Report of the Regents of
the University of Nowe vox for 1867, Appendix E. The reader's attention 1s
called to the note on the Hastings rocks at the close of this reprint.

118 T. Sterry Hunt on Granitie Rocks.

Potsdam sandstone, which rests upon their eroded outerops,
and sometimes includes worn fragments of apatite derived from
em.

graphite.

_ §87. The resemblance between the minerals of these Lauren: _
tian veinstones and the same species brought from Norway, Was
noticed so long ago as 1827, by Dr. William Meade (this —

Daubrée agrees with Scheerer in regarding these veinstones &
produced by a process of secretion, in opposition to Durocheh

T. Sterry Hunt on Granite Rocks. 119

who looked upon them as having been formed by igneous

structure, their drusy cavities, the peculiar incrustations and
modes of enclosure often observed in the crystals, and finally

~ variety found in the Schischimskian Mountams in the Urals is the gangue
diamonds, which are found abundantly in microscopic crystals im in i
ine. The seybertite of this region (the xanthophyllite of G. Rose) is described
in taleose slate with serpentine (which also include diamonds),
tian rocks it is only known in calcareous veinstones with spinel,

hite, etc.
ul For a notice of the eccurrence of leucite in these veins, and aiso in veins in
Peeing see the author’s Contributions to Lithology (this Journal, II, xxxvii, 264).
ccording to Garrigou, this rare species occurs well ized and in com-
pact porphyroid masses, in dioritic rocks (ophites) at Lusbé in the valley of Aspé,
in the Pyrennees (Bull. Soc. Geol. de Fr., Il, xxv, 727).

120 T. Sterry Hunt on Granitie Rocks.

small prisms of apatite are enclosed in large crystals of phiogo-
pite, in pyroxene, in quartz, and even in massive apatite;
crystals or rounded crystalline masses of calcite are imbedded
In apatite and in quartz, and well-defined crystals of hornblende

m-
plete, while the space within either remains empty, or is se
with other minerals, often unsymmetrically arranged.

well-know?
granitic veinstone of Paris, Maine. I have elsewhere refer:
red to the formation of such moulds or skeleton-crystals a
having taken place in vein-cavities, and as serving to eXP re
ny cases of enclosure of mineral species (Address to the r:

A. S., Indianapolis, 1871. Amer. Naturalist, vol. v, page 49))-
In addition to the examples there cited, the Laurentian vel
stones afford some curious cases. Thus a prism of ye

T. Sterry Hunt on Granitic Rocks. 121

idocrase half an inch in diameter, from a vein in Grenville,
Ontario, composed chiefly of orthoclase and pyroxene, is seen
when broken across to consist of a thin shell of idocrase filled
encloses a small crystal of zircon. In like manner large erysta
of zircon from similar veins in St. Lawrence County, New York,
pe sometimes shells filled with calcite.

crystalline form is nearly or ~~ effaced, the surface being at
the same time smooth and s 1

serve their crystalline forms intact (Geology of the First Lns-
trict of New York, pages 57-58). These facts are well shown
in the apatite-veins of Elmsley and Burgess, Ontario, where the
crystals of apatite rarely present sharp or well defined forms ;
but, whether lining drusy cavities or imbedded in the calcite or
other minerals of the veinstone, are most frequently rounded or
sub-cylindrical masses, while the pyroxene and sphene, which
often accompany them, preserve their distinctness of form. This
rounding of the angles of certain crystals appears to me nothing
more than a result of the solvent action of the heated watery
solutions from which the minerals of these veins were deposited ;
the crystals previously formed being partially redisso ved by
some change in the temperature or the chemical constitution of
the solution. Heated solutions of alkaline silicate, as shown
by Daubrée, are without action on feldspar, as might be
expected from the fact observed by him of the production of
ee of feldspar, as well.as of pyroxene, in the midst of such
solutions. These liquids would, however, doubtless attack and
dissolve apatite, which is in like manner decom y solu-
tions of alkaline carbonate, and these latter at elevated tempera-

122 T. Sterry Hurt on Granitic Rocks.

previously rounded and enclosed in a large crystal of quartz,
t r ich are also nearly obliterated. From the
alternations in the deposited mineral matters in many veinstones,
as well as from what we know of the changing composition of
mineral springs, it is evident that the waters circulating in
fissures now occupied by veins, must have been subject to
periodical variations in compositio

me of the more important types of Laurentian vell-
stones may now be noticed. Those made up of quartz wl

orthoclase, muscovite and black tourmaline, often with zircon,
are not unfrequent in the Laurentian gneiss, though so far a8
yet observed less abundant than in the gneisses and mica-schists
of the White Mountain series. It is true, as already pointed
out, that from the greater softness of the enclosi the

and are thus rendered more conspicuous than those in the

mates of the same author is an opalescent or chatoyant
ite which occurs with quartz in another vein in the same reglo™

closing rocks
veins of the latter series are often weathered into relief (§ 20),

|

4

T. Sterry Hunt on Granitic Rocks. 123

cleavable magnetite, the latter in masses sometimes two or three
inches in diameter, scattered through the feldspar.

5. The veins hitherto noticed occur in gneiss, but on the
river Rouge one consisting of large masses of quartz and albite
is found in crystalline limestone. A remarkable vein described
by Sir William Logan in Blythefield, Ontario, traverses alter-
nate strata of limestone and gneiss, and has a breadth of not less
then 150 feet. It consists in great part of a coarsely cleavable
pale green pyroxene (sahlite), with a dark green hornblende,
phlogopite and calcite. Portions of the veinstone, however,
consist of an admixture of orthoclase, quartz and black tourma-

e

spathic type of veins. In Ross, Ontario, a vein holds large iso-

lated crystals of white orthoclase imbedded with black spinel,

apatite and fluorite in a base of lamellar pink carbonate of lime.
ne of the most remarkable of these composite veins is in Gren-

ville, Quebec, and was formerly worked for “a ee It cuts a

crystalline limestone, itself holding graphite an

has afforded not less than fourteen distinct mineral species, viz :

r

scribed by Blake in Vernon, New Jersey (this Journal, II, xiii,

116), in which calcite, fluorite, chondrodite, phlogopite, marga-

rite, spinel, corundum, zircon, sphene, rutile, menaccanite, py-

rite and graphite occur. Some of these contain barytine, and In

one case I have observed natrolite, both seemingly one cavl-
e

ties, and of later origin than the other minerals remark-
able zinciferous minerals, franklinite, zincite and dysluite,
found in the Laurentian limestones w Jersey, appear

in Moriah, New York, which includes angular fragments of the
magnetite which forms its walls, and consists of a cleavable
greenish triclinic feldspar, with quartz crystals having round

angles, octahedrons of magnetite, allanite, and a soft greenish

oganite. : :
. regards ‘he order of deposition of minerals in
— veins, we find apatite enclosed = in — in quartz,
in phlogopite, in spinel, in graphite and in pyrite.
hand, ace pee Calas aes 8 erystals of calcite
or of quartz; and graphite, which itself encloses apatite, is
found included alike in quartz, in orthoclase, in pyroxene and
in calcite, in such a manner as to ead us to conclude that its
crystallization was contemporaneous with that of all these

124 T. Sterry Hunt on Granitie Rocks,

minerals; while from the other facts mentioned it would Bae
to

47. The veins hitherto noticed, whether feldspathic or = :

less completely filled geode-like cavities rather than veins.

§48. In the reprint of my essay, already mentioned, several é

to a younger series. Such are the veins containing er :

quasi-anthracitie form of carbon, both from Madoc, and a

a

the vein already noticed as occurring in the township of Lake” :
($36), which contains in one part bismuthine with tourmaline,

quartz and graphite, and in another part calcite with phlogopite :
i jated Wi

is latter vein occurs in an impure limestone, associate@ =
quartzite and micaceous schists, and belonging to a series

conformably overlying the Laurentian, and resembling . :
rocks of the White Mountain series (this Journal, II, ], 83). :
will be noticed that this vein is lithologically similar to HO”

of the Laurentian, which are not improbably of the were .

Caleareous veinstones like those already described, are

known in the White Mountain rocks in Maine, where are found :
on a small scale aggregates of erystallized pyroxene, i e
and sphene, and others of calcite with hornblende, apatite @ fe

graphite (§18), closely resembling the Laurentian veinstones ©
New York and Gannita:

“

T. Sterry Hunt on Granitic Rocks. 125

was led to look upon them as eruptive ; and generalizing from
this, he declared that all the crystalline limestones of northern
New York were non-stratified rocks of eruptive origin (Geol.
of the First District of New York, 1842, pages 87-59). This

view of Emmons was to a certain extent a

gneiss in the mountains of the Vosges (Bull. Soc. Geol. de Fr.,
iti, 215-235). In support of this view could be urged the dyke-
like form of the calcareous veinstones, which other observers,

Naturalist, II, iii, 128), and subsequently more at length in the

—. so often referred to (Report Geol. Survey of Canada, 1863—
> p 182). It ;

careous veinstones are nearly free from foreign minerals, and

Bergstrasse, which Bischof t
These endogenous concretionary limestones are 1m fact to the
stratified limestones, what endogenous granitic veins are to
gneiss roc

126 A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches,

Art. XIX.—Brief Contributions to Zoilogy from the Museum of
Yale College. No. XVUL—Descriptions of North American
fresh-water Leeches; by A. EK. VERRILL.

Cystobranchus vividus, sp. nov. Figure 1.

ew
er aad
-

‘12 of an inch. Head excen- 6 EE Be ee ee
trically pedicellate upon a slen- ipa, © Samant

der neck, small, disk-like, sie
rounded in front, or somewhat
heart-shaped with the rounded point forward. Ocelli four,
small, brownish, placed near the attachment of the neck, om
each side, those in the anterior pair farther apart. Acetabulum
large, well-rounded, as wide as the body, disk-shaped, and
attached nearly centrally. Male organ, when protruded, elon
gated, conical, acute, placed just behind the fourth pair of large
lateral white spots.

Color of back dusky brown or purplish brown, finely specked
with stellate points of darker brown, and with three irregular
rows of conspicuous, small, round, opaque white spots along
the upper surface of the back. Sides with a row of about 16,
larger and more conspicuous, semicircular, white spots ie
the margin, each consisting of a cluster of 3 to 9 small rou
spots, enclosing a more transparent area in which a diaphanous
pulsating vesicle or enlarged vessel may be seen to protrude at
each dilation. Lower surface of body light grayish, specked with
darker and often with obscure transverse bands of whitish;
acetabulum similar in color to the body, with small reo
white spots, the margin more or less radiated with lighter am
darker. Upper surface of head similar to the back, the st
and front lighter. ;

West River, near New Haven, on Fundulus pisculentus
November and December, 1871,—F. S. Smith; Savin Rock, —
in salt water, among eel-grass,—Prof. J. E. Todd.

This very active species lives in both fresh and salt wate?

The transparent lateral vesicles referred to are probabil
organs of respiration, analogous to the much more highly dev
oped branchial appendages of Branchiobdella.

Ichthyobdella Funduli, sp. nov. a

Body smooth, distinctly annulated, subterete, thickest ©”
about the posterior third, tapering considerably toward h:
head, and slightly posteriorly. Length about ‘75 of an mer

A. E. Verrili—North American Fresh-water Leeches. 127

reatest diameter about ‘08. Head small, rounded in front,
scarcely explanate, and separated only by a slight constriction
from the body. Ocelli two, distinct, well separated, place
near the posterior part of the head; two others, Lary small and

CLEPSINE Savigny.

This genus is very abundantly represented in our waters,
both in individuals and species. A onge but two recogniz-

under surfaces of floating logs and old pom of boards, or be
neath the loosened bark of submerged

decaying trees. Occasionally they adhere to the lower surface
of turtles or other animals, but they seldom, if ever, suck blood.
They feed upon insect larve, small worms, etc. Most of the
+ ees are elegantly, and some are quite brilliantly colored, but
the colors are often quite variable in the species, and cannot

more importance. hen disturbed, these species cur] a

posterior sucker, and before : ea the + usually present
the essential characters and o
the adult, though paler.

128 <A. BE Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches, .

Section A. Ocelli 2, separate or confluent.
Subsection @. Back smooth.
Clepsine parasitica Diesing.

Hirudo parasitica Say, Major Long’s 2nd Expedition to the source of St
Peter’s River, Lake Winnepeek, etc., vol. ii, p. 266, 1824.

Clepsine parasitica Diesing, Systema Helminthum, vol. i, p. 450, 1850.

Body smooth, but distinctly annulated, much i
broad, tapering anteriorly to the obtusely rounded head, broad
and emarginate posteriorly, with a broad round posterior sucker
or acetabulum, about half of which is exposed behind the end
of the y- Length in extension 8 inches; test breadth
3 to 5 of an inch, according to the degree of extension. Ocelli

margin spotted like that of the upper side.

West River, near New Haven, on lower side of floating wood,

and at Norway, Maine,—A. E. Verrill; uent in the lakes

alow North-western States, adhering to the sternum of tortois,
a

J:
This species is one of the largest and most conspicuously
colored of the genus.

Clepsine picta, sp. nov.

Body smooth, much depressed, broad posteriorly, somewhat
tapering anteriorly, about 2°50 inches long in extension; vary
ing in greatest breadth, from -25 to 30 of an inch. Acetabulum

surface,
ng Acetabulum
varied with n and orange the green forming rays"
the margin, ewnnitus with salmon-colored spots. Lower st
face darker than the upper, deep greenish on the central part

A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches. 129

Another variety agrees in most respects with the preceding,
but has a median brown line along the back, interrupted b
about six, irregular, light green blotches, the last one largest
and elongated; the rest of the back purplish brown, varied
with greenish, the colors appearing as if in fine checks, owing
to lighter and darker lines running in both directions ; a row o
rounded light green spots on each side, midway between the
dorsal line and margins, and a row of flesh-colored, semicircular
spots, alternately large and small, along the margin. Acetabu-
lum varied with light purple and flesh-color. Lower surface
pale bluish with lighter lines.

.

oung specimen, about °75 of an inch long, had the same

through the integuments.

Other variations of color were observed. In some the
blotches interrupting the median brown line were dull orange
and the marginal spots were orange-yellow ; the sides of the back
were orange-brown, thickly specked with dark brown and with

interrupted, and the back was finely variegated with green,
orange, and flesh-color, the green in stellate specks, with a
row of small white spots on each side; the marginal spots pale
orange-yellow.

Whitneyville Lake and West River, near New Haven, com-
mon, on submerged or floating wood, and beneath dead bark,—
A. KE. Verrill.

Clepsine modesta, sp. nov. Figure 2.

Body in extension elongated, tapering and very slender an-
teriorly, broader and obtusely rounded posteriorly. Length 1
Inches in extension. Back smooth, Fig. 2.
faintly annulated, translucent. Head
small, obtuse, whitish. Ocelli two, “=
black, near together. The gene
color above is pale purplish brown,
or purplish flesh-color with minute ks of brown, and very
small round spots of dull yellow, and often of light green ; mar-
gins and a median dorsal line pale. Acetabulum moderately
large, whitish, Auditory vesicle or “cervical gland” placed
near the head, small, rounded, slightly prominent; conspicuous,
deep brown, surrounded by a whitish circle. Lower surface pale
purplish. The attached young, about 3 of an inch long in ex-
tension, were slender, whitish, and sub-diaphanous, with the
brown intestine showing through posteriorly.

Am. Jour. Sc.—Tutrp Series, VoL. III, No. 14.—Fes., 1872.

‘9

A

1380 A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches, |
West River and Whitneyville Lake, with the preceding,

common.
Subsection 6. Back papillose.
Clepsine ornata, sp. nov.
Body somewhat depressed, rather broad and obtusely rounded
posteriorly, in extension tapering, but not slender, anteriorly,
about 1:25 inches long. In contraction elliptical, and about 20
broad in the middle. Back with a median papillose dorsil
carina, and two similar ones midway between it and the margins
Head broad, acuminate, whitish in front and at the margin
Ocelli united into a single, small, transverse spot, situated at
the edge of the white area. Acetabulum moderately os
i about half of its breadth exposed behind the end of t
ody.

€ margin is pale purplish, with conspicuous pt spots,

purplish red sik bright red specks, and with a median row g :
red points, while several median white spots occupied the Da ‘
tions of the large transverse orange spots of the adults. hes ;
teriorly the branched lobes of the intestine gave a greenish ¢o . |
to the body. Ocelli closely united into a transversely tiang¥
lar or bilobed spot of bright red. 4c
est River, on the lower sides of submerged wood ane —
pieces of boards.

Clepsine papillifera, sp. nov. ad
eile decidedly convex above, broad and obtusely are S
behind; in extension long, slender, and tapering anterl e
Length, when extended, about 1 inch; greatest breadth, in ©)
ion, about -20 of an inc Back covered with s "hich
tant, subconical papille, arranged in transverse rows, of W ~
the anterior contain about three papilla, and the posterior ones

A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches. 181

rous, forming a single median row anteriorly, which becomes
double posteriorly, where there is also a row on each side, mid-
way between it and the margin. The general color above is

Lower surface lighter.
Variety c. One specimen, perhaps distinct, has the ocelli
united into a single spot, and the back covered with numerous

small, scattered papilla. The color was not recorded.
Section B. Four ocelli.

No American species belonging to this section are known to
me.

Section C. Six ocelli.
Sub-section a. Back smooth.

Clepsine pallida, sp. nov. Figure 8, a; head enlarged.
Body depressed, broad and obtusely rounded posteriorly,
tapering, but not very slender, anteriorly ; about 1 inch long

an 1 b i a Fig.

tracti

Yellowish with scattered blackish specks and with a m
ight line, interrupted by a row of nt, small, black spots.
Beneath pale flesh-color. :

West River, with the preceding,—A. E. Verrill.

182 0A. EF. Verrill— North American Fresh-water Leeches.

Sub-section 6. Back papillose.
Clepsine elegans, sp. nov. Figure 8, b; head enlarged.

3
i

white in front and along the edges. Ocelli six, the three a
close together, on the white area of the head, those of the

Is a very active species. It adheres ee |
been indicated from North America. The first has not

hi
mate. Acetabulum orbicular. ngth 6-7 lines, W}
lines.”

Carolina, upon the surface of tortoises and frogs,—Bos¢.

Tnostomum coceineum Wagler. x
Isis, 1831, p. 533; do. 1832, p. 53; Diesing, Sitzungsb. der kais. Akad
Wissenschaften, xxxiii, p. 495, 1859, a
This genus is remarkable in having no ocelli, and no fold ce
lobes, nor plications within the mouth and cesophagus. |
Mexi ky.

exico,—Karwinsky.

A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches. 1338

Nephelis quadristriata Grube.

Famil. des Annel. pp. 110 and 149; Diesing, Sitzungsberichte der kaiserlichen
Akad. der Wissenschaften, Math.-Naturwiss. Classe, xxxiii, p. 496, 1859.

smaller, inconspicuous ones, are placed well pa on the sides
of the buccal segment. Anal orifice large, with a raised border,

_ spots, which often also form the center of the black spots.

Lower surface plain brown or fuscous, usually a little lighter
than the back.
ew Haven and Farmington, Conn.,—A. E. Verrill: Fal-
mouth, Mass.,—Dr. Edw. Palmer. This species is very common
in the fresh waters of New England.
Nephelis lateralis Verrill.

Hirudo lateralis Say, Long’s Second Expedition, vol. ii, p. 267, 1824; Diesing,
Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 474.

Nephelis lateralis Verrill, this Journal, ii, p. 451, 1871.

The original specimens, described by Say from the waters
between Rainy Lake and Lake Superior, were dull livid with
“a few very remote minute black points, and a rufous line along
each side;” the ‘six ocular points are placed in a regularly
curved line.”

A specimen from New Haven appears to belong to the same
species, This was 3 or 4 inches long in extension, and ‘15 to 5
wide; rather slender and subterete anteriorly, somewhat de-
pressed posteriorly, with the margins rounded. Head obtusely
rounded in front, not very distinctly annulated. Ocelli six,

are very small and well separated. Acetabulum as wide as the
body het extended, with a circular row of blackish sub-

134 A. EF. Verrili— North American Fresh-water Leeches.

marginal spots. The three folds of the cesophagns are about
as in the preceding species. The color above is dull dark

orange-brown, with numerous fine longitudinal lines, alternately —

scattered unevenly over the surface, except along the mid
the back ; an obsure reddish line passes along each side ne
the margin, apparently due to an internal vessel showing —
through the integuments. Lower surface plain, dull orange
brown, somewhat lighter than the back. Head light flesh-color

Whitneyville Lake,—A. E. Verrill.

Nephelis marmorata Verrill.

Hirudo marmorata Say, op. cit., p. 267.

(?) Nephelis punctata Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. of Philad., 1870, p. 89.

This species, found by Say associated with the ie
appears to differ in no important particulars, and may be on

darker and lighter, and with many small irregular black By ‘
lle of
e near

te

7

; : ae
a differently colored variety of the same species. Itis described

as blackish or fuscous, with irregular whitish or light colored —
spots; beneath pale, generally immaculate, but sometimes with
confluent black spots. Ocular points six, in a regularly curve
ine. pea
_ When a larger series of living specimens from various local
ties can be studied, the three preceding forms, admitted here as

species ,
variable than the Nephelis vulgaris of Europe. e agreement
in the number and arrangement of the oceili is very close 2
the three forms. 7
The leech described by Dr. Leidy from the vicinity of Phila
delphia, and Beverly, N J, appears to, differ in no essential
characters. It was blackish olivaceous above, the anv
minutely punctate with yellowish olivaceous or dusky white
and narrowly bordered with the same; beneath grayish.
Nephelis fervida Verrill, described in the December number
of this Journal, from Lake Superior, appears to be quite dis
tinct from any of the preceding, judging from the preserve
oie geet The eight ocelli are all small and nearly equ

specimens show many faint longitudinal lines of brown. , .
ere found 12
August by Mr. Smith, attached to the leaves of Nupha, in *
‘small lake near Simmon’s Harbor. These are broad ov sb
elliptical, above smooth and convex, translucent yellows z
brown, with a thin, flat, lighter border, each end prolongé
slightly into a short tubular neck, with a terminal orifice
Lower surface flat. Each contained two, three, or more oung
leeches, mostly upwards of half an inch long, plain W i
with eight distinct black ocelli. The largest capsule was bad

*

A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches. 185

an inch long by ‘85 wide, including the margin; the smallest
was ‘87 long by ‘30 wide.

NEPHELOPSIS, gen. nov.

or pyriform vesicles, apparently but eleven on each side.

This genus has a remarkable combination of the characters
of Nephelis, Trocheta and Aulastomum, In general habit and
form of body it is much like Trocheta, but there are no maxille.

Nephelopsis obscura, sp. NOV.

Body much elongated in extension, depressed posteriorly,
distinctly annulated, a little rugose anteriorly, in contraction.
Length in extension 4 to 5 inches; breadth ‘25 to 35 of an inch.

two pairs on the sides of the buccal agacth small, distant, the
e outer pair of anterior
ones. Inner surface of the upper lip very rugose, the suica-

his species was taken in May, 1870, when numerous egg
capsules were also found attached to the stones along the shores.
Aulastomum lacustre Leidy.
Proceedings Acad. Nat. Sciences of Philadelphia, for 1868, p. 229.
_ This species, well described by Dr. Leidy, has 10 ocelli; eight
in the upper lip, the last pair separated by an annulus from

186 A. EB Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches.

the others. Male aperture in the 24th annulus; female orifice 4
in the 29th. (Esophagus capacious, with twelve folds. “Jaws 7
thin, small, when at rest included in pouches formed by am —
eversion of the mucus membrane. Teeth 12 in numberto Ff
each jaw, bilobed at base.” Color throughout ve “
closely maculated everywhere with confluent spots of a darker |
hue of the same color. A variety was lighter green with —
fewer spots of blac 13

Twin Lake, Minnesota, and Lake Superior,—Leidy.

SEMISCOLEX Kinberg. pie:

Ofversigt af Kongl. Vet. Akad. Férhandlingar, xxiii, p. 357, 1867. e

According to Kinberg this genus has the following chara
ters: maxille wanting; pharnyx with a transverse suleus he
low the posterior margin of the buccal segment, and below that
provided with longitudinal sulci; habit of Hirudo.

Semiscolex juvenilis Kinb., loc. cit.

_The following species, although evidently allied to Semiseoleh ae
differs decidedly in the structure of the cephalic lobe ie ;
pharynx, and in having ten ocelli. These characters seem om
of generic value.

HEXABDELLA, gen. nov.

terior :

rat of

ngth, in partial contraction, 1°50 inches ; breadth 40. a

or cephalic lobe, somewhat elongated, rounded in front, font

four annulations, the first or terminal one oval, remite he
:

dy strongly annulated, broad and much flattened

A. FE. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches. 187

fold; behind these, and separated by a deep groove, there are
six well-marked plications in the cesophagus. Anus with ele-
vated, crenulate borders. Male organ between the 24th and
25th segments of the body. Acetabulum round, of moderate
size. Color of the preserved specimen, dark slate- brown, above,
with few irregularly scattered remote black spots, and with still
fewer, small, white specks. Beneath lighter slate-brown, with
very few black spots, toward the margins.
ear New Haven,—A. E. Verrill.
Democeprs Kinberg, loc. cit., p. 356.

This genus, according to Kirberg, has “ three muscular, com-
pressed, edentate maxille,” with the habit of Hirudo. The two
species first named by him are from Port Natal and have 10
ocelli. The remaining species has but 8 ocelli, and is described
as follows.

Democedes maculatus Kinberg, loc. cit., p. 356.

irregular black and white spots ; cephalic lobe 5- or 6-annulate ;
ocelli 8; fourth pair on the buccal segment ; abdominal orifices

in the 25th and 80th segments; segments 94; length 88™™.
Wisconsin,—Kumlin.

MACROBDELLA, gen. nov.

opening dorsal, in advance of the posterior sucker.
This cenus has a remarkable combination of the characters of

* Leidy says that the male orifice perforates the 25th annulus, but he appar-
ently excludes the buccal segment from his count.

188 <A. E. Verrill—North American Fresh-water Leeches.

cephalic lobe, beneath; maxille similar to those of Hirudo, but
more prominent; a plicated cesophagus, similar to that of
Aulastomum ; a stomach most like that of Hemopis ; internal
reproductive organs similar to those of Hirudo; while the
» external male organ is more like that of Hamvpis. The genus

iffers from all the others, however, in the situation of the
genital orifices, in the form of the maxille, the number of
plications in the cesophagus, ete. It includes one of the
stoutest, largest, and most powerful of the leeches hitherto
described.

Macrobdella decora Verrill. Figure 4; a maxilla.

Hirudo decora Say, Long’s Second Expedition, vol. ii, p. 268, 1824;
tema Helm., i, p. 474; Leidy, Proc. Phil. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1868, p.

_ Body large, stout, broad, considerably depressed throughout;
in extension much elongated and gradually tapering anteriorly,

strongly annulated. Length of the larger

Diesing, Sys
230.

Fig. 4.

very prominent, higher than broad, outer edge rounded in fron
and finely and closely denticulate (figure 4). Below each max
illa, in the oesophagus, is a broad plication or fold, which divides |
.mto two a short distance beyond; alternating with these 4%

formed upon the

there are conspicuous rugose elevations on the 86th and 37th,
and on the 88th and 39t

Chemistry and Physics. 1389

specimens of large size, taken in the breeding season, in spring.
At other seasons and in smaller specimens, these charac’ ers are
not so obvious. Acetabulum large, separated from the body by
a well-marked constriction.

Color above, dark livid brown, or olive-green, with a median
dorsal row of about 20 to 22 bright or pale red. spots, which are
sometimes obsolete, and a row of rounded black spots near each
margin, corresponding in number and nearly in size with the

ower surface bright or dark trig es or reddish
iis sometimes with black spots near the ma

Vermilion River ,—Say ; Norway, Maine; in aati? lakes and
streams in other parts of Maine; and in streams and ponds near
New Haven,—A. E. Verrill ; Minne sota,—Dr. Lei

This species is very common and widely diffused in the fresh-
waters of the northern United States. Its range northward
and southward is unknown. It is the only true blood-sucking
leech known to me from the Atlantic States. It is capable of
drawing blood from the human skin, but ordinarily subsists
upon frogs and tadpoles. It often attaches itself to the a _
por _speedily kills them, even when of large size. It 1

ntly used instead of the imported leeches by shi palabicte
des is equally efficaciou

The following species, iri I have not seen, have been
described from North America:

Hirudo ornata Ebrard, Rone. Monog. Sangs., p. 55. North-
western America.

Hirudo ¢) Costaricensis Grube and Cirs.; Diesing, op. cit., p.
509. Costarica,—CErsted.

Mirudo Billberghi Kinberg, op. cit., p. 356, 1867. Montevideo.
This species is described as having eight ocelli, with the genital
ba in the 28th segment. It probably belongs to some
other us.

Oxyptychus striatus Grube, Fam. d’Annel., . 110, 148; Dies-
ing, op. cit, p. 510. Montevideo,—Burmeister.

Centr tropygu s Jocensis Grube and (CErst., 1857 Dies., op. cit.,
p- 511. St. Joce, Central America, —CErste

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
I CHEMISTRY AND Puysics.

pesca while the solution was “hath warm, tufts of splendid

bronze-green dichroic crystals began to
the Beabce: These pore coliooted, and dried at 100°. By tran

140 Scientific Intelligence.

K,PtCy,+(TI,CO,), =TI,PtCy,, Tl,CO,+K,CO,. —
Treated with warm nitric acid, it effervesces, leaving 4 pe
residue of thallous platino-cyanide. It is nearly insoluble in ve :
water, and dissolves with difficulty in hot. It may be rece
ized from a hot solution of thallous carbonate. Its aqueous “
tion is colorless, and yields no absorption bands to spectrom
examination. The crystals are cubes, sometimes so united toge
as to produce needles. hone
Thallous platino-cyanide—obtained by decomposing’ hes hite
platino-cyanide with thallous sulphate—occurs in yo
crystals, entirely destitute of any dichroic properties.—J. Ch. : ’
ix, 461, July, 1871. 6 x
n Aurine.—Daxx and ScHorLEMMER have made an examill
tion of commercial aurine—obtained by the action of cone pe
sulphurie acid and oxalic acid upon phenol. They find tha

ceeded in separating from it the pure coloring matter. Bhi
crystallized from hot acetic. acid —its best solvent—it 1s pe it
either in the form of splendid chrome-red needles, with an a ~ in
tine luster, having the composition C,,H,,0g, H,0)2 ?, ri the
smaller dark-red needles having a steel-blue reflexion, wit 160°

iti O,, 23(H,0). Both lose their water at 1005

the formula C,,H,, ~ ure aurine heated with ee
yields benzol and other bodies having a higher poms
=. Ch, Soe., Il, ix, 466, July, 1871. Ber. Berl. — nas
574,

“so acid Of
of about 150 grams of camphor in two liters of nitric we
Specific gravity 1-27 (two volumes commercial acid dilute
on

.

s . ous
ume water) is heated on the water-bath in a capact
ecke k, until

co im a with

: the flask by a plaster of paris luting. 4 in 50

the above quantity of materials, the process is terminate ee
by Slides for the microscope, prepared with this substance in the same
Salicin, are magnificent objects with polarized light.—G. F. B.]

Chemistry and Physics. 141

hours, and the yield from 1°5 kilograms camphor is from 725 to
805 grams crystallized camphoric acid.—Ber. Berl. Chem. Ges.,
iv, 570. July, 1871. Ga FB

; the Synthesis of Ozxaluric acid.—By the action of
ethyloxyoxalyl chloride upon urea, Henry has succeeded in form-
i ric acid,

?
The reaction takes place according to the

Cl owe Ee
0,0, i 00,1, + | Hn = HN 1 6,0,-00,H, +H.

in ky
needles, which are tasteless and anhydrous, slightly soluble in
co re so in hot water, easily soluble in acids, alkalies, and
ammonia. Heated to 160° to 170° it melts, evolving oxamethane
and leaving cyanuric acid. Boiling with water decomposes it,
yielding oxaluric acid. Heated with alcoholic ammonia to 100° it
yields oxaluramide.— Ber. Berl. Chem. Ges., iv, 644, July, 1871.
G

. FB.
5. On the Coloring matter of Cochineal—LiEBerMaNnn and

water containing nitric acid, gave the latter substance pure, in
large silvery plates. This acid, when heated in sealed tubes with

0 e cresol of coal tar, fusing a ,» and yielding a
oe salt which crystallizes from water in yellow needles.
he nitrococcusic acid is therefore one of the isomeric trini-

ave all been prepared and examined. s
nitrococeusie acid to cresol, it is clear that the coloring matter of

To obtain that part of the carmine molecule which yielde
nitrococcusie acid, free from the action of the nitric acid, this car-
mine was warmed with concentrated sulphuric acid. At 120° the

of CO, and SO,. After prolonged heating to 140° or 150°, the
whole was poured into water, when the new coloring matter was

‘

142 Scientific Intelligence.

precipitated in brown flocks, After washing and drying it was
extracted with alcohol and the extract evaporated. The coloring
matter thus obtained, which the authors call Ruficoccin, is difi-
cultly soluble in cold water, readily so in alcohol, giving a yellow
fluorescent solution, partially volatile, giving a red vapor com
densing to yellow-red needles, and colors mordanted cloth like
cochineal though less brilliantly. Its formula is C,,H,,0,

the mode of its production and its behavior, the authors
believe it to be a derivative of dimethylanthracene and assign to
it the formula: ch).

C,,H, (OHS.
O ”

% 2
This view is strengthened by the fact that when the va or of
ruficoccin is passed over ignited zinc-dust, a hydrocarbon © high -

hydrate.—Ber. Berl. Chem. Ges., iv, 655, July, 1871. & FB

base obtained from neurine, which Liebreich had derived @
protagon. Neurine, being trimethyl-oxethyl-ammonium chloride,
gives oxyneurine by oxidation and subsequent removal of hydro-
chloric acid, thus:—

(1) (CH,),(C,H,O)NCI+0, = (CH,),(C,H,O,)NC1+H,0.
(2) (CH,),(C,H,O,)NCl+HCI = C,H,(CH,),NO>.

xyn
having produced, by the action of triethylamine upon monochlor
ty the action of triethy+
phosphine, a similar y containing phosphorus im place af
nitrogen, Murer at his suggestion ere | the pe a

- .

ing in sealed tubes for five or six hours to 100°. The platunu™
double chloride afforded on analysis the formula C,H, (CHs)s
PO,HCI],PtCl,, Treated with 25, it yielde simple

chloride, from which the sulphate was prepared; this, by te
ment with barium hydrate, vielded et gai base as a mass of
splendid radiating crystals. It was neutral in its reactloD, be
hygroscopic, and readily formed salts. The iodide is quite solubi
in water and crystallizes in beautiful plates. This base therefore, _
there can be little doubt, is the oxyneurine or betaine

rus series.— Ber, Berl, © sg

Geology and Natural History. 143

IL GroLoGgy AND NATURAL History.

1. Geological Survey of Ohio. Report of Progress in 1870;
by J. S. Newserry, Chief Geologist. Including Reports by E.
B. Anprews, Epwarp Orron, J. H. Kurppart, Assistant Geolo-
gists; T. G. Wormiry, Chemist; G. K. Girpert, M. C. Reap,

rnry Newron, W. B. Porrer, Local Assistants. 568 pp. 8vo.

to serve as its basis.

Dr. Newberry mentions the interesting fact that the valleys of
the streams of Ohio “are all cut far
beds. The valley of the Beaver is excavated to a depth of over
150 feet below the present water level. The trough of the Ohio
is still deeper. The Tuscarawas at Dover is running 175 feet
above its ancient The borings made for oil, along the
streams of the region, afford many remarkable facts bearing on
this subject.”

The structure of the Lower Coal Measures in Northeastern
Ohio is particularly described; and, in connection, he observes that
the noted fish-bed of Linton is connected with the coal seam,
which he numbers (counting from below) 6. The coal lies under
the Mahoning sandstone, in the valley of Yellow Creek, and is
the “Big Vein” of Salinville, Hammondsville, Linton, and New
Lisbon, being 4 to 74 feet in thickness ; at the mouth of the Creek

is seam is underlaid by four inches of cannel, and in this last
are the remains of fishes and amphibians—twenty new species
having been afforded by the bed. e fishes are mostly species
of Celacanthus and Enrylepis, with one of Palwoniscus, two o
Rhizodus, and many spines and teeth of sharks. Dr. Newberry
observes, respecting the original condition of the place :—

. “ All

144 Scientific Intelligence.

when, just as so many of our little lakes are ‘growing up’ now,
the lagoon, was closed and ultimately all filled up by the peat that
formed its margin, This peat produced the ordinary cubical coal
which composes the mass of the seam.”

The Report of E. B, Andrews relates to the Second Geological
District, the southeastern quarter of the State. Prof.

Under the head of the several geological formations of this
part of the State, the results of his recent observations are next
given, including numerous sections, and a large amount of valu
ble detail with regard to the coal beds, limestones, ete. Pro
Andrews shows that the beds of coal, as well as of intermediate
rocks, are often quite limited in lateral extent, and well illustrates

er.
a Geological Survey of California.—A letter from the State
Geologist of California to the Governor of the State, recently
urin

of each part requiring a year,
Prof. Whitney announces that a smaller map of the State, %
en

basis of the prelimina kent
ry geological map of the State.
for the second volume of he Omithology are well adva!

Geology and Natural History. 145

which have red greatly increase ed. Dr. Lei y has made nto
inary reports on the vertebrate fossils, and st go forward with
the volume whenever the State is ready fo ts publication; the
species are of great interest, embracing, as “ later Tertiary ” species,
the elephant, mastodon, rhinoceros, tapir, camel, ee several
species of the horse family, bison, elotherium, _and any other
extinct species. The Botanical volume has bee eye progress
under Professor Brewer. The geological ferveatigatioiie ave been
continued along the fees ort elsewhere, preparing the way for
the final reports. These will make two volumes, one on general
geclogy and the other ou ee mines and useful minerals, or econom-
ica ;

“¢ Ad under Professor Whitney has performed its work
thoroughly re faithfully, and ag volumes of reports unsur-
passed in excellence in the co untry. Large appropriations to it, to
hasten on the completion of the field labors and the hale
would contribute to the honor and best interests of the State

Swanton, Briures, F.G.S., a Pee og of the Geol
Surv Canada, —A few aay ago Mr. Solon Burlington,
Vt., visi seum and informed me tha d a specime

“ye which I believe to be the S. A sadeholle described in
m Pal. nibs vol. i, p. 18. This marble, both at Swanton and 5St.
Albans, seems is underlie the ig slates. It is enerally of a
reddish, motiled color, but someti ray or greenish, The lime-
stone at the straits of Belle Isle, in fa whieh S. pulchella is found, is
also red, gray and greenish ; and i is, I have no doubt, of the same
age. At this latter locality it overlies a red or brownish sand-

Belle ‘Isle sandstone to be the “Quartz rock” of the Green moun-

tains of Vermont. In that case, the limestone at Belle Isle occu-

Pies, stratigraphically, the podition of the Stockbridge limestone

Stipes ape sted by Dr. Emmons in his American pee , part 2,

- On page i ar the same work, Dr. E., speaking of the

tockbridge i eeties, says: “It is reddish at Wi liamstown and
Am, Jour. Sct.—Tuirp Sertes, Vou. I1I, No. 14 —Fxs., 1872.

10

146 Scientific Intelligence.

Saddle mountain, and which covers more or “
flank of the Green Mountains.” If the limestone to which he
alludes is one of the gray varieties of the Winooski marble, then
he is most probably right. I believe Mr. Allis’s fossils are the
first that have been found in the Winooski marble.

Montreal, Dec. 21st, 1871.

a
of new fossil mammals, birds, reptiles and fishes were collest
n was spent in eastern Oregon, Yfter
We resting Tertiary mammals were foune ak
a short visit to California the party returned east, some by
L Marsh via Panama. one

: e Expedition was in all respects successful, and the mor —
important scientific results will soon be made public. a

5. Discovery of a tooth of a Mastodon in Massachusetts ; yen
E. Hrrcucock. (From a letter to one of the editors, dated AM
herst, Jan, 12, 1872).—I have seen and identified a mastodon’smolity
which was found in the town of Colerain, Mass. It was shov' she
out of a muck bed, on the farm of Elias Bardwell, just 8!
ground was frozen for the winter; and in the spring he pro

; ne
me to make more thorough search for the remainder of the |
skeleton.

eral Resources of North Carolina; by Dr. F. A. GP)
To delphia, 187
Some 32 pp. 8vo. ee a has I

Geology and Natural History. 147

7. Final Report of the United States Geological Survey of
Nebraska, and portions of the Adjacent Territories, made under

187 pp. 8vo, with several lithographic plates of fossils and
a geologic —This very valuable Report was communicate
Commission of the General Land Office, b yden

account of the geological formations along the route of the Union
Pacific Railway, Eastern Division, Dr. Hayden observes in his
introductory remarks, that the State of Nebraska, while over
three hundred and sixty miles in average length from north to
south, and one hundred and seventy in average width, presents to
view the rocks of only three geclogical formations—the Upper
Carboniferous, the Cretaceous and the Tertiary. The Carbonife-
rous beds thin out in their western extension and almost disappear
in the region of the Rocky Mountains. The thickest coal beds *
are 12 to 30 inches thic

descriptions and figures of fossils are given with Mr. Meek’s usual

Scudder on the Orthoptera collected in Nebras
8. Miers, Contributions to ciety © Teonographie and Descrip-

of South American Plants, we have the present collection of three
volumes, the text of which is a reprint of papers contributed, at

illustrations now added consisting of 154 quarto plates, litho-
graphed from Mr. Miers’ own excellent drawings. Still another

148 Scientific Intelligence.

volume is before us, a collection of the Memoirs which our author
has published in the Transactions of the Linnean Society of

u
that upon Geetzia and Espadea (taken as “istinet gee with a
good figure and discussion of the Cuban plant, of most uncertain
relationship, and one in which three new genera of Ver

are described.

tains “a complete monograph of the Menispermacee.

of a long and diligent investigation of this family, with rear”

career of botanical authorship commenced with a list of the plants
he collected. '@
S. Watson, Botany of a Geological Exploration of :
7 ing. (Second Notice}
Under the modest name of a catalogue of the known plants

and the Rocky Mountai gate the
elite he a ountains, which is invaluable ¥ aa

with corrections or additions, others original revisions by wee
himself—are added in an appendix, ste bs afford every possible

Geology and Natural History. 149

help to the student or collector who has not access toa full botani-
eal library, and indeed most acceptable facilities to those few who
ave.

After thus calling attention to a volume of so much importance,
we propose to restrict our comments to sundry details of criticism,
or points of information, where opportunity occurs.

nder Thalictrum Fendleri some synonyms en adduced which
are not all certain; as there is another Oregon species which has
been confounded with 7° dioicum, but is distinct from both in pt
fruit, which was sparingly collected in the British Boundary ex

pedition, and lately by Mr. Hall

Ranu us alismeefolius var. montanus is essentially equiva-
lent to the var. alismellus Gray; although the specimens from th
“head of Provo River in the Ui ” are a stouter and Jarger-

flowered form, identical with Parry’s No. 79, which we ha
wrongly named when distributed and which may be rightly charac-
terized as merely a dwarf mountain state of Geyer’s Ft. alisme-
Solius, e may now add that there is a much older name ed
eu

ascicularis, there is no revere! evidence that this species
extends to California, "Nevada, en to Oregon, nt
referred to and so named in Lyall’s plaaain; though not in fruit,
is ire the R. to. Halls a plant most rare in collections,

Smith may also be of that species

A yellow-flowered Aguilegia, with flowers rather smaller and
Sometimes much smaller than those of A. Canadensis, thd with
Spurs shorter than the widely spreading sepals, after the manner
of A. formosa, and more or less curved (thus pppeoecens the
European type), which has been collected by Lyall,

A. flavescens
' cultivated in European gardens, from seeds collected by Reezl,
under the name of A. aurea, but it is doubtful if yet published
Boo: oti d the interior
ore constitute an important order in the inte
basin and ao borders. One of Mr. Watson’s most notable dis-

150 Seientifie Intelligence.

eoveries is that of Brown’s Purrya macrocarpa, hitherto found
only on the Arctic coast. It was detected on the highest peak of

ascertained that several species, such S. procerus, the curio
ssicaulis, 0 new species, have oblong seeds in.a terete
elongated pod, and cotyledons inclining to be incumbent in the
nner 0 tum, combines them into his new genus,

w genus, when all could be disposed in the two genera:

Ve are bound, moreover, to take steps for the suppression of
a nominal species which is here introduced in consequence of oUF
an

Plants of Oregon.—Mr. Eumav Hatt, well-known wae?
Tprising collector, during the past season mai

Plants of this region being far from co in herbaria gen®
rally, it 7 thought that these sets will at once be taken up AS
. Hall is | ely to be very soon engaged in another exploraty
intending subscribers may address Mr. Charles Wright, Harva®
University Herbarium, Cambridge, Mass. Brg
11. Saunders’ Ref ugium Botanicum.—This Botanical Reus

: ed and maintained by W. Wilson 5a0y
ders, F.R.S., is not an asylum for decayed pomeiiiaes but a period S

Geology and Natural History. 151

ble amount of letter-press—e only a single leaf or a single page
accompanying the plate; sometimes a genus or a group is treated
systematically and more at length. The first and second parts

nor easily rendered in a description. Among these the species o
Cotyledon (including Heheveria), now favorite succulents in culti-

istorisk Forening i Kjobenhawn, for the year 1871, an icle of
108 pages upon the question whether the Cyathiwn of Euphorbia

uts.
language is Danish; but, according to an excellent ee newly in-
troduce : ; , sible

uced, a recapitulation is appended in French. rrent
tabs ic a to have originated with Lamarck, but was com-
pleted and fully developed, not to say establis rown,

152 Scientific Intelligence.

d

ip t si lie Sado

harmony with all other Euphorbiacee, in having unisexual —
in themselves simple, but with inflorescence often very ben ~

13
record which has been omitted for the last year or two :— oak
RANZ UnceEr, of Gratz, was found dead on the ee
of the 13th of February, 1870, under mysterious cree wena
which suggested violence, but the suspicion has not — in Fos
Unger was distinguished first in Physiological, afterwaras

oa a) en
. 5. Prrorrer, for many years digests - the nego ase
at Pondiche died near the beginning of the sam vs les.
Car. Mituee of Berlin, the pontinaton of Wal pipe yee
June 21,1870. The publication of the 7th volume 0
has been completed since his decease. botanist
Franz Ruprecar, of the St. Petersburgh Academy, 6 Herba-
of distinction, August 4, 1870, His office as keeper of t
rium is filled by Dr, Maximowitz.

' Geology and Natural History. 153

Baron CHARLES von Hueet, an Australian explorer and seien-
tific cultivator, founder of the collection of live plants acquired
Prince Demidoff, and lately dispersed at the sale of the collections
at the Villa Demidoff, —died in Belgium, where he was Austrian
Minister, in the summer of 1870

Tuomas Aw NDERSON, late Superintendent of the Botanic Garden
at Calcutta, an excellent botanist, who has done much good work
and from whom “oe — was sepeta upon Acanthacee, died
at Edinburgh, ees 6, :

F. A. IQUEL, most igo er of the Neth-
erlands and Director of the Leyd erbarium, as well as Professor
of Botany at Utrecht, died J sour 23, i871, at the age of only
59 years.

B.S. G. Lanrzius-Beninea, chiefly known for his researches
i the v4 i of the spore-case of Mosses, died at Gdttingen,

Tarch 6

Cari i ‘Soa LTZ-SCHULIZENSTEIN, Professor of Physiology at
the University of Berlin, who wrote yer erin upon Cyclosis
and Vessels of the Latex, died March 2

Wiu1am Witson, of Warrington, i re veteran Muscolo-
Bt former associate. with Sir Wm. Hooker in the Muscolo ogia

ritannica ,and sole author of the last edition of that Wark, or
rather of the Br yologia Britannica, died April 3, 1871, at the
age of 72.

opor Hartwse, at one time botanical traveler and
poliocko: ae the London Horticultural Society in Mexico, Sout
America, and California (the dried plants enumerated by Bentham
in Plante Hartwegiane}, and of late director of er Grand Ducal
egies at Swetzingen, Baden, died February 3, 1871.

OHRBACH, “of Berlin, a most promising poenece t, who has
bata: revised the Silene, Typhace we, &e., with gr ~~ credit, died
June 3, 1871, before he had completed his 25th yea

vlas Minpx, of Breslau, an investigator of Febiiblions, and ,
later of Ferns, died J uly 3, 1871.

AMON DE LA SAGRA, & Spanish botanist long resident in Cuba,
for whose work upon the civil and natural history of that and
Montagne contributed the aliation of the lower Cryptogamia,
and Achille Richard commenced that of the Phanerogamia, died
in June, 1871

Henry Tsseg of Clermont-Ferrand, France, author of a most
elaborate work on the Geography of the Plants md Europe, and
a distinguished bette botanist, died August 4, 1871 .

Stearriep Retssex, keeper of the Imperial Herbarium at
Meee and author of) some good botanical papers, died November

1ST.

e zs De Carte Sowersy, son of the artist of the ori we
Socics of the British Botany, and who himself drew most o
plates of the Supplement, died in London, August 26, 1871, at 4
ag <

LD SEEMANN, editor of the Journal of eee British and
ie eae of the "Botany of the Voyage of the Herald, of the

154 Seient:fie Intelligence.

Flora Vitiensis (of which the last fasciculus has been unacountably
delayed for the past three years), and of other botanical writings,
—a very enterprising botanist, but of late years muc occupied in
business affairs in Central America,—died of fever in Nicaraguain
November last, as we learn from a brief announcement of the sad
event in the Gardeners’ Chronicle of Dee. 16. :

Sepastian René Lenormanp, Vire, France. A wide circle of
correspondents and friends will share our regret upon being in-
formed of the death of this venerable botanist (specially an adept
in Algology), and most charming man. This occurred on the
11th of December, 1871, in the 76th year of his age.

4. Fish-nest in the sea-weed of the Sargasso Sea. Extract
from a letter from Professor Acassiz to Prof. Peirce, Superinten-
dent U. S. Coast Survey, dated Hassler Expedition, St. Thomas,
Dee. 15, 1871 —* * *° Th
voyage thus far is the finding of a nest built by a fish, floating o
the broad ocean with its live freight. On the i3th of the month,
Mr. Mansfield, one of the officers of the Hassler, brought me a ball

of wate
nen the central part of which was more closely bound up together
In t

]
» by which the whole was kept floating. the 7
more careful examination ver soon revealed the fact that a
elastic threads which held the a

at intervals, sometimes two or three beads being close together,

f bravest ‘pin’s head. We
ze of an or =
had, no doubt, a nest before u ’ th i kind: full of

revealed two lar.
over the back of the body, as the embryo uniformly appe

Geology and Natural History. 155

h
The next day I found two embryos in one of my glass jars; they
occasionally moved in jerks, and then rested for a long while

Atlantic, and of these the most common are Exocetus, Naucrates,
Scopelus, Chironectes, Syngnathus, Monacanthus, Tetraodon and
Diodon. Was there a way to come nearer to a correct solution of
my doubts ?

the very first comparison I made secured the desired result. The
pigment cells of a young Chironectes pictus proved identical with
those of our little embryos.

It thus stands as a well peer Re fact that the com-

e@
cradle, rocking upon the deep ocean, is carried along as an undying
arbor, affording at the same time protection and afterward food for
its living frei it. ;

This marvelous story acquires additional interest if we now take
into consideration what are the characteristic peculiarities of the

importa
not probably in building their nest.

156 Scientific Intelligence.

"s All the officers of the Hassler are indefatigable in their
efforts to help our investigations, and even the men show useful
interest in our proceedings. We have just reached St. Thomas, 80
that I have nothing to add as to observations made here.

15. On t hosphorescence of Animals.—Prof. Pancenrt, of
Naples, has been studying for some time past the phosphorescence
of marine animals. He has examined Noctiluca, Beroe, Pyrosomd,

phorescence is due to matter cast off by the animal—it is a prop-

engaged. One of them, illustrating Echinocidaris punctulatd, 8
by the “ Albert ” process, and the son, representing a section .
unum, 18 printed by the “Woodbury” process. The latter

nce, 2
American Naturalist.—In enter
lume, the editors of the American Naturalist
announce that they have established a department of microsty
with Dr. R. H. ard, of Troy, N. Y, as special editor. *°

Astronomy. 157

judicious improvement in a journal already so ably and satisfac-
torily conducted, and so etalon eh approved by naturalists, can-

not fail to please the former subscribers, and secure new ones
and considering the small amount of microscopic literature pub-
lished in this country, a8 compared with the amount of work act-

ually done by our inioroscopists, and the very general inverest in
the subject, it is a change in every way desirable.

8. Anatomisch-systematische Bewthiheiiang der Ale, yoncnian
erste Abtheilung; * Pennatuliden, zweite fratee tos erstes Heft, mit
vii Tufeln; by A. K ueticnss Frankfort, 1871.—In this part of Dr.
Kdlliker’s ‘eceallont we almost exhaustive oak upon the Pennatu-
lians, he describes and illustrates the genera, Halisceptrum, Virgu-
laria (15 species), Stylatula fe Ape Acanthoptilum, anew genus
founded upon two species e Gulf-stream oe of
Pourtales, Seytalium, Paaewe, "Halipter is, and Fun

arge part of the work is devoted to descriptions of t the ees

omy and histology of the various genera and ae
19. Lllustrated Catalogue of the Museum of Dowgeniisite Zook.
ogy. No. VI. eg to oe Ophiuride and esi We de
efer

. Stellar Photography.—W e are ad
oa Viberalit of members rs of his own, =: his wife’s amily, means
h

which convey to all paete ue ~ _ BD. of the fn dep
a scien

grapher, after spending som ahi in a observatory 0 of Mr, Ruth-

catalogue and maps of all the stars visible to the naked eye on
the clearest nights, together with a ayn ape of their poreone.
Vv

previously been known. For instance, Reaslandes found from the
North Pole to 30° S, 3256 stars visible to the naked eye; and Dr.
Gould has already found from the South Pole to 10° N. 4600. To
do this the sky has been divided into seventeen maps, ‘and he and
his four assistants have labored night and day in mapping and

158 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

estimating magnitudes, and making the asinine necessary for
finding the position of each star from the posit n it held when

back exact woe of the great southern constellations, a great

addition will be made to Ae aaa science, of which as s Ametr
ey we may iaatly be pro
2, Eclipse of the Sun of D —A telegram from Mr. Davis,

photographer to the English. Helipes expedition, says: “ Mange
dore, Baikul. Five totality negatiy es; extensive corona; persist: |
ent rifts; slight external changes.” Another from Mr. ‘Tanssea,
a Saf French Acade my of Sciences, dated Octacamund :

a couronne eases matiare loin qu’ atmosphére du Sold
sek, Dee. 2

TV. MiscennaNngous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE.

— Chicago Academy of Sciences.—This active Academy, We
e glad to learn, is likely to resame work under far more favor
pets conditions than was at first thought possible. While the loss
of special collections cannot be repaired in all cases, and the losses
of the results of years of labor by Dr. Stimpson in memolrs,

library makes all rie of books, and even of separ rate copies of
memoirs from authors, highly acceptable to the Academy:
We know that some authors and publishers have already sent in
offers of importance, and, no doubt, an organized effort, in response
to the circular lately issued by the ‘President, Col. Foster, and ie
Stimpson the Curator, will be fruitful of good re sults. |

Let us hope that this second total daeracion of the Chicag?
Academy by fire will lead them, in rebuilding for the third time,
to the eo of every possible means of security against 4 simi
a disas'

The ‘Natural Sciences in Public Schools.—We learn, pes

Bi satisfaction, that a science-school for the teachers in| the pub-
lic schools of Boston has been established through the enli iightened
liberality of John Cummings, Esq., whose interest and zeal in PY
moting Seite education are well known. Professor A. I i
and W. H. Niles, oe many of the officers of the Boston Society 0 .

snake relied upon. The intention is to impart knowledge of such —
kinds, and in such -— that the iS can give it in their tur”
to their pupils. Thus even the youngest pupils may re¢ eive m

or less of the sciences in the most suitable and practical manner.

Miscellaneous Bibliography. 159

It is certain that the eves of _ young children can be
directed to the study of Natural History, and habits of careful

of primary eee rst_ course essons, on Physical
Geography by Mr. W. H. Niles, was Siteaded by upward of five
hundred teachers, and was very successful.

V. MIScELLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY.

London and New York, 1 "Chiacmilian ah Co 0.) $9.00.—This

sonal observation; and that for the ‘cee 0 Kian ia

the six hundred works biuece compose the world’s cnolo pes lite-

either i. must or the wine; and they a o urge co

remember that the grape gives the Andel ay to the wine, and
hence that “the most renowned wines are all made from distinct
Varieties,” ponseg aay ae ne Paes es eomread of erent of
grapes used to produce a the less character the wine pos-
Sesses, and therefore the mab sedis it may be “artificially imita-
ted. “The ape, a: fermented, unsugared, and unbrandied

they maintain, “that the grapes from which they are made con-
stitute the first term of the description.” The word “Sherry”
cannot be distinctive, since when made from the Palomino grape

160 Miscellaneous Bibliography.

when ne are grown me the aoe district.
H

ook hist ronal at once the eekakieg. on wine and wine
sans and cannot fail to add to the already excellent reputation
of its authors. The wood-cuts are superior, the letter-press is ele-
gant, and the binding is superb. Mechanically the book is all
that could be desired.
2 eet we the Anthropological Institute of New York.
Vol. I, w York, 1871, “sae Westermann & Co),

; Sq.)
Vice-Presidents. This sie ceabe of its publ stoti contains
several valuable original papers, besides a translation of the ad-
dress of Dr."M. Paul Broca, before the Anthropological Society of
sheen on the progress of Anthropology. These papers are entitled

von Ma on some points of South American ethnology, by &

dear representing silver gee wooden idols, ete., by &
G. Squier; Sculptured rocks, Belmont Co., Ohio, with fi
slabs with human and other footprints, by J. W. Ward; Canoe
Savannah river Swamp, by C. C. Jones, jr. Trepanning among the
Incas, with a figure of the trepanned skull, by J. C. Nott; the
Arch in bbe: be by E.G. Squier Progen = ace ete., bY

parallel with Mathematics as a Science of Method. Biology 8
discussed from a physical, a physiological, a ae .
eo and a spiritual oint of view.

Reon are issued by th of the Yao nt of the Interior, as part of :

9 a on the U. 8. Geological Survey of the Territories, under se
Hayden. They present the features of one of the most

ni hrs regions on the — ent. The positions of all the numer

AMERICAN

JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS,

[THIRD-«SERIES.]

Art. XX.—The Hot Springs and Geysers of the Yellowstone and
Firehole Rivers; by ¥. V. HaypEN. With maps.*

(Published by permission of the Secretary of the Interior.)

sometimes applied to the entire valley; but the basin proper
comprises only that portion enclosed within the remarkable
ranges of mountains, which give origin to the waters of the
Yellowstone, south of Mount Washburn and the Grand Cafion.
The range, of which Mount Washburn is a conspicuous peak,
seems to form the north wall or rim, extending nearly east an

west across the Yellowstone, and it is through this portion of
the rim that the river has cut its channel, forming the remark-
able falls and the still more wonderful cafion. This basin is

gang h

at side, without any apparent break in the mm
This basin has.been call
of an ancient voleano. It is probable that during the Pliocene
period, the entire country drained by the sources of the Yellow-
stone and the Columbia’ was the scene of as extensive volcanic
activity as that of any portion of the globe.

* The charts accompanying these articles were prepared by Mr. E. Hergesheimer,
@ most accompli pographer connected with the U. S. Coust Survey.

Am. Jour. Scr.—Tuirp Serres, Vou. II, No. 15.—Mancu, 1872.

ll

162 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

It might be called one vast crater made up of thousands of

smaller rents and fissures, out of which the fluid interior of the —
earth fragments of rocks and volcanic dust have been erupted —
in unlimited quantities. Hundreds of the nuclei or conesof
these voleanic vents are now remaining, some of them rising to —
a height of ten thousand to eleven thousand feet above the sea —

The lake itself is about twenty-two miles long and avers
ten or fifteen miles in width. Our soundings show it t0 eee
an unusual average depth, though the greatest depth wine? wt
, after a careful series of amie bid: ee

The clear green shading, with the deep ultramarine hue te
waters, adds not a little to the effect of the scene. The es
has, at all seasons, nearly the temperature of cold spring watel-
S i 27 feet.

e were

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 168

one to three pounds each. They are very abundant; but five
out of six of them were infested with a singular parasitic worm,
which is found in the abdominal cavity, or interwoven in the
muscular portions in sacs or cysts, or sometimes in the gills,
Dr. Leidy has described these worms under the name of Diboth-
rium cordiceps. It is possible that this diseased condition of the
fish is caused by the proximity of the hot springs, which are
abundant all around the shore of the lake and sometimes ex-
tend far out into the waters.

We cannot at this time present a full description of a lake

a

which would of itself furnish the material for an extended

time. The two lakes were then connected, although probably
never completely united, The belt of mountains that separated
_ them was about four miles in width. have estimated that,

fall every second or two, and, with each pulsation, throw out a
small quantity of water. Quite a pretty symmetrical funnel-

164 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

shaped crater is formed with a cireular rim varying from a few
inches to several feet in diameter. Some of these funnel-shaped —

Hot Sprine.

chimneys extend out into the lake several feet, and the hot spmlg
deposits may be seen through the clear depths for fifty yards
Bubbles may be seen on the surface of the water some distance
from the shore in many spots and show the presence of a spring
beneath. vay
The same variety of colors, quiet springs, mud springs, old
ruins, &c., that we have before described, occur here. No gey: |
sers were observed, but the group of mud springs keep Nee
constant thud-like noise, which can be heard with great distinct:
ness for half a mile . ‘
On the east and northeast sides of the lake are a number?
groups of living or dead springs. High up on the sides of the
mountains are two quite extensive patches of the siliceo e
deposit, which look in the far distance like an immense bank 0
snow. They are called by the mountaineers, brimstone ar
The large double basin on. the southeast arm was once Covel”
with hot springs, though at the present time, there is 20 hea
there with temperature above ordinary spring water. re
_quantities of sulphur are mingled with the silica, and henee

. ¥

name.
At Steamboat Point there are two vents which keep §P™

up among the foot hills of the mountains, a mile or tW° aie
the lake. One of the most conspicuous of these great W ni
hills, seen from all sides of the lake, is called Sulphur Mount |
it is located on the side of the mountains at the north en© ~~

of thie, Yellowstanaaed Winataie Medes 165

the lake. The summit of this deposit rises about 600 feet above
the lake; it is the remains of one of the most interesting group
of springs in the vicinity; there are now many steam vents
lined with a brilliant coating of sulphur. The deposit is from
50 to 150 feet in thickness, and when not mingled with sulphur,
is as white as snow. Silica predominates over all other mate-
rials; but it is much variegated by oxide of iron, sulphur, &e.
At the foot of the mountain, near the margin of Pelican Creek,
a few springs issue from beneath the crust with a temperature
from 150° to 180°, but this great group may now be regarded
as extinct.

We will now leave the Yellowstone Basin, and, pursuing
a westerly course, make our way over the high range, or divide,
into the great Geyser Basin of the Firehole river, a branch of
the Madison Fork. The mountains that surround the Yellow-
stone Basin are of the same character as those which, extend
down the branches of the Madison and Gallatin Forks for thirty
miles; and not until then do the sedimentary or granitic rocks
appear to any extent. Immense quantities of obsidian also are
found on both sides of the range. Little lakes, varying in size
from the diameter of a few hundred yards to four or five miles,
are scattered all about the sources of the Missouri, Yellowstone
and Columbia. Some of them are situated on the very sum-
mits of the mountains, ten thousand and eleven thousand feet
above the sea.

Traveling in this region is attended with great difficulties,
on account of the fallen timber. The uplands, as well as the
lowlands, are covered with a dense growth of pines, the majority
of which have a trunk not over six to twelve inches in diameter,

In crossing the main divide between the drainage of the
Yellowstone and the Madison, we first strike the sources of the

hundreds of vents. There was one locality, covering several
acres, that presented one of the most beautiful of scenes. The

e

166 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

entire area was covered thickly with conical mounds of various
sizes, ranging in diameter from a few inches to a hundred feet
or more, and these cones or hillocks were full of orifices, from
which streams were issuing. All these little chimneys or —
orifices were lined with the most brilliant crystals of sulphur,
and avhen the heated crust was removed, we found the under-
side adorned in the same manner. The basis of the deposit was
silica, as white as snow ; but it was variegated with every shade
of yellow from sulphur, and with scarlet or rose color from
oxide of iron. In the distant view the appearance of the whole
country may be not unaptly compared to a vast limekiln m
full operation. The east branch of the Madison is almost en-
tirely fed by water from the hot springs, and its temperature 1s
60° or 80° all the time. The vegetation that grows along its
branches and in the stream itself is a marvel of luxuriance.

A broken range of hills, forming a kind of ridge, oxi :
its terminus it is broken into several isolated butes, yao :

€ ie
deed, the igneous rocks on either side of both the valleys
show plainly that during the time that the volcanic forces were

forming very thick
the mountain.

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 167

From the large group of springs on the Kast Fork, we passed,
between the isolated butes, to the valley of the Firehole, where
the principal springs and geysers are located. The entire feet 4
averaging about three miles in width, is covered with the sili-

Hor SPRING Basin.

a

may
ee

| [hrs
AUER a,

HY
hi

ceous crust as white as snow. Among the dense # ier in the
foot hills, and even quite high on the mountain side, a column
of steam, rising above the tops of the trees, reveals the location
of a spring or a steam vent. As ame out into the level
open plain of the Firehole valley, the elevated mounds and

168 F. V. Hayden— Hot Springs and Geysers

numerous columns of steam revealed to us where the most im-
portant groups were located. It will be seen on the chart that
all these groups, and nearly all the springs, occur along the val-
leys of the streams, and for the most part very near their banks,
On the east side of the valley are scattered groups of springs,
the aggregated waters of which form quite large streams. By

1e hundred feet. Some of them have nearly circular rims,
with funnel-shaped orifices, and are filled with water up to the
very margin, which is so transparent that we could look down
into the clear depths for five to forty feet and see the smallest
tubercle upon the surface. The funnel-shaped orifice or basin
usually extends down until it closes up to a very narrow B®
sure, and then extends on below to an unknown depth.

In the Lower Geyser Basin, although there are many groups
of most interesting springs, none of them can rank as geysers of
the first class. Over an area of about three miles in width and
five in length, the surface seems to be literally riddled with the

umns of water from two to six feet in diameter to the a of
15 to 80 feet. One geyser, with quite a small orifice, p <
: a

for itself a cistern, which for beauty and elaborateness woul
compare well with those of the springs on Gardiner’s river.
We called it the architectural fountain.

mulation made by this spring descends for several hundred feet
m innumerable semi-circular steps varying from one-fourth of
an inch to two inches in height, and is exquisitely beautiful 1D
all its details. When in active operation a column of water 1
_ thrown 30 to 60 feet high, when the waters spread over & radius

“NIVINOOY TVYUALOALINOLY

169

\ x
\

i

te eee
i \ es Silas |
[ON ot

\
~
‘

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers.

lla

170 F. V. Hayden-—Hot Springs and Geysers

of fifty feet, filling the numerous reservoirs that surround the
immense rim 0 basin. There were other funnel-shaped
basins with elegantly scalloped rims, which were covered:
over the inner side, to the depth of 10 to 20 feet, with bead-like
tubercles of silica. Sometimes these siliceous beads were: ar-
ranged in large numbers like Fungia corals, or like the heads of
cauliflowers,

In the Firehole Basin, silica predominates in the deposit, and
so far as we could determine there was very little, if any, lime.
Sulphur occurs in very small quantities in the lower basin, al-
though there were two or three springs the orifices of which
were lined with it.

A short distance from this beautiful geyser is a remarkable
group of mud springs. One of them has a basin fifty feet in

SY

wy
\
wet

nS

.

<a

=

boven

ba ‘Nel.

Se =
‘dais

—

tMup Geysers.

most delicate pink or rose, with a base as white as snow. Pa
e fines

- aum. The most fastidious manufacturer of [gies
ware, would go into eestacies over this magnificent bed of mor
tar, that has perhaps been worked and re-worked for many
thousands of years,

171

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers.

"saaog GayW

oe
— E
—
ate

-

Cittitade

+ ] it De Gh . = —, eae : e \ = 2 y Oe : = i] =
- ayy 4 aN a.

SR. sewn = sen 90 te eA Ce i \ = Dey,
ae A Sapte Dees aa Tae “i )) i ‘ Wt sss Peaks eS moors at
Uae rai SR OR SG NE TRONS ss f tad } \ i emt BS ae
eS ee. Breage vip 2 / oe Nae ay yy ae ree wal MAE a
ete a amen 3 fe ——
Re ie { ages Fie pre copie ee

_ —. —— rn Siem inte oo cde
an ee oe Sempre

172 F. V. Hayden—Hoi Springs and Geysers

These springs occur in small groups all over the basin, and
are often in close proximity to geysers or to perfectly clear
quiet springs. They are found in every stage, from simply tur-
bid water, through all grades of consistency, to thick stiff mud,
through which the gases force themselves with a suppressed —
thud-like sound. Each of these mud springs probably com- —
menced as a geyser or at least as a boiling spring. The water
is at first clear, then becomes turbid, and grows gradually
thicker until the heat dies out.

face where the water flows. This coating in the old springs
becomes broken up, so that it is suspended all over the sides of
the springs like rotten mouldy fragments of leather. The ion
is undoubtedly held together by vegetable matter. When these
springs entirely dry up, these leathery fragments are blown
about the surface in every direction by the winds ae

In the vicinity of the active geysers, the surface over which —
the surplus water from an eruption flows is sometimes covered,
to the thickness of two to four inches, with a substance which
appears to the touch like jelly or pulp. All over the surface
there are irregular depressions with sharp raised edges, like the
inner surface of a cow’s stomach. The colors are varied, bemg —
usually a white base with every variety of scarlet, pink or Ts
color, with brilliant shades of green.

Another interesting feature was the quantity of inerusted
and silicified wood found scattered about the springs. Very free
quently the pine trees, which are abundant in the vicinity, have —

G Up the Firehole river about ten miles, there is the Upper
eyser Basin, where the great geysers are foun

of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 173

In the Lower Geyser Basin on both sides of the Firehole,
even Aad among the foot hills of the mountains on either side,

of the most interesting phonies that can well be ima
columns of steam are rising from a cidaaana vents, pester
shrouding the valley as with a dense fo of the cit

dense black smoke arises in hundreds of Soin flavin of
the white feathery clouds of steam.

pper Geyser Basin is located very near the source of
Firehole river, and between it and the Lower Geyser Basin
there is an interval of about five miles in which the hills come
close to the river on both sides, and the springs occur only in
small groups. Although possessing some interest, yet there

i t t

Stream SPRING AND CONE.

which we call Iron Spring Creek, on which are located many
more prings, as the chart indicates. * This stream receives its
name from the vivid yellow and pink clays, on both sides, from
mouth to source. Ascendin ng the Firehole, we find the sur-
face, on both sides of the river, covered with a thick siliceous

174 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Geysers

crust, and completely riddled with springs of every variety.
Quiet springs, with basins varying from a few inches toa hun-
dred feet in diameter, are distributed everywhere. Some high
pyramidal cones, with steam issuing from the summits, indicate
the last stages of what were once important geyse

Near the center of the basin, which is about two miles long
and half a mile in width, there is one of the most poweriu
geysers of the basin. During our short visit of two days it
operated twice. Our camp was pitched within a few yards of it
The preliminary warning was indicated by a tremendous rum-
bling, which shook the ground all around us with a sound like
distant thunder. Then an immense mass of steam burst out of
the crater as from an escape pipe, followed by a column of
water eight feet in diameter, and rising by steady impulses to
the height of two hundred feet; I can compare the noise and
excitement which it produced only to that of a charge m bat-
le. This wonderful fountain continued to play for the space
of fifteen minutes, when the water gradually subsided and set-
tled down in the crater, about two feet, and the temperature
slowly diminished to 150°. There are here two separate basins,
one of which is in a constant state of violent agitation, while
the other plays only at intervals of about thirty-two hours;
and although, so far as the eye could detect, there was a partl-
tion of not more than two feet in thickness between them,
neither of them seemed to be affected by the operation of the
other. The decorations about these springs were beautifi
beyond anything I had ever seen in nature. ‘The most delicate
embroidery could not rival them in their wonderful variety and
complexity. The surface within and without was covered ovel

with little tubercles of silica, which had a smooth enameled

appearance like the most delicate pearls; down on the sides a
the basin were large rounded masses like corals, formed entirely
of silica. There was one spring with a small elevated crater
about two feet high, which threw up a small column of water,
about twelve feet high, by continued impulses, like the move
ments of a saw, and thus it received the name of the Sawmill
Geyser. There were probably from twenty to fifty geysers of
greater or less —- in this valley ; and it is quite poss!

ble that some of the s rip gs placed in t iet class operated
at times as first ec : ra The Sars he Grotto

Geyser and Castle Geyser. The crater of the latter is er re

ndred feet 1
diameter at its base; it was built up of thin layers of the silica,
which mise, much like steps, to the chimney on the summit,
which is about ten feet high. Clouds of steam issue constantly
from this chimney, and every few moments a column of heat
water is thrown up fifteen to twenty-five feet.

|
:

| of the Yellowstone and Firehole Rivers. 175

But the most accommodating, and, in some respects, the most
instructive geyser in this basin was called by Messrs. Langford

ia:
i
i

fm , j it iM ih,
(caine
Ts hor,

Z |
\ 4
‘ N Dg tp
/

Nh)

AGA S ' ay
SECA],

RG, YW
WAR i

« ANG ]

SS

|
di

cession of impulses is goes? held steadily ns for the space
of fifteen minutes, the water falling

ter and overflowing in large quantities. It then ceases, and
with a rush of steam for a few seconds closes the display for
the time. Words can convey but an inadequate conception of
the intense excitement which the scene produces upon the mind.

176 F. V. Hayden—Hot Springs and Greysers, ete.

Night and day some of the geysers are in operation continually,
and, at certain periods, several of them perform at the same
me.

about 85 per cent of silica, 11 per cent of water and the remain-
der mostly chloride of magnesia; and only a slight trace of
ime was found in the water. In but one locality west of the
lake, Col. J. W. Barlow found a calcareous deposit. There are,
scattered over the great area, about forty by fifty miles mn ex
tent, a few patches of the sedimentary rocks, and it is most
probable that underneath the deposit of this small group of
springs, there are portions of the Carboniferous limestone.

ar as we could ascertain, in all the deposits of the Yel
lowstone Basin proper, and in the Firehole Basin, silica 18 the
dominant constituent. The springs are, with ver few excep-
tions, and those not important, near the borders of the streams
below any beds of limestone. It is quite possible that under-
neath the vast masses of volcanic material, which composé
mountains on every side, the sedimentary rocks exist, but Lam
disposed to believe that they occur only in isolated and much
restricted patches, if at all.

We may therefore state, in general terms, that the great be
spring region of the sources of the Yellowstone and Missoutt
rivers 1s covered with rocks of volcanic origin, of comparatively
modern date.

In this article I have been able to present only a few of the
wonderful and most attractive features of this unique tegi0™
A bill has been introduced into Congress which has for its pur
pose the setting apart of tis wonderland as a great National
Park for all time. We have, as a precedent, a similar acho?
with regard to the Yosemite valley, and this noble act has met

We
that before this article is published to the world the act will
ave become a law.

G. E. Moore—Electrolysis of the Derivatives of Acetic Acid. 177 |

Art. XXI.—On the Electrolysis of the Substituted Derivatives of
Acetic Acid. Preliminary Notice; by Dr. G. KE. Moors.*

as follows: ‘
H, d eile 4
20 | o[ co on+H,0-2(Gx} Cc) +200, +H,0+H,,

/
in other words, the univalent radical monocyan methyl (ox ro)

For
rather more than 200 grm. of pure monocyanacetic acid was

d .

With this material the electrolysis was performed in the
month of December, 1870. The result obtained was decidedly
negative; the expected substance could not be detected among
the products of decomposition, and the queiaee for whose
solution the investigation was originally un ertaken was there-
ore to be considered as settled.

It appeared desirable, nevertheless, to subject the products of
the electrolysis to a more thorough examination. They are

)

completed ; as, however, temporary postponement of the work
has become necessar ; it rma hid ie Gahout interest to com-
municate a few of the more interesting results already obtained ;
all analytical data are reserved for a future
cation.

* Communicated, in substance, to the Chemical Society of Berlin, at the sitting
of May 22d, 1871.
Am. Jour. Sct.—Turp Series, Vou. III, No. 15.—MAakcH, 1872.
12

agitation with the least possible quantity of potash solution,
filtered and the ether distilled off from the water-bath. There
remained a brownish residue, solid at ordinary grec
which agreed in its crystalline texture and other externa
properties, as well as in its fusing point (87°°8 C.), with pees
cyanide C,H,(CN),. When boiled with a concentrated potas
solution it evolves ammonia, and leaves a residue in nie
means of its suffocating vapor and reaction with ferric chloride,
ethylene succinic acid may easily be detected.
The course of this phase of the decomposition may therefore
be represented by the following equation :
CH,CN CH,CN
= H,O+H
2h6 2 oH tH:0 du ont 2002+ a 2)

precisely analogous to the reaction by which, during the elec:

td

trolysis of potassium acetate dimethyl | __° is obtained.

The study of the associated products of the electrolysis bag
still incomplete, I abstain from a further development ot t il
theoretical bearings of the facts already communicated ut
the missing data can be obtained. ie

As far as studied the reaction affords a very clear and positive
evidence regarding the constitution of ethylene; it proves PY r
simple synthesis that this body is formed by the direct. union 0
two methylene groups, and, that its formula should be written,

in accordance with what is now the general usage yes and not,
3
as it is still occasionally written, ‘so cy’, or, what is the
CH ”
same thi <
ins, (455

It is my intention to extend this investigation to the dob
and triply substituted’ acetic acids, and, as the corresponding

J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartzite, 179

cyanogen derivatives are still unknown, I shall try if it be

possible to obtain a similar series of reactions among the chlo-

rine derivatives. Monochloracetic acid should give ethylene di-
CH

chloride }_* , and, by a precisely analogous reaction, we

might expect from the electrolysis of dichloracetic acid acetylene

tetrachloride | *, In the same manner the electrolysis of

trichloracetic acid would probably yield dicarbon hexachloride

Ocl,”

Art. XXIL—Green Mountain Geology. On the Quartzite; by
JAMES D. DANA.

THE quartzite of the Green Mountain region is the most
remarkable of its rock formations. It has a wide distribution

The outcrops are smallest to the south, in Connecticut, and
largest in the southern half of Vermont. In the latter region,
the quartzite departs somewhat from its habit of isolation, and
forms, according to the geological map of Vermont in the Report
of 1861, a ridge, with but small interruptions, over one hun
miles in length, rising near Bennington, in Bald Mountain, to
a height of 3100 feet.

The quartzite has still another peculiarity in usually crop-
ping out in the vicinity of the great metamorphic limestone of

* Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., Jan. 1, 1841; also, Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol. and Nat.,
1842, p. 482; and Address before the Assoc. in 1844, Am. Jour. Sci., xlvii, 150, 1844

180 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartztte.

the Hudson river and the Stockbridge limestone being regarded
as in part the Hudson river shales folded and partially meta-
morphic.

Professor Emmons in his Geological Report (1842), treating
of his Taconic system, reversed the order, putting the Stock-
bridge limestone over the quartzite; but the Taconic slates,
lying to the west, with some limestone strata associated with
these slates, conformably below both, and making all older than
the Potsdam, or the basal rock of the New York series. The fact

are called, in th ti
that of 1843 the slates all the way to the Hudson river are

?
Black slate of Bald Mountain, the newest of the series; 2
this order is made consistent with the easterly dip throughout,
by supposing, in order, “to assist us in maintaining these
views, that the “superior members,” or newer rocks, were
removed by abrasion to the eastward before they were upturned,
and were “thus limited in an easterly direction ;” and, bes ve
the upper strata were probably “scantily extended east ant
west,” “the whole system having been formed in a trougt
The quartzite is still made conformable to the limestone, W ile
the black slate is at the other end of the series conformable
also. In his American Geology, published in 1855, this ordet
is in the main sustained, the quartzite and associated slates
being overlaid conformably by the Stockbridge limestone, this

e “talcose lates to

essor Emmons made out rightly the relations of the
quartzite to the Stockbridge limestone, the argument pre.
in 1 and since, for the pre-Silurian age of the bg
would have been without any foundation worthy of note.

J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quarizite. 181

?
the beds to the Quebec group on his geological map of Canada.
The quartzite, however, is still of undetermined relations, some
regarding it as at the base of the Lower Silurian, and Logan
placing it at the top.
propose to state the more important facts which I have ob-
served in connection with the Green Mountain quartzite at a
few of its localities, and some of the conclusions which they
appear to sustain.
Several sources of uncertainty attend the investigation of the
quartzite formation. :
In the first place, there are quartzites of more than one age 1n
New England, west of the Connecticut river. A Helderberg

range, whose relation to the quartzite in the gneiss is unascer-
tained. .We cannot assume, therefore, that this last 1s all of one
geological age. aoe
Another difficulty in the way of investigation arises from the
fact that the quartzite is very generally jointed, and the joints
are often so numerous and regular that they are ages | mistaken
for planes of bedding. The only safe course in all cases was
ound to be, to doubt as to the beddin unless there were

tal.
he obliteration of the bedding by impulses of lateral pres-
sure is well illustrated in the quartzite near Poughquag,

s, the
vertical portions, of the whole height of the section ap to
which have lost entirely the bedding, or division into layers,

* Pronounced as if spelt Poquaig.

182 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartzite,

fied quartzite, in which, under the lateral pressure, fractures
were produced, and where, consequently, the successive move-

\ iB !

JOINTS IN THE POUGHQUAG QUARTZITE.

In a case of this kind only a force that was comparativel aire
i

process, if continued, might result in a universal obliteration of
the bedding. :

It should be noted that after a quartzite had been consolida-
ted this obliteration of the bedding would be an impossibility,
however powerful the forces at work. The sand beds must be

eebly compacted, or the sands could not be shaken down and
re-arranged into a series of vertical or nearly vertical beds.
Hence the jointed structure, when connected with absence of

tainly not after it. peek
_ Again, the quartzites of different periods are almost identical
m structure and mineral characters, so as to afford nothing by
which they may safely be distinguished. In the same region
all kinds often occur, frora the finest and hardest granular
quartz to pebbly layers, and to conglomerates made of stones as
large as cobble-stones, on one side, and to thin friable layers 02 |
the other. The presence or absence of a pearly micaceous OF
talcoid mineral in the layers is not a distinction of value: Z
may be a pure quartz rock in one place, a0
even look gneissoid in another. > iene
€ conclusion of the whole matter is, that the age of eac
quartzite outcrop must be determined by an examination of its
special stratigraphical relations to the aligning rocks.

I proceed now to an account of the quartzite of a few oe
Mountain localities. The observations at the first two of the
following localities, Canaan and Poughquag, were made 1n con
Junction with Mr. James T. Gardner, an excellent stratigrapht
Cal observer, and one of the corps of the Clarence King ur

J. D. Dana on the Quartzite of Canaan, Ct 183

pe: Eepentigh along the 40th parallel, west of the Rocky
Moun

1. QUARTZITE OF CANAAN, Connecticut.

The village of Canaan is situated in Northwestern Connecti-
cut, in the town of North Canaan, the northern town of the
—. on the east bank of the Housatonic River. Canaan

untain, an east-by-south and west-by-north ridge, stands
Monts the southern border of the town. The quartzite out-
crops occur to the north of this mountain, and within a mile o
it, not far from the residence of Dr. Adam, on Blackberry River.

The Green Mountain series of outcrops of quartzite, consist-
ing in Massachusetts of prominent ridges and ridgelets, here
has one of its southern terminations, none existing in Connec-
ticut, as far as known, south of Canaan Mountain. This is not,
however, the most southern extension of the rock, for other

uterops occur at distant intervals twenty , miles farther west,
in Dutchess Co., New York, and to the southwestward.

e quartzite of Canteen constitutes low ledges in a region of
crystalline limestone and metamorphic schist. ‘There are six of

the ledges to Me. Joseph

Tam sudasane of
: ‘Ata mn 7 sees a large map are by Mr. coun

8 ate guarate edges; A, Dr. Alas house; C. W. the Connee
Nees ro Railroa

184 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartzite.

¥.

5 high ; feet long

feet long, and 120 feet wide, and 45 high; 4° is 1,080 ie:

and 450 wide and 70 feet above the road on the re 5 is

1,400 feet long, and 30 feet above the plain; 6 is 400 feet <
The surface between the quartzite ledges is vovered wi

and the Eolian of Vermont; and the same wide band stretches
southward, and somewhat westward, through Salisbury, Conn.,
and Dover and Pawling in Dutchess Co., N. Y. gai cen
This limestone is generally admitted to be of Lower o ee
age, and to represent more or less of the time ag ae
ciferous to the Trenton periods. The fossils from the

encrinal stems, and have been regarded as indicating that “
rock is not older than the Trenton. | Mr. Billings has apt:
evidence tending to prove that limestones of the Quebec ee
are included in the formation; and if so, the Chazy is pr

a base of limestone, while made up mainly of the gpd
schist, a fine-grained, fragile arenaceous rock, in eri on The
like. The layers of both rocks are nearly horizontal.

* Geol. of Vermont, 2 vols. 4to, 1861, i, 418. ooski

+ In a paper on a Primordial limestone in Northern laraeeny ecapitig
limestone—at Page 145 of this volume, Mr. E. Billings suggests tha’ but may be
bridge limestone may not merely include this Primordial limestone, na, which
made up of it. His conclusion is based on sections by Professor psagsiaett it.
I sha 'w, before the close of this paper, are not of a kind to Primordi
Moreover it will appear, on what I think is good evidence, that the h it may
does not enter at all into the proper Stockbridge limestone, althoug
Constitute other areas not far distant from it,

J. D. Dana on the Quartzite of Canaan, Ct. 185

of metamorphism *had to reach it through the thick horizontal
limestone formation; for the gneiss where much tilted is a
firmer rock. In some places about Canaan it is decomposed to
a depth of thirty or forty feet or more, and then resembles a
fine-grained soft sandstone.

The quartzite is for the most part the ordinary fine or
coarse-grained hard quartz rock. The ledges indicated on the
above map are more or less completely surrounded by lime-
stone, so that you cannot get from one ledge to another without
crossing a limestone interval, although the distance between is
in no case over 400 yards, and in one but little over 100. The
quartzite evidently underlies the limestone.

The rock is very strongly and evenly jointed, and nearly
vertically so, and the joints are generally the only divisional
planes, or are far more distinct than any planes of bedding.
= direction of the joints in the several ledges is N. 80° HE. to

. 87° E. :

There is an exception in ledge No. 5 to this remark with
regard to the absence of planes of stratification. This ledge
has a bluff front facing the northeast, thirty feet high, in which
the bedding is displayed in great perfection. It is made dis-

186 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartzite.

structure in the quartzite demonstrates that its origin antedates
the deposition of the limestone.

The ledges 5 and 6 (see map, p. 183) are stated to have the
opposite dip that indicates a fold. But No. 6 is altogether too
narrow to be the counterpart of No. 5, or the other half of the

+ * . . 80.
forming to the jointings of the quartzite but oftener not, may

The conclusions to which the facts lead are, therefore :—
That the quartzite is the inferior rock

(8) That the jointing, u lifting and consolidation of the
quartzite took place before the limestone was deposited.

A. FE. Verrili—A ffinities of Paleozoic Tabulate Corals, ete. 187
&

Art. XXIII.—Brief Contributions to Zovlogy from the Museum
of Yale College. No. XVIUL—On the Affinities of Paleozoic
Tabulate Corals with Existing Species; by A. E. VERRILL.

i by the lower parts of the bodies of the coral-polyps, thus
lviding the lower, unoccupied portion of these coral-cells into

former position of the base of the polyp, which occupied the
cell, as it grew upward. In most of the other corals, on the
contrary, there are either no transverse plates, or else they exist
between the radiating lamelle or septa, thus dividing each of
the radiating chambers into a series of transverse cavities, which

formed after each discharge of ova; the vacuity thus produced,

chambers, the septa formed below them in the different cham-
bers will not be coincident, or exactly at the same level in all.

We should, naturally, expect to find such variations in peri-
odicity among the species and genera of many diverse groups,

188 A. EF. Verrilli—A ffinities of Paleozove

—and this, I think, can easily be shown to be the case. Thus,
or example, the genus Celastrea V., an undoubted Astrean

forming true tabule; the genus Alveopora (figure 1, a), and
others allied to Porites and Madrepora, have true tabule; also
the genus Astreopsammia V., of the Eupsammide ; the species
of Pocillipora, a genus closely allied in its animals, and other-
wise, to Oculina and Stylophora, have very numerous and per

a Fig. 1.* b

fect transverse septa; even among the Alcyonaria, the genus
Ti ubipora occasionally has transverse internal septa ; and the
same is true of Millepora, belonging to the class of Acalephs.

Notwithstanding the very slight basis upon which the group
of “ Tabulata” was established, and disregarding the very great
and important differences which exist among the corals thus
unnaturally brought together, most writers upon corals, whether
recent or fossil, during the past twenty years have adopted this
classification without hesitation.

And yet this is but another instance forcibly illustrating the
general rule that classifications based on single characters are
very likely to be artificial and erroneous. It also illustrates the
manner in which such an error often leads to others of still
greater importance,

In 1857 Professor Agassiz made the very important discovery;
that the animals of Millepora are not true polyps, but genuine
hydroids, belonging to the class of Acalephs or Meduse. u
since Millepora is a genus belonging to the “ Tabulata,” he
immediately concluded that all the “ Tabulata” are, therefore,

ydroid Acalephs! And not content with this sufficiently bold

* Figure 1 a, a longitudinal section of Alveopora spongiosa Dana; 1 8, a VO ;
cal view of some of the cells; both much enlarged, copied from Dana’s atlas

ytes of th ixpl. Exp. For the use of this cut I am ic
debted to vont tate & Mead, the publishers of Professor Dana’s new work on
Siands.

a Proceedings of the ‘Boston Society of Natural History, vol. vi, p- 373, | -
oe fur Pourtales, in Illustrated Catal. of the Mus. of Comp. Zodlogy, No. !¥ P

Tabulate Corals with existing Species. 189

generalization, he extended it likewise to the extinct “ Rugosa”
or Cyathophylloid corals,* at first apparently with some hesita-
tion, but more recently without qualification.t
rom this conclusion, if admitted, it followed that in the
Paleozoic ages there were few, if any, true polyp-corals, but, on
the other hand, the class of Acalephs was abundantly repre-
sented by a great variety of coral-making forms, some of them
of great size, and capable of building extensive coral-reefs,
similar to those made by true polyp-corals in modern times!
Thus the geological importance of these two classes of animals
would be completely reversed, as well as our ideas of the nature
of corals and coral-reefs.
These views have been held and advanced by Professor
gassiz for many years, and have been urged quite recently,
notwithstanding the great amount of evidence that has been

3 contributions to the Natural History of the United States, vol. iii, pp. 61-3,
and vol. iv, pp. 292-6, and p. 338. :
+Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, vol. i, No. 13, p. $84, 1870.

‘

190 A. E. Verrill—Affinities of Paleozoic

In the present state of science, the only stony corals which
are known to be formed by hydroids are the several species of
Millepora. We can reasonably infer that a few other genera
having essentially the same structure, or belonging properly to
the same family, are also the corals of hydroids. But as to the
great majority of the “ Tabulata” and “ Rugosa,” there can no
longer be any reasonable doubt that they were made by true
polyps, essentially similar to those of the existing corals.

But among the Tabulate corals, after excluding the Millepo-
ride, great diversities of structure still remain, and no doubt
representatives of several families that ought to be widely sepa

in the tropical waters of the Pacific and Indian oceans.
corals are terized by rather small, tubular cells, usually

* The following quotation from the Bulletin of the Mus. of Comp. Zodlogy, »
No. 13, p. 384, Nov., 1869, will serve to illustrate the views of Professor AgassiZ:
: we now remember that the Acalephian affinities of the Tabulata are unques-
tionable, and that, with them, the Rugosa must be removed from the class of

ng :

Tabulate Corals with existing Species. 191

where the cells are crowded, as at the ends of the branches.

12, well-developed, radiating septa in several species of Pocilli-
pora (e. g., P. elongata Dana, P. plicata D., P. stellata V.) should
be sufficient evidence that such corals have no Acalephian

was abundantly represented in the Paleozoic seas by the genus
Favosites, with its numerous species, and by several other allied

Alveopora (figure 1, 5). The transverse e are variously
developed, being often nearly flat, but with the intervenin

_* On the Affinities of the Tabulate Corals, in Proceedings of the American Asso-
Clation for Adv. of Science, 1867, p. 148. Proceedings of the Essex sarong he
Me p. rik 1869. Transactions of the Connecticut Academy, i, p. 518, 1870.

ournal, vol. i, p. 389, May, 1871.
tTrans. Conn. Aoadaiee i, p. 523, (Pocillipora lacera V.). The polyps of P.
pecs as figured by Quoy and Gaimard in the Voyage of the Astrolabe, are

ur Similar.

192 A. E. Verrill—A ffinities of Paleozoic

with the Milleporide, and at best only a distant one with the
Pocilliporide, although Edwards and Haime placed it in the
same family with the latter.
In the Report on the Zodphytes of the U. S. Exploring Ex-
pein 1846, p. 509, Professor Dana instituted the family,
avositide, in which he included three sub-families: st,

ment is incorrect in several oints, it is, nevertheless, much
nearer correct than the classifications of Edwards and Haime,

oped and imperforate, completely closing the cells at interva
of about ‘05 to 20 of an inch, varying even more than this 10

of plates is found in the Silurian genus, Dania, which is said,
however, to have dmipanfonste walls, ee
e walls in the tabulated genus, Koninckia,

Whether all the species of Alveopora have complete transversé

Septa is

looked_by the describers. Edwards and Haime make no allu-
Sion whatever to such septa in their descriptions of the genus
and its species. In all the species which I have examined, how-

Yabulate Corals with existing Species. 193

ever, these septa are to be found, but they are usually more re-

and less evident than in A. spongiosa, while the walls in
most of.the other species are thicker and perforated by fewer
and smaller openings, thus producing firmer corals. In A.
dedalea Dana* the walls are much thicker and perforated by
smaller, rounded orifices, of which there are two or three verti-
cal series on each side of acell. The cells are very deep and
the transverse septa are complete though distant, and coincident
in adjacent cells. The radiating septa are represented by twelve
vertical rows of stouter spines, which often meet at the center.

numerous and thin, usually irregular, but with an evident ten-
deney to coincide in height in all the chambers of the same

* This Species, which proves to be distinct from the dedalea of Forskal, etc., has
Tae ame 4 Versdieea by Prof. Dana in his recent work on Corals and Coral

t Annals and Magazine of Natural History, vol. vi, p. 384, Nov., 1870.
Am. Jour, Scl.—Turep Series, VoL. III, No. 15.~—Maxcu, 1
13

194 A. E. Verrill—A ffinities of Paleozoic Tabulate Corals, etc.

doubtful whether the group can be maintained even as @ SUD.
family, for Alveopora and Goniopora combine the characters of
perhaps, be provisionally divided into three sub-families; Por-
ITIN#, for Porites and the closely allied genera ; ALVEOPORINA,
to include Alveopora, Goniopora, Litharea, and, if considered
distinet, Koninckia and Favositipora ; FAVOSITINS, to embrace
Favosites, nsia, Michelina, and the other closely allied
genera. It is probable, however, that even such a slight sep®
ration of Alveopora and Favosi

t.

seem the more remarkable, considering the extreme delicacy and
fragility of these corals, and also the fact that, so far as know?
they are all shallow water and reef species.

* The genus Montipora, for which Edwards and Haime constituted their seem
sub-family of Poritidee (Montiporine), belongs properly to the Madreporide, # re it
ed elsewhere by the writer (Trans. Conn. Acad., vol. i, p. 501), and whe

was of. Dan
the writer in 1870 (Trans. Conn. Acad., i, p. 518). Mr. Kent, in the article referred
to, pub simultaneously with mine ssed th

im
hydroid polyps, as I had one both in the r refe a

. Dae sas it
1867. This coincidence of opinion, arrived at through studies pursued in se
Ways and approached from different directions, could not fail to be gratifying
to the writer and to Mr. Kent,

'
E
|

feo eee ee Se

B. Silliman— Geological and Mineralogical Notes, etc. 195

ArT. XXIV.— Geological and Mineralogical Notes on some of the
Mining Districts of Utah Territory, and especially those of the
Wahsatch and Oquirrh Ranges of Mountains ; by B. SILLIMAN.

WITHIN the last two or three years, important developments
have been made in the mineralogical and metallurgical re-
sources of the eastern ranges of the North American Cordilleras
of the Great Basin, and especially in the Wahsatch and Oquirrh
Mountains of Utah, in the valley between which flows the Jor-

an river, pouring the fresh waters of Utah Lake into the
Great Salt Lake. It is in these two ranges of mountains that
the most important and best known of the “ mining districts ”
of Utah Territory are established.

Commencing on the western slopes of the Wahsatch, near
Salt Lake City, we find in order, going southward, the districts
known as ‘‘ New Eldorado,” “ Big Cottonwood,” “ Little Cotton-
wood,” and “ American Fork”; on the eastern flanks of the
same range are the “Uintah” and “Snake Creek” districts ;
while on the southern extension of the Wahsatch, are the

The writer had occasion, in 1864, while studying the structure
of the parallel ranges of Nevada, to note the fact, that these ranges
were characterized by the existence in each of parallel zones of
metallic veins; sometimes of the precious metals, almost without
admixture of base metals, as in the Plutonic rocks of Western

*Two hundred miles farther south, and chiefly in the counties of Beaver and
ashingt Beaver River range” and “Mineral range, are
Ohi. n, Star, Lincoln, Granite and Beaver districts in Beaver county, an’
Py and Warsaw districts in Piute county: some of these are probably silage
hoe as yet only imperfectly explored districts, yielding copper, ‘ron, gold,
silver, antimony, bismuth, &e.

196 B, Siliman— Geological and Mineralogical Notes

Nevada, full of evidence of hot springs, solfatara and volcanic
action, and yielding such mines as those of the Comstock lode and
of Aurora, Bodie, and the White Mountains; or again, those like
the Toyabe range, yielding silver with base metals, as antimony,
lead, arsenic, copper, zinc, &c., as is also true in a more marked
degree of the Humboldt range. So, in the present case, we find
in the Wahsatch and Oquirrh ranges ores of silver, either argen-
tiferous galenite, or largely epigene species secondary to galenite,
with some ores of copper, antimony, zinc, &c., from which silver
is rarely entirely absent. Prof. W. P. Blake, in his catalogue of
Californian minerals sent to the Paris Exposition (1867), dis-
tinctly points out this parallelism in the metallic contents of the
ranges of the American Cordilleras, and the same feature 1s
fully recognized by Mr. King in his chapter on Mining
tricts introductory to “Mining Industry,” vol. iii of the Geo
logical Exploration of the Fortieth Parallel, p. 5. :

The structure of the Wahsatch and Oquirrh ranges is fortu-
nately exposed to view by the cafions, which cut profoundly
into them from the valleys. It is in these cafions that mos of
the mining districts are located, and through them the summits of
the ranges are conveniently reached.

The Big Cottonwood ‘and Little Cottonwood cafions, for
example, expose profound sections of the Wahsatch range, cut

eastwardly across the structure of these mountains, forming
a V-shaped chasm with very precipitous sides and obliquely
transverse to the axis of the main range. Thus the poy. A
direction of the Little Cottonwood cafion is about N. 62° B,
cutting the main range at an angle of about thirty degrees.

rock extends up the cafion for several miles, the lines of original

metamorphic of conglomerates, an opinion first suggested to m¢
- Blak i

ing the Mormon Temple at Salt Lake City. These qualTy-
ing operations have been confined to splitting the great fallen

on the Wahsatch and Oguirrh Mountains. 197

masses of granite on the surface, and we may here see fresh
faces thus split, measuring, at least, twenty feet vertical by more
than this laterally.

At a cabin known as “ Garrard’s house,” some six or eight
miles up this cafion, is a fine terminal moraine of the ancient
glacier system, forming a complete dam across the cafion, over
which the road now winds and through which the mountain
torrent finds its way after giving motion to Garrard’s mill. The
surface of this old moraine I found to be approximately 2140
feet above the Townsend House in Salt Lake City. The Town-
send House is about 60 feet above Great Salt Lake, so that the
lower end of the ancient glacier system of the Wahsatch at this
point was, in round numbers, 2200 feet above the present level
of Salt Lake, or 6400 feet above sea level, assuming 4200 feet to
be the proper elevation of this. inland sea, as commonly stated.

The following heights were determined by one of Green’s
aneroid barometers, and may be considered as approximate.

Mesa over Salt Lake Valley, -..------------- 510 “
Emmaville, half-way house,
Garrard’s House, top of old moraine, -------- 2200 “
Central City, six miles above Garrard’s,....-. 4460 “

MN VOR Dee oa pes eae 5560“

The loftiest point yet measured in the Wahsatch is the Twin
Peaks, which Clarence King has determined. I have not seen

s figures, but they are said to make this point over 12,000 feet
above tide. ;

indicates for a large part of the mass a lower horizon. I find

by chemical analysis that the white limestones, containing the
contain a little silica,

som © . . .
i completely free ftom silica and iron, but containing a little
um

%

y

198 = BB. Silliman—Geological and Mineralogioal Notes

and is easily reduced toa fine granular non-crystalline powder,

ile the non-magnesian beds beneath resemble dolomite im
fracture, though quite free from magnesia. They are non-fos-
siliferous so far as observed by me. Whether they are strictly
conformable to the crystalline white limestones is doubtful,
and further explorations are needful to decide this point, which
is one of considerable interest in view of their metallurgica
contents.

The great chamber of the Emma Mine, which is an ovoidal
cavity measuring, so far as explored, about 110 feet vertical by
about 80 by 110 feet transverse, was found to be filled almost
exclusively with epigene species, the product of oxidation of
sulphides, and maak By of removal without the aid of gunpowder,
for the most part. The study of this mass reveals the interest-
ing fact that it is very largely composed of metallic — =

pe

Mitek once eee aye ee 0°48
CAG, 555-2 ole 84°14 Atuming, . 2.2.1. 55 -<-- 8 a
prepare ese ee 2°37 Mapnesia,.. >. ---,----+"<"" 0.2
Antimony,.--- ---- Pere Name i) eee 0-72
Copper: i S55 0°83 Carbonic acid,..----------- ie
BIG cl CIES 2°92 90°42
Manganese, -_.-._. O15 Oxygen and water by diff, 9°58
-Os te ui wets 3°54 —
100°00

The quantity of silyer obtained from this lot of ore was 156
troy ounces to the gross ton of 2240 pounds. :

his analysis sheds important light on the chemical history

of this remarkable metallic deposit, and will aid us in the dy

‘of the paragenesis of the derived species. It is pretty, certain

on the Wahsaich and Oquirrh Mountains. 199
esi od) ies. Soups. tne wipes 40°90
Metallic sulphides, ._._. iv ae OBO
Al ‘35, Mg -25, Oa -72, Mn? Mn -20, 1°52
95°02
Water, carbonic acid and loss,.....-.._-.-- 4°95

This calculation assumes that the sulphides are as follows, viz:
Sralemite. oo. oe ee 38°69
peibnite, See ee eee 3°30
Poe, OO 103
Sphalerite (blende), ..........-.------------ 3°62
FPG os 5°42

Argentite, _ . ._ 0°54==52°60

This statement excludes the presence of any other gangue
than silica, and considering that the ores exist in limestone, the
almost total absence of lime in the composition of the average
mass is certainly remarkable. The amount of silica found is
noticeable, since quartz is not seen as such in this great ore
chamber, nor so far as I could find, in other parts of the mine.
The silica can haye existed in chemical combination only in the
most inconsiderable quantity, since the bases with which it could

! search among the contents of the mine The miners
of the “ chlorides,” and unscientific observers have repeated the
Statement that silver chloride is found in the Emma Mine, but

eat i a) territories

mining population of the centr r

of the United State tinction between horn silver and of silver. Ped

*rror arising, as I am persuaded, from supposing the ochreous ores to be chlorides
Rot 80 perfectly developed as to be sectile.

200 B. Silliman— Geological and Mineralogical Notes

districts of the Wahsatch just named, and the occurrence of
pyromorphite is extremely doubtful. :

Molybdie acid, however, exists pretty uniformly disseminated
in the mines of the Wahsatch, in the form of wulfenite,
Although it occurs in minute quantity, it is rarely absent, and
may be regarded as a mineralogical characteristic of the districts
of the two Cottonwoods and of the American Fork. For this
reason a few particulars will be in place here.

in the ochraceous ores. In the “Emma Mine,” vugs, or
geodes, are occasionally found lined with botryoidal, apple-

among
crystalline at first, and as it accumulated becoming fibrous an
amorphous, completely enclosing and capping the other species.
Wulfenite occurs also in this mine, as likewise in the “ Flag
staff,” the “‘ Savage,” and “Robert Emmet,” without the cala-
mine, but never, as far as observed, without cerussite and other
carbonates. In the “Savage,” masses of cerussite with various
oxides are interpenetrated by the tabular crystals of wulfenite.
wulfe

these districts, occurring in the magnesian to :
Tam informed, or have observed, wulfenite has not been hither-
to found in any of the other mining districts of Utah; but

pee ks upon
In a subsequent paper will be Pee ee cor dinesls
the Oquirrh range Kin some of its ores, and 20
from other districts of

New Haven, January, 1872.

202 HT, A. Nicholson on Cornulites and Tentaculites,

ArT. XXV.—On the genera Cornulites and Tentaculites, and on
a new genus Conchicolites; by HENRY ALLEYNE NICHOLSON,
M.D., D.Se., Professor of Natural History and Botany in
University College, Toronto.

I, CornvuLtires AND CONCHICOLITES.

Dm
's *
D
S
=
a
=]
0g
et
(2)
=
ia]
J
wm
a
=]
ae)
fq?)
4
st
ie)
B
co
‘<
™m
io)
po)
°
B

unlike that of the Serpulae. The walls are of very considerable
thickness, and are composed of
a number of large rounded or
oval cellular spaces or cavities,
bounded by thin walls; which

longitudinal series of imbrica-

~
smaller end directed toward the Upper portion of the tube of Gorm
mouth of the tube, and fitting — ee Dudley, b.
into the larger aperture of the Cast of the tube of the same, nat. size.
ring next it in the series. The

rings are generally narrower and more crowded together towam
the fixed end of the tube, and the entire surface of the cast 8

several inches, and a circumference of about two inches at its

and a new genus Conchicolites. 208

aperture. This species may be recognized, not only by its great
size and by the thickness of the investing tube, but by the fact
that the external surface of the tube is covered with very
numerous and fine longitudinal strie, communicating to the
fossil something of the aspect of a cora

Recently, several specimens of a new fossil have come under
my notice, which I at first referred to Cornulites, but which I
ain now disposed to place, provisionally at any rate, in a new
genus, under the name of Conchicolites, under the specific title
of C. gregarius. From their peculiar mode of occurrence, these
fossils are of considerable interest, and no doubt can be enter-
tained as to their being truly the remains of tubicolar annelides.
Conchicolites gregarius occurs in b
the form of small clustered tubes
(fig. 2), generally slightly curved,

pering towards one end, an
attached by their smaller extrem-
thes to some foreign body. Most [
of the specimens in my possession [
occur attached in great numbers
to the dead shells of Orthocerata

ood v . .
tesembled in its habits the mod- garius. Natural size. Only the mouths
= Serp ulae, and its zoological of the tubes are visible in this speci-
affinities are altogether beyond men. 0. Cast of the tube of another
doubt. specimen of the same.

All of my specimens, which show more than the mouths of
the tubes, are in the state of casts; and I am unable to sp
Positively as to the characters of the tube itself, except from one
or two fragmentary examples. The disappearance, In some
cases, of the walls, leaving merely the internal casts, renders it
tolerably certain that the tubes were calcareous. 1t is also to
be regretted that the materials at present in my hands do not
render it possible to determine the presence or absence of the
cellular structure which is so conspicuous in

rius. In the specimens growing on Orthocerata,

Where the Orthoceras is broken C
to get a view of the surfaces of the tubes. Owing, however,

204 H. A. Nicholson on Cornulites and Tentaculites,

ful examination, however, of this portion of the fossil has con-
vinced me that the exterior of the tube presents the same
appearance as the cast, consisting, namely, of a series of imbri-
eated rings. There are, therefore, no traces of the longitudinal
strize which distinguish the outer surface of the tube of Cornw
lites serpularius. é

The casts of the tubes of Conchicolites gregarius (fig. 2 6) have
exactly the characters of those of Cornulites serpularius, but on
a greatly reduced scale. Each consists of a succession of short,
imbricated, conical rings, the wider ends of which are directet
towards the smaller end of the tube, whilst their surface 1s
smooth. From their small size, the casts, on a cursory examina-

longitudinal strie of the external surface. al
Locality and formation.—Wenlock limestone of Dudley
and Ludlow rocks of Westmoreland, England. _
Concuicouires Nich.—Animal social, inhabiting a caleate
ous (?) tube, attached in clustered masses to some solid olor
The tube is conical, slightly curved, attached by its sm fae
extremity. The wall of the tube is thin, its external su a
devoid of longitudinal strie. The tube thin, composed of sho?!
imbricated rings, but apparently destitute of any cellular ee® ‘
ture. Cast of the tube com of short conical rings, its SU?
face completely smooth, and destitute of strie or furrows.

and a new genus Conchicolites, 205

Conchicolites gregarius Nich.—Tubes closely in contact, at-
tached by their smaller ends to dead shells. Tube varying in
length from + to $ an inch, and having a diameter at its mout
of about half a line. Conical rings which compose the tube
about four in the space of a line.

rom the great similarity presented by casts of the tubes of
this species to those of Cornulites, I was at first disposed to
sdpnid this as a small example of the latter genus. more

of its tube. In the face of these differences, it is somewhat
singular to find that the internal casts of the two should be so
absolutely undistinguishable except in point of size. Conchaco-
lites presents some resemblances to the genus Salterella of
Mr. Billings, defined as consisting of “small, slender, elongate-
conical tubes, consisting of several hollow cones placed one
within another, the last one forming the chamber of habitation
of the animal.’ In Salterella, however, the tubes appear to be
solitary, and no evidence has been adduced to show that they
were attached to foreign bodies, though Mr. Billings regards
them as allied to Serpulites.

ality and formation.—Conchicolites gregarius occurs not
uncommonly attached to the shells of Orthoceras Brongniarti, 10
— flaggy shales of Caradoc age, Dufton, Westmoreland, Eng-
an

Tl. TenTACULITES.

It may not be out of place to add here a few remarks on the
genus Tentaculites of Schlotheim, though most paleontologists

eading opinions as to the nature of the fossils in question, some
arding them as tubicolar annelides, whilst others, followin
Austin, refer them to the P A

n s d
whilst Tentaculites has been referred to the tubicolar annelides,

206 HH. A. Nicholson on Cornulites and Tentaculites, ete,

there have not been wanting observers who would place Cornu:
lites amongst the Pteropoda.
The shell of Tentaculites, as in well known, has the form of a

o specimen of Tentaculites has ever been found attached to
any foreign body ; and though this of itself would not be fatal to
the view that the genus belongs to the Zubicola, the mode of
occurrence of the fossil completely negatives this supposition.
Thus, Tentaculites are usually found in great numbers together,
often over large areas, confusedly scattered over the surfaces of
the laminae of deposition. If we had to deal with a tubicolar
annelide, it seems certain that specimens would be found im
bedded vertically in the rock, with the closed apex downwards,
and the aperture directed upwards; or élse we should find
them attached by their smaller extremities to shells and other
foreign objects. On the contrary, the aspect presented by 4
slab covered with Zéntaculites is precisely that which would be the
result of the fortuitous aggregation on the sea-bottom of a num-
ber of small shells, sinking from the upper strata of the ocean.
All the evidence, then, at present in our possession goes to
show that Tentaculites was an oceanic genus, comprising minute
pelagic creatures which swarmed at the sarface of the Silurian
seas, and the shells of which were scattered in myriads on the

other, having all the characters of Cornulites.” It might, there
fore, in some cases, be impossible to decide whether a give?

Meteorites of the Hacienda “La Concepcion, ete. 207

Art. XXVI.—On the Meteorites of the Hacienda “ La Concepcion”
and San Gregorio; by JuAN UrcinpdI. (Extract from a letter
to Prof. Henry, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, to
whom we are indebted for the communication.)

sembles the enclosed drawings [drawings not sent].
Nothing is known, with certainty, regarding the fall of this

meteorite, nor is it mentioned in the deed of this Hacienc

whence, unburied, it was taken about a hundred yards off,

t+ knew it, in 1823, and from there my brothers and I

tion.

With much difficulty, and after spoiling chisels of good steel,
several pieces have been cut at different times, resembling the
two which I now send you, leaving a brilliant surface where
separated. Even a bridle-bit, knives, and some other small ob-

Was presented to the late Spanish Commander General of Chi-
huahua. The blacksmiths assert that the metal is very ductile

state of fusion, since such
holes are identical with the cavities left by bursting bubbles. °
In regard to its weight and dimensions, S eRe I fin
i i thus:

208 § D. Kirkwood on the mean Motions of Jupiter, etc.

89,299 cubic inches. Considering the metal as cast iron, the
weight of which is to the weight of distilled water, frozen, as
2,070 is to 1000, and that the cubic centimeter of such water
weighs 20-031 grains, we may infer that the meteorite weighs
164,537, “arrobas!”*

This is all the information I can give regarding the meteorite
of this Hacienda, and I fear it is too scanty, and perhaps too lit-
tle exact, to satisfy the learned professor for whom it is intended.
The pieces that I send will enable him to ascertain the sub
stances of which it is composed ; and if some photographer
should come in this direction, I will have it photographed, and

ill take much pleasure in sending you a copy.

I am still less informed in regard to the meteorite of San
Gregorio, since I have seen it only twice, in 1856.+ tis larger
than the one at this place, sad seems to consist of the same
material, has very much the shape of a sofa, and bears an inserlp:
tion, which reads thus (translated) :

“Only God with his power
This iron will destroy,
For the world will have
No one able to divide it in pieces.”

In my opinion, this meteorite and the one we have here are
fragments of another much larger one, that probably burst at 4
suflicient height from the earth to cast one piece on this Hace
enda, another one on that of San Gregorio, 10 leagues to the
northwest, and other larger ones on Chupaderos, 20 leagues
the northwest of this place. I have not seen the latter ones,
which are said to be the most curious; but I have already taken
some steps to have them carefully examined, and I promise
myself the satisfaction of transmitting the result to you.

enn

Arr. XXVIL—On the Mean Motions of Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus,
and Neptune; by Professor DANIEL KIRKWOOD.

THE recent note of Professor Peirce,t announcing his dis:
covery of some TWh ee ee between the mean motions

while engaged

* One arroba is equivalent to 25 lbs, ourbal,
ee rs fog article on this meteorite by Dr. J. Lawrence Smith, see this J¢
> 4 i :
thi This Journal for January, 1872. It will be observed that Professor : aa
oe equation is identical with that discovered by Professor Newcomb inl
Gould’s Astr. Journ., vol. v, p. 101.

A. E. Verrill—Additions to the Molluscan Fauna, etc. 209

putting on record for future discussion
2n¥ — 3n%§ —11n™! =30 ke ee (1)
2n'—21n¥''+30n"! 280 ws Oe I ae
3n°— 8n¥i— QnVii + TnV=0 ae a ERS

planetary elements. Of these, the following may be worth

Ooi ae ehny 26 ee ee
257n* ~—844n"! +5870"! =0 Mies siete agdr (5
both of which, I believe, are accurately true. The fifth, how-

Bloomington, Indiana, January, 1872.

Art. XX VIIL—Brief Contributions to Zoblogy, from the Museum
of Yale College. No. XIX.—Recent Additions to the Molluscan
Fauna of New England and the adjacent waters, with notes on
other species; by A. E. VERRILL.

THE new edition of Gould’s Invertebrata of Massachusetts,
edited by Mr. W. S. Binney, and published in 1870, was in-

fro
it included all, or nearly all, the species known from
land and the adjoining B

is my intention to enumerate the marine pate from New ct
land and closely adjacent waters, not included in Binney’s Goul
* Newcomb’s Orbit of Neptune, p. 76.
Am. Jour. Sct,—Tu1rp Series, Vou. III, No. 15,—Makon, 1872,
14

210 A. E. Verrili— Recent additions to the

whether previously known or more recently discovered, so far
as known to me from personal observation or from the state-

‘ments, believed to be reliable, of others;:* to describe several 2

tions on the distribution, structure, and affinities of species 2

previously known.
As more detailed descriptions and fuller synonymy will be
given in a work on the Mollusca of the coast of southern New

England, now in preparation for the Transactions of the Con-

necticut Academy of Science, the species will be treated here as
briefly as possible. It is believed, however, that the figures
will prove sufficient, even with short descriptions, for the easy
identification of the new species.

Last of species not included in Binney’s Gould.

0
species at Stonington needs confirmation. Linsley’s species

Aclis polita V., sp. nov. Plate vi, figure 5, x5 diameters.
K. Verrill.

- Sp. nov. PIL. vi, fig. 4, x5 diameters. |
Vineyard Sound, 8 to 10 fath., shelly,—A. E. V., S. L Smith.
Stylifer Stimpsonii V., sp. nov. On Euryechinus Drébachiensis V.,

in 82 fathoms, off Long Island,—Capt. Gedney. ‘
Cecum costatum = Caecum Coopert Smith (non C. Coopers Carp)

1863. Pl vi, fig. 6, x24 diameters. Vineyard Sound, 6 to

fath.,— A. E. Verrill; Long Island,—Sanderson Smith.
Doris bifida V., this Journal, II, vol. 1, p. 406, 1871.

Eastport, Me., and Savin Rock near New Haven, under stones

at low water, laying eggs Oct., 1871,—A. E. Verrill.
Doridella obscura V., this Journal, II, vol. 1, p. 408, 1872.

. Near New Haven at Savin Rock and off South-end, 4-6 fath-

* The following species need ¢ ion: abagella Con., Newpors
oo (Dekay); Tellina 1 ae “(Bteatiord, Conn.,—Linsloy
Dekay, Lit nrg tomington,—Linsley ; N. Jersey,—A. E. V.); Fusus é

¥5 Littorinella levis (Dek.) = Rissoa Stimpsoni Smith (Stratford, Dekay)-

;
:
f

.

Molluscan Fauna of New England, 211

—A.E. V. and E. T. Nelson; Great Egg Harbor, N. J.,
9 ices shelly,—A. E. V., 8. L "Smith, and J. EK. Todd.
Dendronotus robusius V. , Op. cit., p. 405, fig.
Eastport, Me., and Grand Menan, —A. E. V. and O. Harger.
Cavolina tridentata. Fresh shells dredged in 20 to 25 fathoms
off Martha’s Vineyard,—A. E. V., Dr. A. S. Packard.
Styliola vitrea V., sp. nov. Plate vi, ’ figure 7, x8 diameters, off
Gay Head, among wees E. V. and Dr. A. S. Packard.

Angulus nonesate V. Plate vi, ees 2, X5 diam.; 28, nat. size.
“V.

Gastranella tumida V., sp. nov. PI. vi, fig. 8, x 16 diam., 38, x6
diam. Off South- end, near New Haven, 4 to 6 fath.—A. E. V.

Semele equalis, = Amp hidesma equalis Say.
Stonington, okie ,—Linsley. This has not been found by
recent collectors on this coast, and eka needs niga me

Cryptodon obesus V., sp. nov. Plate vii, figure 2, x8 diam
Off Martha’s Vineyard, 20 to 25 Gahtanes mud,—A. E. v.,
Dr. A. S. Packard.

Cyclocardia Novanglie = Actinobolus (Cyclocardia) Novanglue
Morse, first Annual Report of the ne of the Peabody

» fig-
ure, 1869. Nea r New Haven,—Perkins. The relations of
this form are not vel fully ascertained.

Modiola hamatus. PI. vii, fig. 3, X2diam.,= Mytilus hamatus Say.
New Haven harbor and vicinity, usually attached to oysters,
—G. H. Perkins, A. E. Verrill; Gulf of ace Bey |
Cynthia pulchella v2 this Journal, IL, vol. i, p. 98, 1871.
Eastport,—A. E. V.; Ne wfoundland Banks,—T. M. Coffin
Glandula arenicola VE ‘sp. 0
Murray Bay, Gulf of St. Ladrendds —Dr. J. W. Daw
Molgula nelle V.. this Journal, vol. i, p. 56, fig. ‘3, "1871.
Bay of Fundy,—A. E. V., 8. L Smith, O. Harger.
Molgula eee VO PL vit, te x2 diam. ; op. cit, p. 57,
g. 4b, 1871,
E astport, Me. ret E. V.: off Martha’s Le gi —A. Hyatt.
Molgula lidoralis Vi an cit., p. 56, fig. 4%, 1
poe Me VSL Smith, 0. pails
olgula pannosa v. oO rs: p- 56 fig.
Bay of Fundy,— ¥,,0m, V.: Murray Ba ay,—J. W. Daw
Molgula pellucida V. = Molgula producta aed pl. 22, figs. ‘B16,
316, but not the description (non Stim eer
Eugyra pilularis V. = Molgula acme lL Vand 56, fig. th c.
astport, Me. and Grand Menan,— “ L Smi
off Martha’s Vineyard, 20 fathoms, ae

212 A. E. Verrill— Recent additions to the .

Perophora viridis V., this Journal, vol. ii, p. 859, 1871.
Wood's Hole and toner eg Sound, low water to 10 fath. —
A. E. V. and S. L Smith

Amouroucium glabrum V., t this Journ., vol. i, p. 288, figs. rie:
1871. Eastport, Me. and Bay of F undy,—A. K. V3 M
Bay,—J. W. Dawson.

Amouroucium pallidum V., a cit., p. 289.
Eastport, Me. and Bay o f Fundy,— A. E. V.; off Martha's
Vineyard,—A. Hyatt.

Amouroucium pellucidum V.. op. cit., p. 2
Point Judith, R. L,—J. Leidy ; Vineyard Sean etc.,—A. E.
Ye L Smith, J. 'E. Todd.

Amouroucium stellatum ee - cit., p. 291.

Vineyard Sound, Mass., 1 to 10 fathoms,—A. E. V.,S.1
Smith, J. E. Tod dd, H. E. Webste

mouroucium constellatum V., this Ja our., ii, p. 359, 1871. With
the preceding.

Macrochinum crater V.; op. cit., i, ae te 23-25, 1871.

Banks of Mughiaatine = Tt. M. Co

Lissoclinum aureum V., op. ns : Dp 444, rig 26, 1871.
Eastport, Me.,—A. E. ha rill,

oe tenerum V., cit., p. 445, 1871.

—A.E.V.; Newhatedignd Banks, —T. M. Coffin.

Lepicinan albidum V. , op. cit., p. 446.

g I. Sound to Labrador; common in Vineyard Sound,
8-10 fathoms, on shells and stones.

Leptoclinum luteolum V.; op. cit., p. 446. of

Vineyard Sound, 8-10 fath. SEF E. V., S. I. Smith; Bay 0
A. E. V.

Fundy,—

BRYOZOA.
Aleyonidium ramosum V., sp. nov. PL viii, fig. 10, x2 diam.
Long L Sound, near New Haven, in 1 to 5 5 fa th., ) oe

forming large, much branched, arborescent clumps, 2 voi
more high,—A. E. V.: ; Vineyard Sound, Mass. and G
Egg Harbor, N. J..—A. E. V., S. L Smith and J. E. Todd.

The following species have been found on the shores of Long
Island, but ae ye in New i, wae waters :
onax fossor osa Say ; Sigaretus perspectivus

bas pe bade aps cae (Staten L); Margarita orn

Changes in the Nomenclature of Species previously recorded.
a 18 not intended to revise, at this time, the entire list
ew

land species; but merely to a aie a baie of
more important and necessary changes. Mr. Dall as alreaty

* Proceedings of the Bost. Soc. of Nat. Hist., xiii, p. 240, ee Ie

i
"

Molluscan Fauna of New England. 218

given a revised list of the species described in Binney’s Gould,
and has referred the species to the recently proposed genera of
the Messrs Adams and others, but not always correctly, even if
we admit the validity of the genera recognized by him. _Correc-
tions have also been made by others, which are here omitted.

Nassa vibex, var. jretensis = N. vibex (pars) Say ; Binney =. /re-
tensis Perkins,

Astyris lunata = Columbella lunata (Say) +B. Wheatleyi Dekay
(var.) =C. Gouldiana Ag.

Lunatia heros = Natica heros Say +N. triseriata Say (var).

Elysiella catulus (gen. nov.) Plate vii, figs. 5, x3 diam., and 5",
=Placobranchus catulus Ag.

Onchidoris tenella V., this Jour., vol. 1, p. 407, =Doris tenella Ag.

Onchidoris grisea V., 1. v. = Doris grisea Stimp. (MSS.) in Gould.

Onchidoris pallida V., 1. ¢. = Doris pallida Ag., in Gould.

Ensatella Americana (Gould, nom. prov.) = Solen ensis Gould
(non Linn.

Periploma papyracea. Plate vii, figs. 1, 1", x4 diam., 1, x30

- diam.; pl. viii, fig. 1 (anatomy) =Anatina papyracea Say.

Turtonia nitida V. (sp. nov.) Plate vii, fig. 4, x40 diam., and

G44, 7: hors).
Astarte undata Gould (nom. prov.)=.A. suleata Gould, pars (not

Astarte quadrans Gould= A. quadrans, +A. Portlandica Migh.

Pecten tenuicostatus =P. tenuicostatus, +P. fuscus Linsl. (young).

Anomia glabra V. =A. ephippium (pars) Linn. ; Gould, +A, elee-
trica Binney (non Linn.), +A. sguamula Gould (non Linn.),

young.
Ostrea Virginiana Gm. = 0. Virginica Lam. + 0. borealis Lam.
+0. Canadensis Lam.
Leptoclinum luteolum V. = Didemnium roseum Binney (non Sars).
Botryllus Gouldii V., 1. c. =B. Schlosseri Gould (non Pallas).
Molgula Manhattensis V., \. c. =Ascidia Manhattensis Dekay +A.
amphora Ag. ;
olgula psammophora V. =A. psammophora Ag. ; Binney.
Eugyra glutinans V. (Moll. sp.) = Glandula jfibrosa B., pars (spe-
cies figured), not of Stimpson.
Glandula mollis Stimp. = @. moilis B., pars (not the figures).
Pera crystallina V. (Mill. sp., 1845)=Pera pellucida Stimp. 1852.
ae ia partita Stimp. PI. xi fe ‘ =C. partita, +? C. rugosa.
. (MSS.) + C. stellifera V. (var.
ress cage 2 # beh’? earnea Ag. + C. gutta Stimp. +¢
placenta (pars) Pack. (species figured by Binney).

214 Scientific Intelligence.

Oynthia monoceros (MOll. sp.) =@. condylomata Pack.

C. echinata (Linn. sp.) =C. echinata, + C. hirsuta Ag. (young).

Ciona tenella V., 1. c. =Ascidia tenella Stimp. +A. ocellata Ag.

Ascidiopsis complanatus, gen. noy. (Fab. sp.) Plate viii, fig. 8,
part of gill, =Ascidia callosa Stimp.

[To be continued.)

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.

I CHEMISTRY AND PuHysIcs.

ing liquid, in suc manner that the vapors. which
subsequently rise shall pass through the condensed liquid, and
thus be in a measure washed. The apparatus employed consists

es ° s of the gauze are about 0°75 of a squat
millimeter, and the caps are easily formed by stamping in a press
or mo of hard wood. The tubes and wire caps are easily

author gives a number of new determinations of the boiling ae
antl

Chemistry and Physics. 215

otherwise it may be broken by the rapid formation of the hydrate.

In any case, the process enables the chemist to prepare, in a few

hours, several liters of absolute aleohol.— Ann. der Chemie und
Ww

previously saturated with chlorine. The bulbs were so place
that each could be illuminated, by a definite portion of the spec-
trum. Their distance from the prism varied from 1 to 2 me

observed. When A was placed in the blue, violet, or ultra-violet,

and B was dark, the expansion amounted, as a maximum, to 7°".

Corresponding results were obtained by aie the relative
i e

ere to the chemical rays, as all bodies do when exposed to heat.

*

verted into heat, and thus cause expansion.

consider them as exerting no heating effect. i

The author considers the first of these views as most probable,
and promises a further investigation of the subject.—Pogg. oti
bes x . * :
n the Ammonia-platinum Bases.—Cixve has communi-

216 Scientific Intelligence.

ii NH
1. Platosamine (Reiset’s second base), Pt | NH,
ii
2. Platoso-semi-diamine, Pt { NH,. NH,
ae 5, § NH,. NH;
3. Platoso-mono-diamine, Pe} NH,
i | NA
4. Platoso-diamine (Reiset’s first base), t NH, : NH,
iv NH
5. Platinamine (Gerhardt’s base), Be | NH,
6. Platino-semi-diamine, Pt | NH,. NH;
; ae p, § NH. NH;
7. Platino-mono-diamine, Br} NH,
* (NB
&. Platino-diamine (base of Gros & Rawsky), Pe} NH, E NH,
NH,
wo ae
9. Diplatinamine, Pts{ 4 H,
NH,
t (NH,.NH;
10. Diplatoso-semi-diamine, Pt, 1 NH,.NH; ©
Yb ee NH,
11. Diplatino-semi-diamine, Pt, NH, . NH;
NH,. NH,
vi_ NH, . NH,
12. Diplatino-diamine, Pt, NH,. es
NH,

N |

In the present paper the author describes the salts of —
very complex radicals, understanding simply by this a , one

plex of atoms which may be transferred without change from

compound to another.

8 .

2NH,.0 80,

If we denote by R the molecule, Pt 2NH, g ?

we have the following compounds as crystalline salts: ae
RC+2H,0, PtOly.2RCl{2H,0, RB,+2H,0, RNOy
R,50,+3H,0, R,€,0,+2H,0, R,€rO,+xH,0, R,€2%
0H

If we denote by R the molecule, Pt phe >
‘ 3
©... tH,

'

C
we have the following crystalline salts :
s +
OAD Olt CpPtCls-+2H,0, R.2NO,, 2(R-5,)
Cl

3H, 6, RCr, 0, +H, 9.

Chemistry and Physics. 217

The iodide and iodo-nitrate of platino-diamine give with ammonia
two compounds having respectively the formulas :
I

I
2NH,.I 2NH,.NO,
yeep ese: Pees =F Ms NH, .NH
2NH,.1 2NH,.NO,
I

The first of these bodies gives with nitric acid a nitrous-iodo-
NO,

. iv .

nitrate of platino-diamine, Pt ONE? ; Nets the second gives

with nitric acid the iodo-nitrate of diplatino-diamine,

I
oNH,.NO,
« | 9NH,. NO
Pts) oNH,. NO,’
aNH,.NO,
]

This salt is decomposed by chlorhydric acid, and gives small
octrahedrons having the formula, Pt ONE : a By double
Cl

decomposition it gives the salts:
vi va
Pt, .8SNH,.I,, Pty. SNH, . (SO,)olo, Pts . SNH; . (PO,H) ale,
Pt,.8NH,.(©,0,)oI,, Pt.. SNH, . (N@5),(H9).,
. 6N6,+4H,0, Pt,.8NH, . Cl,(@H),+H,9,
Pt, .8NH, . (S@,),(OH), +2H,0, Pt, . SNH, . (PO,)2+2H,9,
Pt, , 8NH . (€r,0,).(OH), and Ft, . 8NH, . (©,9,)a +2H,9.
By the action of bromine on the basic nitrate
Pt, .8NH,. (N®,),(H9),,
Cleve obtained the bromo-nitrate Pt,.8NH, .(N;),Brz, from
which by double decomposition the following salts \ ere iormed:
. 8NH, .Cl,. Br,, Pt, . 8NH, . (SO ,)2Br.+2H,9,
tg.8NH, . Br, .(€,HO,),.©o 4 :
— Bulletin’ Mentscl de la US sue Chimigque de Paris, April, May
and June, 1871, p. 181. a.
5. tson has shown that in capil-
lary attraction the product of the density of a saline solution and

to 59 milli : ct of these numbers is 61°9. 4
imeters; and the produ y 1-184, rises to 54°2 milli
I

1°133,
meters; and the product is 61°7, differing but slightly from that
with nitrate of Hehtn dak Sci. Paris, Jan. 8; L’ Institut, Jan. 10.

218 Scientific Intelligence.

IL GroLtocy anp NaturAL History.

1. Geological Survey of Ohio. Report of Progress in 1810.—
The notice of this Report, commenced on page 143, is here con-
tinued.

Prof. Edward Orton reports on the geology of Highland Co.
The rocks of this county range from the upper beds of the Cur

rf:
Charles Dalyrymple. The pebbles that compose the conglomerate

cks. The conglomerate is also fossiliferous, well-worn forms ©
with it. The fossils

geology of the Mississippi valley, proofs have been accum
that a Silurian island stretched hae, from Nashvils
toward and beyond Cincinnati, Highland county furnishes gies

quota of facts as to the existence and as to certain of the

Geology and Natural History. 219

daries of this ancient land. Other facts will be adduced that
bear upon this point in the description of the remaining forma-
tions of the county. The date of the uplift of this island is approx-
imately determined by the fact already quoted—as land at the
westward is found in existence early in the history of Clinton
time. This folding of the crust, then, that transformed a portion
of the ancient sea-bottom into dry land, probably occurred about
the close of Lower Silurian time, and it seems also safe to say that
it not only marks the date, but furnishes the producing cause of
the great change in the formation that then took place.

Next follows a full Agricultural Report by John H. Kleppart,
embracing observations on the meteorology of the State, and vari-
ous matters of general interest.

The Chemical Report by T. G. Wormley contains numerous
analyses of the coals, iron-ores, fire-clays, limestones and soils of
the State, a discussion of the yield of the coal in gas and coke,
and of the character of these products; and all his results show
the skillful chemist. We cite a few facts.

The amount of moisture in the coals of the State varies from 1:10
to 9°10 p. ¢, those of the southern part of the State containing the
most, The coal loses less in weight at a temperature of 240° F,
than at 212°F.; if, after heating at 212° F., it be exposed to a heat
of 240°F., “it will generally increasé in weight, owing to the
absorption of oxygen.” : Ape

Two coals which at 212°F. lost 7°70 and 7:40 p. c. in weight,
regained, on cooling, in 5 hours, 4°20 and 4:50 parts; and in 20 h.,
4°70 and 5-10 parts.

e average of ash in 88 bituminous coals examined, south of
the line of the Central Ohio Railroad, was 4°718 p. c., and in 64
coals north of said line, 5-120 p. ¢. e mean average of ash in
1] cannel coals was 12°827 p. ¢.
ith regard to the sulphur in coal, Prof. Wormley says :—
“Tn the report for last year, Prof. Andrews drew attention to

showing that about 0-48 of the 0°57 parts of the sulphur present
on.

m the coal were in some other combination than with irc
y ; er cent of sul-

0-086 per cent of iron, which would require only abo
Me sulphur, leaving about 0°90 parts of s
n,

220 Scientific Intelligence.

“The following table exhibits the amount of sulphur and of
iron found in several different coals, and the proportion of the sul-
phur that could have been combined with iron :—

Sulphur in coal, -__....__ 0°57 1°18 0-98 2-00 0-91 0-86 057 O74 404
Iron in co 0-075 “742 “086 -425 +122 -052 ‘102 ‘102 2°05
Sulphur required by iron, 0-086 848 -097 -486 -139 -06 ‘116 “116 2343

, by Henry Newton, E. M. Mr. Read speaks of the abundance
of glacial markings in Geauga Co., and states that their direction

above the Lak °
On new Tree Ferns and other Fossils Srom the Devonian ; by
Dr. J. W. Dawson. (Quarterly Journal of the Geological we

e
dle and Upper Devonian of North America, a great number at

small and delicate species, which were probably herbaceous;
but there are other species which may have been tree ferns. it

the Geological Society for 1858. The original specimen of thas?
ad an opportunity of seeing in London, through the kindness

n my paper on the Devonian of Eastern America (Quatt

Geol. - Society, 1862) T mentioned a plant found by Mr
Perry, as possibly a species of Megaphyt =
Scars in two vertical Series; but the specimen was obscure, =“
have not yet obtained any other.

Geology and Natural History. 221

y some remarkable specimens obtained by Prof. Newberry, of
New York, from the Corniferous limestone of Ohio, which indi-
cate the existence there of three species of tree ferns, one of them
with aerial roots similar to those of the Gilboa specimens. e
whole of these specimens Dr. Newberry has kindly allowed me to
examine, and has permitted me to describe the Gilboa specimen,
as connected with those which I formerly studied in Prof. Hall’s
collections. The specimens from Ohio he has himself named, but
allows me to notice them here by way of comparison with the
others. I shall add some notes on specimens found with the Gil-
boa ferns, and on a remarkable plant from the Devonian of Caith-
ness, kindly placed in my hands by Dr. Wyville Thomson.

t may be further observed that the Gilboa specimens are from
&

with the arches, so that all belonged distinctly together.
ingly slender, far too much so
d

* Abstract in Proceedings of Royal Society, May, 1870.

222 Scientific Intelligence.

We still hold that the regular spacing of these arches along the
under surface renders it very improbable that they were | oe
Had they been closely crowded together, this argument would
of less weight ; but while so very slender, they are a apse: of an
inch apart. Mr. Woodward’s comparison between th
form of the arches in a Macrouran and that in the “tribolite does
not appear to us to prove anything. We therefore still believe
that the specimen does not give us any knowledge of the actual
legs of the trilobite. Mr. Woodward’s paper is content in vol,
vii No. 7, of the Geological Magazine. D. D,

4, Deets on the Geological Structure and Mineral paar
of Prince sea d Island ; by J. W. Dawson, LL.D., assisted by

6.2.04 N, Pu. pp. 8vo, with 3 lithographic plates.
(Printed by. authority of the Ge ernment of Prince Edward Island),

om this excellent report the following facts.

The roc a are (1) newer Carboniferous, red-brown and gray sand-
stones like those of Nova Scotia, and New Br ‘unswick, occurrin

Seis and the Can necticut Valle y 3 (3) drift epost and (4)
those of oie date. The unconformability of the ‘
of the Trias over those of the Carboniferous i is “ ok pelt percept
ble,” and in aspect they are often very similar

In the Carboniferous there are numerous He of coniferous
trees, the largest observed a foot in ener which are of the

Species Dadoxylon materiaru va Scotia spe
ey have afforded also in some localities Calan ki
ngt., C. cistéi Brngt., C. giga arenaceus Jager, Cor

eds have a Nake not exceeding 500 feet, and
the lower a70 feet are regarded as constituting a a lower division.
ae dip is very small, and the beds are often acyl nt by
n.

on on, i in the lower part of the Upper seg or u yer part of
j thygna

ucot
5. Prowliar Prssdwinls observed in by W. a:
Nixes, Prof. Phys. Geol. and Geogr. in pom Insti-
tute of P eehnology —The Benen here described are fractures;
su ttc gre expansions of beds of stone conne
ey due apparently. to the state of tension to
which the be tc r sahoctek when in its original state in i

Geology and Natural History. 293

quarry. The author mentions a spontaneous fracture in a bed of
gneiss three feet and nine inches thick, which was sixty-one feet

ng, and mainly in the direction of the strike, but in the south-
ern half with some abrupt transverse (to the east) turns. The
transverse fractures were opened wider than the north and south,
—in two and a half months, the former five-eighths of an inch, the
latter nowhere over one-fourth—-showing that there was less resist-
ance to motion in the direction of the strike. He mentions cases
of anticlinals formed by movements in beds. In one instance a

ha i

?
crack three-sixteenths of an inch wide. In another instance in a
bed three inches thick, the amount of elevation at the center was
one inch, and there was a fracture along the whole length of the
crest, trending east and west. Prof. Niles observed a bend form
ina bed and three-quarter inches thick; in a few hours
the portion of the bed forming the crest was elevated three ee
ad a

Ity. ree other instances are mentioned of similar effects, on a
smaller seale,

6. Fossils from the so-called Huronian of Newfoundland.—
r. E. Brutinas read a paper on this subject before the Natural

ossils. Th
-s ne is broad ovate (6 lines
long by 5 broad), with a ring-like border, inside of this a groove,
with an angular ridge or crest
along the middle. In allusion to the shield-like form, a little like

224 Scientific Intelligence.

an ~— a wen is eae by Billings Aspidella Terranovica.
o specimens 0 ne slab of stone. The relations of the
fossil are not déieriai bined The other fossil is regarded by Bi
lings as identical with the ao ap sere spiralis, found in Sweden
below or at the base of the Primordial.
These fossils were first found tay Mr. Murray in 1866, and others
ete a subsequently obtained by Capt. Kerr, Mr. Robinson and Mr.
owle

7. Bathm odon, a new genus of fossil Mammals ; by E. D. Cops.
(Read before the Am. Phil. Soc., Feb. 16, 1872. )—This capt has
a remote affinity to Palsosyops and Titanotherium, The ch
ters of the molar stn indicate that it belongs to a new amy
Two species are des d, B. radians and B. semicinetus. They
were from the eestee eda of the Wahsatch group, near Evans-
ton, Utah, where they were obtained by Dr. F. V. Hayden. ‘The
beds are inferior to the Bridger group, and are supposed to be
Lower Eocene. Prof. Cope writes us, that by the printer’s neg-
-_ the date to his paper is wrong; it should be, as above given,

6th.

8. IMustrated Catalogue of the Museum of Comparative Lo-
Slogy. Supp

a list of publications i in iis part of actinolog i M ablished since
1865, to which is added some papers ie eS d in the previous

classification ; 4th, two tor representing in an nomena fil
ner the new species m mentione d above, and all the new genera :
some of the new species eotabliahiod by the author in his prelimi-
nary report.
inire des
* Among these is a little pamphlet by Mr. Duchassaing (Animaux Radiaite ©
Antilles, 1850). Owing to 0 the kindness of Mr. Riise, I was well acquainted pice

appli Ger the completely inexplicable diagnoses, I thought it best to pest
part hassaing’s on whole not hig table -
darkness; the more so, as the attempt I made. ise, to
ginal specimens of ing’s Ophiuride, failed altogether, 40
not

Geology and Natural History. 225

satisfy our thirst for information in a more copious manner.

different works; but perhaps a future number of the iar 5
will embrace them, as well as the other new observations of Mr.
Lyman on this branch of the animal kingdom.

n some of the new genera established in these two works, and

to Ophioenemis obscura Ljn.; in fact, I entertain a strong suspl-
cion that this species is identical with 0. cacaotica, and I see no
rmorat

8 far as I can judge from the description and figure, iotham-
nus also ees very wel h Ophiacantha, the differences being
I think, only of specific value. Not having access 1e8

re “
all, in the commonly accepted sense of the word; and my belief
that if, after this suggestion, Mr. Lyman will reconsider the ques-
tion, on the base of the lately acquired fuller knowledge of the
genus Ophiacantha, he will feel himself satisfied as to its conflu-
ence with Ophiomitra and Ophiothamnus. : :
. [This ah a by Dr. spec of Copenhagen, will be continued
in the next number of this Journal.

Am. Jour. Sct.—Tarrp Serres, VoL. III, No. 15.—Marou, 1872.
15

226 Neientifie Intelligence.

Ii Asrronomy.

1. Eclipse of the Sun, Dee. 1871.—Extract of a letter of
Dr. Janssen to Prof. New TON, ag boy! Sholoor, Nilgherry, Dee.
26th, 1871.—I have the honor to send you the results of my

part.
i m dicho * the spectrum of the corona does not _— a
continuous, but is remarkably complex. I have found in
I. The bright rays of hydrogen gas, which ime the pana
element of the protuberances and the chromosphe ;
IL. The bright green ray, previously remarked i in ee eclipses of
1869 and eg and certain other fainter o
ark rays of the ordinary joine; specs tis particularly
D. “These rays are much more difficult to detect
My observations prove that, ea eee of the cosmical mat-
ter vhich should be found n the sun, there exists, about this
body, an atmosphere of great oxen araendissy rare, and witha
hydrogen base. This atmosphere, which, doubtless, fom the
last gaseous envelope of the sun, is fed from the matter 0 of the

temperature, and perhaps the presence of fo
reason then for distinguishing this new 8°
atmosphere. I propose to call it the coronal atmosphere, 2 name

which indicates that it is this atmosphere which produces the large
part of the phenomena hitherto denoted by the name solar coront.
In announcing this result, I do not, on my part, forget aie
much we are indebted to the labors of those who have prepare
the way for it, especially to the labors of the American astron®
mers who observed the eclipses of 1869 and 1870. will
I do not soak that the observations of others this year
agree with min ie
<. sit the Solar -_Hiclipse of December 12, 1871; by J. pees
Locxy As the mail, the first available one after t
eclipse, ma this place to-day, I must lose no more time 10
cording preliminaries. I will therefore at once state the ee
arrangements of the parties, and what I at present know of
observations. The stations and observers as finally arranged wel?
as follows :— |
Bekul—Analysing Spectroscope, Capt. Maclear oe ii Pring’®
renal iu Dr. Thomson. Photography, Mr. D aa
Manantod ie Anslvning Spectroscope, Are vise } Integra 6
Lameaai Mr. Abbay. iy
*This te’ has an openin nd a focal pea of om
1=-42. The apes of object rag ieee ae ‘bright as in ap ordinary rg
* nomical telescope. ‘oscope was so constructed sits wae this light.

Astronomy. 227

Poodocottah—Spectroscope, Professor Respighi; Sketches of Co-
rona, Mr. Holiday.
Jafina—Integrating Spectroscope, Capt. Fyers and Mr, Ferguson ;
Polariscope, Capt. Tupman and Mr, Lewis; Photography, Cap-
in H

tain Hogg.
Trincomalee—Spectroscope, Mr. Moseley.
Besides these observers, we had at Bekul the valuable assistance
)

(for whose help in supplying guards, t , the friends of
science cannot be too thankful), Colonel Farewell, Judge Wal-
house, and others, in sketching the ¢ stations, of

course, most precious help in various ways was given
present who volunteered for the various duties, though some of
them lost a sight of the eclipse in consequence. Among those

ot
°
°
o
nm
mM
@
re
°
oc
R
<
po]
ery
fn]
oD

. ? . .
echipse the great. Monster Rahoo devouring one of their most
d

th determined to limit my spectroscopic observations to
the spectrum of a streamer, and to Young’s stratum, thereby liber-
ating a number of seconds which would enab e to determine

eet—no death-shadow cast on the faces of sa
The whole eclipse was centered in the corona, and there it was, 0

228 Scientific Intelligence.

i of a horizontal diameter. The rays were built up of in-
numerable bright lines of different lengths, with more or less dark
spaces between.’ Near the
brightness of the central rin

ut from this exquisite sight I was compelled to tear myself

thickening downwards, like F. I was, however, astonished at

e vividness of the C line, and of the continuous spectrum, for
there was no prominence on the slit. I was above their habitat.
The spectrum was undoubtedly the spectrum of glowing gas.

I next went to the polariscope, for which instrument I had got
Mr. Becker to make me a very time-saving contrivance—a double
eye-piece to a small telescope, one containing a Savart and the
other a biquartz. In the Savart I saw lines vertical over every

i i and unoccupied sky

2

; rig C
then F, then G, and last of all 1474! Further, the rings bie
nearly all the same thickness certainly not more than 2’ high, 4

but delighted to find that the open-slit method is quite compet
to cat we promi Salar li 24 I felt as if I

knew the thing before me well, had hundreds of times seen 18

of the corona. Scarcely had I done so, however, when the ae
was given at which it had been arranged that I was to do t

Astronomy. 229

the 6-inch Greenwich refractor. In this instrument, to which I
rushed, for Captain Bailey had just told us that we had “ s¢é// 30
seconds more ”—which I heard mentally, though not with my ears,
as “only 30 seconds more”—the structure of the corona was
simply exquisite and strongly developed. I at once exclaimed,
“like Orion!” Thousands of interlacing filaments varying in
intensity were visible, in fact I saw an extension of the prominence-
structure in cooler material. This died out somewhat suddenly
5’ or 6

the rapidly increasing sunlight. I then returned to the Savart,
and saw exactly what I had seen during the eclipse; the vertical

my attention to them, I am, however, not prepared to say that
they were visible through a large are of retreating cusp. :

r. Thomson confined his observations to the polariscope, ear 3
the Savart, He states that his observations were identical wit
at eras . . .
Mr. Davis’s photographie tent was below the cavalier in which
our telescopes had been erected; and immediately after the ob-
servations I have recorded were over, I went down to see what

the exception of the sketchers, with General Selby at their head,
who have recorded most marked changes in the form of the outer
corona, and Mr. Webster, who was 80 good as to photograph the
eclipse from a fort some eight miles away, with an ordinary camera,
and obtained capital results. :

Next a word about the Poodocottah, the other fortunate Indian
party. Prof. Respighi has promised to send his results to you
With this. About Mr. Holiday’s labors I know nothing, except
that he has obtained three sketches.

=

230 Scientific Intelligence.

Concerning the Ceylon parties, I give you a verbatim extract
from the telegrams. From Jaffna: “ Exceedingly strong radial
polarisation, 35’ above the prominences; corona undoubtedly solar
to that height, and very probably to height of 50.” From
Trincomalee Mr. Moseley informs me that he carefully watched for
Young’s bright line stratum, and did not see it, and that 1474 was
observed higher than the other line.

is is the sum total of the information which has at present
reached me. It is clear there are discordances as well as agree
ments, the former being undoubtedly as valuable as the latter.
It remains now to obtain particulars of all the observations of all
the parties, before a final account can be rendered of the eclipsed
sun of 1871. This, of course, will be a work of months; but if all
goes well, I trust to obtain information shortly of the outlines of
the work done by the Indian observers and M. Janssen, as I am
now remaining in India for that purpose, and this I will communr
cate to Nature by the earliest opportunity. In the meantime I
hope the good people at home will think we have done our duty,
and that all the members of the Government Eclipse Expedition
of 1871 will soon be safely with them to give an account of their
work.— Nature, Jan. 18.

Ootacamund, Dee. 19, 1871.

3. Inauguration of the Cordoba Observatory.-—This event, one
of great importance to astronomical science, as well as to the
country which has the honor of establishing the observatory, took

st. T nd

e formal inauguration of the Argentine Observatory at yee
p and circumstance

ven amongst the audience every pause of the Professor was
3?

Most of the facts in the very able address have been ae
communicated to this Journal by Dr. Gould. We cite the 1

Abbé de la Caille, vis-
ited the Cape io 14 Calle
Peta of the principal southern stars. With a little telescope
01

Astronomy. 231

of brightness which his telescope permitted—and in determining

fom

their knowledge of a large portion of the southern sky. Since
that time a permanent observatory has been established by the
British Government at the same place, and a large number of

supply this pressing need; and while at Santiago, he made the

work was unfortunately suspended: but I have a received the
gratifying assurance that the calculations are now to be com leted,
and the resulting catalogue published by the Observatory at ash-
ington * * * * * * *

N or has the progress of the work failed to afford its due share
of discoveries, It has given us the

Ww
rightness is not always the same, but undergoes systematic
Variations, § be t e to considerable bril-
lianey, and then fade away until telescopes of som re
heeded for rendering them visible. Others still are now found to

Which has been assigned to them by mére
times past. Such stars must be carefully watched, fac
‘ny regular and periodic fluctuation in the amount of their light
either established or disproved. Of such cases there are already

«

232 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

ifest the existence of several. ne of those most remarkable f

in the short interval of 214 hours. Another in the constellation

of the “Southern Triangle,” which has been regularly observed by

Mr. Davis, exhibits regular fluctuations of light, comprised with

in a period of about 34 days, similarly alternating between vist
h

IV. Miscennanrous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE.

\ from seven to three members, an average of
four topographical parties was maintained through the season.
Messrs, E. i i

. e w
of the expedition, Dr. W. J. Hoffman the naturalist, Messrs. F.

io Se

y Miscellaneous Intelligence. 2338

Bischoff and J. Kohler the collectors, and Messrs. G. K. Gilbert
and A. k. Marvine the geologists. The enti i
ing escort, &¢c., numbered eighty or ninety persons, and was

observations were made througho i
In natural history extensive collections were made, which can-
not fail to afford a considerable number of new species, and a mass

lost, as his notes were carefully kept, and will be of great use In
the compilation of the map. :
A preliminary report and map will be published in a few weeks.
2. Notice of the Earthquake in New En gland of January 9th ;
by Prof. C. G. Rock woop. (Communicated.)—At a few minutes
before 8 p. aw. of J anuary 9, 1572, an earthquake was experience
over a considerable portion of eastern New England and the St.
e

‘awrence valley. It was felt along the St. Lawrence river to a
distance of 200 miles N. E. and 60 miles S. W. from Quebec, and
#t various points of mpshire and Maine between this

e

Seconds, being accompanied b w rumbling :
caster, N. H., there ete two distinct shocks, each lasting but a

234 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

few seconds, and the last being the more violent. The shocks were

about 3 Pp. M. and 11 P. M. of ar same soe

Brunswick, Me., Feb. 3, 872.

3. Monthly Rainfull at San Francisco ; by Purxy Harve
Cuass, Professor of Physics in Haverford College. (Com mmuni-

1, 187 ennent has published a chart, com
om his own satevetions ot the mo bathly amounts of rain in San

eet for twenty-two years, from July 1, 1849, to J uly 1, 1871.
have grouped the amounts in seven short i sr pore

1849-62, 1952-55. 1955-58 1958-48.
on oe =_-_7——_—_—_ Laney N
N R N R N BR 6
Oy, on. 4 sees 3 cone 3 02 2 26 ri
hia 9 0 6 5 eee Tae
Bape 800108 4) 1 <2 07 «16 eee
okies. 3°35. 111 3°33 65 138 57 a ae
Hay. nin. 1203 196 793 116 6-47 136 12:80am
Dec... .-. 1435 228 1633 176 1365 219 23 ae
yee. 64 191 1147 193 1621 249 2975
Feb. ..... 245 155 14-23 194 10-92 217 vt) a
Mar. ._... 3-15 136 13-01 185 17: 166 1990)
Ags igus 195 90 13-49 142 eae
May, ..... 99 34 2-28 112 40 O18
June, -._.- Se 08 1 20 «12 a
1862-65 esi
1865-68. 1868-71 es
July, --.-- ols eer Saget nil
nie. 21 3 Stes 1 are 3 : 20
Sept. ....- 04 20 39. 511 15>. 48 2 et
ee ee 46 68 1-44 1419
187 10-95 135 2-30 115 63°21
Sans 13°06 252 26-43 249 1203 206 «11926 oe
ae pe 10°60 229 2554 267 1331 257 «11652
Bebis. 2... 453 161 1545 210 44 235 eS ae
Mar: sac: 32 113 1092 135 643 171 69°89
oS ieee 412 82 73 565 101 3914
Meg; 5 sp 164 48 149 31 44 ut ee
WOM co 17 27 9 02 11 “19 Wg

There is so much similarity between the different curves,
general character is so much like that of the apps curves, 4 h ey
, they accord so nearly with the annual temperature cu that t

may reasonably be merit as typical, ere the daily ; econ ~ :

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 235

probably furnish materials for more minute and detailed profitable
investigati

mong the deductions in my paper on the “tidal rainfall of
Philadelphia” (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., x, 530), were the two fol-
lowing :

“(1.) The tidal rainfall, like the ocean tides, is affected by ‘ estab-
lishments,’ which depend upon ocean currents, mountain ranges,
i D

*(2.) It is also, hike the ocean tides, more marked in low than in
high latitudes.”

These inferences are strikingly corroborated by the Lisbon
records, and I look confidently for equally striking additional con-

rmation from observations on our Pacific coast. Moreover, 1
think that my previous discussions, combined with generalizations
from the meteorological reports of the Signal Service Bureau and
with well known tidal laws, are sufficient to justify the following
predictions. )

(1.) The tidal rainfall will generally be found more strongly
marked on the western shores of the several continents, than in
the same latitudes on the eastern shores, :

(2.) When the rainfalls, at any given station, are grouped both in
accordance with the age of the moon and the direction of the
wind which brings the rain, opposition of winds will be ound to

character peed

_ 4. Meteor in Mexico.—For the following communication the

Journal is indebted to the favor of Prof. Henry, Secretary of the

Smithsonian Institution.

_ The observations relate to the meteor of the 22nd of last month

~ 1871, but the month not stated in the communication] and are
So del Comercio,” published by waa

Mexi
Being in the telegraph office, we have

ielegraphically the meteor from one poin

ng are the reports received.

exico.— At - quarter past eight o’clock P. M., a red —
appeared in the blue sky, and turned afterwards into a w :
luminous band. It moved from west to east. with a slight inchina-
tion towards the W. §. W. and E. N. E., and lasted ten minutes.

t to the other. The fol-

— 236 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

Apizaco.—When the advice reached me, I could only see a
handsome light, which vanished in the horizon. It may have lasted
about ten minutes.

Puebla.—After eight o’clock a fire-ball was seen to start from
the direction of Popocatepetl, running toward the top of Orizaba
and leaving in its course a cloud of dense reddish smoke,

the course of the inflamed body.

San Andres—The meteor has been observed here, and left a
line from east to west. :

Pervote.—At forty minutes past eight o’clock the meteor was
observed here and lasted four minutes, leaving im its course4
luminous band.

phuacan.—At a quarter to nine o’clock the meteor was observed
here. It moved from west to east, looked like an inflamed cannon

ow.

Jalupa.—At forty-five minutes past eight o’clock there was
noticed here a whitish luminous band only ; but other persons 88¥
the meteor itself. / It

era Cruz.—At nine o’clock the meteor was observed here. a
moved from west to east, and lasted about a minute. Its wake
was brilliant and extensive, lasting about five minutes. .

orty-five minutes elapsed from the moment the meteor Wi
observed at Mexico, till the moment it made itself visible at Vera
Cruz, three hundred and twenty kilometers distant. of

I shall be very glad if this information may serve as a means
ascertaining at what distance from the earth the meteor occurTe
and what was the velocity of its motion.

ation in this catalogue, 146 different meteoric stones i“ :
meteoric irons. The heaviest specimen of the irons is one a
Aeriotopas, weighing 438 pounds, and the largest of the stones
that from N ichi ?

. ae ae ihe
ne in the same room, he introduces the name Anéillite for

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 237

the series of specimens, even when several inches across, are
plainly pseudomorphs after chrysolite, amphibolite, augite and
titanite ; and that these pseudomorphs so abound in the matrix
that they constitute the largest portion of the mass, and may be
easily separated by u blow of the hammer.

6. The Rumford Medals.—At the last annual meeting of the
American ‘Academy of Arts and Sciences held in Boston, May 30th,

1871, the Rumford premium was awarded to Mr, Joseph Harrison,
Jr., of Philadelphia, “for his method of constructing steam boilers,
y which great safety has been secured.” According to the direc-

Tn 1839 to Dr. Robert Hare, of Philadelphia, for his invention of
the compound blow-pipe and his improvements In galvanic
apparatus. : ,

In 1862 to Mr. John B. Ericsson, of New York, for his caloric

ne. ;
In 1865 to Professor Daniel Treadwell, of Cambridge, for his
_ _ improvements in the management of heat.
In 1867 to Mr. Alvan Clark, of Cambridge, for his improvements
in the manufacture of refracting telescopes, as exhibited in
his method of local correction. f
In 1870 to Mr. George H. Corliss, of Providence, for improve-
ments in the steam engine.
It was directed by Count Rumford that the premium should be
ven “to the author of the most important discovery or useful
Ht published by Nery or

With which the Academy found it im ossible, or at least very inex- '
pedient, to comply literally, and for this reason the premium was
hot awarded during a long series of years. The Academy is now

3

238 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

any annual meeting, and relieves them from the necessity of limit
ing it to discoveries or improvements made during the two years

7

the question whether the idea that the bottom of the ocean is ra

being preyed upon, suggested in the Reports of the dredging expe
ditions of H. M. 8. Porcupi i

ders the bottom barren of life, pointing out many facts with re ze
to the growth of life, in great variety, over the muddy bottom© —
seas, |

leaves of an old linden, in the Vosges. In composition it is am fi
by Ehembeey and Berth 2
I It contains, in round numbers, 55 p. c. of cane sugar, *"
mverted sugar, and 20 of dextrine. It occurred on the yee
part of the tree, not the lower. Although there were egies

of the same kind in the vicinity, only this one afforded the mav”

tare of an insect; but Boussingault thinks that this is not {®
Source of it in the case of the linden manna; for he had seen 20™

4

Miscellaneous Bibliography. aoe

sect on the tree which could have produced such a result.—Acad,
Sei. Paris, I? Institut, Jan. 10.

9, Hailstones of salt and sulphide of iron.—Prof. Knxneort, of
Zurich, states that in a hailstorm, lasting five minutes, on the 20th
of last August, the stones, some of which weighed twelve grains,
consisted essentially of common salt, mainly in imperfect cubical
cr ga He supposes that the salt had been taken up from the
salt plains of Africa, and brought over the Mediterranean.

Hailstones containing each a small crystal of sulphide of iron are.
reported as having fallen recently, by Prof. Eversmann of Kasan.
The crystals were probably weathered out of some rocks in the
vicinity — Nature, Jan. 11.

Temperature of the Su
cording to Secchi’s calculations, is at least 10,000,000° C.; an
according to Mr. Sperer’s, 27,000° C.; while Pouillet placed it
between 1461° and 1761° C. Mr. Vicaire, in a note to the French

n.—~—The temperature of the sun, ac-
d

ble conclusion that the temperature does not exceed 3000°
(5400° F.). He observes that the greatest heat of the oxyhydro-
gen blowpipe is 2500° C. (4500° F.), and the highest furnace heat
not above 2000° C. (3600° F.).

V. MISCELLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. Catalogue of Photographic Illustrations by Wm. H. Jacx-
90N, sedan to se Suey of the Territories under Dr. F,
AYDEN, Department of the Interior, Washington, D. C.,
1871.—This catalogue contains the titles of over four hundred
Rocky Mountain photographs, mostly eight by ten inches in size,
representing scenery of geological as well as general interest,
ndian villages, Indians, etc. We have seen eighteen of them

plementing well the articles by Dr. Hayden in this Journal. by
their high character, they speak well for the rest in the list.
They represent lakes and boiling springs, basins and cones, and
eysers, quiet and in action, and show even the texture of the
eposits of silica and carbonate of lime which constitute the cones
and the borders of the basins. They enable the geologist to real-
ize what kind of deposits springs or chemical depositions make,
presenting nothing to favor the idea that beds like those of ane
nary even-grained limestones, however pure and free from fossils,
are possible results of such action. eee 3
. Fireside Science. A Series of Popular Scientific nee,
upon Subjects connected with Hvery-day Life; by er -
Nicuots, A.M., M.D. New York, 1872. 12mo, pp. 283. ( fu
& Houghton.)—Dr. Nichols has made a valuable contribution to
the fireside literature of science in these essays, which ag wed in
a clear manner many important facts and principles in familiar
«

240 Miscellaneous Bibliography.

Royal Coll. Phys., London. ith numerous illustrations and
notes and additions by the Translator. Philadelphia, 1871. 8v0,
pp. 322. (Lindsay & Blakiston.)—This is Part First of the great

ment of Paris by the German army, so that the translation
appeared before the original was published. The American edi-
tion is an impression from the English types, and is most excellent
in its execution 8.

scopical Society of Illinois, Edited by S. A. Brices. Publis
Committee: C. Biggs, E. H. Sargent, C. Adams. No.1. 64 pp. 8¥

5. Elementary Treatise on Natural Philosophy ; by A. Eee :
Descuanet. Translated and edited, with extensive additions, °Y |
J. D. Evererr, M.A., D.O.L., F.RSE,, in f eo
pp. each, 8vo. 1872. (D, Appleton & Co., New York.)—The puy

: explanations and descriptions are clear :
concise, The English editor has largely Serene the value of the
original work by the additions he has made.

: Sees AM.J-8ClL. VOL. IL_AR

oe al gOS Beans
Ohl Wie

ay
BN A

Wk
RY
SAS
iS

oe
SY ile a J
>
Airs
44%
ee OY 5

ee (
My, Wilts
yyy My ere a
ulti,

8
N
SN

tits
\
a
al
NV
iy

5
oe

eC Se,
‘oh |
SWAY, :

Wei iy) .
NIA |

qua)

ae

hg

Wer dae
=

ote

Tee
‘ tall
rea ceee
wtaata §

Vie on

|

ea Zanin
Zipik

ives

PRS
is

y {7 AN Ys

“bapa we Ll}

cer Venatici

+

HEROES x,
:+ Geyseoy-
scvcsanaergantttit ang &

tf

eye Zip,
eb ABEP Ey ie
Get

re

(Cag

Raa ty
Tp in

Wa, Sie ea. a PR Pia ei y ; ae. ee eg
He DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
US GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE TERR

ait
Ne

WS

:
I

Plate VII.

AM. JOUR. SCI. AND ARTS, Ill, Vol.

A. E. V. from nature.

AMERICAN
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS,

[THIRD SERIES]

Arr. XXIX.—Discovery of Additional Remains of Pterosauria,
with Descriptions of two new Species ; by Professor O. C. MARSH,
of Yale College.

wise of great size, showing that these peculiar ga so jong
deemed wanting in America, were apparently well represent

Pterodactylus occidentalis Marsh.

The additional remains of this species, discovered by. our
Party during the past summer, consist of portions of five indi-

* This Journal, vol. i, p. 472, June, 1871. As this name had already been ap-
Plied Provisionally by secey toa Pterodactyl from the Greensand of England, the
Present species ma ed Pterodactylus occi is.

Am. Jour. Sc1.—Turrp Series, Vot. III, No. 16—APRIL, 1872.
| 16

242 O. C. Marsh—Discovery of New Pierosauria.

viduals, which differed somewhat in size, but all tend to con-
fi e conclusions based on the fragments first examined.
From the locality which furnished one of the original specimens,
we recovered the proximal end of the right wing-finger meta-
earpal, which evidently belonged with the distal extremity de-
scribed, and proves the entire bone to have been at least fifteen
inches in length, or much more elongated than any hitherto
known. With this specimen were found portions of the second
and third phalanges of the same wing-finger, all indicating the
great size and power of the wings. Another specimen, found
by the writer at a higher level, in the yellow chalk, pertained
to a larger individual, and is of much interest. It consists of the
distal extremity of the left-wing metacarpal, articulated to the
adjoining proximal end of the first phalanx. Both bones are
in excellent preservation, and show this characteristic joint most

The most important remains of this species yet discovered,
however, consist of nearly all the bones of a right wing, from
the humerus to the last phalanx inclusive, which were found
by the writer in place in the gray Cretaceous shale, during out
investigations near the Smoky River. Although more or less
fractured, the bones are in general well preserved, and show
clearly the peculiar structure of the Pterosaurian wing, as wel
as the especial characters that mark the present species.

humerus, which is nearly perfect, is remarkably short
and robust, and in its main features surprisingly bird-like.

is concave transversely, thus differing widely in this respect
from the avian type. The ulnar crest is very prominent, aud
its proximal extension is continued to the line joming the ra ial
and ulnar angles of the articular head. The radial crest 18
prominent, but scarcely exceeds the ulnar ridge in s1Ze, and 18
hence proportionally much smaller than in most of the Ptero-

actyls described. Its point of greatest extension 18 nearly

pneumatic foramen on the anconal side of the proximal bee
tremity. The shaft of the humerus is smooth, sub-c eta

in transverse outline, and apparently less sigmoid longitudinally
than in the species already known. The osseous walls are thin,
and very compact. The distal extremity is much flattene?,
and has the articular condyles very similar to those 1n the hu
‘merus of birds. The radial condyle is the larger, and mor
prominent. It is oval in outline, and extends obliquely rather
more than half way to the ulnar side. Near its termination 0
the palmar surface, and on the ulnar side of the median line, 18
a large, oval, pneumatic foramen. There is here no indication

0. C. Marsh—Discovery of New Pierosauria. 243

of an impression for the attachment of the anterior brachial
muscle, as in the humerus of birds. The ulnar condyle is

transversely oval in form, and is separated from the radial

ifference of the two bones in size, they appear to resemble
most nearly the anti-brachial bones of Pterodactylus Suevicus, as
figured by Quenstedt.* With the above specimens were ex-

rising in the groove of the distal end, either in the present speci-
men, or in others of the same species. The outer trochlear sur-
“Ace 1s most developed, and has its exterior margin angular. In

joining shaft. The inner trochlear surface has a rounded inte-
nor margin, and, on the anconal side, ends abruptly in a promi-
hent ridge, which limits the lateral motion of the join
There were four phalanges in the wing-finger, and the greater
Portion of all of them is preserved. e first phalanx is almost
* Ueber Pterodactylus Suevicus, 4to, Tibinge 1855.
+ Fossil Reptilia rote crvenanoiastiadic Sepplement, pl. iv.

244 O. C. Marsh—Discovery of New Pterosauria.

entire, and measures about seventeen inches in length. Its
proximal end presents the peculiar articulation for union with
the metacarpal, which is well shown in the figures given b

Quenstedt, von Meyer and Seeley. The outer articular face, or
that on the ulnar side, is reins | nearly flat transversely, an

forms almost a right angle with the adjoining side of the shaft.
The inner face is shorter, deeply concave transversely, with a
thin exterior edge. The two articular faces converge, and unite
on a sub-triangular olecranoid process, which projects proxi
mally from the anconal side of the shaft, thus moving between
the condyles of the adjoining metacarpal, and preventing the
flexure of the joint beyond the full extension of the wing.

extremity. The articular surfaces of all the bones preserved ‘al
smooth and well defined, like those of mammals and birds. Al

have been pneumatic.

The teeth found with remains of this species, and supposed to
belong with them, are very similar to the teeth of Pterodacty ls
from the Cretaceous of England. They are smooth, com
elliptical in transverse outline, pointed at the apex, an
_ what curved.

The following are the principal dimensions of the specimens
mentioned in the previous description. Some of the measur
ments are only approximately correct, owing to the distortion
by pressure of several of the specimens:

some-

Length of humerus on radial Pa age is Seva ie we
Length on ulnar side, BPG He Med ea 174
Greatest diameter of articular head, _-------------------

st diameter of articular head,...-.-...------------- 12
Greatest diameter or width of proximal end, -- -- -------- 63
Greatest diameter of distal end,............----------- 64"
Vertical diameter of shaft, where [OS CTE by perl
Length (minimum) of ulna, or larger bone of fore-arm,- - 336

Greatest diameter at proximal end,...-.------.-------- has
Greatest diameter of articular surface,_.--------------- 46
Greatest diameter of distal end, la ay
Greatest diameter of radius, at proximal end,_---.------- 33°
Greatest diameter at distal end,.-......-.-.----------- 28°
Transverse diameter of proximal carpal, .--------------- 5
Antero-posterior diameter of proximal carpal, --- ---- ---- 28
Greatest diameter of articular face of distal carpal, -- ---- 42
Lenetn.of lateral’ carpal... 2.05. 5. .icie 1 eel eps
Length (minimum) of metacarpal of wing-finger, - --- - - -- 412°
Length of first phalanx of wing in Sia lc kd alae wtathigae 428
Transverse diameter of proximal end,-_.-..------------- 53
Chord of greater articular surface, _....--------------- 30
Length of olecranoid process, Lo he bid cane ee
Greatest diameter of distal end,.-.-------------------- 29°
Greatest diameter of distal articular surface, ---- .--- ---- 35°
meee rameter ee Se ae ee ’
Greatest diameter of second phalanx, at proximal end,.-- 35
Greatest diameter of proximal articulation, - - .- - --------
Greatest diameter of distal articulation, ---- .----------- 20
Least diameter, ume deg oh
Greatest diameter of proximal articulation of third phalanx, 18°
Least diameter, - UBe pe hk eee set .
Greatest diameter of proximal articulation of fourth phalanx, 10°
Letgth.of crownof toothijc: 2. aici edelosi ee tase 25°

for the entire wing a length of at least eight and a half feet,
and, for the full aa of both wings, a distance of eighteen

the species belonged to the short-tailed or true Pterodactyls, as

= the other groups this bone has been found to be invariably

ess than one-half the length of the fore-arm. The large laniary

teeth clearly indicate the carnivorous and predacious habits of
as dou

probably b
other sia ilee
All the known remains of this species were found in the
eer Cretaceous strata, near the snbky River in Western
nhsas.

246 0. C. Marsh—Discovery of New Pterosauria.

Pterodactylus ingens, sp. nov.

other specimens secured are equally characteristic, and serve to
supplement this series.

same bones show equally marked differences. In i‘
talis, the articular face on the outer side extends trapsyer?
only to the margin of the central tubercle. In the species U2 a4
consideration, this face does not terminate until it reaches a pr
opposite the middle of the corresponding projection, bag
much more compressed tham in the smaller specimen. ;
radii, also, of the two species exhibit essential differences, &P°
cially in their proximal extremities. ms Hg

he metacarpal bone of the wing-finger is very similar at!
sine end to 15 ibed. It shows;

With one series of the above specimens, a small bas ye
found, which is probably the distal end of a metatarsal. 12

1-
men is nearly solid bone would be an argument for considering

* Ornithosauria, plate vi., figures 8 and 9.

0. C. Marsh—Discovery of New Pterosauria. 247

it the latter, as all the wing-bones examined during the present
investigation are clearly pneumatic.

The dental characters of this species are at present only
known from a single crown of a tooth, found with one series of
the oo and from two larger and very perfect teeth
found by themselves, which agree so closely with the former
that they deserve notice in this connection. These specimens
are less curved and less compressed than the teeth referred to Pt
occidentalis, but in other respects they are nearly identical.

leasurements.

Greatest diameter of ulna, at proximal end,------------ a
Greatest diameter, at distal end, -.----.-.------------- 68°
Greatest diameter of radius, at proximal end, ---- -- ----- 2
Transverse diameter of wing-metacarpal, at distal end, .-38°75
Transverse diameter of shaft, at junction with condyles, -32°
Antero-posterior extent of outer condyle, on palmar side, 34°
ea sem extent of inner condyle, on palmar side, .35°

fransverse diameter of proximal end of first ortpal tagesaag
Len icular face, 32°5

Antero-posterior diameter, at base of crown, - --- -------- 79
Transverse diameter, sc. fs a oe ees 5°
Length of large isolated tooth, _-.-------------------- 48°
Antero-posterior diameter at base of crown, -------- ---- 14°
Transverse diameter, igwisel .i-cavel. ssuvee 20-1 11°3

Harger, of Yale College, and the writer. The localities
were in the blue shale and yellow chalk of the Upper Cretace-
ous, near the Smoky River, in Western Kansas.

P ;
the specimens appear to show several points of distinction from
the species already describe ee
n the metacarpal bone, the articular distal extremity 1s
smaller in proportion to the size of the shaft which supports it,
than in either of the species above described. In other respects

248 A. E. Dolbear on a Method of

it appears to present no essential difference except that of size,
The first phalanx, however, shows in its proximal end several
differences which are clearly of specific importance. The outer
articular surface in the present specimen is proportionally much
narrower, and has its posterior margin more exten TOXI
mally. ‘There is, moreover, no indication, on the inner side of
the bone, of the large obtuse tubercle which is a prominent fea-

appeared from the present specimen, leaving an elongated oval
h

depression, with a we th of the above
bones are somewhat distorted by pressure.
Measurements.
Transverse diameter of win tacarpal, at distal end,...26° ™.
Proximal extent of outer condyle, on palmar side, ------ 22°6
oximal extent of inner condyle,__.._...__----------- 0°

Transverse diameter of shaft at junction with condyles, .-21
Antero-posterior diameter of proximal end of first phalanx,38°
Greatest transverse diameter, _.......... _.----------- 12°
The specimens of this species at present known do not afford
perfectly reliable data for estimating the size of the animal, but
the wings, when fully expanded, were probably from twelve to
fifteen feet in extent. The fossils here described were found
by the writer, in July last, in the gray cretaceous shale, on the
south side of the Smoky River, in Kansas.
Yale College, New Haven, Conn., Feb. 26th, 1872.

Art. XXX.—On a new method of measuring the Velocity of
Rotation ; by Prof. A. E. DoLBEAR.

WHILE experimenting with the gyroscope, I have often
wished to know its velocity, but knew of no way to peor
it when it was set in motion in the usual way with a string:
have lately found a simple and exact way of doing this, ee
description of the plan may be of interest to others, as it can
used to measure the velocity of wheels of every size, and every
possible speed, without inconvenience and without expense. ‘

If a short piece of wire be soldered to the end of one brane
of a common tuning fork, one end of the wire projecting *
little on one side, and the fork made to vibrate at the same time

is has been used to determine linear velocity ; but it can so
a

be applied to rotary with great precision. I have a large fork

Measuring the Velocity of Rotation. 249

equals the number of vibrations per second of the fork, and 6
equals the observed number of undulations in a single turn of
the disk, then v=4.

_A single wave, or even half of one, is sufficient for determina-
tion if the length be measured in degrees, in which ease if d=
the length of one wave in degrees, the formula will stand Vea
If the rotation be very rapid the quickest possible touch is

f

white paper can be pasted upon it and smoked without burning,
end it answers every purpose. To the certainty and ease o
this method may be added another advantage, that the slightest
touch needed for this cannot sensibly retard the motion of the

a as any mechanical fixture attached for such a purpose

ust do,
Physical Laboratory, Bethany College, Bethany, W. Va.. January 19.

250 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quarizite,
Art. XXXI—Green Mountain Geology. On the Quartzite; by
JAMES D. Dana.

(Continued from page 186).
2. QUARTZITE OF PouagHquaGc, Durcuess Co., N. Y.

THE town of Poughquag is situated on the road from Paw-
ling (a village on the Harlem railroad) to Poughkeepsie, and is
about five and a half miles northwest of Pawling,* near the
parallel of 41° 38’.

n order to arrive at the true relations of the Poughquag
quartzite, the position and age of the other rocks of the region
must be considered.

1. Taconic rocks.—As has been stated (p. 184 of this volume)
the Stockbridge limestone extends from Canaan, west of south,
through Dover to Pawling. It continues beyond this latter
place southward along the valley, for seven or eight miles,
where both valley and limestone narrow out.

n the region of Pawling the limestone dips to the eastward
at_a large angle, between 55° and 70°; and in the two anda
half miles of breadth there must be a thickness of at least
3,000 feet, perhaps of 5,000 feet. Supposing that there are no
folds—none were detected by us—the thickness would
much greater than this.

est of the Pawling limestone region to Poughkeepsie on
the Hudson,—a distance of twenty-one miles, directly across
the strikes—the rocks all the way, with some small local excep-
tions, dip easterly (to the south of east) the observations of Mr.

miles ¢ of New Milford (on the Housatonic), or twenty-seven
miles from Poughkeepsie. t
Leaving Pawling on the way to Poughquag, going pore
ward, you pass from the Stockbridge limestone (of Pawling)
* The distances given in this paper are air-line, not road-line, distances. ¢ this
+ I am not yet able to say which of the patches of limestone to the south 0 is
apparent termination is a continuation of the Stockbridge limestone. or that any

s
Azoic Hig dges on the west and south, alluded to beyond. The @ ge
Williamsburg and along the Harlem ruilroad are probably continuations, not Se
Stockbridge band, but of otler bands of limestone lying fa the

of Kent and Ne d (see Percival’s map, in his Geological Report);

rt); whi
by the way, aco rding to sections made by Mr. Gardner and myself, in the line .

f a synclin

, are opposite sides of a i al, an ;
schists, overlie the Stockbridge limestone, unless

superincumbent gneisses and
great fault intervenes.

© position of the synclinal axis referred to in the preceding note.

J. D. Dana on the Quartzite of Poughquag. 251

mica schist, part of it gneissoid ; and this schist unquestionably
underlies conformably the limestone. Along the plane of junction
of the limestone and schist, both here and to the north, occur
beds of limonite, which are a result of the alteration of iron-
bearing minerals in the schist, as stated by Percival, the beds
often retaining in some parts the structure of the schist.* The
strike of the schist is N. 10°-40° E., and the dip about 50° to
the eastward. It is a southern extension, as recognized by Per-
cival, of the schist or slate of Taconic mountain. It has the

tom a specimen I collected from one of the ridges on the ascen
of Graylock.

About a mile and a half southeast of Poughquag (and four
from Pawling) the mica schist is left for a light-gray fine-grained
thick-bedded gneiss, partly granitoid. The gneiss has essentially
the same strike and dip as the overlying mica schist, the
strike being N. 10°-35° E., and the dip mostly 50° to 60° to the

* Specimens collected by Mr. Charles A. Brinley at Richmond, Mass. show that
the principal one of the minerals there altered to limonite is siderite (spathic iron
or “pla ga of iron). The limestone in some limonite localities is the underlying
Tock. \

“des ter

ing like a taleose schist, it contains only a

Sterry Hunt has confirmed this conclusion

Canada rocks. d :
I have examined the rocks of Taconic Mountain myself only in Mt. Washing-

ton. Percival, in his Geological Report of Connecticut, describes — Agee iid Ta-
i . ; . schis

8
o
oO
Fs
(=)
&.
oh
po
5
2
g
8
5.
8
8
=
™m

chlorite, and yet hs a
inerals [garnets and staurolites]. This is particularly the case in the south an
Rortheast part of Taconic Mountain.”

252 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartaite.

eastward. This gneiss is, therefore, conformable to the schist, and
an inferior bed of the Taconte series.

2. Poughquag and more western limestones.—West of this
gneiss, about Poughquag, there is a great limestone formation,
which, judging from the width of the area and its dip, 1s as
thick as that at et 2 It has the same strike with that
rock, or N. 30°-40° E., ‘with the dip also about the same, or
40° to 60° to ~ southeastward. This range of limestone
extends northward, and although interrupted for some distance,
appears to be the same with that which Percival and Mather
lay down as passing through eastern Washington, western
Amenia, Boston Corners, by the east side of Winchell’s Mount-
ain (a ridge just southwest of Boston Corners), to Copake on
the east side of Ancram Creek valley. It is distinct, according
to Mather, from another limestone range in Copake. which lies
on the west of Ancram Creek valley, and stretches south on the
west of Winchell’s Mountain to Pine Plains and Stissing, and
thence, by Wappinger Creek valley, to Barnegat on the Hud-
son—a range of limestone called by Mather the Barnegat lime-
stone. Mather speaks of another intermediate line, extending
from Stamford, through Washington, and half a mile east of
Verbank; and this line appears again at Arthursburg and
Beekman, es continues down Fishkill Creek to Matteawan on
the Hndso

Calling ae Pawling (or a eae eco No. I, the
Poughquag and eastern Copake is No. IT; the Arthursburg
and Fishiail Creek, No. III; the western Cee Pine Plains,
Stissing and Barnegat ( ‘Barnegat limestone), No. I

In an excursion to Poughkeepsie, we passed No. III at
Arthursburg, ten miles from Poughkeepsie, and No. IV, or
the Barnegat limestone, at Manchester, three miles from Pough-

eepsie. Barnegat is a place on the Hudson, about four miles

the stat so that the uniform easterly dip is no proof t -

* Mather has an meine error in his statements about this band and the first
of the bands here mentioned; for he makes the first to extend to Fishkill, and
the one last inline: to cross that and extend to Poughquag. The great bands
of limestone are not continuous lines, owing probably to the irregular manner in
which the rocks have been faulted and the subjacent slates uplifted; but the parts
of each have a nearly common direction. The region requires a careful survey:

i tr there are extensive beds also of compact slate-rock or argilla-

mn

~ alent

J. D. Dana on the Quartzite of Poughquag. 258
posed to exist there by the Professors Rogers we found no cer-

tain proof of, but were rather disposed to believe in a series of
faults and monoclinal uplifts.

The Poughquag limestone is bluish and less perfectly crystal-
line than the Pawling; and, both the limestones ro the

slates show a continued diminution in the degree of metamorphic
changes as you go farther west. The Barnegat is very slightl

crystalline, and evidently contains fossils, as has been fab i
although none have yet been found that could be determined ;
and the slates pass from micaceous or talcoid schists to simply
glistening slates, and in some places to earthy slates, which are

96). They are probably Laurentian, as state Logan and
Hall, that is, they are equivalents of the oldest known Azo
rocks of Cana ut as this point is not definitely settled,

* Whatever part of the Archean beds are proved to belong to an era in which
there was life, will be appropriately styled the Archeozoic. This term avoids the
objection which Eozoic derives from the doubtful nature of the Eozoum.

254 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quartzite.

These Archean rocks of the Highland range are exposed to
view in.a deep cut on the unfinished Hartford & Fishkill Rail-
road, within a mile of Poughquag. The light-gray gneiss east
of Poughquag, above referred to, lies to the north of the stage-
road; while 300 or 400 yards to the south of it, and in sight
from it, there is a high railroad embankment, leading westward
into the cut. The Archean rock is a coarsely crystallized

eiss, containing red orthoclase (feldspar), some white albite
o possibly oligoclase), and in places a little hornblende, with

fe magnetic iron. Some portions were a black-
ish gneiss. The strike is N. 40°-55° E.; the dip is nearly
vertical, but varies from 65° to the southeastward, to 80° to
the northwestward, while mostly 70° to 80° to the southeast-
ward. This gneiss was thus wholly unconformable to that
before described, and also widely different in its lithological
characters. Some layers of it at Brewster, fifteen miles to the
east of south, on the Harlem railroad, contain zircons an
really a zircon syenite; but they alternate with others that are

e

simply gneiss. of magnetic iron ore is worked in the

4. Quarizite formation.—The quartzite constitutes a northeast
and southwest ridge on the west side of the Archvean range, the

The quartzite is in general evenly bedded. While there are
hard compact layers, many are very thin and friable, looking
sometimes as if argillaceous, though really consisting of ine
quartz sand. This finer kind is often a little silvery, with micr
ceous or talcoid scales, and sometimes contains traces of chlorite.
The stratification varies but little from horizontality, and sr
variations are in large undulations toward different pomts
the compass, the dip being mostly but 5° or 10°, though some-
times 15°. There is hence no conformability to the Archean
gneiss, and none to the gneiss, mica schist, or limestone, of the

J. D. Dana on the Quartzite of Poughquag. 255

Taconic series. ‘The nearly horizontal beds of quartzite lie on
the nearly vertical Archzean, and both occur within a few hun-

red yards of the steeply inclined Taconic beds. The rocks
are sparingly faulted; but in some narrow vertical sections
this faulting has been carried so far as to obliterate the stratifi-
cation; a case of this kind is represented in the figure on page

5, Relation of the Quartzite to the Poughquag limestone adjoin-
ing it.—At the west end of the cut we open upon the plain of
Poughquag, and come immediately to the Poughquag lime-
stone (No. II). There is no section exhibiting the quartzite
and limestone together ; yet it is obvious that the quartz is the
inferior rock, and that the two are unconformable. Out-
crops of the two occur within 200 yards of one another and
on the same level; and while the quartzite is nearly horizontal
in these outcrops as elsewhere, the limestone in the nearest
exposure has a strike of N. 45° to 50° E., with a dip to the
northwest of 40° to 45°; showing not only unconformability
to the quartzite, but also a wide divergence from its ordinary
dip in the region, which is 40° to 50° to the eastward.

The Poughquag limestone continues westward for two miles,
and becomes to th i
clay-slate of the region, the rock which is the prevalent one

ma was consolidated and jointed before the deposition of the
atter,

2. That the quartzite is older than the rocks of the Taconic
beds that outcrop between Poughquag and Pawling, and uncon-

mulated ; for (1) the beds of quartzite rest unconformably on the
Archzean rocks, and (2) their sands were evidently sea shore or

256 J. D. Dana on the Green Mountain Quaritziie.

initial step in the making of these mountains, and the position
of which modified the action of the causes depositing later beds,
and also, by their unyielding nature or resistance, the action of
forces uplifting them. |

at, evther the quartzite was a ledge within or along the
shores of the sea in which the limestone was deposited, the
two being unconformable and no intermediate beds being pres-
ént; or elsethere is a fauit between the quartzite and limestone,
along which the Archean rocks (overlaid by the quartzite) were
brought up to their present position so as to be on a level with
the limestone beds.

The latter view is favored by the fact that the line of this
supposed fault nearly accords with that to the north between
the limestone and Taconic gneiss. The former view is support
by the facts that (1) the Taconic slates, schist or gneiss, which
ought to have been carried up on top of the Archean rocks
and quartzite, in case of such a fault or uplift on its east side,
nowhere exist in the vicinity of Poughquag, and are not known

_ It isa remarkable fact that in this Poughquag region no beds
intervene between the Archzan and the quartzite, although
some pre-Silurian strata might reasonably be looked for, and
none between the quartzite and the limestone, although so great
a thickness of strata really exists in the vicinity inferior to the
limestone.

are

FF, B. Meek—Two new Star-fishes, etc. 257

Art. XXXII—Descriptions of two new star-fishes, and a Cri-
noid, from the Cincinnati group of Ohio and Indiana; by F.
B. MEEK.*

PALZASTER? DyeERI Meek.

Among the specimens loaned to me for study and description

y Mr. Dyer, there is a very imperfect example of one of the
largest known Silurian star-fishes. When entire, it must have
been from five to five and a half inches in diameter across from
end to end of the rays of opposite sides; while its disc, as seen
in a flattened condition, measures about two inches in diameter.
As near as can be determined from the published description of
Paleaster granulosa of Hall (which has not yet been figured),
this very large specimen would seem to be related to that
species, and may possibly be the same. Still, from its much
larger size (P. granulosa being described as “ of medium size ne
as well as from the want of exact conformity of some of its
details of structure, I am led to believe it distinct. The speci-
men, however, is unfortunately much obscured by the adher-

ieee and descriptions of these fossils are to appear in the Ohio Geological

tThe spines are articulated, and not merely projecting points of the dorsal
Pieces themselves

Am. Jour. Sct,—Turp Serres, Vor. III, No. 16.—APRIL, 1872.
17

258 F. B. Meek—Two new Star-jishes,

the articulation of a spine, measuring from 0-16 to 0-28 inch
in length, and about 0°04 inch in thickness, and consequently,
distinctly larger than those of the dorsal side. e l
side, the so-called madreporiform body can be seen near the
margin of the disc, in one of the axils between two of the
ranges. Itis nearly flat, of a transversely suboval or subtri-
lobate form, the lobed side being directed inward; while the
little divisions are seen radiating and bifurcating inward on the
middle lobe, and laterally on the lateral ones, like the nerves
of the pinules in some kinds of ferns.

From some of the characters imperfectly seen in the species,
it is possible that better specimens may show it to belong to the
genus /’etraster, and render it necessary to write its name Petras-
ter Dyer. The structure of the dorsal side of Petraster is, I
believe, not certainly known. In the published species of
Palcaster, the dorsal pieces are illustrated as if close-fitting, or
at least without very obvious pores passing between the pieces
Indeed, it was originally supposed that the dorsal pores passed
through these pieces, instead of through the sutures between
them, and this was mentioned in the generic description as one
of its most important characters. I have no typical examples
of that genus at hand, showing the dorsal side; but as no such
characters are shown in the figures of any of the published
species, or alluded to in connection with the genus, in later
publications, we may perhaps infer that it would not now be
1nsisted upon as an essential character of the genus. Bogs

Locality and position Cincinnati group of the lower Silurian;
from the horizon of about one hundred feet below the tops of
the hills at Cincinnati, Ohio; where it was discovered by Mr.
C. B. Dyer, to whom I have dedicated the species.

STENASTER GRANDIS Meek.

Attaining a very large size, with the body or dise compara-

tively sane, or oaig oP che breadth of the anitad inner ends of

the five rays. Rays long, slender, gradually tapering, and very
flexible, widest at their immediate connection with the body,

tubercles, or sométimes assume almost the character of short
spinules, and are arranged in quincunx, so as to form about
eight rows near the middle of the rays; those of the outer two
rows being a little larger than the others. Dorsal pores ap
parently rather large, and passing through between the concavé
sides of contiguous pieces. Ventral side of body unknown.
that of the rays composed of the usual single row of jie
verse adambulacral pieces on each side of the well defined,

and a Crinoid from Ohio and Indiana. 259
}
rather deep, and moderately wide ambulacral furrows. Adam-
bulacral pieces rather more than twice as long as wide, with their
longer diameters at right angles to the ambulacral furrows, and
rounding over from end to end so as to be most prominent in
the thiddte ; while they do not connect with each other by flat
sides, but have little projecting processes, and corresponding
sinuses, shar for the purpose of imparting greater flexi-
bility to the rays.

Breadth of body, 0°63 inch; length of rays, 2°40. inches;
breadth of same at their connections with ‘the body, 0°36
inch. Diameter across from the tips of rays on opposite sides,
about 5°50 inches.

Not having seen the under side of the body of this species,
Lam not quite sure that it is exactly congeneric with Mr. Bil-

from which it also differs in a mar in the much
greater length and slenderness of its rays. In these characters,
however, it agrees nearly with his S. pulchellus and S.

ment, nor their arrangement, can be very clearly made out.
They seem, however, to connect with these pieces along their
Joming edges, instead of springing from their crests.

Adopting the suggestion already made by another, that the
hame Stenaster for this group should be replaced by McCoy's
name, Urastrella, previously suggested, incidentally, for a
parently congeneric forms, the name of the species here de-
scribed would become Urastrella grandis. ;

Locality and position.—Upper part of the Cincinnati group at

7 lana. I am de igati Mrs. M. P.

es of Richmond, for the use of the only 2g p> I have

seen of this species, which was discovered by her at that place,

some time back. It may not be out of place to state here, that

this lady has by her own zeal and industry, stimulated by a

for scientific studies, succeeded in getting together one of

the finest and most valuable private collections of minerals and
in the West.

260 FB. Meek on a new Crinoid.

pieces in succession, on each upper sloping side of each third
primary radial; the first two or three of each series onl

rms ten, rather long, simple, widest a little above their
e ing to their ends; composed

Pinnules very long, moderately short, nearly. in contact, and
composed of pieces three to four times as long as wide. Sul

ary and secondary radial $s more prominent than the
much smaller pieces filling the interradial spaces, and thus

forming somewhat flattened ridges, more or less interrupted at

the sutures, and abruptly beveled at the sides; interradial and

axillary areas roughened by a minute projecting central point
h

Column of moderate thickness, apparently nearly round, or
perhaps sub-pentagonal near the base, and composed of alter

j Vv pressure to afford accurate pare
ments, but it seems to have been about 0°45 inch in height, by
* I prefer to designate the minute pieces sometimes seen at the connection
the body and column, in Species of this and some other Silurian types, 45 SU tts

, T than as true basals, not only because they are Sometimes absel
recisely similar pieces are ire
which they

een
a e distance below the body, thus indicating that they belong © the

F.. B. Meek on the Genus Lichenocrinus. 261

a little less in breadth; while its arms measure 0-07 inch in
breadth at the widest part, a little above the top of the body,
where about eight arm pieces may be counted in a length of the
same extent.

NOTE ON THE GENUS LICHENOCRINUS.

Since the publication of the note on the genus Licheno-
crinus, issued in the January number of this Journal, Mr.
Dyer at my request, sent on a specimen of this type which

center of radiation, must be the mouth, and the minute radia-

.

ane furrows the ambulacral canals. A careful examination
unde i

: ITO several
the little furrows, in part, do not reach the central opening, but

ready been several times stated, specimens that grew attached
to the surface of some smooth bo y, have been separated from

the under surface. But when moistened, and examined under a
Magnifier, these regular radiating striz can be seen through its

-

262 C. A. Young on Recurrent Vision.

thin translucent substance within. In numerous other instances
where these basal platforms can be seen still firmly attached to
their original station, with the plates of the upper side and the
internal lamellze wholly, or in part removed, the inner, or upper
side of this platform can be clearly seen to be without a trace
of a central or other opening, and marked by numerous slender
radiating lines corresponding to the lamelle of the interior. A
portion of these strive can be distinctly traced to the central
point, where, instead of an opening, there is often evena
minute elevation. It is also worthy of note, that here, on the
inner surfaces of these basal layers, the little raised radia-
ting lines, like the lamelle within the disc, do not increase by
bifurcation, but by the intexcalition of shorter ones between the
onger; so that if we were to place the specimen mentioned
above, showing the central opening and striz of its under side,
on one of these basal platforms, the elevated strive of its under
side would conform to the little furrows of the platform in such
a manner that these little furrows would all be closed.

a
their bifurcating character would seem to show that they do
not coincide with the lamelle within, but with the déerstces
between them; while there are no open slits between these
strize, as we would expect if they were the edges of lamella,
but mere furrows. :

As I have already remarked, if these discs are really bodies
they must belong to a form constituting the type of a strongly
marked family of the Cystoidea, if not typical of a more mr
portant section.

sane $

ArT. XXXIIL—Note on Recurrent Vision ; by Prof. C. A.
Youne, of Dartmouth College.
IN the course of some experiments with a new double plate
Holtz machine, belonging to the college, I have come upon ave
curious phenomenon, which I do not remember ever to have

1

C. A. Young on Recurrent Vision. 268

seen noticed. ‘The machine gives easily intense Leyden jar
Li from seven to nine inches in length, and of most daz-

P

perfectly visible; and what is remarkable, every conspicuous
object is seen éwice at least, with an interval of a trifle less than
one-quarter of a second—the first time vividly, the second time
faintly ; often it is seen a third, and sometimes, but only with
great difficulty, even a fourth time. The appearance is pre-
cisely as if the object had been suddenly illuminated by a light
at first bright, but rapidly fading to extinction, and as if, while
the ene lasted, the observer were winking as fast as

sible

I see it best by setting up in front of the machine, at a dis-
tance of eight or ten feet, a white screen having upon it a black
cross, with arms about three feet long and one foot wide, made
of strips of cambric. That the phenomenon is really subjective,
and not due to a succession of sparks, is easily shown by swing-

ing the screen from side to side. The black cross, at all the

measured roughly as follows: A tuning fork, making 9
vibrations per second, was adjusted, so as to record its motion
a

Whatever the true explanation may turn out to be, the
phenomenon at least suggests the idea of a reflection of the nerv-
us impulse at the nerve extremities,—as if the intense impres-
‘1on upon the retina, after being the first time propaga Si
brain, were there reflected, returned to the retina, and from the
: traveling again to the brain renewed the sensation. :
have ventured to call the phenomenon “ Recurrent vision.

264 C. Abbe—Toial Kelipse of the Sun of 1869.

It may be seen, with some difficulty, by the help of an indue-
tion coil and Leyden jar; or even by simply charging a Ley-
den jar with an old fashioned electrical machine, and discharg-
ing 1t in a darkened room. The spark must be, at least, an
inch in length.

Hanover, Feb. 9, 1872.

Art. XXXIV.— Observations on the Total Eclipse of the Sun of
1869; by CLEVELAND ABBE, Director of the Cincinnati Ob-
servatory, Assistant in the Office of the Chief Signal Officer,

ashington.

the eclipse expedition by Mr. T. G. Taylor of Philadelphia.
A short notice of the principal features noted by myself was
sent at once to the eta of the Astronomische Nachrichten,
but has not yet been published, and I therefore take the liberty
of restating, through your Journal, the simple phenomena that
I then saw.

_ Our station was at Sioux Falls City (formerly Ft. Dakota),
in the southeastern corner of Dakotah Territory, latitude 44,
longitude 97°, elevation about 1,500 feet above sea level, in the
midst of an extended plateau.

CO, Abbe—Total Eclipse of the Sun of 1869. 265

The whole interval of totality was unfortunately not at my
disposal, owing partly to the very rough and faulty stand sup-
re the telescope (everything had to be transported an hun-

red miles by mules into a wilderness), and partly to an inter-
ruption by one of the members of the party ; but there seemed
to me to be no doubt of the facts as recorded, nor was I con-
scious of the least undue emotion that might have interfered
with my reliability as a witness, although it was the first total
eclipse I have ever had the pleasure of observing.

As seen through my inverting telescope, the structure of the
largest protuberance on the right hand lower limb was well
made out. The neighborhood of the sun was examined to a
distance of its own diameter (a radius of possibly one degree
from the sun’s center), but no trace of the coronal rays as
they were seen by others of my party. The evidence as to the
existence, shape and positions of these streamers as given by
my six assistants, was conclusive as to their actual appearance,
with the usual variations as to details. That they were not

zenith, further to the right, ps epee to
. rise up three, and posst

-- background of the field of view,
and there was every evidence that
they had an identical structure
and cause. The outline of each

em)
ogg
pal
=
=
ot
&
°
Ler }
=
=
B
3
a
~
3
om
~
g
4
o
or

of the cones were quite sharp
down to within a few minutes of
~~ sun's limb, when all three appeared to begin to lose their
distinctive characteristics. : ;
‘he height of the apices above the limb varied between one
half and two thirds of the solar radius: the diameters of the

266 C. Abbe—Total Eclipse of the Sun of 1869.

bases of the cones was probably included between seven and
three minutes. Each apex was of a slightly dusky shade com-
pared with the body of the cone.

The most interesting feature was an unmistakable striation
upon the surface of each cone, the strive apparently twisting
spirally around up to the apex opposite to the movement of
the hands of a watch as represented on the accompanying
drawing.

I noticed no colorations of these striae other than their darker
hue. The details of this striking and new phenomenon inter:
ested me so much that I naturally enough lost the observation
of the third contact. The pearly cones were on that limb of the
sun from which the moon was moving, and the details were
every moment becoming more distinct, when the growing height
of the bank of red protuberances was followed by the too speedy
apparition of the glowing sun beneath.

agrin at the loss or imperfect observation of the third con-
tact, caused me to forget to note whether the three cones con
tinued in view for any number of seconds thereafter. From
the time of first recognizing the pearly cones until their disap-
pearance probably thirty seconds elapsed (I am writing without
my note book or other aid to memory), and I did not note any
change in the appearance of the striw. The middle one of the
cones caught my eye more particularly, and the impression Was
that the other two, especially that on the right, was some dis-
tance behind it, or possibly obscured by a cloud of haze in the
solar atmosphere.
t the time it seemed to me that I saw in the central cone r
column of smoke and hot gas ascending high above the area ©
red flarae, then visible on the surface of the sun, and that the

pearly cones existed in the solar atmosphere and constituted 4
true solar corona. s anttfh
My long delay in making this communication to the scientil¢
world will be excused, I trust, in view of the imperative ©
mands made upon my time during the two years that —
elapsed since the eclipse of 1869. I shall be deeply inter
to learn whether the phenomena seen by myself may not
repeated on some other occasion and be studied by more exp®
rienced observers. ; sl
I may add that I had hastily provided myself with a N ed
prism, in hopes to make at least some trial of the nature of the

A. M. Mayer—Acoustical Kaperiments. 267

coronal light; but the rude apparatus did not work satisfacto-
rily, and I confined myself to details of structure; indeed in
my earnest gaze upon the novel phenomena I quite forgot the
polarizing apparatus.

Washington, D. C., Feb. 6th, 1872.

Arr. XXXV.—Acoustical experiments, showing that the transla-
tion of a vibrating body causes it to give a wave-length differing
from that produced by the same vibrating body when stationary ;
by AuFRED M. Mayer, Ph. D., Professor of Physics in the
Stevens Institute of Technology, Hoboken, N. J

THE APPARATUS.

Four tuning-forks mounted on resonant cases and giving the
note UT'*,=256 complete vibrations per second, were obtained.
I will designate them as Nos. 1, 2, 8,
os. 1 and 2 were brought into perfect unison by a process
to be described.
_ No. 1 was placed before a lantern, and just touching one of
Its prongs was a small ball (5 or 6™™ diam.) of good cork, sus-
on by a silk fiber. The images of the fork and of the cork-
all were projected on a screen.
_ No. 3 had one prong weighted with wax, so that it gave two
beats a second with Fore
No. 4 had the ends of its prongs filed off, until it also gave
two beats per second with 1 or 2; thus No. 4 gave two
vibrations a second more than No. 1, while fork No. 8 gave
two vibrations a second less than No. 1.
THE KXPERIMENTS.

In the experiments, one to seven inclusive, fork No. 1 re-
mains before the lantern, with the suspended cork-ball just
touching one of its prongs.

Exp. 1. Fork No. 2, screwed on its case. was held in the hand,
at a distance of 30 to 60 feet from No. 1, and sounded ; the

ll was projected from the prong of fork 1, which vibrated in
unison with 2.

Exp. 2. I stationed myself 30 feet distant from fork No. 1, and
fork No. 2 was screwed off its case and vibrated in one hand,
while the case was held in the other. I now walked rapidly
toward fork 1, and after I was in regular motion, I placed the

on its case, and just before I ceased walking I took it off;
although, when I did so, I was only about a foot from fork 1,
yet the cork-ball remained at rest against its prong.

Exp, 3. Again I walked toward 1 as in Exp. 2, but I did not

=

268 A. M. Mayer—Acoustical Experiments.

remove the fork from its case after it was placed on it. The
ball remained at rest until the moment I suddenly stopped
walking ; at that instant, the ball flew from the fork, while an
assistant, whose ear was close to the case of fork 1, while his
eye was directed to the screen, found that at the instant I
stopped walking, the fork 1 sounded, while the ball jumped
from its prong.

Exps. 4 and 5. These experiments were exactly like Exps.
2 and 3, except that I walked away from fork 1 instead of, '
approaching it. The results were the same as in Exps. 2 and 3.

Exp. 6. Fork No. 3, giving 254 vibrations per second, was
sounded as in Exp. 1. It had no effect in moving the ball.
now screwed the fork off its case, and standing about 30 feet .
from fork 1, with my arm, I swung the case toward fork 1,
and while it was approaching it, I placed fork No. 3 on the case;
the proper velocity (from eight to nine feet per second) having
been obtained, the ball was suddenly projected from fork 1.
On greatly increasing or decreasing the above velocity of the
penne ease, the vibrations of fork 3 produced no effect on
ork 1. :

. 7. Fork No. 4, which gives two vibrations per second
more than No. 1, was substituted in Exp. 6, but was placed on
its swinging case, when this was receding from fork 1. The
pare of this motion and of varying velocities was the same as
in Exp. 6.

Exp. 8. I placed fork 3 before the lantern, and swung fork L
as in Exp. 7. The effects were the same as described in Exp. 7.

Exp. 9. I now placed fork 4 before the lantern, and moved
fork 1 as in Exp. 6. The effect on the ball was the same as
in Exp. 6. ;

im unison. Two forks, sounded together, may give no percep-
tible beats, for they may constrain each other into a ee
forced oscillation, and deus both will give the same number 0
vibrations, yet m3 be removed from equality when sep

The process I have adopted is as follows:

¥

A. M. Mayer—Acoustical Experiments. 269

Three forks are taken which are supposed to give the same
number of vibrations in a given time. They are supported on
india rubber tubing, and are thus insulated. One of the forks is
now loaded so that it gives two or three beats in a second, with
one of the other two that are to be brought intu exact unison.
The interval of time occupied by 20 or 30 of these beats, is_
accurately determined by means of a chronograph (one of
Casella’s registering stop-watches does very well). The interval
occupied by the same number of beats given with the second
fork, is now ascertained, and if it differs from that given by the
first, the quicker. vibrating fork is made to give the same num-
ber of beats as the slower by loading it with wax. When the
forks have thus been carefully adjusted, I have had no difficulty
in projecting the ball, in Exp. 1, at a distance of 60 feet, and I
believe that it could have been accomplished at a distance of
100 feet. The ball of cork should be spherical, so that it will
always just touch the fork, no matter how much it may rotate
around its suspending thread; which latter should consist of
only one or two fibers of unspun silk. The cork is rendered as
smooth as possible and is then varnished: this is important, for
the varnish gives a firm coating to the ball, without sensibly
increasing its weight, and is especially useful in covering the
minute asperities or elastic projections on its surface, which
otherwise would act as “ buffers” to the impacts of the fork and
deaden its projectile effects.
_ The above stated conditions having been obtained, no phys-
icist will have any difficulty in repeating these experiments.
machine has been devised by which a uniform motion of
translation can be given to the forks, and with this I propose
making a quantitative investigation of the phenomena, using an
acta essentially the same in its action as the one here de-
seri

We may substitute for the suspended cork-ball a light plane
mirror, held between two stretched vertical fibers, while one of
its edges touches the fork. The motions of a beam of light
reflected from the mirror to a screen, indicate most beautifully
the vibrations of the fork. This ingenious and most delicate
device for detecting vibrations, is due to Prof. O. N. Rood, of

lumbia College, N. Y., who first used it in a public lecture,
delivered in New York, on the 28th of last December. We
have, however, in our special work, found the image of the pro-
jected ball more convenient, and sufficiently delicate, for our
experiments.

Quantitative relations in the experiments and analogical facts in
the phenomena of light.

The UT,, No. 1 fork, makes 256 complete vibrations in one
second, while fork No. 8 makes 254, giving for the respective

-

270 E. Billings on a Question of Priority.

wave-lengths of these vibrations 4°367 and 4°401 feet, which we
will designate in order as A and A’ We will take 1118 feet per
second as the velocity of sound at 60° Fahr.

Now 256 vibrations in 1118 feet make 14-367 feet.

and 254 “ 1118—2A (=1109-266) give A=4°367 feet.

As the velocity of propagation of the vibrations and A are the
same in both cases, it follows that (n a =) the number of vibra-

tions in a second, reaching a distant point, is the same, and,
therefore, 256 vibrations from a body at rest will produce the
same effect on a distant surface, as 254 vibrations emanating
from a body which moves toward that surface, with a velocity
of 2A, or of 8°734 feet per second; and this is the velocity we
gave the fork in Exps. 6 to 9.

We will now examine the analogical phenomena in the case
of light. Let fork No. 1, giving 256 vibrations a second, stand

February 8th, 1872.

Art. XXXVI.—WNote on a Question of Priority ; by E. BILLINGS,
Paleontologist of the Geological Survey of Canada.

In the Canadian Naturalist, published on the 29th of Dec,
1871, I proposed two new genera of Brachiopoda, Monomerella
Ww

*The form here alluded to is fig. 20, p. 189, of the report. It shows the it-
terior of a dorsal valve imperfectly. This may not be 0. Canadensis; but @
Segre I think it is. Should it be otherwise, it does not affect the question.
The fossil will only require ano ific name.

E. Billings on a Question of Priority. 271

0. Galtensis, an imperfect cast of a dorsal valve of which was
figured in my Pal. Foss., p. 108, in 1862. Neither of these
species, so far as I know, has ever been found in New York.
About three weeks after my paper was published, I received
information from Thos. Davidson, Esq., of Brighton, England,
the eminent Brachiopodist, that Prof. Hall had descibed

+

number of geologists, professors in colleges, and scientific insti-
five i ide

anada. With a single exception, no one had received the
oe agg Several expressed the opinion that the copy sent
to 3

the American Associations, a species or a genus must be pub-
lished in a book, or in a journal circulating among scientific
men. The book or the journal must be obtainable by the
public, by purchase. If an author having a book in the press,
should make an abstract of four or five pages, and give

272 E. Billings on a Question of Priority.

us strike out the word “ priority ” from the pages of science. A
rule that can be evaded by every one is a dead letter.

In addition to the above, I beg to give a short statement of
facts, to prove that I am not to blame for the unfortunate col-
lision that has occurred. During the winter of 1871 there was
a correspondence in progress, between Mr. Davidson, Mr. Dall,
myself and others, on the subject of the genus 7rimerella. In
February and March, Prof. Hall, on two occasions, applied to
Mr. Selwyn for the loan of specimens of 7rimerella, Kutorgina,
and O. Canadensis. He stated that he wanted them in order to

On the 6th Dec. I received a letter from Mr. Davidson, m
which he mentions Prof. Hall’s pamphlet, but makes no allu-
sion to Fhynobolus. My paper was at this time in print, and I
sent Mr. Davidson a proof of it on, or about, the 8th of Dee.,
and at the same time some specimens. I heard no more from
Mr. Davidson until the 17th of Jan., 1872. On that day I re-
ceived several letters from him, some of which had been dela ed
a

t
= the name Rhynobolus for my genus Obolellina, 1 then
made

the figures. The genus is pro on a Canadian ete
from Galt, the original Trimerella locality. Pro says he
red the specimen there, “many years since.” It thus ap-

pears that at the time he borrowed our gy apeere ohne
engaged upon one from the same locality, an

A. C. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1872. 273

comparison. Mr. Selwyn, when he lent the specimens, gave
him notice of the correspondence then going on between Mr.
Davidson, Mr. Dall and myself, and also that I was at work
on O. Canadensis. Prof. Hall should have notified Mr. Sel-
wyn that he was engaged on the Canadian specimen, or he
should have published his genus. He did neither, and it re-
mains for the public to decide whether he was right or not.

It appears from Mr. Davidson’s letters, that Khynobolus was
to have been brought out in England, in a paper which he (Mr.
Davidson) and Prof. King had im preparation on the TZrimerella

oup. 1 knew nothing of this We can now see why it was
kept so quiet in America. Fortunately, Mr. Davidson delayed
his paper for a box of specimens I had promised him, and these
I could not well spare until my own paper was finished. Mr.
Davidson appears to be under the impression that Prof Hall’s
pamphlet has been regularly published.

hat is stated above, can be authenticated by a number of
letters written by Prof. Hall, Mr. Davidson, and some of the
best scientific men in the United States.

Montreal, 26th Feb., 1872.

Arr. XXXVIL—The Aurora of February 4th, 1872; by Prof.
ALEX. C. TWINING.

gh sition of the zone. No “aurora’s bow” ever
a

€ like consistence or constitution, or the like color and time
of continuance, or the like invariableness of position. Indeed,
‘tis a fact which the writer can avouch from his own observa-
tons, that—excepting the extreme western parts, which he did
hot observe early in the evening—the zone maintained essen-
Hally the same extent and situation, relative to the stars, at a
uarter past ten o’clock in the evening which it had here at
€w Haven at a quarter before seven. The same fact, it
Aw. Jour. ng wie Sunres, Vou. III, No. 16.—APRIL, 1872.

274 A. C. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1872.

will be noticed farther on, was observed for a much longer
time—four hours and a half—by intelligent and trustworthy
witnesses, at Brunswick, Maine, and at Hudson, New York,—
respectively 170 miles N.N.E., and 80 miles N.W. from New

at about 24° of Aries, and was inclined 37°. The zone, cer-
tainly, was not cosmical ; for it embraced auroral streamers, both
red and white, although, in this instance, very short. It was
also part of a display which was showing itself simultaneously
in the opposite quarter, as the ordinary ‘‘ Northern Lights.
Besides these things, it was affected by parallax, as will be seen
abundantly from the concurring testimony of observers at distant
places, when compared together; and it also showed the usual
a lines of the aurora. The fixed position among the stars,
though extremely surprising, may be explained, perhaps, by
a reference to facts which are known respecting the frequent
western movement (although sometimes eastern) of auro
clouds, arches and streamers; but the coincidence of incline
tions to the ecliptic cannot be surmised to be more than fortur
tous, so long as it does not appear from known facts that the

eight (339 miles) is less to be relied upon as 4 near
roximation to the truth than this last (3524 miles), becaus®
for this last, the observations are more ample and more pseg *
the writer himself saw, both north and south, may °
described briefly, as follows:—At 74 p. M. there were their
bands, apparently parallel, from east to west, having oi
eral aspects and their general situation the same as observ
accurately half an hour later. At 75 30™ the most northern es
pearance was a white and moderately brilliant arch that crow”

A. OC. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1879. 275

a dark space or dise beneath it. Its breadth was 16°, and its
upper boundary ray at or closely contiguous to Regulus and to
Delta Ursa Maj. Thus it enveloped the handle of the “ Dipper,”
and it extended down to the horizon both on the east and on
the west. Between this and the zenith there was a rosy band,
obviously parallel to the last described, rising from the ‘eastern
horizon, and passing up between and grazing Gamma Gemin.;
on the north and Betelgeux on the south, but becoming diffused
and indefinite soon after passing the meridian. South of this a
streak, partly white and partly azure, adjoined the last named,

tion. Its north margin passed 1° south of Beta Orionis, and

readth. About 8 o'clock it all became temporarily faint. At
10 15™ both margins remained, in general situation as before,
and also the eastern extremity nearly or exactly, and appar-
ently also the western extremity, which faded out at about the
istance of Andromeda. Thus: the arch was about 123° in
extent and 11° in breadth, conforming substantially in these
respects with the similar arch of 1870. At the time of iast
observation the band was equally brilliant as at first, but clouds
rapidly formed and covered it from sight.
he well known and accurate observer, B. V. Marsh, Esq., of
Philadelphia, among other observations, has obligingly commu-
nicated the following, made by himself at Haverford, ten miles
west of that city :-—
“Feb. 4th, 74 20™ p. vw. Brilliant crimson light in S.E.,
Principally in Canis Maj. and Orion; Sirius was near the center
; 10 exceedingly fiery patch, which extended some 5° or 6°
below and eastward, and in the west joined another but little
less brilliant, enveloping the brightest part of Orion.
7h 23™7h 30" 'S

a“

and N.
E., especially the latter, involving the whole handle of the
per.” Si .

‘@xtending 5° to 10° below, and about the same distance
toward t bie 4

276 A. C. Twining—Aurora of Feb, 4th, 1872.

10" 20". Crimson in S.E., S&S, and S.W.—especially in
Canis Maj. and lower half of Orion,—extending 10° to 20° E.
of Sirius, which was still in brightest part. Upper margin per-

° . eg

f

Respecting this same aurora, Prof. C. G. Rockwood of
Bowdoin College, obligingly communicates, among other things,
the following :—

“On the evening of Feb. 4th, at Hudson, I saw it first a
little before 7 Pp. M., being a brilliant patch of red light in the
S.E. It was of irregular shape, the brighest part being about
over the three stars Alpha, Beta and Gamma Leporis—say in
A.R. 82° Dec. —20°, and extending with a variable breadth, like
a bank of colors, toward and over the triangle formed by Delta,
Epsilon and Eta Canis Maj.—say across a point in A. R. 100,
Dec. —28°. At 7 P. M. there were visible two or three faint
white streamers stretching far *p toward the zenith and resting
upon the red as a base. The 12d mass continued visible, though
varying in intervals, until atter 11 o’clock. At 11> 30" P. ™
it had faded away.

I had given up all hope of any parallax, from the remarkable
fact that the red patch retained the same position among the stars
all the evening, moving with them from west to east. Prof.
Brackett, who observed the phenomenon here [Bowdoin Coll.
lat. 48° 54’ long. 69° 57’], noticed the same thing.’

In addition to the foregoing, Assistant Arthur Searle of Harv-
ard Coll. Observatory, has obligingly communicated the fol-

owing:

z The red southern arch of Feb. 4 was very ill defined.
I have the following notes: ‘At 6° 25™ p. mu. reddish light
diffused from below Orion to square of Pegasus’ [90° extent];
at 7 35™ band in the south nearly white, covering most, o
Canis Major. Mr. Trouvelot, observing here, made the following

otes: ‘At 8" 15™ p. M., arch dark purple, about 8° or 10 wide
where it was broadest; its northern edge nearly reaching the
nebula of Orion, very vaporous and ill defined.’ At 8" 40"
just reached the Orion nebula. At 10" 50™ lower than before,
and almost exactly resembling in form the pale arch ™ the
age as a . vee a reflection of it.” : ; a

e problem relative to actual height in the early eve

ea 9 : easured
in a direction across itself, appears to have been 8° between

° 'W. from it,—and 54° between New Haven and the samé
being 158? miles, S. i i
73° of parallax in the azimuthal p Oe aa
oo — seem to be indicated = the foregoing, 0¥
specific results cannot be attempted at this point.
_ This anrora’ was observed with the spectroscope by Professot

A, OC. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1872. 277

Brackett of Bowdoin College. He obtained two lines in the
white aurora, one of which was wanting in the red. Prof. Geo.
F. Barker, of Yale University, has obligingly furnished the fol-
lowing observations of his own:

‘The aurora was observed with the spectroscope about 8
p. M. Three bands were then plainly visible, two of them
quite sharply defined. The least refrangible of these was the
well-known red line, first observed by Zéllner. On measure-
ment, it gave a wave-length of 623 millionths of a millimeter.
The second in order was the bright line of wave-length 557, as
given by Angstrém. The third was a nebulous band slightly
more refrangible. Mr. C. S. Hastings informs me that at seven
o'clock he was able to detect five lines in the auroral spectrum.
Beside the three above mentioned, there were two others more
refrangible. These were, however, too feeble for measurement.

The white auroral cloud which lay for a time beneath the
western end of the fiery red tract, and the white streamers
which shot up from the north, afforded a similar spectrum, but
without the red line.”

zenith, and appeared at ‘the Pleiades and in Orion.
= ee first formed by rays converging to Aldebaran ; and,
at 74", a luminous cloud-zone, normal to the meridian, moved

278 A. C. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1872.

center—in form as a dark circle six to ten moons in diameter,
and rays from it on every side,—short to the S., moderately

The d
ticulars: 1st, the formation and aspects in the east and west “i
the outset; 2d, in the three coronas,—of which sort of dever
+ ping never one had been witnessed before; 8d, in the on
disc in the south, instead of the north, as usual. Unfortunate!y

»

A. C. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1872. 279

science is helpless with reference to these phenomena, because,
in these parts (!) ‘people are more disposed to wonder at the
hem.” The telegraph reports these
appearances in Silesia, Posen, Western Prussia, and in Paris,
ith much disturbance of the wires,—also at Alexandria, over
all the sky, for five hours,—and at Constantinople at 104
o'clock, at least, and till 14 o’clock in the morning. At Car-
diff the same was spoken of, as in the zenith, with an elliptical
corona of silvery blue streamers toward the north, the east,
and the west.

irectl
the zodiacal light, but never identified with a spectrum line of
any te i

Operated with great difficulty or interruption.

other foreign descriptions, that the aurora tober, 1870, is
referred to as a lel, in its main characteristics, with this of
1872. Also that this last is spoken of as unequa In varl-

As
an illustration, Professor E. T. Quimby of Dartmouth College,
New Hampshire, in this instance, observed the magnetic nee-
dle during much of the day of February 4th. His chart of the
curve of disturbance is in possession of Prof. H. A. Newton,

280 A. C. Twining—Aurora of Feb. 4th, 1872.

tion had increased to 50’, where it remained unsteadily for six
minutes, and thereafter advanced to 65’ increase at 10" 20"
Resting about at this four minutes, it suddenly reached an
an eastern variation of 93’, and, at 10" 26", of 113’. Declining
back however, in 1™ to 52’, it kept traversing, through a range
of 10’, at about that average till 10" 35", when observation was
suspended an hour and eighteen minutes. On renewed obser-
vation, at 11" 53™, the same was found at 1338’ eastern devia-
tion. It started on in 12™ to 173’, and so traversed till just
before noon. At 1™ before 12 o'clock it started on to 193’, and
traversing through a back and forward range of 18’, advanced,

* 6™ P. M., to 313’, and, at 12" 7, to 328. At this instant
the north end of the needle—which has, normally, 11° of decli-

deviation followed by as many of sudden change back agail,—
that the extreme fluctuation was 5° 40’ in three hours time, a
that the violent disturbance preceded the visible, although per
haps not the actual, phenomena. Bie
Reverting, in conclusion, to the enquiry concerning
actual height of the zone of 187 2, although the early ee
tions at Hudson, New Haven, and Haverford, as already admit:
ted, are not favorable for its determination, yet it is evident, 0

named the very latest are so nearly coincident as to time, and

ose stations (158°7 miles) as a base, and the azimuth of the base

54° W. of m

zone at the star Sirius, the parallax is found by measure

ment on the globe to be 9° 5 ith d
New Haven is found 36° 40’, and the corresponding zenith a.

tance 65° 10’, and the zenith distance at Haverford 57 -

A. E. Verrill—Recent additions, etc. 281

The computed result is, rigorously, 852°25 miles of height

above the earth’s surface. e distances of the point observed

from the two stations were respectively 720°08 miles and 600°31

miles. This ascertained height, like the same found for the

similar zone of 1870 (839 miles), is, no doubt, extraordinary ;

nits considering the novelty of these zones in other particulars,
' :

#

Art. XX XVIII.—Brief Contributions to Zoiilogy from the Mu-
seum of Yale College. No. XX.—FHecent Additions to the
Molluscan Fauna of New England and the adjacent waters,
with notes on other species ; by A. EK. VERRILL.

[Continued from page 209.]

es ).
Loligo = Ommastrephes Bartramii Binney (non Les. sp.). The
figure (pl. xxv, fig. 339), represents a Loligo, but does not show

Descriptions of Genera and Species.
Scalaria angulata Say, Amer, Conch., 1831, = Humphreyst:

Kiener, 1838.

Say described this species as a doubtful variety of S. elutheus,
under the above name, which should, therefore, be adopted
instead of Kiener’s,

Acirsa borealis Mérch (Beck sp.).

Shell white or pale flesh-color, elongated, turreted, acute.

orls ten, convex, with numerous revolving striz ; the upper

* This Journal, I, vol. xxxii, page 217.

282 A. E. Verrili— Recent additions to the

whorls with slight transverse undulations or faint cost, which
are wanting on the lower ones; last whorl slightly carinated,
Aperture roundish, effuse and slightly angulated in front,
Length about 75 of an inch; diameter 28.
Eastport, Me., shelly bottoms, 10 to 40 fathoms, dead shells
frequent, rarely living,—A. E. V. and S. L Smith.

Lunatia heros, var. triseriata.
Since there are no positive characters by which the Natica

confirmed two years ago at Kastport, by
characteristic specimens of L. heros, when

The two varieties are associated and have the same range, be-
ing common everywhere on sandy shores from the Gulf of St
Lawrence to Cape Hatteras, and probably farther south.

Aelis polita V., sp.nov. Plate VI, figure 5.

Shell white, elongated, regularly tapering, slender, acute.
Whorls thirteen or more, convex, rounded, scarcely flattened ;
surface smooth, polished, shining, with faint or scarcely distinct
stri of growth. Aperture broad oval; outer lip sharp, slightly
effuse; columella slightly curved, without a fold. Length 33
of an inch; breadth 08.

. Eastport Harbor, 20 fathoms, shelly bottom. Only one iS
oe a ucts was obtained.—Exp. 1864, A. E. Verrill an 5.
- Smith.

Turbonilla elegans V., sp. noy. Plate v1, fig. 4.
Shell light yellowish, elongated, moderately slender, a
horls ten or more, well rounded, not distinctly flattene¢;
suture rather deeply impressed; surface somewhat lustrous,

with numerous rounded vertical costs, narrower than the

t ;
upper whorls there are about five; and on the lower half of the
last whorl usually five or six distinct and continuous one®

Molluscan Fauna of New England. 283

same,
Stylifer Stimpsonii V., sp. nov.
Shell white, short, swollen, broad oval; spire short, rapidly
enlarging. Whorls four or five, the last one forming a large
part of the shell; convex, rounded, with the suture impressed,
surface smooth, or with very faint strie of growth; a slightly
impressed revolving line just below the suture. Aperture large
and broad. Length about ‘15 of an inch; breadth ‘12. I have
seen no specimens with the aperture perfect.
Off the coast of New Jersey, on a bank in 32 fathoms, para-
sitic on Huryechinus Drébachiensis V.,—Capt. Gedney.
Cecum costatum V. Plate v1, fig. 6.
Cecum Cooperi Smith, Annals Lyceum Nat. History, vol. ix, p. 394, fig. 3, 1870,
(non Carpenter).
Mr. Sanderson Smith has described and figured this shell in
a later stage of growth than the one here figured. my fig-
ure the longitudinal costz are, by an error, not so distinctly
brought out as they should be, and the annular grooves 1n the
Beeston are too distinct.

n the adolescent stage of growth pase at enlarges rather
rapidly, and has 12 or 13, distinct, elevated, rounded coste, nar-
rower than the intervals between; the circular grooves are
numerous, unequal, interrupted over the costw, and broader
toward the aperture. The aperture is rounded within ; its mar-
gin is externally stellated by the coste. yaoat

Vineyard Sound, 8 to i0 fathoms—A. E. V.; Gardiner's
Bay, L. ., 4 to 5 fathoms, sand,—Smith.
ELYSIELLA, gen. nov.
Allied to Elysia and Placobranchus. Head rounded, os
two short, obtuse tentacles; eyes sessile behind the bases of the
tentacles, on the neck. Lateral lobes united behind, rounded

* The figure in Gould’s Tavertebrata (copied in the new edition) is very poor.

284 A. E. Verrill—Recent additions to the

and separate in front, and raised from the back, leaving a
cavity beneath for respiration. Blood vessels, commencing in
the anterior part of the back, extend backward, forking and
diverging, in the area enclosed by the lateral lobes.

This genus differs from Placobrunchus and Elysia in having
the lateral lobes united together posteriorly over the back, s0
that the respiratory cavity partially enclosed by them is closed
behind.

Elysiella catulus V. Plate vit, figures 5, 5%,

Placobranchus catulus Agassiz, MS3.; Gould, Invert. of Mass., 2nd ed., p. 256,
pl. xvii, figs. 249, 250, 1870.

and S$. I. Smith; New Haven, Conn., and Wood’s Hole, Mass,
—S. L Smith.

It often floats with the bottom of the foot at the surface of
the water.

Shell smooth, polished, diaphanous, almost glassy, long con!

bi slightly curved toward the acute apex.
Animal white; swimming organs obovate
rounded, and bearing the slender tapering tentacles near the

Length of shell -46; diameter -08 of an inch. :

This species was taken among Salpe, off Gay Head, Marthas
Vineyard, in the afternoon, Sept. 9th, 1871,—Dr. A. S. P. ack-
ard and A. E. Verrill.

Ensatella Americana (Gould sp.)

Solen ensis of American authors, not of Linnzeus.

In addition to the differences in the shells of the American
and European species, noticed by Gould and others, there ate,
apparently, still more marked differences in the soft es

. . u

with similar basal spots; alternating with the primary and sec

Molluscan Fauna of New England. 285

terior portion of the opening has small conical a along its
margit y truncated and
beveled laterally.

&
» shows that it is very different from Anatina, and agrees

he siphonal tubes are separate from the base, slender, sub-.
equal; the orifices are both surrounded by a simple row of

dinal fold on the dorsal side posteriorly. Palpi with the ante-

weet
the small antero-ventral opening for the foot.
In young shells (pl. vii, fig. 1*) the spoon-shaped tooth is
supported beneath by two slender brace-like lamin, 1n both
valves; in larger shells one of these usually becomes obsolete.
This species occurs from New Jersey to t abtador.

by comparin l. vii ith that of A. tener
g the figure (pl. vii, fig. 1) with
(le 2) magnified on ee extent. The ligament plate is

This species occurred sparingly in Vineyard Sound and
Buzzard’s Bay, in 6-10 faints sand,—A. E. Vv. and S. 1
Smith ; it has also been found in Long Island Sound, off New
Haven, 4-5 fath., mud,—A. E. V.

. 286 A. E. Verrill—Recent additions to the

GASTRANELLA V., gen. nov.

anterior one smaller. No distinct lateral teeth. Animal with
long, slender, separate siphonal tubes, with a simple circle of
papillz at the ends; mantle well open anteriorly ; foot ligulate.
The curious little shell for which this genus is constituted appar-
ently resembles Gastrana more than any other described genus
Gastranella tumida V., sp. nov. Plate VI, figures 3, 34.

Shell small, variable in form, swollen above, more or less elon-

+

iridescent. Color white, with the umboes purple. Long I

Turtonia minuta Gould, 2d ed., p. 85, fig. 395 (not of European authors).
The American specimens of this shell differ so widely 10

a ee Te ee ee ee ee + © a

Ee MOE ES Wee ee Be

Molluscan Fauna of New England. 287
Astarte undata Gould, Inv. Mass., 1st ed., p. 79, 1840 (provis-
ion :

Astarte sulcata (pars) Gould, op. cit., and most American writers.

Crassina latisulca Hanley, Recent Bivalve Shells, p. 87, pl. 14, fig. 35, 1843.

This is by far the most abundant species on the northern
coast of New England. It ranges from Cape Cod to Labrador.
In the Bay of Fundy it is very abundant at all depths, from
3 to 125 fathoms, on muddy bottoms. It varies greatly in form
and sculpture, but can easily be recognized in all its varieties,
by any one familiar with the species of this genus. The beaks
are less prominent and the lunule less deeply excavated than
in A. sulcata, and other differences exist in the hinge, ete.

The figure in the new edition of Gould (fig. 482) is not charac-
teristic, having been made from an old eroded specimen, of
unusual, if not abnormal, form.

Astarte lens Stimpson, MSS.

that a ee with the original Portlandica, in color, form, and
size, while other specimens are intermediate between these and
be formed

rounded angle; ventral margin prolonged and rounded in the

.

prolong
middle ; posterior side with two strongly developed flexures,

288 A. E. Verrill— Recent additions to the

separated by deep grooves. Interior of shell with radiating
grooves, most conspicuous toward the ventral edge.

Length of the largest specimen ‘60 of an inch; height 72;
thickness 52. The smaller specimens have about the same
proportions.

No-man’s Land, in 19 fathoms, muddy bottom,—A. E. V.
and Dr. A. S. Packard ; Labrador,—Dr, Packard.

Six single valves, some of them quite fresh, were obtained off
No-man’s Land at several different localities. They were all
right valves, and the smallest was 50 of an inch in height. The

astp

zard’s Bay and Vineyard Sound. It is a thinner and more
delicate shell, more rounded, relatively much longer, and 38
seldom more than ‘25 to 80 of an inch in breadth.
Anomia glabra V. .

Anomia ephippium (pars) Linn.; Gould and most American authors.

A, electrica Binney, in Gould, 2d ed., p. 205, fig. 499 (non Liun.).

A. ephippium Binney, op. cit., p. 204, fig. 497 (non Linn.).

sionally found as far north as Nova Scotia, I have never met
with it at Kastport or in the Bay of Fundy, where it is replaced

Glandula arenicola V., sp. nov.

Body sub-globular, rather higher than broad, the whole su!
face covered with grains of sand forming a continuous layet.
When the sand is removed the surface of the test is reticulately
wrinkled and pitted, not furnished with fibres, except at
where there are a few long, slender, thread-like, white one
Tubes terminal, near together, in the alcoholic specimen short,
forming low verruce, swollen at base, the ends a little rominent
and naked. A square, with four small lobes. The
test is tough and opaque. Height 45; breadth ‘35 of anim

Murray Bay, Gulf of St. Lawrence,—Dr. J. W. Dawson.

Molluscan Fauna of New England. 289

Molgula pellucida V. Plate v1i, figure 2.

Diameter of the largest specimens about 1 inch.

. Bay,—L. Agassiz; Long Island,—Coll. Peabody Acad-
emy of Science; Bird Shoal near Beaufort, N. C..—Dr. H. C.
Yarrow.

Mr. Binney has published characteristic colored figures of
this species under the name of M. producta Stimp., which is a ~
very different, sand-covered species, (plate viii, fig. 6).

Hugyra glutinans V.
Cynthia glutinans MOll., Naturh. Tidsskrift, iv, p. 94, 1842.

Asciidiopsis complanata V., gen. nov. Plate vill, fig. 8.

Ascidia complanata Fabr.; Verrill, this Journal, i, p. 98, fig. 11, 1871.

Ascidia callosa, Stimp., Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iv, p. 228, 1852,

The remarkable and complex structure of the gill in this
Species seems to require its separation as a distinct genus. A
“tn all portion of the gill is represented in the figure, much en-

Aleyonidium ramosum Verrill, sp. nov. Plate VHI, fig. 10.
_Much branched, when full grown; the branches irregularly
dichotomus, usually crooked. Surface glabrous, smooth, or
nearly so, the cells rather small and crowded ; zooids with six-
teen slender tentacles. Color ashy brown, or dull rusty brown.
eter of branches mostly ‘20 to 25 of an inch. Height
10 to 15 inches.
Am. Jour. cable Series, Vou. ITI, No. #6.—AprRIL, 1872.

290 0. C, Marsh—Dermal Scutes of Mosasauroid Reptiles,

Off South-end, near New Haven, 1-4 fathoms, common,
—A. V.; Vineyard Soe, cpa ‘and Great Bog Harbor,
N. Tiel. K. V., and 8. L Sm
Errata.—p. 210, for saat cerinum, read Mangelia cerina.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

PuLaTE VI.
Figure 1. ag aides enlarged 5 oo ; 1 a, the same, natural size (from
nney’s Gould, by E. 8. Mor
2. Angulus mode us V., enlarged 5 ai ameters ; 2a, the same, natural size.
ete oe hari v. enlarged 16 diameters ; 3a, another specimen,

= eae ser num = hae ature, enlarged 24 diameters
“7, Styliola vitrea V., enlarged 3 di diameter

oO
=]
—
=
“8
a
3
5 - =")
Se
Le eee ee

LEN ee ee

Figure 1. Periploma Eevyrcoes, left side, exterior view (from Binney’s Gould, by E.
8. Morse); La, the same, view of the interior of a young specimen, with
the ossicle in place, enlarged 3 diameters; 10, ossicle of the same,
enlarged 30 diameters.

ie ‘ todon V., enlarged 3 diamet

“8. Modiola hamatus tee: rom New Have n, enlarged nearly 2 diameters.

“ 4. Turtonia nitida V., view of the saterlot, aulerg bl 40 diameters ; 44, the
same, hat view, natural size and enlarged, (from Binney’s Gould, by

E. 8. Mors
“* 5. Elysiella ati V., dorsal view, sinter nearly 83 diameters; 5a, the
same, ventra fe teers e0 nlarged
Puate VIII. a
Figure 1. potty orepe papyracea, papas resting in right valve wie Be of the man-
e Femoved fom ¢ the upper side; a, retracted a ‘nal tube; , branchial

3 m,m, anterior and posterior addu ett muscles ; 4, intes-
snes ee o pal i of left side; 7, retracted foot; 0, openi
tle for protrusion 0 of foot
He 12. Mol iD rebar more than natural s : a 4
—- Bugyra po tad +. enlarged about 2 ne “with the adhering m ;
partly removed. e
“ 4. Molgula papillosa V., from off Martha’s Vineyard, enlarged 2 diamete 18

with t hering sand mostly af
“ 5, Molgula arenata Stimp., natural size, and with its coating of sand.
eC. Me ueta Stimp., natural size, with its coat of fine sa

t

“7. Cynthia partita Stimp., erect variety, showing the outline and the go

ter of the apertures; but the surface of the body appears smoot other

is natura
one, Ascidiopsis com ee mata V., small portion of the gill, much enlarged.
’ a V., from Murray Bay, enlarged 3 diameters. with
uae Aleyoion ramosum V.,a young specimen enlarged 2 diameters,

of the zooids expanded.

Art. XXXIX. a of the Dermal — = Mosasauroid
Reptiles ; by Professor O. C. Mar

THE great abundance of Pythonomorpha in the Crete
deposits of this country is rapidly affording material hess t
understanding of the structure of these peculiar reptiles, abou
which, _ recently, so little has been known. The arent
tions of the Yale Coliege party in Western Kansas, 1 L he
first proved the existence of posterior limbs, in three of *

0. C. Marsh—Dermal Scutes of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 291

genera,* and the same party, during their investigations of the
past year in that region, have added several other important

their true affinities. An examination of a large number of
specimens has shown that this covering existed in Hdestosaurus,

jodon, Holeodus and Clidastes, and hence there can be little
doubt that it was common to the entire group.

The plates were first observed in a specimen of Hdestosaurus,
on which several were adhering to portions of the skull and
lower jaws. A few of these were attached together, a ps
in their original position with reference to each other, thus
indicating their natural arrangement. There were evidently at
least two or three kinds of scutes, and all of those preserved are
essentially quadrilateral in form, the posterior margin being the
shortest. the lower surface is smooth. The upper side has
the margin more or less beveled, to admit an imbricate arrange-
ment when in place, but no true ornamentation. The edges are,
in general, quite thin, but one shows that it was unit
sutur ere are also indications of an imperfect articulation,
somewhat like that seen in the plates of some species 0
Paleoniscus

Measurements.

Length of large scute of Hdestosaurus, ------------------ 5 li
Width at anterior margin, ---.-_------------------ ----- Me fh
Width at posterior margin,.il.5..2 (ss esse este ake + eee 9°
Greatest thickness ¢2o¢ .asrut Jsoieere es Le - 3°
a of small scute of Hiestosaurus, . -------- jodhe ie sh 18°
Wi h at anterior Margin, - —-6 Js c1 005 Gsi- 46 Oe ON oe Se 18°
Width at posterior MAPgIN, Jou 5 dec wn der aeisssmen Ahine e- 12°
OSE I Rall aatihd ea SEs ail HS SEP 5

In the genus Liodon, the scutes are acne gree and some-
. . ' b

to be proportionally smaller. Those found with one specimen

are quadrilateral in form, with the posterior margin shortest.

ey are smooth below, but the upper surface 1s rugose. The ex-

posed portion is linguiform, with its longer axis corresponding to

that of the seute. One perfect scute was 269", 4n length, 20 in

average width, and 4-25 in thickness. The scutes in Holcodus,
* This Journal, vol. i. p. 447, June, 1871.

tl

292 P. E. Chase—Method of Estimating the Sun’s Mass.

so far as observed, resemble those of Zzodon. In Clidastes, the
only scutes detected were some fragments adhering to the
caudal vertebree of C. Wymani Marsh. They are very thin,
and quite smooth.

he various specimens examined in this investigation render
it probable that the cranium of these reptiles was not cove
with plates, but the body only, as in some of the Crocodilia
The scutes are apparently different in each species, and hence
are important as a means of identification.

Yale College, New Haven, March 5th, 1872.

Art. XL.—A New Method of Estimating the Sun’s Mass and
Distance, by means of the Heating Energy of Flames ; by Pt
EARLE CHAsk, Professor of Physics in Haverford College.

In a recent paper* I endeavored to demonstrate, from f-
miliar postulates, the following proposition : ae
The kinetic energy of dissociated water should be to the kinehe
energy of terrestrial revolution, as the mass of the earth is to the mass
of the sun ; ce
And the energy of hydrocarbons should be to the energy 2 dis-
sociated water, as elastic energy, under constant volume, 1s to elastic
energy under constant pressure. ¢
As the proposition has obvious important bearings, I submit
to the readers of this Journal the following illustrations of my
method. 4
arious experimenters have estimated the heating equiv®
lents of chemical combination, for hydrogen and other elemen
tary and compound substances. The earlier estimates are Very
discordant, but successive improvements in apparatus led to a
satisfactory approximation of results.
olecular, as well as cosmical forces, being presumably cet

ure-
ments of those energies, but I am not aware that any on¢; ga

* Read before the American Philosophical Society, Feb. 16, 1872.
+ Proceedings and Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc.; this Journal, 1863-4, et sv».

P. E. Chase—Method of Estimating the Sun’s Mass. 298

heating energy of Hydrogen, the reasonably accordant ones of
Andrews, Dulong, Favre and Silbermann, Grassi, and Hess.
According to the mean of their several results, one ‘ipod of
H, burned with eight pounds of O, liberates enough heat to
34533 X 772 feet.

If such a lift were accomplished, it would establish an oscilla-
tion, which would be perpetually sustained by terrestrial attrac-
tion and elastic rebound, if not counteracted by opposing
forces.

lift the nine pounds of gaseous H,O i vacuo,

Let h= mean height of oscillating vapor (3X ee a feet).*

m= mass of sun, in units of the earth’s ma

d= mean distance of sun in units of sarttts equatorial
radius =mean height of sagtiwiane earth.

Yo= 3654 5b 48m 49s,

y,= time of ee revolution at earth’s equatorial sur-

face = 27_|—.
r= earth’s equatorial radius (20,923,654 feet=mean of
Airy and Bessel.)
g= 32°08744.
According to my hypothesis

[Ae | BOs on | Bas BRE Bio

h
We have also, according to well known mechanical laws,
m= (¥1\3 xq", Solving the equations, we obtain the follow-
ng values (C), which I collate with the careful astronomical
estimates of. eweomb (N), and Stone (S).
S.

C
Mass af the sun, 330,260 26, 329,
Distance “ « 92,639,500 m. 92,389,000 m. 91,945,000 m.

If an elastic fluid is lifted above the earth’s surface, subject
to the (nearly) constant pressure of gravity ; :

The superficial pressure oc (“)’.
And the volume « a (*) z

Therefore, under equal increments of heat,
vol. under const. press. : const. vol. X (r-+h)*:
In the case of H,O, from the values already die’ we

obtain (“)" =1-488, This corresponds, approximately, to

* My theoretical mean specific heat of H,O being $.

294 F. V. Hayden— Yellowstone National Park.

the experimental valuation adopted by Tyndall (1-421), and is
virtually identical with the mean result of the experiments of
Dulong, and Favre and Silbermann, upon ether and olive oil
(1-494 and 1495), as well as with the theoretical volumetric con-
densation of H,O (1°5).

If my postulates are admitted, the field which they open for
the verification of astronomical, thermal, electrical and chemi-
cal observations and experiments, seems unlimited. have
already in view special researches pertaining to solar tempera-
ture, zthereal density, atomicity and valency, specific and
latent heats, temperature of fusion, vaporization and dissocia-
tion, mixtures of gases and vapors, periods of planetary rota-
tion, terrestrial rigidity and tides.

. Philadelphia, Feb. 20, 1872.

Art. XLL—The Yellowstone National Park ; by ¥. V. HAYDEN. —
ith a Map.

the Senate of the United States, by the Honorable S. C. i
€roy, to set apart a certain tract of land lying near the hea
waters of the

F. V. Hayden— Yellowstone National Park. 295

“game time a similar bill was offered in the House of Represent-
atives, by Hon. Wm. H. Claggett, the delegate from Montana.
After due consideration in the Committee on Public Lands in

e bill now before Congress has for its object the withdrawal
from settlement, occupancy, or sale, under the laws of the United
States, a tract of land fifty-five by sixty-five miles, about the
sources of the Yellowstone and Missouri Rivers; and dedicates

months of June, July and August, the climate is pure and most
Mvigorating, with scarcely any rain or storms of an kind; but
the thermometer frequently sinks as low as 26°. ere is frost
every month of the year. ‘This whole region was in comparatively
modern geological times the scene of the most wonderful voleanic

n
these springs are adorned with decorations more beautifal

>

than human art ever conceived, and which have required thousands

296 F. V. Hayden— Yellowstune National Park.

? Ta for the cunning — of nature to form. Persons are now

ing for the spring to open to enter in and take possession of
done remarkable curiosities, to make merchandise of these beauti-
ful specimens, to fence in these rare wonders so as to char, rge vis-
itors a fee, as is now done at Niagara Falls, for the sight of that
ee oe ought to be as free as the air or water.

a few years this region will be a place of resort for all classes
of petals from all portions of the world. The geysers of Iceland,
which have been objects of interest for the scientific men and
travelers of the entire world, sink into insignificance in compati-
son with the hot springs of the Ydllvtirotis aud Fire-Hole Basins.
As a place of resort for invalids it will not be excelled by any
portion of the world. If this bill fails to become a law this ses-
sion, the vandals Sie are now waiting to enter into this wonder-
land will, in a single season, despoil, beyond recovery, these
remarkable siekaaitsen which have im athe all the cunning skill of
nature thousands of years to prepa

We have already shown that no portion of this tract can ever
be made available for agricultural or mining purposes. Eveni
the altitude and the climate would permit the » country to be made
available, not over fifty square miles of the entire area could ever
be settled. The valleys are all narrow, hemmed in by hi gh vol
canic set te like gigantic walls.

e withdrawal of this tract, therefore, for sale or settlement
takes “sikiey from the value of the pu ublic domain, and is 10
pecuniary loss to the Government, but will be regarded by the
entire civilized shes as a step of progress and an “honor to Con-
gress and the nati

DEPARTMENT 0 E INTERIOR,
Washington, D. C. ane 29, 1872.

Sir: I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your com
munication of the 27th instant relative to the bill now pending in
the House of Representatives dedicating that beg of country
known as the Yellowstone Valley as a ag a8 ted

you herewith the report of D Hayden, Uni
States geologist, relative to said propoted deradee: and hav

only to add that I fully concur in his recommendations, and tru
i il aw.

Hon. M. H. Dunn ell, House of Represen ntatives bill
e committee therefore ebimaid the passage of the »
without amendmen

Chemistry and Physics. 297

s rivers ; thence east to the place
of beginning; is hereby reserved and withdrawn from settlement,
occupancy, or sale under the laws of the United States, and dedi-

py the same, or any part thereof,
cept as hereinafter provided, shall be considered trespassers and

said park, and against their capture or destruction for the pur-
Ses of merchandise or profit Il also cause all 0
trespassing upon the same after the passa f oO

such measures as shall be necessary or proper to fully carry out
the objects and purposes of this act.
Approved, March 1, 1872.

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.

IL CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS.

1. On the wave-lengths of Fraunhofer’s lines.—DrtscuEiNeR has
recomputed the values of the wave-lengths determined by himself
after again counting the lines upon his ruled plate of glass. The
total breadth of the ruled surface was found to be 13°8765 milli-
Meters and the number of lines 3001. Ditscheiner’s values, with
the corresponding ones as determined by Angstrom and van der

298 Serentific Intelligence.

Willigen, are given in the table below, which is taken from his
paper. omparison of the results of the measarements of these
different observer, provided apparently with equally good instru-
ments, will serve to show that the subject is by no means ex-
haust ed, and that new series of determinations are required.
Kirchhoff, D. Angstrom. v. d. Willigen. Kirchhoff. D. Angstrom. _v, d, Willigen.
593 687-41 686-67 687°132 1737°6 511712 510-70 Pee
C 694 656°23 656-18 656°557 1750-4 510°00 509.88 510199
TLL5 651-71 651-55 651°961 17774 50811 50788 508'268

7 6 ates
55a 1834 504°26 504713 504390

831 623-24 623-14 aie 18545 502-96 502-70

850 619°26 619°05 619°423 1867 501-97 501-75 oak

860 61714 616°82 617-201 1873°5 501°38 501°32 oa
616°37 616:12 616-510 18-5°38 500-78 500-50 ae

8745 614°38 614-05 614-451 1908°5 499°43 499-02 oven

877 613°88 613°55 GIS 718 a 98°48 498-20

597-79 597-70 ar 1983 49405 49385 ....

585°92 585- Dae

57639 576-20 suis 2041'4 489°25 489°05 489°378
7544 575-20 a 2058 487°89 487-75 Ladd
7117 570-83 — 2067 487°26 487710 ee
568-37 568-14 _... || F 20801 48622 48608 486400
566.00 565 sued 2103'3 48434 483-90 pe
563°93 562-23 —§62°336 2121°5 48253 482-24 ja

56165 561-45 561-809 21 0.28 480.00 ph

557-45 557 21871 47653 47650 ee
554°21 552-75 553-214 2201°9 475°62 475°35 ase
550°80 55 ft 3 2291-7 474:07 473°60 nas
550-37 way 2233-7 473°08 472-66 pai
547°81 547-60 548-186 2250 471°53 471:35 +ns
46°46 546-23 546-551 2264°3 470-43 470-20 ins
545°73 645°-46 545°813 2309 46680 46665 467
54476 54458 2416 460°36 459°20 o--+

10 542 eee 2436°5 45840 458710 =
540°60 540-48 ce 24575 456°53 455°50 ---
539°71 538 24674 455°45 454°90 a
53720 537-05 537.409 2489-4 453-49 45330 453
53420 534 253771 450°29 450-05 ---
532°98 532-75 533-070 2547°2 449°86 449-40 o=-*
529°91 §29 se 25663 448°20 448-20 -os+
523-39 528-96 SRS 2606 445-74 445°40 ----
527.71 527-50 sane 2627 444°39 444°20 ----
52713 526-90 527-203 2638-6 443°59 443-45 sais
5°68 525-4 as 2670 441°63 441-48 pin
523-43 52323 523.590 26866 440°62 440°40 195668
522.79 522-64 522-968 2721-6 43850 43840 #
2169 521-50 Ss 27349 43755 437°51 a--*
521 520-75 oo 2775°6 435°42 435°18 Ta
519°37 5191 2797 43408 434-00 pee
51843 51831 5186 2822-8 432°56 432°50 abe
17°40 617-22 4517522 || @ 2854-7 431:12 430°70 30-190
51685 51668 516-985 2869-7 430:13 430:00

51434 513-85 a 428°96 428-90 dai

F
;
;
4

TE SS as ok Ce a =

Chemistry and Physies. 299

Kirchhoff. dD. Angstrom. v. d. Willigen. Kirchhoff. Dd. Angstrom. _v. d, Willigen.
427°32 427°15 TATT v 14°43 41430 414°5

y 426711 426°00 426°002 T 41837 41320 413°444

8 425-41 425°05 re ea E 410°22 410°01 410°402

6 424:98 424°95 kyue 0 40821 407-70 407-979

ew 423°69 423°55 T 407-75 407710 Se st

B 422°68 422°65 422-876 a 40631 4(6°30 ss

¢ 421°80 42150 by Z 404°52 404°50 404°172

0 420713 419°81 Sess t 40338 402°95 403°615
t 418°92 418°70 5 ae @ 400°63 400-4 nore

x 417-36 417:20 eens H 39689 396.80 397°146

BE 415°70 415°40 Sein bs bg 393°53 393°30 393°872
WwW. G.

v.

. On the spectroscopic observation of the rotation of the sun.—
ZittneR and Voce. have succeeded in applying the spectroscope
to the measurement of the velocity of the sun’s rotation. The
first successful observations were made on the 2d of June last

ory at Bothkamp near Kiel. The slit of the yates a
e receding

highly dispersive spectroscope by Schroder, consisting of five
direct-vision prisms and five other prisms arranged in a circle,

sec

admitted, and Vogel considers the observations at present as

simply demonstrating the fact of the sun’s rotation.—Pogg. An.,
9 Ww. G

yf Cobalt.—F.

ammonia-cobalt bases, containing, besides an elaborate history of
the subject, some interesting new facts. By the action of the air
u ia, besides the
chlorides already well known, a dark- and a light-green salt are
formed. The dark-green salt dissolves readily in water, at first
with a greenish-blue color, which quickly passes to pure
after some time to violet. Chlorhydric acid, with the aid of heat,
decomposes this body with formation of chloride of purpureo-
cobalt. The author calls this body chloride of dichro-cobalt, in

300 Scientific Intelligence.

consequence of its well-marked dichroism. Its formula is, in the
old notation employed by Rose, Co,Cl, . 3NH ,+2H0, which
may be written €o,Cl, .6NH,+20H,, so that it is probably the
chloride of cobalt-hexamin. Erdmann has described a correspond-
ing nitrite and Ktinzel a sulphite; both these salts probably be-
long to the same series. Rose does not state whether the chloride
unites with — chlorides to form salts. The light-green salt
formed at the same time is identical with the salt discovered by
Genth and Gibbs, and called by them ba era alt. The exist-

4NH,+2H0 o
o,Cl,.8NH,+20H,. It appears to be the chloride of the
tetainn (octamin) series, the hyposulphate of wee oe se
by Kiinzel and has the formula, Co,O
. 8NH, 13: Rose does not state Jee the a cit
soit bities or ‘not with metallic chlorides, nor whether it rat
other salts by double. decomposition.— Untersuchungen
berg 1871 Kobalt- Verbindungen von Dr. F. Rose. Hie
erg, 187 w.
4. On some new salts of roseo-cobalt and luteo-cobalt. "Koo
has eget a number of interesting salts of roseo-cobalt and luteo-
cobalt in the laboratory of Blomstrand. The iodosulphate of luteo-
cobalt, a yellow salt slightly soluble in hot and nearly insoluble in
cold water, has the formula €o,(NH S0,),. By evapor

of luteo-cobalt. The corresponding chlorosulphate, €o,(NH,)12
Cl,(S0,),+6 aq, five’ beautiful quadratic prisms, ra arely See
psits "Orher salts of the same base have respectively the tor
mulas,

Cl, . 2HgC1 Cl, . PtCl,
604(NH,),2 sé, . gCl2) €0(NH,) 24 ($80)
©o,(NH)i24 G2 HS | €o,(NH).2 1 4,

4
The salts of roseo-cobalt obtained were:

vi
€o0,(NH,), ,1,(S0,J.4+2 aq
€o0,(NH;,), oB .(50,).+2 aq

€o0,(NH,),.(NO5), +2 aq
€o,(NH,),, Se, - (SO,NH,)’s
02( dros, }: +6aq
eed
€o(NH)(N'5 Soe
€o,(NH,),,Cl. (N®.), +3 aq.

ree ee ee ee ee ee ae

|
|
|
|
|

Geology and Natural History. 301

Jahrgang iv, p. 749. , +
5. the transformation of glucosides. into monatomic and
OUCHARDAT has studied the action of an

Ixxiii, p. 100

]
the known remains of the other species would indicate. The third

at its distal end. This sp call
agilis, will be fully described in this Journal at an early day.
Yale College, New Haven, March 19th, 1872.
2. Corundum of North Carolina.—Corundum has long been
known to occur in Franklin, Macon Co., N. C., in large loose masses.
rough the energy and labors of Col. C. W. J ENKS, the masses have

the main vein is four feet wide, and has a northeast course. It is
made up of crystalline masses and crystals of the corundum, of

302 Scientific Intelligence.

fine blue, grayish white and red colors, along with crystallized
chlorite, and has a considerable thickness of the chlorite either
side. The chlorite is supposed to be the corundophilite of Shepard,
as the mineral to which this name was given came from masses
of the corundum. There are six other veins, according to Col.
Jenks: one of them is pure corundum; in others, it is associated

. chlo
vein has the chlorite packed with zircons; while another contains
a greenish black variety of spinel, partly in disseminated grains,
and partly in octahedral crystals, often grayish externally. In the
mountain there are talcose or talcoid schists with some serpentine
and several other minerals. The crystals of corundum are of all
sizes from those of quite small size that are red and blue sap-

4. United States Geological Surveys.—A Dill has passed the
House in Illinois making liberal appropriations for the publication
State, and it 18

it.
ewberry has asked from the Legislature for $10,00
finish the Survey of Ohio and the Reports. The Legislature ie

y
passage of the bill. The survey has been well carried formes
under its able head, Prof. J. S. Newberry, and the Reports Wes

lature of
der

large appropriation is looked for from the Legis

ports. —
5. Second Report of the Geological Survey of Indiana, ree
wit
lates, n 1871. oe
eport of Prof. Cox is occupied mainiy with details respect™e
the coal beds and the associated on a of Sullivan,
ies i i the coul-
: he Quater-

* The veins are being opened by the American Corundum Co.
ar are y the erican Corundum
which Col Jenks is the “ business manager.”

Geology and Natural History. 303

cal with existing species now living in the State, excepting Feliz
occulta, which has not been found living north of Arkansas
Prof. Cox states that he is unable to find any ground for subdi-
viding the coal formation into parts corresponding to separate
epochs, e observes that there are two well defined zones of
t

ern is about 450 square miles; and the coals are of the free-burn-

e

quarter millions of tons. e coal from this zone has received
the name of Block-Coal on account of readily coming out in large
blocks when mined. It breaks into thin sheets parallel with the
bedding, but with difficulty in the opposite direction. The coal is
remarkably free from sulphur and phosphorus, and is coming rap-
idly into use for the manufacture of Bessemer steel. :

e western zone covers full 6,000 square miles, and contains
a or more thick beds of good coal, which are in eneral caking-
coals,

a2 Report closes with a list of the Plants of the State, by A.

8: :

6. Mines, Mills and Furnaces of the Pacific States and Terri-
tories ; by Rossrrer W. Raymonp, Ph.D., United States Com-
missioner of Mining Statistics. 8vo, pp. 556. New York: J.

the usual chapters of statistics of the vemaagr ss of the precious
Metals, this volume, like those which have — it, gives a

Sources and methods of the mining and me llurgical industry in
California, Nevada, Montana, Arizona, and other important min-
ingregions, We find, also, chapters upon metallurgical processes,

304 Scientific Intelligence,

narrow gauge railways, mining law, the geographical distribution

i
of metals and ores, the origin of gold dust and gold nuggets,

etc., etc.

Incidentally to the descriptions of mining districts, a very con-
siderable amount of information respecting the topography and
the geology is given. This is true especially of the chapters upon
the Territory of Arizona, which was visited by Dr. Raymond's
assistant, Mr. Tilers. We find, for example, p. 230, the best de
scription of the nature and extent of the great basaltic bed along
the Gila river that has yet been given.

In the five chapters devoted to metallurgical processes, there is
one upon the treatment of auriferous ores in C ich in-
cludes a description in detail of the stamp batteries, and the
arrangements for concentration. It is thorough and scientific, and
is a valuable contribution to the literature of the mechanical treat-

the product of stamps. The cost of gold extraction at steam
mills is deduced as $3.74 per ton, including the interest on capital
and the loss of quicksilver. Mr. Hague, in the volume upon Mir
ing Industry, p. 555, makes the cost, exclusive of interest on cap
ital, $3.69 per ton.

produced $25,000,000, and Nevada $16,000,000, Of quicksilver,
the production was 29,546 flasks, being about 4000 flasks less than
in 1869, and the price had advanced from 60 to 90 cents.

e volume, throughout, gives evidence of great labor and
care in its preparation, and is a most acceptable addition to ow
knowledge of the mineral resources of the western portion of the
co

2f Geology of Oxford and the Valley of the Thames ; by Joux
Puiturrs, M.A., F.R.S., etc., Prof. Geol. in the University of Ox-

Britain, has done a great service to general Bass! in the pre
paration of this work on Oxford geolog e

as old as any in Scotland—and the representatives, therefore,

on. e ee. 75
part of the volume is taken up with the lias and odlite, and in t

Geology and Natural History. 305

‘hands of every teacher of geology, and of all who have special

interest in the science. Moreover it is a model for a treatise of
the kind.

8. Papers on the Eastern and Northern Extension of the Gulf
Stream.—From the German of Dr. A. PETERMANN, W. von
Freepen and Dr. A. Musny. Translated, in the United States
Hydrographic office, in charge of Captain R. H. Wyman, .
by E.R. Knorr. 388 pp. 4to. Washington, 1871.—The Bureau

Asia.
9. Corals and Coral Islands ; by James D, Dana. 398 PP. large
8vo. with several maps and numerousillustrations. New York, 1872.
(Dodd & Mead, 762 Broadway).—This work is a general treatise

< of living corals, are given. The frontispiece con-
tains colored figures of species of Actinis or Sea-Anemones, from

gured in the author's Report on Zodphytes are given in @ table
prepared by Prof, Verrill.
_ the volume is printed in an unusually handsome style. The
illustrations add much to its beauty. :

10, Report of the Geological Survey of the State of New Hamp-
shire, showing its progress during the year, 1870, by ©. H. Hiren-
cock, Ph.D., State Geologist, Prof. Geol. and Min. in Dartmouth

Aw. Jour. 8c1—Tump Senres, Vor. III, No. 16.—APRIL, 1872,

306 Scientific Intelligence.

College. 82 pp. 8vo. 1871.—This report contains brief notes on
some of the rocks of the State, but is occupied mainly with the
meteorological observations and other records made during the
“ Mount Washington Expedition ” in the winter of 1870-1871.

1l. Report of the Geological Survey of Wisconsin; by Joux
Mourrisu, Commissioner of the Survey of the Lead District, Ad
dressed to the Governor of the State, and submitted with the
xovernor’s message, Jan. 11,1872. This report is evidently the
work of no regular State geologist. It is a trashy document,
miserable in the most of its science, and often bad grammatically.

12. Annual Report of the State Geologist of New Jersey for
the year 1871. 46 pp. 8vo.—Prof. G. H. Cook, State Geologist,
here presents briefly facts connected with the economical ge-
logy of the State.

x
the eye of the veteran

ding both Stylipus and Sieversia. The North American speci
admitted are : :

. Virginianum L. and G. album Gmelin, characterized as he
now understand them, but with more absoluteness than 18 fou
to prevail here where they grow. To the latter Scheutz inclines
to refer Walter’s G. Carolinianum. From the character os
hardly a doubt of it, and Walter’s name is much older
Gmelin’s. i

G. Oregonense Scheutz is a new “sub-species” under G. u
num (otherwise recognized only from the Old World): “a
described from a specimen in the Stockholm herbarlum colle ae
by Werngren; nothing of the sort from Oregon has fallen un
our notice.

(l-
18

um) have n
with Thunberg’s character, and their rounder, scarcey

Geology and Natural History. 307

G, agrimonioides (Pursh ?) C. A. Meyer. As to Pursh’s plant,
Scheutz has overlooked the positive affirmation in Torr. and Gray
Flora, that it is Potentilla arguta, as was long before suspected by
Sasa 8 Scheutz has no authentic materials of this, but describes

no white flowered species with densely pubescent receptacle, which
is the special character of G. strictuwm, and none of the latter
with petals oval instead of orbicular, and rather shorter than the
calyx. Meyer’s plant lies between 'G.. strictum and G. album or
Virginianum. It is to be noted that there is a Geum in Penn-
sylvania, Ohio, &c., with greenish-yellow or yellow petals, but
with the receptacle and mainly the other characte rs of G. album

is we have once referred to G. urban ., and the question
is whether G. albwm altogether should not be e referred, as i
intimated in the last edition of the Manual.

G. rivale L. and G. geniculatum Michs,, our only Caryophylla-
ta, The latter, we still presume, was not found in Canada, ;

G. glaciale Adams, G. triflorum Pursh (to which his @. ciliatum
is also ata nd G. anemonides Willd. (the first and last

ngsd. and G. calthifolium — (probably not distinct), of

naked ab

Ro. aestt eee has styles wholly naked, and the pinnate
foliage of G. tri

vernum Torr. and Gray, the Stylipus vernus ay our
author j is much dispo a | to rehabilitate as a genus.

4, Baillon, Histoire des Plantes (Hachette & Cie, Paris). The
parts which have a appeared during the year 1871 are numerous

Besides those noticed in our cess hgs: arid we have now
before us the monograph of Papaveracee ridacer.

Following his extreme bent for pa e tev Baillon not only
ranks the Fumariacee as a mere tribe of Papaveracee, but com-
bines Hunnemannia with Eschscholtzia ae jacce all Cl hie
he keeps Adlumia ge en Dicentra Il Cleomeo

enera to Cleome and Wislize in place ping ft ine genera admitt re
y Bentham and Hooker and uae: though somewhat dubiously,
appends Moringa to the order

kine the next eg rm te that of Crucifere, we were curious to

know what course would be followed in a strictly monotypical
order, rather expectin te the 170 genera which Hooker and
Bentham admitted might be reduced to a moiety; but he has cut
an literate a and, in fact, has followed his predecessors some-
te

308 Setentific Intelligence.

In the monograph of Resedacew there is no novelty to report.
In Crassulacee only seven genera are left, Penthorum being trans
ferred to Saxifragacee, Tilleea as well as -Rochea to Crassula, and
Diamorpha reunited to Sedum

Saxifragacee are remarkably treated, The order,—widened
beyond all former limits by Bentham and Hooker, who included
the Francoee, saints the Grossulariee and Ce; hulotus,—is now

need b ; 2. Pterostemon, with seed ned
to be copiously abuminous; 3. the Pittosporee ; 4. the Brun
acer , amamelidece ; 6. Liquidambar and its allied

to ied, not ay the Saururee, but © Chloranthea, it
Ceratophyllum as an appendage ; the @ gener mre: as in a recent
volume of the Prodromus. In Urtic we, the order is taken mr
strict sense, and Weddell is quite implicitly followed.

Ill Astronomy.

1. On the Eclipse of the Sun on September 29th, 1875 ; by Rosest
Treat Parne.* (Communicated to this Journal.)— —In the remait-
der of this century there will be, in that large part of the United
States north of North bebop and east of the Mississippi, only _
one central eclipse of the sun, viz., the one which will be ann ‘a
in part of the State of New York and of four of the New Engl

is is mentione
1875 Sept. 29th, a rises three-fifths hea aces 55 56™ 30° mean time
Fo ¢ 2

rmation of the ring - 2
Rupture of the ring, 6 22, ve ‘
End of the eclipse, 7

With the aid of the English Nautical Almanac o _ (i
which the places of the sun and moon are given according this
recent and more accurate tables of Le Verrier and Hanse a), 6 ont
eclipse has been lately recomputed for lat. 42° 99) 48”, long.

40”, and will take place as follows: <
* Mr. Paine states in a note to the editors :—My list of aii the solar erg
Boston between 1824 and 1901, was computed in 1823 (the year oe

college) when in my 19th ag Tt contains 30 Sains, of which 20 Feb
place, all of which but two, I think, I have observed; four of them (Fe oo.
Sept., 1838 ; May, 1854, ind Oot, 19m) annular, at Chatham, ©. ©. ; and

Middlebury, Vt.; and Charleston, and two total: (Nov. 30th, vrei

souess Pee 1869), at gre s. 0; sae Boonseboro, os and I ha rt + 1815)
t I may observe here, ~ nular one ©
an yt "Gonads, the total one on July 29th, 18

ee eS epee ee ne PN ee Pe ae

Astronomy. 309

' Formation of the ring, 65 21™ 22°7 a. M.
Least distance of centers of G and p, 6 22 37°0 “
Rupture of the ring, oe 2° Rie
End of the eclipse, Y 2372" *

Least apparent distance of centers 29’'"64, difference of semi-diam-
"85.

?
The central eclipse will begin on the earth at sunrise, in lat. 434°,

Greenwich time, in Salisbury, in the northeastern extremity of
Massachusetts, in lat. 42° 52 57’, long. 70° 50’ 5”; it thence passes
in an E.S.E. course across the Atlantic, reaching Africa in lat. 17°

longest will be 3" 395, but in Salisbury, Mass., and the adjacent
town of Seabrook, N. H., 3" 17°2°.

The distance between the northern and southern limits of the
annular eclipse in New York and New England will be about 110
miles, and a line drav a map, from Watertown, N. Y. about
five miles south of Middlebury, Vt., and three south of Portland,
Me., will represent very nearly the northern limit, and another
drawn five miles north of Ithaca and of Hudson, N. Y., over
Hadley, Franklin, Duxbury and Truro, Mass., the southern. Be-
tween these lines are included a large part of central New York

east o

southern half of Vermont and New Hampshire, and the south-
western extremity of York and part of Cumberland counties,
Maine ; also five astronomical observatories, viz: those of Hamilton
College near Utica, and at Albany, in New York, at Harvard Unt-

ampshire ; but the eclipse will not be annular at Vassar
College, Poughkeepsie, in any part of Connecticut or Rhode
—— at Springfield, Fall River or New Bedford, Mass., Middle-

i ve :

two seconds only.

ince the magnificent total eclipse of five minutes duration, at
Boston and Albany, near noon of June 16th, 1806, there have
been in New England only two central eclipses, both annular in
i ar

810 Scientific Intelligence.

1876, March 25th, a central eclipse near noon, in part of Van"
couver’s Island and of British Columbia, probably total there a
very few seconds, but generally annular, where the altitude of the
moon will be less,

1878, July 29th, the great eclipse of June 16th, 1806, will
return for the fourth time, and the shadow of the moon will pass
over British Columbia, Montana, Colorado, Texas, Cuba, the city
of Havana, ete. At Denver, Colorado, at about 34 p.m, the
eclipse will be total nearly three minutes, so that for careful ob-
servations on this eclipse Denver appears to be very favorably
situated. ;

1885, March 16th, the eclipse of Feb. 12th, 1831, will return
the third time, and be annular in the northern part of California
and in Montana.

1900, May 28th, a total eclipse of the sun in the southern States,
and the shadow of the moon, coming from the southwest, wi
reach the ocean in North Carolina, a little south of Norfolk, but
the duration of totality will not exceed a minute at any place in
the United States, where the eclipse is central.

Boston, February, 1872.

2. Solar eclipse of Dec. 12. Observations made at Bekul by

J. P. Macrear, dated S. S. Indus, Jan. 6, 1872.—* * * The

2

ment of the eclipse the slit of the 6-prism was placed tangential
the point of contact, that of the direct vision radial, width su
that the absorption lines were very distinct

harengiey paced ees, a
units, the length of all five varvi
being

rage
bout i rying, but not together, the ave
about one-eighth the height the visible spestrttl.

Se ee eames ee ee

ES ORANG mate Cpe ey ae Ce Oe Deel RR Ow Taree ae

Astronomy. 311

line a little more refrangible than the air band between 6 and F.

i i i i ared ; soon
after this I saw F line double about the same height as usual, one-
eighth spectrum.

‘At 7h. 23m. m.t., having returned to the 6-prism radial to the
cusp, I observed the hydrogen D, E an very plain; several
lines then began to come into view, as near as I could judge all
the iron lines from halfway between D and E to beyond d. These

placed the telescope on the moon’s limb by the eye-piece, then put
in the spectroscope, but the light was not sufficient to show any

oon, not much
Plainly visible in the S.E. quarter
now arrived, and, as previously arranged, Mr. 5
place at the 6in., while I again looked through the 6-prism spectro-
pe to record anything that might be visible, but I saw nothing.
As the spectroscope yas not on the sun’s limb at the re-appearance
of the light, I cannot state what took place.
ng the remainder of the partial eclipse I watched the north
ern cusp as the moon uncovered the sun, and several times I saw

312 Scientific Intelligence.
distinctly the four bright lines near C; but saw nothing else worth
ording.

The color of the corona appeared to me a light pinkish white,
very brilliant. I saw no streamers, The rest of the sky and
everything around had a bluish tinge, * * *.— Nature, Jan. 18,

- The Solar Eclipse of Dec. 12. Observations made at
docottah ; by L. Respieut.—The spectral observations of recent
total eclipses of the sun had plainly demonstrated the existence

conformation and extent. This question, therefore, constituted
one of the principal problems remaining to be solved by observa
tions of the eclipse of the 12th of December, 1871.

The slit-spectroscope applied to large telescopes doubtless affords
the best means of verif i i
regions, of this gaseous stratum, which may be termed the superior
chromosphere, and of determining the materials of which it 38

tary rays differing considerably in refrangibility, it appeared to
me that the form and dimensions of the higher chromosphere
might be much more conveniently studied by means of a large
prism fixed in front of the object-glass of the telescope, whereby
the several chromatic images of the corona would be distinctly

rved

simultaneously in the same field, and their form and dimensions
directly investigated. :

Towa s the end of the year 1868, a small flint-glass prism was

made for me by Signor Merz, of Monaco, to be fitted to the object

ness of this prism and of the object-glass, was found to bese
mirably adapted for observing the eclipse in the manner JUS
described.

The dispersion of the prism from the lines C to H of Frannhit?
is about 32’; the free aperture of the object-glass is 45 #rene”
inches; the field of the telescope is about 1°, with a magnifying
power of 40,

Astronomy. 313

venient method of solving the questions relating to the corona
itself, With this instrument, then, I prepared to observe the
eclipse, proposing to myself the following problems :—

L. To ascertain whether, just before the beginning, and at the
end of totality, the solar spectral lines are reversed—a phenomenon
observed by Prof. Young in the eclipse of 1870.

2, Amidst the several chromatic images of the prominences, to
observe especially whether the image given by the ye low line
D, coincides with that of the lines of hydrogen gas.

3, To define the form and dimensions of the chromatic images
of the corona. wc?

0 verify the phenomenon of the reversal of the spectral lines at
the extreme edge of the sun, I had arranged the plane of disper-

came continuous, without however exhibiting, just before

totality, the reversal of the lines, although I was watching most

intently for this phenomenon. I would not, however, be under-

stood as denying altogether the reversal of the lines, for it is not

impossible that a thin film of mist, or the bright atmospheric light

at that time diffused over the spectrum of the solar limb, may
have concealed the bright lines.

the very instant of totality, the field of the telescope ex-

acle. The chromosphere at the

d

7

of light and the most surprising contrast of the brightest colors,
it

with the tints of the chromatic images of the corona. My atten:
tion was mainly directed to the comparison of the forms of the

nore strongly marked, one in the red corresp nding with the
line C, another in the "green, probably coinciding with the line

314 Scientific Intelligence.
1474 of Kirchhoff’s scale, and a third in the blue, perhaps coinciding
with F.

The green zone surrounding the dise of the moon was the bright-
est, the most uniform, and the best defined. The red zone was
also very distinct and well defined, while the blue zone-was faint

nces,

These colored zones shone out upon a faintly illuminated ground,
without any marked trace of color. If the corona contamed rays
of any other kind, their intensity must have been so” feeble that
they were merged in the general illumination of the field.

want of an assistant to note the time, and to write dows
the observations as they were made, occasioned me some loss ‘
time, and the end of the total eclipse was already at hand before
was aware of it. as
e green and red zones were well developed at the western 2
at the eastern limb, while the blue remained faint and ill-defin

n
spectral solar lines, or to a simple discontinuity in the eat
y were too soon immersed in a flood of light, whic?
‘£2.

“The reversal of the Fraunhofer lines seems to have bees ee
factorily observed by Captain Maclear at Bekul, Colonel Teo®”

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 315

at Dodabetta, and Captain Fyers at Jaffna. It was partially seen
by Pringle at Bekul, and Respighi at Poodocottah, and probably
by Pogson at Avenashi. How it was with Janssen I do not know.
His instrument, however, on account of the small size of the sun’s
image, was not very well adapted for this observation.

own wo
lines flashed in; what proportion of the whole I cannot say, per-
haps one-third.’

aptain Maclear writes, ‘ As totality came on the light decreased,
and the lines increased exceedingly rapidly in number and bright-
ness, until it seemed as if every line in the solar spec Ww
reversed ; then they vanished, not instantly, but so rapidly that

4 ?

IV. MisceLLanrgous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE.

the published correspondence they have confined themselves first
to a respectful request to the Commissioner of Agriculture that he

r
ture;” then, on receiving an unfavorable reply, to which the Com-
Misslouer gratuitously appended the intimation that were it not
for his desire . i

he conld say something to Dr. Parry’s disparagement, one of their

msinuated, and was accordingly “ put in possession of the whole

subject,” in a reply from the Commissioner, and thereupon (permis-

ston asked and granted), the correspondence is printed, that it may

Fey for itself. Leaving the case to make its own impression upon

mmissioner’s own showing, no comment was made beyond
prefac

‘ r. Parry was thought to have performed the duties of Botan-
Ist to the Department of Agriculture to the entire satisfaction of

316 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

the previous Commissioner. His extraordinary abrupt dismissal
upon the incoming of the present Commissioner, following a course
of vexatious treatment to which, he states, he was subjected by

scientific men in the present administration of a department in
which they eecanllty feel much interest.”
The tenure of any appointment in a government office, with
Soe usages, is precarious enough under ordinary circumstat-
; but here a scientific man is dismissed with far less notice and
a nde than is due to a household servant. The Commis
meee, just established in his office, writes to Dr. Parry, Sept. 27—
“Sir: Your services as botanist of ‘this s department will not be re-
quired after this date ;” and this letter is delivered at the close of
the day.

Now, apart from the recognized official usages, there is one rei
son which m ight have * suggested — - —— in this instance

was transferred to the ee Bureau under an arrangement
between the Secretary of that Institution, and the late estimable
and enlightened head of the Bureau (Gen. Ca pron)—who seems not
to have though ht an herbarium and an “herbarium botanist” “ f
tically unimportant.” And we understand that the Secretary 3
the Smithsonian Institution stipulated that the herbarium shoul

be in the charge of some sa acceptable to him, and 8 sho ont

put into proper order; and that Dr. Parry was appointed er
his recommendation. It ig ane — Piet sheet ‘

change necessary, he would have mae or with the Secretary, «
the Institution ; while the delay of a week or two needful for “_
so, would have ‘allowed the incumbent he was se pcre no m0
than the customary eee uaa the lowest cler
office may expect to rece the
Evidently, this prpeipitele dismissal of his subordinate by ye
ommissioner, as it would seem to be justifiable only ry itself
— of gross misconduct of the former, so it would 01} im-
m to imply misconduct, And the Commissioner makes the
Sdindtion explicit at the next stage of the proceedings, name
his reply to the memorial of the botanists who solicited i for
sideration, and that gratuitously, as the memorial does not ask
the reasons. When informed that they were of a nature “0
greeable to utter and likely bt disparage Dr. Parry i the oh for.
tion of his frien ds,” they were of course immediately # ask pe
The claim for them was ib castenk to; and it only remains t0
siderwhat the Soom turn out to office,
irst, the Com ssioner, on «taking pa a oi his. peyond
“found that atthe at all had been done by Dr. P oS yithout vihon
his attention to the preservation of the her Faria : "

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 317

ously the first thing to be done, and Dr. Parry was specially
appointed to do it; and that the herbarium was in the midst of

desire the botanist to undertake, “the principles of vegetable

to.
e next charge is that there were letters written by Dr. Parry
si deeme i

present Commissioner, one or two extracts from which are appended
ce 85

he correspondence we are noticing. Such pa it would
hardly be worth while to notice, except b of a demur to the
Commissioner’s judgment. e want of perspicuity and g

e Commissioner’s remaining specifications, detail
length, from all that we can learn, amount to this, While arrange”
‘ng the herbarium, Dr. Parry was in the habit of transmitting by
mail occasional specimens to be examined other
Specimens were also sent to him for naming. new
Sloner and his clerk appear to have suspected something w
°F irregular in this, and required that all notes accompanying
* Yet it is hard to insist upon them, since, when sought at “any of the literary
e

” i mpsnteet a et
colleges,” they are to b acquired at such fearful risk. The eemert at us, that

rong
such

4 farmer’s son, grad i institution, finds no place
T's son, graduated in such an institution, finds no plats, "'”
domestic circle of his family ; he is actually driven by his ave year
Sty of resorting to some neighboring town, in pursuit of a lea ’
¢he soon forms habits of idleness and intemperance.

318 Miscelianeous Intelligence.

~~ however triv ial, should be strictly 4 ar and should
r e the nat

Commissioner himself. the botanist should ask for “ definite —
written instructions ” was no a unnatural when a new practice was

copy of it
DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, 7

oe D. C., September 27, 1871.

Hon. F. Watts, Commissioner of Agricultur

a In order to enable me to comply strictly with the regulations of this De
t in regard to or te correspondence | in conn ection with my 0 offical

hay a botanist, I r tfu ished with i
following points, 1st. Should letters addressed to me personally, as ear
de partment, imparting or requesting res ngage h on botanical sje ele:

01

the

sveved and signed by me personally as bota the name of

sioner? 2d. In sending botanical > Rrey abe é be ine or in returning such 48
have been sent _ me, should the accompanying letter be signed by my-
self as botanist or by the Commissioner r?

Having heretofore sac a my own a in this matter, with due regard
to the scientifie interests of the department and to facilitate the business eee
ision, I desire to avoid any future Seah ioton nding by receiving definite
ten instructions on these points for my guidance
-Respectfully yours
0. G. Parry, Botanist Agr. Pies

2. Spectrum oo diva? in its application to Terrestrial
and the Physical Cg tf the Heavenly Bodies,
explained by Dr. H. Scuer Director pe Re she
Cologne, ete. Translated an. the second e
German edition by Jane and Caro1ine Lasstte
notes, by Wm. oaacne: LL.D., F.R.S. 662 pp. 8
ous woodcuts, colored plates, and hoe s ee Kire

:)

in all respects, in its paper and typography, its ¢
treatment of the subject, and Pipe chin raged

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 319

numerous and include many colored spectra of the elements, others

uncolored of the sun’s spots, corona, etc., several of comets and

stars, and many beautiful colored views of the protuberances of
" : gir

id figures o

and an account of the methods of observations, together with a
list of the memoirs and works hitherto published on the subject.

3. Kansas Academy of Science.--This Academy is a State So-
ciety, and has no special location in the State. A list of the papers
presented at the annual meetings in 1869 (the second), 1870 and
1871, is contained in the Eleventh Annual Report of the Depart-
ment of Public Instruction of the State of Kansas, 1871. The
papers on the plants of Kansas by J. H. Carruth mention 600

4. Hunt’s Green Mountain Series.—In my notice of the address
3 of thi

on the west. A cor espondent observes that the exceptions are
larger than is implied in the above expression. In order to give

are found both to the east-and the west of the Mesozoic valley in
Connecticut and Massachusetts. They also occupy a considerable
" freain eastern Vermont, where they are separated from the White

stern Vermont will be found to belong to the Terranovan
[White Mountain, as now designated by him] series.” J. D. D.

: OBITUARY.
Joo Wm. Baien, of the British Museum, died on the 27th of
Anuary last. The Standard writes of him:—* In losing Dr. Baird,

cated at Edinburgh, Dublin, and Paris, for the medical profession,
and served for some years a surgeon in the naval service of
the late East India Company. His voyages in this capacity gave
m emple opportunities for the study of his favorite pursuit—
Zoology. In 1841 he accepted an appointment in the Zoological

“

320 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

i His writings are ee to
cals; but his ines emper tant work was a ‘ Natural Trton of ae
British Entomost > which was published under the ee

Water, tor Feb. 3, Seen = Most pee 40 we omllen the last pre: Ay
ceding sentence. His store of knowledge
of : : :

specimens of s ; and so closely i is he saacdiataels in our mind
the scene of his ditie es, that when in future we enter the valley
will be long ere we cease to look owing

. HarPe Shia died recently at Honolulu, where he *
lived since 1853, collecting and studying the mollusca of
Hawaian seas and of Polynesia ay oa During the

them were some new peau which were afterwar
Mr. Cassin.—X. in Harper's Weekly, Feb. 10. frou
Rev. Canon Mosztey, F.R.S., author of papers on the on
ing of ice and the movement of glaciers, died on the 200)
anua peak in his Mess
4 OLP ange the able Professor of Chemistry
Witchery, as Auantiy died.

mgr . 3 gia shonirtg of ong s ceek Sue, by Pro

24 pp. 8vo York. (John & Son, Astor Puen Boating sot

pnipiouis of Soreve oo prxeltalass as new during the four J
the publication of the Min

strated Catalogue of nate Maia of Comparative Zoology at

No The i ture sta’ he Odonata, PartI. Su Lf
wis Cabot. 18 pp., with three plates. Vv _pumplemen to the ‘
and Astrophytide ; by Theodore Lyman. 18 pp., o plates. the loca
Catalogue of the Prin Principal Minerals of Colorado, “vith Amioat ons on the
iarities of several species; by J. Alden Smith. 16 By.
Colorado, 1870.
Contri ton Bg the Fauna of the New York Croton Water. Svs
observations during the yee 1870-71; by Charles F. Gissler. 22 PP»

four plates. New For k, 1

Rae)
YAN

SHAMS

REA]

‘y
HTNSA
gavt

AN yak

\
SS
NSS
\

Ny AAS

NITE
WHT

Uae

\
AN
ys

ru
HTS Si
my) TAN
f \
Bon

st

Ns he
Ce,

> <=

Wien
Ae

‘Mt ‘i

HN w. a
A
))
1
‘1

ey

i)

TAN

\
Veerveyar
'
"

Ht

SEAM
Noh

1

any
uth

\

7
ques Wy
Teraenty
HEARS
Wa
piney
Lai

it

Ue if, i Yi 44 Dy Tf 44

TN

* yeaah patti) Me
Ve

tay
qi
v

ay,

Zit

ah
Sai,

77,
agheg
te
RD yd
So, ee
LAW
if fi
(7
7
i

AM
aN) i
=>

Zw
Pre
i
es

PRIS
Lig Pat
An
an ?,
ee,

a,
thy,

“|
WG
“i
“A

ie,

Thy
Mil
yy

“
Wigs
‘L,

th

SS
SN
WS
WS
Suny)

Ww

=-s=
>

SS

wy

NY

Meas df

Ha ~ Ys,

ty Ii ‘iff
Vip se uy i,

ty

SS
~
N
SS
RR
YS
\\
AS
AY

SS
lin ES
Ss
AS

WAN

RAS

Shy

wh)

Wy

NY

=
SMELLS
SMG ee:
. liywerer
Wee
“Getcea==
eo
7 .
= ENG
< RN Ia SS
is SUAS
ce sS>

4,
oo,
tj
fe
sN

og A ete
TTA
Ly, wrt S\

R AS
A,

‘4
hs
4, TRON
SS>y
xs WSIS
SY \N
SS S

= wes.
ASS

RT

WBA OSS

RSS iy

=<

ws

iy
WZ

Ly

yt

"

uw
Shh
=
=:
“yd
NS
YS
\\Y

~
7 liNee
fi

>

i

une 4 Co UY

Hp MEAN, = = Me
Fay Mi eR Nid

Sy) “by 2 oe SR
‘AY 6-5-7, To

SON —— SS

Vag fs,
ity,
Mae
CS uy}
/
SS
SS
we
\ Me
YS

yy}

Hy
WAN
A

SNe

Ss UP)
ATTA laf
SNL
+

7,
tN
He
a

iy Gj
Wie
HAA
morn
My

NS
" NS

Ae

S
Ws
"

NY
A\)
i

Ai}

/
arp
VU bgt

yj?
Up

YN
AN

a

4]

7,
Le

4, “. fe A
DAS ay ‘il }
(oS a) >
Dae Oe eS TE SS
ae \} SSS

/,
MG
UGE ag
f Pil Del?
Wt, aot

CoA AN
"Wi PEE, Se Uwe
ee Lyin Biiier ay, Si
"4,4 io PAE AWN GN H
ee OH Ay OHA ies AN
“ALAM THE
La Low

oad,

A

WOsAh

ST
“at

>
eae

Z
.
eh

We a

WZ

Wises

Wee
‘st

SANs
xt)

Ww
yy

=

eo
aes

y\V

x!
~ *
SWS
SSN
SS
os
=

i)
yay

‘ty
7A Wh } "
MWY GM, Zi
fog “4 ni ”
1;

i

1}
AN
~

2,
%,

7
fi thy
Tir \

Wr

iN

\\
An
NN
~~

"

y
SS

yon n
eu t
feat !

= /

4
SP
MG,

ANN
SS
~~
SS
3,

aN
~.
~~

4477
Wiis
tn an me
~
»
WN
SS

i
i
ii

AE
.)

72
BESS
Ay
MN
SAND
SS
~
S
a
=

>

\V
VN,

AN

Wily
lh
Ny il;
~
HEN ‘

=
Z
oa

Ww

\
{
Wiaiy 4
\A Hy |
= Wi Mid
4

Lb
ff, <
OE
Wiis ss 7 HNN Ate Le
Uniti Zee Gg)
WEE iia,
“4
‘4
~

bey
Ug ‘7,
44g ee
o
~
RRS
RSs

a

“s % 4

ees ‘iifly,
VW Ae

Ht
XN
Pill,
“i “it
MHA
SN

STEEN
Sse

YS Se S

<
WN

Vi
fi

Wil
ei f aah
Miia (hie
. eee We
iy AE

iid
Bie <-

SS
aisens ASN
ON
Mf
NH
H

MZ,

i
SS:
~
NS

PPPVANS

\

~
NSS
AN
H THAN

eibeel
il
aut

—

“ANN
A

\\

1

w
\
‘
4
WW
N

~
Sy

TS
a

===
===

HAN
=
ae

V
=>
AN
W
.)
yi
fi

a
fh
si
mk
~
=
Ww
WN
A)
ul

‘t

4
4,
Hee
ue
lye

Ae teh)
==> i
uh
ey
KN
i
i
a
tin
WY

e
%
Hl
SS
i:
4
‘i,
i;
i
F
dH
th}
i}

1
‘\ N
a, ft SS
=a tt if, ==
Re
= Wy gaa
==

it
“ie
MY
ti
Ss
iif
Uf
hay
ne
My
Ni

=

M
"
Wf
vib,
RU
==
Wi;
Ad
4,
Aa
Fr qy
ag hth

~ SS
SN

===
ett

WN
~
»

v

aos ”

$een== Le NAW
ate

SF ny ATE a =~

OI ee eed

Wie Cama tase

Lp ty ee ae

NY

V

Hf
iV,
Wh

XS
ae

Ga fie
PPI
Ny
i
1
SS}
Sy
Se
i hes
Shin:
a
A
\\
ANY
MINN
KY

itt
ii)
i

4,
t
ifthe,
a, a

ii se
34,

saass
32335 4/7
ey %, oh

Wie
,

Uys uh
Whe,
Sy) {77 Pes
ih
}
NZ
fl
7,
oh)
SSS
35537;
iil
ah
Lilith "
Han
> Ha

fi

uo

tr
'
'

tips
Ad
f
Hi
4;
ttt,
FLIES
Vy 4,
4 4,
4,

y
YY)
ay

Ww

vs 24:

bb) w Sp Wes Ay
yw ! hy WS

NV SS \

4, 2S

2,

Mh

:

My’

Np Lee
ee:

=.

SS
Ox

~
Sr!
Sh)
Sy S\ 2
Se
x i
eee
ota

<=

=

Hi {
\

Wp
Sai

ra ae

=

oy

eS
Ss
‘SS

niaw

Se 4,

heats y

ma AR . OUT AU Th

ee = ; Wy yw)

= =.

aa st q y; Ss a

TVS = HD) = es
WA YY,

ny

i
THAW
FASS

SN
i
A
Hy
4]
wwii.
wu

7%,

yi
iY
Eg
4,
“
>

= AAAS
Mui
ws
\ yy,
ae
WN -
yg,
De os
UGA SS

i
7)
4,
Mi,

G
2
ih
‘
4,
4,

Soa
a aaa
sSss===
We S

wy
ROS

wes ~ _
OT) Nees se =
fg SS = SS
li Ca RS AY
. “2S ‘
My FSS
SS
i SS
‘se

4
CH
Mi
ny)
Mis h i;

WN ‘

‘

‘

\

1
v

SSS

NS

Ay,
Ait
Gfii
nil
HH
Ny,
te
¢,

ww
¥
»)

») bn

teed

“
i ~~

a
+4,
Mr Ais
%,

6h
itty

Elevations are in Feet above
Sea Levelt
Boundary OF PG TE vicien teas nt

Miles

!
i
:
|

i

fh

oe
i
iif

2

Department, of the Interior

¥, SJ
“in
(f

U.S.Geological Survey of the Territories
YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK

Wi

EA
at
ffi
itt
aut
yt

%
iS
ne,
“4,
lz?
We
Ke
at
\
>
ws
“

Ay
win,
Ry

y

iH)

y

Yh
PP,

<=

tie
‘
ANN

From Surveys made under the direction of

\
NY

=
pian
TAA)
¢ i]

Lin
“a4
bie
“i
"iy

7,

= SS x
\ eee
AY S Mig

nt

i)

i
oN
iy

yh
ry}
4)

He

i
\ AN
}

ae
44,
tf
i
tt

f
RA

My
1)
i)
4,
“yy
Ay
Hi
Mi
1
%
a
z
Say nes
"VILAGE, 4,
4 G CAL ro
SIO]
42% tye ty,
- eae A a
4

4,
ds
.

=

“G4

4,

4,
“i
iy
M4,
132
St
4

“Ny

4,
4,
4,

“
if
if
47,
tipi
“V4,
M4,
“4

M4,
44,
Dy

4
Pie
CLS
% s
<2
ayy
Mf
44,
M4
i We
se
0

oy
Shy
4a,
44
Wy
Hi}

My,
a
4

eats.

q Hy

Si
AAS:

eh

MN
S

S
SS

\

*
\
im
4th
2

fay

Sittings
Oy
SS
\, ¥
RY
NS
Lasse
ee
Sse
SEF
i
TIL)
yh Wht
ey
LSU INN

=.

SS
=:
SY
S
/
iW
uv. D

ws
NS
W NS
HWSSSSZ
Wy
Vigil,
Wi}
Xi
Me
We

yy Fay’
ey)
SHY
“ij
ti,
N
YSN
pj
i)
vd ~
7
ij
ti
t
4
HF i
i

“yy

Y
i

“st
Ps Sd
\

1

i

Yi
Vv

"
iH

4,
ANS

|
Y)
1s,
Ay

4,
Gy,
OY
ty
Ny

N=

\'

\

)

Vu,
Y
=Z4
1,
4)
4,
44,
WY
‘4,
vp
Pity,

Y

“ty
A
Mikes
C7,
TH,
"4,
Phe
TiN
if
i
ity)
Villy
MWe
Hii)
Ns
fay

ce,

Ay,

W
SS
WS:

Ig
fy}
ue
W
Ss
His
ttl
i
M W
if
if
th
ALE

ii
SS
tf

:

Dy
i
‘

i}

4
ae
Nit

Ww
iW

WY,

x
%
.Y
7

oF

=

S
Se
Ok
*
“
nN
i
Le

“ty
1
(

WS

\,

d)
Ww

We

i

SS
S
S
SS

\
SY

i
‘
iN
\\i

=
U

)

Sea
==
o>
AR
Wy
x
if
il
i
.
\
\

SS
ie
>=
SS
34,7,
eee
S
Ha
iN
\
=H
iy
i
Y
a
HN
“Y
iit

Gi
Ty?
ee

Ah
i}

st

<S=S >:

4,
WS
(
Li
MN
Ger
MN
Hy
4
eft
Lui
tf
ops
SEH)
ee’
23
Hy oy
a)
ont
men
it
UY
‘

Vv

Ver

=F
>
S23
wd,
A
WY
Sy
OS
Stn
=
~ —
he
ANY
iy

NY
Xie
My
aN

{NESE

iN

ti

Ythtas 5

COE

aN
~

==
oS,
~
\
+ met)
2
———-
a
~

NN

{7
oY ih Yj
Z
4%,
he.
ot,
3%,
ch, “4 7
Mil
i
Ni
WS
YY
=
——-
SS
~S
wy
ij
it

1
H

=

i

U
i

=~

VSS E.
eS
Ss

vi
ao
44,
“,
ANS
a
*
/

“1,
“ip

“p
i
iH
4;
i,

TAL
Lee
eet
sd
4
=s

//,
ie
is
My
\
/
‘
é

fr
to

OL
i

NY
f 1
i
i
Hi
4,
te

Ww

ij
i
Hl
ft
i
Uy
“it

bij
LET

WE
Sty

i

4f,

NZ
SS, wee

Si
SK
Su
“Hh
4
i
ft
{7
i
i
4

NS

AAV
===!
=

~
Si
SG
\/ Gi
My
ti!
}s
\t
\

SS

i

2
SS
\
NY
WY

ye
a
Pest
iA)
SS
NS
~
pe at
SsSETHS23D
\\
AN
NAN
\
\
~

\

=

~~

RSS

\

\ \y)
\
‘.

fi
3
f
\'
NY
=.

4

i,
s
XY
.

hy
We
{
A
A!
\ \
\
Gs
\
S
MS

4
\
Cee
~
Ws
JUAN

iN
ih}
Ss

'
teh
vtie®
i
=
4

4
it

SSS

=

ih
Ay
Hi
/\

Mt

{if

‘!
ANS
=

~

AN

4
47
“
4,
e]
Sy
——o
=
aH
CH
Uh
=
=

ss
By,
aes
/
LGD,
4,

a,
u,
M
SS
fl

—

—~

=
~~
\
ae
\

)

NS
my

44,
=:

WS

\

WS

i

SS)
SS
Sy

3
—
ed
se
32s)
Ws
~
>
=

S
Wee
=
ee
64;
y=
i Wy

w
—
=>
tom.
SS
te.

nN

sy
a,
x
\
AY

=
‘Le
\

v

c
Mas i
aeiiy
<S
Sass
ip
Ny
wee
AX
HI
AN
MATIN)
ii
i)
Mii)

NS

xy yy
ANS
SY
Nts
NEE
S2533
2s,
Peo]
Cl
: t
i fA wa
Yi

WSS,
Late

WA
\\*

S
PAS

Hf

\
"

aint
a!
WSS
ay S255
ANS
Ue

a

re.

‘a

is

i AN

ee
zs

SY
SSA
=

‘<

: LLG, fs
MES
S. 53°324
OS
TASS
Ait AN N
Si \\

RS
~

ANN
.
eet
\)
ao
eH

AS
RY
(ea
wee
a
a
<
;
Wie
Bie oe
egos
M lene
oy

i

==
Per

%
‘Ve, iy
“2
(fiA
i]
¥
4
a=:
Iy\
Bs

we =

Uy,
Vi
S
S
i
4
)
=
WS

\
“~
Cone
eee.
Se Se
3S a
= Bit
S EOE,
<>
oe
S

=F

WW
i
y)
“4,
SS
YF
‘t
IN

SS
SSS
ES

ia}
nN}
=)
Ws

AY
TAN

1

iy

ny
Sak
S

ih
~ *

==
vy
\

119
nly
His
rh
ui
Saat
mY
)
i
4)
yee
MW,
Uy,
tt
raat
“Wh
ai
<>.
=.
RSS
ASS
=
ww
ww
\
iy
ANH

H
i}
alte;
Wy
€
ANY
t
AN
WwW
AY
\
ANY
My
ty Thea)
HAL

==

a
? soa
My
\
x\
A
IY
\\
vy,
d4

NS
Y,
il
fe
os
ty & =
44,
Ww
WN \
i)
Ay
SN
by
”,

t
7
4,
}
Kn,
7,
Ui
‘4
es
“usta,
a)
\e

iy,
x

a

Ay

Uy
%

y
Ze
Uh
Vy

g
Zi

pS
* en
Xs
SU
z
die,
24
“if,
GL
i
Uf
SS!
Wy)

x

SN

SS
TAS
Ha

HAY

4

he

i
y

(

‘be
rea
Hi

Hh
==

Mj
Vi
4,
(
ny
4
Wy
Na
iy}
Up
<=

==
SS

=

=

“4,
Xi
wh
*
444,

LS
yy
\
Ww
i
ay

=>.

.
SS

i}
Lee
i
Hf
i

4,
~
eo
ho
CA
PLP

RN

ww

SS

SS

“

i
i
VS

My)

yy

uF;
4
%
‘
Ry
‘)
RON
v
f

%
iar
fo
~
)
14
¥
ms
m4
Saeco
Kae
ais

:

SF

z
cg
—

we =
NY
RS
=

ik

{?
X
\
sy

“4,
Yb:
i.
\
Sy
=}
Wn
aS
H
as
a=

THINS

PAR
AMY,
ra i,
i
ij
ARN
HAWN
4)
\
==.
RY

Oa
tees.
“

caf
t/
1),
f
q
S=p}}!

SS
S

7
yy
=
wilh
SY
= tS
oO

SS
Es

.
sy

\

WwW

‘

“,
‘Ay
“Ny ’
SN ~
SES

Y

if,
Wai
Wisi
\
Mi We

\y
SRS

NY =
Ms
we

S

AN
mS
WS SSN

i
iD

iy

te

my
Stitt
With
ANAL
ANE
if

Ay

Plate VIII.
AM. JOUR. SCI., Ill, Vol. Ill.

V., from nature.

AMERICAN
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS,

[THIRD SERIES]

Art. XLIL—Recent Geographical work in the United States.

A. Reporr or THE Corrs or Enerneers, U. 8. Army.

repair of the national fortifications, to devise and carry forw

; S. Lake Survey.—The survey of the Great Inte-
tior Lakes, now under the direction of Major C. B. Comstoc

U.S. Eng., has been in progress during the past year in Lakes
Superior, Michigan, St. Clair and Champlain, and on the St.
rence river.

“In Lake Superior th f the Apostle Islands has been
uperior the survey of the Apo - ot hea Por.

ut
Phas miles ; the base line at Minnesota Point has been measured ;
the longitude of Duluth and St. Paul determined by telegraphic
connection with Detroit; and longitude, latitude, and azimuth ob-
‘vations have been made at several primary stations in the west
end of the lake,

Am, Jour. cNe Series, Vor. III, No. 17.—Mar, 1872.

322 Geographical Notes.

In Lake Michigan the shore-line topography and hydrography
have been carried on the east shore from Little Point Sable to New
Buffalo, a distance of one hundred and forty miles, and on the
west shore from Manitowoc to Oak Creek, south of Milwaukee, a
distance of eighty-five miles, leaving but one hundred and twenty
miles of shore-line to finish the lake. The off-shore hydrography
has nearly kept up with the shore-line wor

reconnaissance has been made, and stations erected for a tri

angulation, to connect Green Bay with Milwaukee, over a distance

one hundred and twenty miles, and a part of the angles meas-
red.

(the northern boun Yenk) to the east end 5) 7
Ontario, = @ part of the angles have been measured
graphy and hydrography h een pide wien the forty

e ow
tance of thirty miles from the south end of the lake. :
In the office, besides the ordinary eae Coherent and plotting of
the field-work, final chart No. 2 of Lake Superior, and a bse
Isle Sovale,. have been prepared for the engraver, "and pre oat
chart No. 3 of Lake Superior has been engraved on sone
publiitivd: "Final charts Nos. 1 and of Lake Superior, and
chart of St. Clair are now in progre base
The expansions of the 15-foot ‘teat bar, and of the two
tubes, have been determined ; observa tions for difference of xe
tude have been made with Dul uth, Minnesota; Wie ee 1, De
Austin and Battle Mountain, Nevada; and Fort Leavenworth,
Kansas. The Washington work has raid reduced. a
The meteorological work of the survey has been continue
The preliminary report of Prof. S. L Smith of New a
on the zodlogical results of the dredging which was cart! Cont
in August and September, 1871, is appended to Major
stock’s report. rvey
The longitude of Detroit (site of the present Lake Su a4
observatory) has been determined as west of Weal
008.12 + 08.02. The longitude between Detroit an pee
and etree Duluth and St. Paul, has also been determm
telegraphic connection, but the result is not publis ished.

q

is given showing the progress of the survey, indicating ey ait :

the shores are triangulated, how far carefully survey
how far the maps are ready for publication. Jor:
mn) "Wheeler's Survey in Nevada and Arizona. —The exP

Geographical Notes. 323

ing parts of Eastern Nevada and Arizona, which was begun in
1869 by Lieutenant Wheeler, Corps of Eng., has been in pro-
gress during the past year. An outline of the results was printed
in this volume, p. 262.

(c) Raymond's Survey of the River Yukon, Alaska.—Capt. C.
W. Raymond, Corps of Engineers, has made a reconnaissance
of the river Yukon in Alaska, with especial reference to a
determination of the exact position of Fort Yukon.

is report, with a map of the river, has been separately
printed by Congress.

(d) King’s Survey of the 40th Parallel.—The survey of the
Fortieth Parallel, to which frequent reference has been made in
these pages, is still in progress. A succinct account of all the
work begun by this survey from March 22, 1867, to Oct. 3, 1871,
by Mr. King, is printed in the report.

We cite the latter half of his Report on “ the methods of work,
the character of the problems investigated, and what I consider
the chief results.”

“The foundation of our explorations has been a continuous
d fro

m mountain-top to mountain-

upon stone monuments.
geographically, and their distances computed from a base an
check-base, and a system of astronomical stations. Within the

these, working always inwardly, a thorough system of minor tri-
angles has been measured with the gradienter, and the topog-

variety of irruptive rocks has been, in almost all cases, accurately
ons, such as the build of mount-
ae the upheaval of chains, and the fo i

Present climatic conditions of the Great Basin, as regards its iso-
thermal lines, annual and monthly averages of temperature, rela-
tive evaporation, and the outlines of storms and rainfall.

n the department of botany a very large collection has been
made, resulting in the discovery of somewhat over a hundred

324 Geographical Notes.

The work embraces a very complete scientific a of a
section of country which traverses, from west to east, nearly the
entire Cordillera system. e rocks at our wit pba!

already those of the Atlantic formationé, and are being exten-
sively studied by a number of geologists

e department of mining industry our labors have been com-
pletely worked up, and the volume and accompanying atlas,
embracing the elaborated results of our three years’ study,

imate.
ed, the series is icdened oe Fike dy, firs ‘oe
work cop eastieal map, bee which shall appear all the eatures
of the country surveyed ; second, a series of geological maps, ti
trating the formations ie eee soils, alkaline déposits, a and t
distribution of arable land; third, a general report, which, in t
synthetical manner, shall describe the history of the formations

val o
meee lithological structure of each family of rocks, rag ee
upon the volcanic and glacial’ages; and an attempt to ie &
present physical conditions, and an account of a pees |
matic change g on.
8 appendices to this, the second, third, fourth, and ii
umes will treat of technical geology, zoology, and mining 10

(e) Surveys and Reconnaissances of Western Rivers oe
the great variety of enterprises of this choiactas with “whic
Engineer Corps are charged, the following, — were iD ‘a
gress sass the year 1870-71, seem to us as of most
: A survey of the Cumberland river under the direction»
Major G. Weitzel, Corps of Engineers, which was made by
S. T. Abert and a party of twenty-one men. The recon®

Geographical Notes. 825

extended from Nashville first to the river’s mouth; afterwards
from Nashville to the falls of the Cumberland.
The length of the river from the falls to the mouth is 595
miles. The following altitudes are of interest :
Foot of Falls, 770°70 above mean tide at Mobile.
Laurel River, 685°70
Smith’s Shoals—

Point Burnside, 7
State Line, 502°50
Nashville, 365
River Mouth, 286

A minute report of the character of the river, and of the
resources of the region, is given.

. A preliminary survey, under the same officer of Engineers,
has been made of the Wabash river, from Wabash to its mouth,
by Mr. F. Stien of Tipton, Ind.

3, An examination has also been made of the French Broad
rwer, by Lieut. M. B. Adams, U. S. Eng.

4. A route has been surveyed for a ship-canal between
Hennepin on the Illinois river, and Rock Island on the Mis-
Sissippi, via Geneseo, showing a length for such a canal of 65
miles, with a navigable feeder from Dixon of 38 miles. The
estimated cost of a ship-canal 160 feet wide and 7 feet deep is
$12,500,000; and for a commercial canal 60 feet wide and 6
= ~~ $3,900,000.

h fic Coast, river surveys more or less 10 detail
‘ve been made in various regions ; including the Willamette,

H. ty, by Maj. R. S. Williamson and Lieut. W
"Sener; the Umpqua; and portions of the Sacramento,

326 Geographical Notes.

B. Tue YELLowstone GEYSERS.

under our notice are as follows:
1. A picturesque description of the Geyser region, based

C. Rovre or tae Norruern Pacrric Ramroad.
€ prosecution of a second railroad route across the com

tinent, by way of the Upper Missouri and the Columbia Mer? 4

has added much to our knowledge of that country.

region which was first made known by the journey of Lewes)

and Clark in 1804-5 and 6; was surveyed by Gen. LL Steven’
in 1853-4-5 (whose report was published as vol. xi,

the U. 8S. Pacific Railroad Report), and was again careful

examined by Capt. John Mullan, U. S. A., who construc

from 1858 to 1862, a military road from Fort Walla Walla om

the Columbia river to Fort Benton on the Missour. 1368
ie Capt. Mullan was printed by the Government 1D

e Northern Pacific Railroad published last ym.

report of a reconnaissance of the route made in 1869, Oy
W. Milnor Roberts. The same engineer has been Pag

a ‘
Mountain Divide, between Lewis and Clark’s Pass on the BOM"

‘

laiee pacha Ses hr rity ee Le aie Medes Sil Ly

(oie oie Ee aa tee fee SS Ne ee ed

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 327

and Deer Lodge Pass on the south, a distance of nearly 100 miles,
covering all the passes of the main chain available for the
Northern Pacific Road. He subsequently went down the Yel-
lowstone, as mentioned before.

9. At the same time, Gen. Thos. L. Rosser has made a sur-
vey of a route between the Missouri at Fort Rice and the Yel-
lowstone.

3. Mr. Frank Wilkeson also made last. summer an examina-
tion of the geology of the region between Cadotte’s Pass and

eer Lodge Pass, with reference to the occurrence of coal
and iron.

4. Mr. Charles A. White has been across the Great Plain of
the Columbia and through the Grand Coulée.
lished)” four reports have been printed, but are not yet pub-

ed.

D. Mar or Transporration Routes in Mrynesora AND Dakota.

partment of Dakota, and published on a scale of ten miles to
one inch. The water courses, lakes, and routes of transit are
carefully indicated, and the sites of settlements and villages;
the heights of land are of course less accurately delineated.
This vast region is now attracting so much attention and is so
rapidly developing, that this preliminary map, prepared under
circumstances of very considerable difficulty, 1s of special inter-
est. The lakes which are so characteristic of Minnesota and

Arr. XLIIL—On Molecular and Cosmical Physics; by Prof
W. A. Norton
A RECENT review of a portion of the ground theoretically

Surveyed in my papers on Molecular and Cosmical Physics,
published at intervals during the last eight years, has led to

328 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics.

One of the most conspicuous of the theoretical positions
reached, was that of the incessant operation of a repulsive
force, exerted at all distances beyond the minute sphere of
molecular attraction, upon individual molecules. Evidence of
the operation of such a force at small distances, in the contact
of bodies whether by pressure or impact, has often been recog-
nized, and it has generally been conceived to be the physical
cause of the elastic outward pressure of gases ;* but in both
cometary and solar physics we have striking evidence of the
operation of a force of repulsion upon the atoms of highly
attenuated gases, at great distances. It is at present the gene-

elief among astronomers that the tails of comets are com-
posed of attenuated matter urged away to indefinite distances
from the sun, by an energetic solar repulsion.t I think I may
justly claim that my own researches, with reference to Donatis
comet, have served materially to strengthen this conviction,
long since entertained by such eminent astronomers as Olbers
and Bessel.

The outstreaming of luminous vapors from the sun’s photo-
sphere, recognized by spectroscopists in the solar protuberances,
and in the indefinite extension of the solar corona,} give mt
mation of a highly energetic repulsion of subtile vapors from
the sun’s luminous surface.

Another position taken was that the contiguous molecules of
a liquid mutually repel each other; the equilibrium bemg
maintained by a compressive force exerted inward at the sur
face—that to which the phenomena of capillarity are ascri
Several striking experimental discoveries have recently been
made, which furnish a strong support to this view. These at

of gases, has its essential counterpart in the impulsive waves of heat nea
proceeding from the molécules. Besides, the advocates of this theory oa he
strained to admit the existence of a gaseous molecular repulsion, to account 10F
elastic reaction of the molecules in their mutual collisions. ag
+ See Herschel’s Outlines of Astronomy, eleventh ae pp. 382-3; Loomis
; ) 237-

Young, in his article on the Solar Corona (this Jour., May, 1871) oe

be reconciled with the known smallness of the pressure at its Oe is

ar below even that of hydrogen, or of matter whose ity 18 to
annihilated, or even rendered negative by some such solar repulsion a8 at
be operative formation of a comet’s tail.” The latter view is that W
have long advocated. (See this Jour., Jan., 1871; and June, 1871, p. 406).

ST eR S! Me RAEN vor ptr pk cueing esl +. Pe), | aerate

‘

Rassias? «Clas te

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 329

the ordinary formula for deflection, and to show the ee,
of introducing a new term, which proved to be in ta pegs
with the conception adopted of the mechanical con fe
solid, and at variance with that generally amare: ae
same notion of the solid state, also led to the apparent detec

1 the inaccuracy of
transverse stress.* hese served to revea :

ance of Angee given of electro-magnetic ee acege
dynamic phenomena, has derived support ee ss Professor
recent pens and delicate experiments made by

Alfred M. Mayer. : ;
Tt may be aided that the fundamental hypothesis be aj tee
ral mutual repulsion of atoms of matter, is 1n cepa se vi
ance with what a distinguished physicist terms the, “modern
idea that matter consists of a force of resistance

nter,”

- Matte
three varieties ; viz., ordinary or gross 1a

rectly recogn
filling pear
and pervading the interstitial spaces of all bodies of ordimary

ee nt of Science,
* See Proceedings of the American Association for the Advanceme
7 to 63

. e following re-
+ Prof. Mayer, in his paper on the er Pie es apart cba of dynamic
. al he r, a are me / i ron
induction given tr: Prof W. A. Norton (in this Jour., Jan., apt Fork TG oat
Molecular Physics, affords a simpler and more satisfactory exp:
than any heretofore framed.”

330 W. A. Norton—Moleeular and Cosmical Physics,

ordinary matter, and that the forces of electric attraction and
repulsion may originate in such motions. But this notion can-
not be regarded as anything more than a conjecture: since no
conception has hitherto been formed of possible atomic move-
ments capable of originating the electric forces, and producing
even the simplest of the electrical phenomena.
he existence of an electric ether has not been as conclu-
sively established as that of the luminiferous, but all the pheno
mena give decided intimations of the operation of such am
agent, and thus serve to confer upon the hypothesis of an elec-
tric ether a high probability.
Now that the ethereal is known to be one of the forms
which matter exists, and as we perceive that ordinary matter

parative availability of the two hypotheses in adequey yy repre-
senting the entire series of electrical phenomena, poth fo 7
and in their precise laws, is the only proper ground upon wil

tance, attract or repel each other, either actually or bike
rar
it
This
¢ ich is COR

ceived to be at rest, so far as the natural action of other ethereal

W. A. Norton-—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 331

atoms upon it is concerned; and this action is supposed to con-
sist in a force of repulsion. It is also true of bodies of ordin-
ary matter; but each integrant atom is under the operation of
attractive as well as repulsive forces, exerted by other contigu-
ous atoms—or at least of forces which tend to urge it from or
toward the atoms acting on it. It is by virtue of this statical
condition, and the change in the intensities of the effective
forces when the relative distance of the atoms is altered, that

Mass,-size, or perhaps in certain cases also the specific intensity
of repulsion, of their atoms. We may reach a still deeper,
underlying principle, by conceiving that all the atoms, so
called, of ordinar matter, and of electric ether, consist of

of — and but one primary form of force. 2
he general inquiry now before us is whether the diverse

332 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics.

spherical layer of atoms comprised within the cone. The entire
wave-force conveyed to m will be the sum of the individual

y
another of the extent ab, posited at the distance ma; and thus

m should then be enormously great, even if the impulses
emanating from the individual ethereal atoms be very feeble.
Now, for every wave transmitted to m, a certain minute frac-
tion of the impulsive force conveyed in it, in the extent of the
atom m, will take effect as an impulse against this atom. The

the waves transmitted from the ether lying within c’md’.

. Hye
m, then receives a certain impulsive action from the ethereal
* #

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 3838

waves that fall upon it, from any side; and in so doing *
intercepts a minute fraction of the wave-force, which
passes back into the ethereal medium as a reflected wave.
t us now take two atoms m and n, Fig. 2, and let
c'nd’ bea conical surface circumscribing n. It is plain,
from what has just been stated, that a certain portion
of the impulsive wave-force propagated to n, from the
ether included within this conical surface, will be inter-
cepted by n, and thus prevented from passing on to m.
The impulsive action upon m received from the ether with-
in the cone cmd, will then be in excess over that received
from the ether posited within the cone e’md’, by the amount
thus intercepted by n. The atom m should then gravitate c
toward n, by this differential force. Let a denote the
amount of wave-force that falls upon m, from the cone emd;
a’ the amount that falls upon n, from the conical frustum e’nd’ ;

is}
a

a

> the amount of impulsive action on m due to the wave-force
a E

a;— that which takes effect on n, from the wave-force a’. The

: ‘ a eee ;

impulsive forces, > and —, will be intercepted by m and n, re-

. , .
spectively. Let —=b ; and the wave-force from c’md’ that is
propagated to m will be represented by a—3, and the impulsive
action it exerts on m, by — Then —— —, or —, will be
the effective force by which m will gravitate toward n; for the
entire gravitating force will be due to the conical portions of
ether considered, provided all the points of m are taken into
account. It is obvious that n will gravitate toward m with an

ee force, if the two atoms are exact counterparts of each
other.

It may be imagined that the deficiency, z in the impulsive
action received from c’md’, may be made up by the wave-force
reflected back from n toward. m, but this initial wave-force is
diffused over the whole extent of the outspreading wave, and
Proportionally weakened at any one point, as m, which it
Teaches ; and hence the portion that falls on m is buta minute frac-

tion of the initial impulse, — reflected at n toward m, and

?
it is on] 1 rong ne : ke effect
only the — part of this minute fraction that can take e

by

impulsively on m. Suppose = of <= is propagated to m,

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics.

then the impulse on m, from the reflected wave ae will be
—b es ; ;

>, whereas the gravitating force of m toward n is ba or 5;
— ee
or, owing to the indefinite extent of the conical frustrum, e'nd’,
not sensibly different from 5 (for all the points of m). It is to
be observed that - will always be an exceedingly minute frac-

i —b : Be
tion, and therefore 5 excessively small, as compared with =.

It will be evident, on considering the varying size of the
cones cmd, c’md’, as the distance m n is supposed to vary, that

the effective force of gravity, >> Will conform to the law of

inverse squares. It may also be shown, by means of the fun-
damental ideas just presented, that if we regard every atom of
ordinary matter as made up of ethereal or other atoms of equal
size (in accordance with our fundamental conception, p. 331);
the entire force of gravitation of one body of matter toward
another, will be proportional to the product of the masses of
the two bodies, and inversely proportional to the square of the
distance between their centers.* If we adopt the other posse
ble conception, that an atom of ordinary matter is one copunu
ous homogeneous mass, impenetrable at all points to the ethereal
wave-force, then the force of gravitation of one atom, ™, toward
another, , will be proportional to the surface of each ; ina a
. Z
present the comparative superficial dimensions of the atoms. :
Y n be urged in favor
of adopting the theory thus briefly set forth of the possible
itati

:

variance with the notion that the atoms of ordinary :
are not made up of ethereal atoms; as we have just seen. hich

. The hypothesis that the ethereal repulsion from ii
the force of gravity is derived is made up of definite impmt"'
leads to the law of inverse squares, as the law of propagation 8
of the wave-force onigiietad We it.

* See this Journal, Jan., 1870.

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 385

8. The effective force theoretically deduced, conforms to the
established laws of universal gravitation.

4. The high improbability that the force of gravitation can
take effect on cosmical bodies, and be transmitted through
theta without being in any sensible degree diminished, or inter-
cepted, cannot be urged as an objection to the present view,
since it is the very interception of a portion of the wave-force
that gives rise to the effective gravitating tendency.

. The conclusion reached by Laplace, that the velocity of
the gravitating fluid, if such there be, must be immeasurab
greater than the velocity of light, does not militate against the
present theory. For when we consider that the gravitation

ties, that will be any sensible fraction of the entire impulsive
action, or indeed of the differential action that constitutes the
effective force of gravity.

6. If these be legitimate conclusions, then it would appear

b
the only intercepting action would then be that already con-
sidered, from which the gravitating tendency results. :
Let it not be supposed, however, that there is an theoretical
objection to the notion of a separate itati

an ether more subtile than the luminiferous, and that the arbi-
hypothesis of such a medium does not seem to be de-
manded by the phenomena. If the hypothesis were adopted,

336 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physvs.

the hypothetical ether would simply play the part here assigned
to the luminiferous ether.

VL. Physical Constitution of a Primitive Molecule.—A primitive
molecule is here regarded as the physical equivalent of a
“chemical atom,” or simple “integrant atom,” as these terms
are ordinarily understood. The prevalent notion has been that
a simple atom is inherently endued with the property of attrac-
tion or repulsion, which it manifests under different circum-
stances ; but against this hypothesis rests the objection that it
is highly improbable that a homogeneous atom can, of its
own nature, exert a force of repulsion at one distance and of
attraction at another. This fact, together with a careful study
of physica] phenomena, has led certain able physicists to Te
gard an atom, so called, as made up of dissimilar parts. Now
we are conducted to a notion of the physical constitution of an
atom (primitive molecule) that accords with this idea, if we
follow out the consequences of a universal force of repulsion.

he impulsive “waves of translation” that are propagated to
any atom of ordinary matter, from the universal sea of ether,
should condense the surrounding ether upon its surface, and
thus form a permanent ethereal atmosphere around it. 118
theoretical result, it should be observed, is in accordance with
one of the inductions of Physical Optics. ee:

Again, the electric ether, the supposed agent in electrical phe-
nomena, cannot be very much less subtile 3.
than the luminiferous ; if so, a portion of
it posited in the vicinity of an ordinary
atom, should be condensed around it by
the ethereal waves, and form an electric
, immersed in the ethereal atmos-

S

Now it is to be observed that both the ethereal atmospher®
and electric envelope of the atom are in a condition of her
equilibrium. The forces urging the atoms of the enve 4.8
toward the central atom are made up of actual recurring 1
pulses ; and the same is true of those condensing the etheren
atmosphere. Every such momentary condensation of t
atinosphere must originate increased repulsive impulses eX
by this atmosphere upon the portion of the envel
to it. Also, by our fundamental hypothesis,

SSS Sr ee eee, ate W var

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 337

space between them, do not in general neutralize each other,
and determine an electric vacuum there; for their oblique
actions on the ether lying on either side of the line of their

electric ether, at those special interstitial points of the body at
which the attractive actions of surrounding molecules upon the

e taken to represent the entire system of waves thus

338 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physies,

The force thus originating I designate as the molecular force
of heat-repulsion ; but it should not be confounded with the
heat energy in the body, derived from extraneous sources, or

ward, through the interstitial electric ether, a series of repul
sive waves. These may be represented by a resultant wave
system, which must obviously be regarded as proceeding from
a center nearer the outer then the inner surface of the er
velope, as at m, fig. 3. This resultant system of repulsive
waves, as it originates in the electric envelope, and is propa
gated by the interstitial electric ether, is termed the molec
force of electric repulsion.

The result then is, that the molecular forces consist of one attrac.
tion and two repulsions; all originating in the primary force of
repulsion. They are made up of impulses propagated in waves;
and hence must observe the law of the inverse ratio of
square of the distance. :

rom these fundamental results I have deduced in my pen
paper on Molecular Physics, the following general analytica
expression for the intensity of the effective action of one Pi
mitive molecule on another, in terms of the distance, 2, betwee?
the envelopes of the two molecules ;
p__ 2(3r?+2re) om
“ (r+e)2(er+a)? 2? .

In this expression n denotes the coefficient of the wert

tive force, and also of that termed the heat-repulsion, ™

coefficient of the electric repulsion, and r the distance betwee

the two centers from which the resultant systems of yn
proceed (fig. 3). The molecules of different pire? pee
differ in respect to the values of m and 7, and of the

a Various supposed values of = were taken, and the effec:

tive molecular action calculated in terms of > The general

character of the results was graphically represented by ® we
4).

of effective molecular action (fig. ost
_ VILL Special Results The following are some of the Pr
Important results of the discussion ; a few of which have

obtained since the publication of my former paper

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 339

1. There are two alternations in the nature of the effective
molecular action, viz., one from a repulsion at the most minute

4.

distances to an attraction at greater distances, and another to
a repulsion beginning at the outer limit of the attraction, a0
ve . . . in t e

2. For some distance above and below a the curve is very
nearly a right line, showing that the effective actions are for

Pp 1 to the distance
from the point of rest. ‘Tt is to be observed that r, the thick-

and hence that any displacement a? is a much smaller fraction

of the distance between the centers of the molecules than of

the distance Oa between the envelopes. .
3. The calculations were made for various values of os

from 4-938 to 12-410. The former value gives a curve lying
entirely below the axis of x, and touching it at the distance

340 W. E. Geyer—A new Sensitive Singing Flame.

2°85 r. For this and every less value of ~~ the effective action
is repulsive at all distances between the molecules. In proportion
as the value of = is greater than 4-938, the maximum attrae-

tion, bm, is greater, the range ac of attractive action greater, the
distance Oa smaller, and the distance Od greater. Oa ran
from 2°85r to 0°5r; ac from 0 to 19°5r, and Od from 7r to 80r.

The value of ab is nearly 0°5r, for all the values of — consid-

ered, excepting those differing but little from 4-938. The value
of the maximum attractive ordinate, bm, varies from 0 to

0-73 3 ; and that of the maximum repulsive ordinate, dn, from
0-0042 = to 0-00032 ; the latter value of dn answering t0
the greatest assumed value of -, At the distance 80r the re-
pulsion becomes very nearly the same for all the assumed val-
ues of ~ viz, 0:00018~.

(To be concluded.)

Art. XLIV.—A New Sensitive Singing Flame; by W. &
GEYER, of the Stevens Institute of Technology.

as to the e

A simple addition to this apparatus has given me @ nis
which, by slight regulation, may be made either : (1) 4 peng
flame merely ; that is, a flame which is depressed and vege
non-luminous by external noises, but which does not sine:
(2) a continuously singing flame, not disturbed by outwar

be

__* Nature, v, 30, Nov. 2, 1871. [This form of apparatus would seem not 1
original with Mr. Barry, since identically the same thing, apparently, was umber
months earlier by Professor Govi, of Turin, and noticed in the September
of the Moniteur Scientifique.—Eps.]

W. E. Geyer—A new Sensitive Singing Flame, 341

noises ; (3) a sensitive flame, which only sounds while disturbed ;
or (4) a flame that sings continuously except when agitated by
external sounds. The last two results, so far as known to me,

On pronouncing the word “sensitive,” it sings twice ; and in
general, it will interrupt the speaker at almost every Mg! OF
other hissing sound.

excellent results. Glass tubes, however, drawn out until the
internal diameter is between one sixteenth and one thirty-

t important:
T have pee used a piece which had been rounded for
heating flasks ; it contained about 28 meshes to the ine
The tube chiefly determines the pitch of the note, shorter or

342 J. Trowbridge—Electro-motive action of Liquids.

gas-pipe, fifteen inches long and three quarters of an inch in
diameter, gave, when set for a continuous sound, quite a low
and mellow tone. If the jet be moved slightly aside, so that
the flame just grazes the side of the tube, a note somewhat
lower than the fundamental one of the tube is produced. This
sound is stopped by external noises, but it goes on again when
left undisturbed. All these experiments can be made under
the ordinary pressure of street gas, three-fourths of an inch of
water being sufficient.

Hoboken, March 18, 1872.

Art. XLV.— Contributions from the Physical Laboratory of
Harvard College.—I. On the Electro-motive action of Liquids
separated by Membranes; by JOHN TROWBRIDGE.

Tr is well known that two liquids, of a dissimilar chemical
composition, separated by a porous partition, give rise to a gal-
vanic current. This fact has an important bearing upon the
subject of animal electricity. Desiring to prove certain theories
in regard to muscular currents, I undertook the following line
of investigation.

: th ings pro
by porous partitions, and filled with the following “
undietilled water; weak solution of salt in distilled pone
solution of various salts of iron; blood; acidulated watt,

n; :
Having carefully placed the artificial muscle in position

J. Trowbridge—Electro-motive action of Liquids. 343

the muscular currents. It will be seen that when we experi-
ment with the muscle itself, we have a vessel containing fresh
blood, with all its chemical properties active, separated by the
sheath of the muscle from the clay guards placed upon the
cushions of the galvanometer. An action must take place
between the fluids of the muscle and the saline solutions of the
connecting apparatus, which is extremly difficult to distinguish

om the muscular current, when we consider that the fluids in
their natural state in the muscle must exert a more definite
chemical action than when they are removed and put in an
artificial test muscle. :

When membranes are used instead of clay partitions, endos-
moti¢ action may arise. Graham has shown, however, that the
membrane must be chemically affected by the separated liquids
in order that an appreciable action may take. place. This
source of error can be shunned by using unbaked sculptor’s clay
kneaded in sulphate of zinc. We cannot affirm conclusively,
however, even in this case, that the membranous sheath of the
muscle is not acted upon by the blood and the sulphate of zinc
in the clay partition.

pikes (., Ramaret
YT i eng i: 7”
pve | \ « MO, Eg BS jp bead
y Pe, 4
Ne pe = id -

er ¥ a sa D ihe
7 a ee <

In the following experiments I placed the terminals of the gal-
vanometer in an oblong vessel filled with sulphate of zine ; an
filling a Utube with the liquid to be experimented with,
closed the ends with pieces of bladder prepared with the white
of an gg, and dipped them in the bath of sulphate of zine.

344 J. Trowbridge— Electro-motive action of Liquids.

In fig. (1) T and T’ represent terminals of the galvanometer
in plan. I found that when the extremities of the U tube
were placed along the line A C, a current went from 0 toA
through the U tube, arising probably from the resultant electro-
motive action at A and C, between the fluid enclosed in the
tube and the sulphate of zinc in the connecting vessel.

ometer returned to zero, and oscillated over a few degrees.
This may be explained by supposing that the current
divides at B into nearly equal portions, one part taking the
direction to the right and the other to the left, and counteract
ing each other in their action upon the galvanometar. On
turning the tube into the position a’ d’, the current is immed:
ately reversed, the current which before passed in the direction

O A through the galvanometer, now passing in the direction 0

The same phenomena are repeated at D, when the tube has
been turned 270° from the point A; the current running agail
in the direction O A on a very slight movement of the tube
from D toward A. :

Care must be taken to eliminate the errors which arise from

This current, however, can be readily distinguished from that

€ experiments of Tomlinson on the cohesive figures P
duced by different liquids readily occurs to one 1 eon
these experiments. But there is not a close analogy yore
the two classes of phenomena; for, upon touching the § a
of the bath with a drop of colored liquid, the needle m i
cases is deflected before the colored fluid reaches the ae
ese experiments bear upon certain facts stated by writers
electro-physiology. DuBois Reymond having connect re
vessels containing the terminals of the galvanometer by ;
phon tube containing the same liquid as was contained “th
separate vessels, the ends of the tube having been cove

u : n '
one arm violently, he found that the needle was deflected

one direction, and upon contracting the other, the direction 7
reversed. i

: ie.
This action is attributed by DuBois Rey mond :

agi Aree NE Le ee Sy ae ee =

J. Trowbridge—Electro-motive action of Liquids. 345

the electrical currents supposed to be circulating in the arms,
By the contraction of one arm the muscular current becomes
enfeebled, and the current of the other arm predominates. It
occurred to me that experiments with the U tube might throw

of the human fingers, a vessel aaa
(fig. 2) with two limbs, which were

connected with each other at the = aby =

top. ta b are pieces of = oro ES

flexible tubing, and the extremi- a {4 Sra Em

tes ¢ and d were covered with F =f =e:

prepared membrane; A was = ee
ed with a weak solution of ——ed—Et---Et—ia
t.

The resistance of the circuit was nearly that of the human
body from the forefinger of one hand to that of the next, and
equal to seven or eight times that of the Atlantic cable. The
extremities of the tube were then immersed in the liquid of the
connecting vessels, the same precautions being observed as
are advised by DuBois Reymond. Upon the first contact with
the liquid, the spot of light from the galvanometer was deflect-
ed over 200 divisions of the scale, and upon the reversal of the
limbs the direction of the deflection was also changed. By
pinching the flexible tube of one of the limbs, this deflection
could be greatly lessened.

currents claimed by the electro-physiologists ; and the further
culty of conceiving how muscular contraction can effect
this current, lead me to believe that the deflection of the needle
resulting from the contraction of the muscle of the arms 18
produced either by the perspiration or by the change in the
flow of the blood.” It may be mentioned in this connection
that the electromotive force between arterial and venous blood
18 2.43, if we represent that of a Daniell’s cell by 76-42.

(Scoutetten, Experiences nouvelles pour constater lelectricite

346 §=R. W. Willson—Demagnetization of Electro-magnets,

du sang et en mesurer la force electromotrice. C. R., lvii, 791-
95.)

It is well known that muscular contractions can alter the
character of the blood ; and we have shown that a very slight
chemical difference between two fluids separated by a mem-
brane of the same nature as the cutaneous covering of the
fingers, will be shown by the galvanometer.

IL—Demagnetization of Electro-magnets ; by Rospert W. WILL
son, Junior Class, Harv. Coll.

Wiedemann has shown Pogg. Ann. C. 235, Ann. de Min.
(3), 1, 189, that the intensity of the current necessary to de
magnetize a steel magnet is much less than that of the current
by which the bar was originally magnetized.

t has occurred to me to experiment, with a view to ascel
taining how far this principle can be applied to electro-magnets

The apparatus used consisted of a cylindrical bar of soft iron
8 cm. in length and 1 cm. in diameter, slightly rounded at
the end. The armature was a piece of soft iron, of the same
diameter and 2 c.m. in length. ;

round this core were placed two concentric helices, wound
in opposite directions, through each of which could be passed
the current of a single Grove’s cell.

The method of experimenting was as follows. A current
was first passed through the inner helix, which, for convement
I shall call A, and the weight supported by the bar was no's
This current being broken, the outer helix, B, was introd :
into the circuit, and the corresponding weight noted. nee
rent through B being then broken, and that through A cl si |
after a short time, the current was again passed through B
the weight noted. The following table shows the results.

Wt. supported by— sane
fe Pil is ‘a diminished by 5
490 grms. 250 130
470 240 130
460 230 130
460 220 120
420 220 130
410 200 110
Mean 452 227 125

Taking the mean result, we see that while the helix rat

only develop sufficient magnetism in the bar to render 7 eer
of sustaining 227 gr., yet, if it act in opposition "oT ers
diminish the weight which the latter supports by

that is, its power to demagnetize is greater than its
magnetize,

R. W. Willson—Demagnetization of Electro-magnets. 347

of electro-magnets the helix, by which the bar was originally
magnetized, is still acting with its full power when the demag-
netizing helix in introduced into the circuit.

A natural inquiry was this: if the bar were magnetized b
the weaker helix B, and then demagnetized by the helix A,
what additional amount of magnetism could A impart to the
bar? It is evident that this case, though somewhat similar to
the former, is not identical with it; here the helix B acts as
resistance to the magnetization of the bar, while in the former
case it acted to deprive the bar of a portion of the magnetism
which it already possessed.

Accordingly the bar, being magnetized by B, was submitted
to the action of A, and the weigh supported being noted, the
reverse operation was performed, and the weights supported
compared as follows:

A demagnetized by B. B demagnetized by A.
85 65
70 65
65 60
65 50

It will be noticed that the results in the left hand are larger
than those in the right hand column, that is, when A is simply
demagnetized by B, it can support a greater weight than when

4 given helix, traversed by a given current, has more power to
hagnetize than to magnetize, while its power to prevent mag-
hetization is greater than either.

348 S. H. Scudder— Canons of Nomenclature.

Art. XLVI.—Canons of Systematic Nomenclatur for the higher
groups; by SAMUEL H. ScuppeEr.

aware, 1s any likely to be presented, until the subject is aa
Pro-

7
attention to the extensive changes which a strict adherence to
the laws of priority would cause in the generic nomenclature
of butterflies; and quite recently has put the same into practic
in his catalogue of these insects

But hitherto very little has been said concerning the special

‘application of definite rules to groups higher than genera, and
it is to this division of the subject that we desire to call atten
tion,

nomenclature should be applied to all the monomial grou :

Unity of principle lies at the foundation of acceptable leg

tion ; second, retrospective laws should be avoide a
One difficulty meets us at the outset,— what some are plea

to term the unstable nature of the higher groups, but which

we should prefer to call the disagreement of naturalists be
the limits and value of these groups; yet as this divers! iy
view is a nearly equal hindrance to any code of rules, it
only to be mentioned in passing. ancl
ndeavoring to keep in mind the principles above e”
ated, and as the simplest means of presenting our reer
nv pea outline of a code is suggested for the consider
of zoélogists. &
Canons.—I. The name originally given by the founder oft
emp should be permanently retained, to the exclusion ,
subsequent synonyms. ae he
is rule, besbisnistig the law of priority, which lies ps the
foundation of all systematic nomenclature, is the same

* This Journal, July, 1869.

ST te! | ae meee ons Meine Coane
pian gis Ra Ss oa es ate ee ae ob aeae ee Tee An cnt een oh Aa MeN

the

S. H. Scudder—Canons of Nomenclature. 349

first and prime rule of the code accepted by the British Associ-
ation, with the exception of certain references made exclusively
to species; and, since this canon meets universal acceptance,
there is no need of discussing it, aside from the following limit-
ations. ?

1. This law of priority should not extend to works published
before 1758.

The same reasons for such a limitation do not exist in the
present instance as in the case of specific nomenclature; but sim-
ilar objections can be made to an earlier limitation. Only three
reasonable courses are open to the naturalist: to accept (a) no
limitation whatever, in which case “ our zoélogical studies would

frittered away amid the refinements of classical learning ; (6)
the limitation here formulated, in which case all our systematic
nomenclature takes its common origin in the tenth edition of
Linné’s Systema Nature ;* or (c) to apply the laws of nomen-
clature to each kind of group (subfamily, family, class, etc.),
from the time when such group was first brou ht into use—
which would engender such confusion as speedily to bring all
nomenclature into deserved disrepute.

2. Plural or collective substantives (or adjectives used as
substantives) are alone admissible.

the higher groups are all collective—in idea, if not in
fact—it is essential that the names applied to them should be at

formed should be dropped. The retrospective action of such a
law would be very slight.

3. A name which has been previously proposed for some
genus or higher group in zodlogy should be expung' :

This accords too well with accepted rules to require any dis-
cussion,

4. When two authors define and name (differently) the same
group, both making it of the same or very nearly the same ex-
tent, the later name (or if synchronous, the least known name)

hould be cancelled, and never again brought into use. _
_ With the exception of certain verbal modifications, this law
18 identical with the sixth section of the British Association
rules, where it is applied to genera only.
_ 5 In any subsequent alterations of the limits of a group,
its name should never be cancelled; but should be retained
either in a restricted or an enlarged sense. i
_rhe necessity for such a limitation is obvious; otherwise a
different name would (or, could) be given by every author who

* The English—the strongest f the plan of dating from the twelfth
edition of the Systema Wateads ksh owe oy aarioas scouting the earlier date of
t 158 as the starting point for zoological nomenclature, and we may assume that,
'n this view, the whole scientific world will sooner or later coneur.

350 Si H. Scudder— Canons of Nomenclature.

differed from preceding ones in his ideas of the precise limite
tion of any group in question. This indeed has already been

this limitation should itself be subject to one exception, which
may be formulated thus :
6. But any assemblage so defined by an author as harshly
to violate the groupings of nature (as known to naturalists of —
his time), should be cancelled.
uch a rule would prevent the injury which might acerue to
science by too close an application of the preceding law.
parenthetical limitation seems, however, to be necessary.
I anges in the name of one group should not affect the
names of other groups.

s. Mo
To this canon no exception whatever should be made or
consent. Anyone who considers the subject, will see yo :
apparently reasonable exception will lead to another
less desirable, until the whole value and force of the Pp
canon is destroyed. known, 35
II e mere enumeration of its members, when ENO".
a sufficient definition of the limits of a group, and gives
unquestionable claim to recognition.
epee ; 2 , ery name pro
Ithough it is certainly most desirable that ev yd (ot shortly
essential ¢ eo

S. H. Scudder— Canons of Nomenclature. 851

for instance, he designates the known genera to be embraced in
a proposed family, he actually defines his group much better
than he could do by a specification of its characters, since we
have probably not yet been favored with any description of a
natural family which gives everything which is characteristic
and omits all that is not.

ommendations. —1. “That assemblages of genera, termed
families, should be uniformly named by adding the termination

tion -ine.

case, it is evident that this recommendation cannot have the force
of a law, nor be allowed any retrospective action. Otherwise
these rules, or any other reasonable ones (however generally
they tnay be accepted), are powerless to assign to any higher
natural group a fixed and unalterable name; but the group in
question would receive a different name from different authors,
according as they considered it a subfamily or an assemblage
of still another nature.

2. All monomial collective names should be derived from
as ay e9 have a plural form. A

- Only the surname of the author who first proposed a grou
need follow its name, whether the group be a in its pn i
or in a modified sense; but when it is desirable to indicate at
the same time its recognized, altered limits, the surname of the
Writer who first proposed the accepted circumscription may
follow in a parenthesis. :

In systematic nomenclature, the object is to register titles, not
to gratify pride, and the names of authors are appended for con-
venience, not fame; the question of justice or injustice has no
place here; and yet the ge recommendation ought to be sat-
\sfactory to those who view this matter in a different light.

352 E. Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils,

Art. XLVIL.—On some new Species of Paleozoic Fossils * by
EK. Bruurnes, F.G.S.

Genus Hyouitues Hichwald.
In the following description of new species of Hyolithes, I
shall call the side of the fossil which is most flattened, or from
which there is a projection in front of the aperture, “ vy ven-

tral side.” irectly opposite is the “dorsum.” The lateral

® ABD

r i : ein 3 a represen
portion of a specimen, No Ball thoes species vary slightly im the ra
tapering.

, 3B
sometimes close to the ventral side, as in fig. 2. The ~ dep ss
is the distance between the median line of the ventral side of
the dorsum, and is at right angles to the width. That pat”

e ventral side which projects beyond the apertye aa

“lower lip.” The “ventral limb” of the operculum 8 7

i Ris in contact with the lower lip, when. the pte
lum is in place, in the aperture. The “dorsal limb” &

; sur-
there is a point around Mege oe,

* Extracted from the Canadian Naturalist of December, 1871-

E. Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils. 353

conglomerate which constitutes an important formation on the
south shore of the St. Lawrence, below Quebec. The age of

shell itself in some of the specimens is covered with fine longi-
tudinal striw, from five to ten in the width of aline. The shell

es obscure sub-imbricating rings of growth.
His species has been found at Bie and St. Simon. :

. "1g. 1 6, representing the transverse section, is not so dis-
Col flattened on the ventral side as it is in most specimens.
Collected by T.C mn. :

_ 41. Americanus—Length from twelve to eighteen lines,
tapering at the rate of about four lines to the inch. Section
triangular, the three sides flat, slightly convex or slightly con-
cave, the dorsal and lateral edges either quite sharp or epee
roun Lower lip rounded, projecting about two lines in full-

Am. Jour. Sc1.—Turrp Series, Vor. III, No. 17,—May, 1872. ,
23

354 E., Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils,

grown individuals. Surface finely striated, the strie curving
forward on the ventral sides, and passing upward on the side

at nearly a right angle, curve slightly backward on the dorsum.

n a specimen eighteen lines in length, the width of the aper ;
ture is about six lines and the depth about four, the propor —

tions being slightly variable.

e operculum has a very well-defined conical ventral limb,

the apex of which is situated above the center, or nearer the

dorsal than the ventral side. The dorsal limb forms a flat mar —
gin, and is so situated that when the operculum is in place, the —
plane of this flat border must be nearly at right angles tothe —
longitudinal axis of the shell. In an operculum six Tines wide,
the height of the lower limb to the apex of the cone is two and .
a half lines, and the width of the flat border, which constitutes

the dorsal limb, about one line.

H. micans.—This is a long, slender, cylindrical species, with

convex, and finely striated concentrically. On des |

elongate ovate scars, arranged in the form of a star, |
toward the ventral side being the longest. None of these se
quite reach the margin.
The shell and operculum are thin and of a finely Jamel
structure, smooth and shining.
curs at Bic and St. Simon; also at Troy, N. Y.
Collectors, T. C. Weston and S. W. Ford. three

the mays

Sometimes numerous small specimens, from half a line ui lab

lines in ee are found with the operculum on the poe :

This shell appears to me at present to constitute a new

E. Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils. 355

differing from the majority of the species of Hyolithes in its cir-

cular section, the operculum not divided into dorsal and ventral

limbs, and in the remarkable system of muscular impressions on

the interior. Barrande has figured an operculum of the same

type, differing from this in having only three instead of five

pairs of impressions. They are, however, arranged on the same
lan in both the Canadian and Bohemian species.* It is possi-
le that our species may be a Salterella.

than the sides. Lower lip uniformly convex, and projecting

about three lines in a large specimen. Surface with fine striz

Collected by T. C. Weston at Bic and St. Simon.
Genus OBOLELLA Billings.
6

une 5. Interior of the ventral valve of 0. enlarged about five ayer
"Ts. aa, the two small scars at the hinge;

7. Interior of the ventral valv int
_Inte e of Obolus Apollinis
Davidson’s “Introduction to the study of the fossil Brachiopoda.
* Systéme Silurian, &e., vol. iii, pl. 9, fig. 16 H, = fig. 17.
. The

England from a figure Thod. Davidson, Esq. F-R.8., of :
C. Weston. specimen is from t drawn for me by Thos. Devios, troy, X.Y. ot iby T.

356 Ei. Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils,

Generic Characters.—Shell unarticulated, ovate or sub-orbie- !
ular, lenticular, smooth, concentrically or radiately striated,

sometimes reticulated by both radiate and concentric ste,

Ventral valve with a solid beak and a small more or less dis

tinctly grooved area. In the interior of the ventral valve there ,

are two elongated sub-linear or petaloid muscular im

which extend from near the hinge line forward, sometimes to |
points in front of the mid-length of the shell. These are either

straight or curved, parallel with each other or diverging towanl

the front. Between these, about the middle of the shell, isa

median lin

3

two large ones dd. Should this be the case, however, the “a
difference in their position would no doubt be of generic Vi

P . Ae ie
description of the dorsal valve of the 0. Apollinis suficiaty
perfect to afford a means of comparison with that of a

but the differences in the ventral valve alone are so

closely related, and occur in nearly the same geologica

] horizon. |

In the rocks below Quebec and at the Straits of Belle Isle, 8

vol. i, p. 292, pl. 80, fig. 2. Occurs at Troy, N.
2. O. crassa

Hall, = Orbicula ? crassa, op. cit. Pp. 299, ae

fig. 8. Occurs at Troy.

ne itudinal occupe le ME
of the adductors, he says: pedro a Pee Rossies,

__ * Speaking
des = impressions et arrive jusqu’au sillon
. 925

i, p.

E. Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils. 357

3. O. ceelata Hall, = Orbicula coelata, op. cit. p. 290, pl. 79, fig.
9. Occurs at Troy.

@, TD. Sp.
saeaulied: Billings; has been found as yet only at the
Straits of Belle Isle.

The following are new species :

. gemma.—Shell very small, about two or three lines in
length, ovate, both valves moderately convex and_ nearly
smooth. Ventral valve ovate, the anterior margin broadl
rounded, with sometimes a portion in the middle nearly straight ;
greatest width at about one-third the length from the front,
thence tapering with gently convex or nearly straight sides to
the beak, which is acutely rounded. The area is about one-

Oe

om deep groove, which extends to the apex of the beak.
orsal valve is nearly circular, obscurely angular at the
beak, and rather more broadly rounded at the front margin
than at the sides.

In the interior of the ventral valve there are two small mus-
cular impressions of a lunate form, close to the cardinal margin,
one on each side of the median line. A second pair consists of
two elongate sub-linear scars, which extend from the posterior
third of the length of the shell to points situated at about one-
fourth the length from the front margin. These scars are nearly
straight, parallel or slightly diverging forward, and divide the
shell longitudinally into three nearly equal portions. Between
them, about the ‘middle of the shell, are two other small
obscurely defined impressions. There is also a small pit close
_ to the hinge line and in the median line of the shell. In the

interior of the dorsal valve there is an obscure rounded ridge
which runs from the beak along the median line almost to the
front margin. Close to the hinge line there is a pair of sma
Scars, one on each side of the ridge. The other impressions in
this valve have not been m t.

e surface of both valves is in general nearly smooth, but
when well preserved shows some obscure concentric strive.

This species is closely allied to O. chromatica, the species on
which the genus was founded, only differing from it, so far as
the external characters are concerned, in being much smaller,
and the beak of the ventral valve more extended.

ee at Bic and St. Simon. Collected by T. C. Weston.

smooth, but
With fine concentric striz, Length seven lines, width a little

impressions are indistinctly seen, but appear to be formed on
the same plan as those of the ventral valve of the genus.

The above description is drawn up on one exterior, and sey-
eral interiors of the same valve, apparently the ventral valve.
The exterior is very like that of O. desguamata, and is of the
same size, but the interior shows it to be an entirely distinct
species.

Length of the largest specimen seen, seven lines; width about
the same, or slightly less.

Occurs at Trois Pistoles. Collected by T. C. Weston.

Platyceras primevum.—Shell minute, consisting of about two
whorls, which as seen from above are ventricose, but most nar-
rowly rounded at the suture; the inner whorl scarcely elevated
above the outer. The under side is not seen in the specimen.
Diameter, measured from the outer lip across to the opposite
side, one line; width of last whorl at the aperture, about one
third of a line.

Collected at Bie by T. C. Weston.

Proposed new genus of Brachiopoda.

rella are, thus, as follows :—
Trimerella.—Cavities in both valves. the
Monomerella.—Cavities in the ventral valve, but none 12

This genus was discovered in the spring of 1871, at Hespe™®
‘Ontario, in the Guelph limestone, by T. C. Weston. pee
venturing to describe it, I sent a specimen to Mr. Davidson | us,
on returning it he stated that he considered it to be a new er
“very closely allied to Trimerella” Lately I received @

from him in which he states that he has obtained the same ge"

%

E. Billings—New Species of Paleozoic Fossils. 859

from Wisby, Island of Gothland, and he requested me to name
it, as he was about to publish the Swedish species.

We have two distinct species, both occurring in the Guelph
limestone. This formation I consider to be about the age of
the Aymestry limestone of the English geologists. I shall char-
acterize our species briefly as follows. Full descriptions and
figures will be given hereafter.

M. prisca.—V entral valve ovate, greatest width at about the
anterior third of the length, thence tapering with gently convex
sides to the narrowly rounded beak; front margin broadly
rounded ; septum about one-third the length of the shell. Dor-
sal valve about one-fourth shorter than the ventral, and more
broadly rounded at the anterior extremity. On aside view the
outline of the ventral valve would be, so far as we can judge

Length of ventral valve, eighteen lines; greatest width, thir-
teen or fourteen lines; length of dorsal valve about fourteen
lines. There are some fragments in the collection which indi-
cate a larger size.

Occurs in the Guelph limestone at Hespelar, Ontario. Col-
lected by T. C. Weston. :

- orbicularis.—Broadly ovate, nearly circular, lenticular,
both valves moderately convex; septum about one-third the
length. The casts seem to show that a thin plate extends for-
ward a short distance from the cardinal edge, supported by the
re sai The length and width appear to be about twelve or

n lines, |

Occurs with M. prisca. 'T. C. Weston, collector.

Both Trimerella and Monomerella are sub-genera of Obolus.

There is, beside the above, a third group which differs from
the other two in having no cavities in either valve.* It includes
the species Ihave called Obolus Canadensis and 0. Galtensis.
For this group I would propose the name OBOLELLINA. It

* Since the above was A : F I have ascer-
: ublished in the Can. Nat., in Dee. last, ve
‘ained that cavities may sds both in Monomerella and Obolellina. Where they do
maces however, in species of these genera, they are small or rudimentary as com-
bad their great size in Trimerella. y r in |
Prepac oe not sc lyonae When, therefore, they are ae 4 slightly es
. », lot even of specific value. But when very ey may
generic importance. . y large,

*

360 0. C. Marsh—Description of Hesperornis regalis,

three of these sub-genera there are species which have the large
muscular impressions of the ventral valve obliquely striated or
grooved. This seems to show that the muscles were not single,
but composed of several bands. The three genera pass gradu:
ally into each other, and yet I think some sort of a subdivision
is required, It seems almost absurd to place such shells as 7,
grandis and O. Canadensis in the same generic group.
Proposed new yenus of Pteropoda.

Genus HYOLITHELLUS, gen. nov.

Since the sheet containing the description of Hyolithes micans
was printed off, I have arrived at the conclusion that a new
genus for its reception should be instituted. I propose to call
it LHyolithellus. It differs from Hyolithes, in its long slender
form and in the peculiar structure of its operculum.

Montreal, 23d March, 1872.

ART. XLVUI— Preliminary Description of HESPERORNIS BE. |
GALIS, with Notices of four other new Species of Oretaceous Birds; —
by O. C. Marsa

of its affinities. This interesting discovery has already been

announced in this Journal, and the name, Hesperornis wa
proposed by the writer for the species thus represented.t, pre
present paper is preliminary to a full description, with ee

some new forms to the limited avian fauna heretofore found 1
the Cretaceous beds of the Atlantic coast.

Hesperornis regalis, gen. et sp. Nov. an
_ The remains of this species at present known consist 0 por
tions of one skeleton, including the nearly entire “tthe
limbs, from the femur to the terminal phalanges, per ibe
pelvis, several cervical and caudal vertebra, and numero oe

( i 5 1872.
* This Journal, vol. xlix, p. 205, March, 1870. + Volt iii, p. 56, ae ii

0. C. Marsh—Description of Hesperornis regalis. 361

The femur is unusually short and stout, much flattened
antero-posteriorly, and the shaft curved forward. It some-
what resembles in form the femur of Colymbus torquatus Briin.,
but the great trochanter is oP acess A much less developed in

tendinal bridge, differing in this respect from all known aquatic
birds. The fibula is well developed, and resembles that of the

birds, There is a shallow groove, also, between the second and
third metatarsals, which taken in connection with the deeper

is indicated by an elongated oval indentation on the inner
m

there is broad, shallow depression, extending rather more than
half way to the distal extremity. :

halanges of the large, external toe are very uliar,
altho gh an approach to the same structure is seen in the genus
Podiceps. On the outer, inferior margin they are all deeply exca-

362 0. C. Marsh—Description of Hesperornis regalis.

cartilage, as in Apteryzx, and, at its upper margin, the anterior
and posterior extensions of the illia, if both existed, were dis
connected, or unossified at their union.

The cervical and caudal vertebree preserved present no fea-
tures deserving of special mention in this preliminary nouee,
The latter are numerous, but apparently not much in excess of
those in some modern birds. Unfortunately, no portions of the
skull were recovered. The femur and tibia have very thick
compact walls, and do not appear to have been pneumatic
The tarso-metatarsals and the phalanges were nearly or quite
solid,

Measurements. a
Leugen Of finest tomas, 2. 36 2 oS ee aed
Transverse diameter of proximal end,.--. ---. ---------- a
Diameter of articular mee. oo SES es os
ransverse diameter of shaft, at middle, eel winery = ey se
Antero-posterior diameter c. 2255. ctesneee eee sy
Transverse diameter of distal end, ..-.--.----------=""
Length of right tabiag ci 7... 22-003 U5. eagle - steel
Transverse diameter of proximal articulation, - - --------- : ,
ength of cnemial process,_........-.--~----------7-7" ps
Transverse diameter of shaft, at middle, - -------------- ee
Transverse diameter of distal CBs. en anes: se eee pa
Antero-posterior extent of outer condyle, eda gers? 3 92°
An ero-posterior extent of inner condyle Auten 2S El ee ix
Length of right tarso-metatarsal,.-..._-.----- -------> 130°
ngth to distal end of third metatarsal,_-------------- 16°
Length to distal end of second metatarsal, - --- --------- -
Transverse diameter of proximal articulation, - ---------- 15°
ast transverse diameter of shaft, rb ee Oe 16°

oo diameter of distal end of fourth metatarsal, - -

Transverse diameter of second metatarsal, .....-.------- arr
ngth of proximal phalanx of fourth toe, ....-.--.--.- 4
SE OF ROCKO. DORON To 0 2 nie ce nie de demos wee 39°5
Length of third phalanx, -.-.----- 40
Length of proximal phalanx of third toe,_..-..-.------- 41

The various remains of the present species already discovered
belonged to five individuals, which differed but little in size, or
in any important particulars. Taking the great Northern Diver
(Colymbus torquatus Briin.) as a standard of comparison for the
portions that are wanting, the skeleton of Hesperornis regalis
would measure about five feet and nine inches from the apex
of the bill to the extremities of the toes.

writer, last summer, in the gray shale of the upper Cretaceous,
near the Smoky Hill River, in Western Kansas.

; its general features this humerus resembles that of the
common Cormorant (Graculus carbo Linn.), although indicating
4 somewhat smaller species. The articular head i ch more
compressed transversely, its apex is more prominent, and its
anconal margin is strongly deflected. The median ridge, on
the anconal side below the head, is rounded instead of angular,
and the ulnar crest is much less produced distally.

Measurements.

Greatest diameter of proximal end of humerus,- -------- sa°r8 sigs
ertical diameter of articular head,_..--------------: -13
Fantveres dismater: 22 as a 6°

Proxi leter, -.--.-.-.----~------ pa
Troximal extension of head beyond ulnar seeeeeee

364 0. C. Marsh—Deseription of Hesperornis regalis.

The specimens on which this species is based were found by —
John G. Meirs, Esq., at Hornerstown, New Jersey, in the green
sand of the upper Cretaceous, and by him presented to the
Museum of Yale College.

Graculavus pumilus, sp. Nov.

The present species, which is hardly more than one-third the —
size of the preceding, is likewise represented by the proximal —
end of a humerus, as well as by some other characteristic remains
The articular head in this specimen is equally compressed, aud
shows the same prominent apex, but is without the anconal
deflection, which distinguishes the larger species. The lower —
half of the head is narrower transversely, and separated from
the internal trochanter by a wider notch. The median ridge
moreover, on the anconal face is much more acute.

Measurements. e
Greatest diameter of proximal end of humerus,. ---- ---- 1836 = |
Vertical diameter of articular head,_..-..------------- v6 a
cransverse diameter, 2... 2... <olic si eels Jee ee ee bf ‘
Least diameter of shaft below proximal end,.--- ------ 31
Greatest diameter of metacarpal, at distal end,- -------- ee
Least diameter, - __. --~ 2 ae :

The known remains of this species are from the same locality :
and geological horizon as the preceding, and were also discov
ered by John G. Meirs, Esq. Pa

Graculavus anceps, sp. NOV. 7

The only fossil bird remains secured during the exp -

was the
a

distal extremity of a left metacarpal, which is so well p dicates :
and so characteristic a part of the skeleton, that It ae ;

therefore be referred provisionally to the genus a :

green Cormorant (Graculus violaceus Gray) of the z ee oe :
and one somewhat larger than Graculavus velox, een

in having the articular face for the external digit brome he :
nearly flat, the face for the small inner digit cies sae
smaller and oval in outline, and the intervening tubercle ©

M. C. Lea—Method of Estimating Ethylic Alcohol. 865

Measurements.
Greatest diameter of distal end, -- - - 1 oases
5:

This specimen was found by the writer in the gray, upper
Cretaceous shale, on the North Fork of the Smoky Hill River,
in Western Kansas,

Paleotringa vagans, sp. nov.

greater portion of the shaft and distal end of a left tibia, some-
what injured, but with its more characteristic portions still
preserved. It indicates a bird somewhat smaller than Palco-
tringa littoralis, described by the writer from the same me 723
but is probably a closely allied form. From the tibia of that
species, the present specimen may readily be distinguished by
the proportionally more narrow and shallow tendinal canal, on
the anterior face of the distal’ end, and by the more depressed
supra-tendinal bridge. The trochlear surface, also, on the pos-
terior side contracts more rapidly, and at its superior margin
passes directly, and not abruptly, into the shaft.
Measurements.

Length of povlioh proserved, {06 < 910.12 14 oo; BE 62° =m
ppproximate width of condyles in front, .--.------------ 8°
idth of bridge at center, viclczc. gyi lau: 3 ESL 2°15
Transverse diameter of lower outlet, ---- - 15
Transverse diameter of shaft where broken, .------.----- 5°
Antero-posterior diameter, ......26 Sixers 2 ees 4°

This unique specimen was discovered at Hornerstown, New
Jersey, about ten feet below the surface of the marl, and was
presented to the Yale Museum by John G. Meirs, Esq.

Yale College, New Haven, April 10th, 1872.

==

Art. XLIX.—On a proposed method of estimating Ethylic Alcohol
ou present in Methylic Alcohol; by M. CAREY Phila-
elphia.

WHILE engaged in the study of some methyl compounds, I
met with a seine: which sal recently been published in
England, for effecting the above object with igre age cor-
rectness.) As any simple means of accomplishing this result

* This Journal, vol. xlix, p. 208, March, 1870.

866 MC. Lea—Method of Estimating Ethylie Alcohol,

would be useful, I have oe an examination of the proposed
method, which i is as follow

1. Some good wood-spirit, which I had distilled over — soda,

was gies Pe I tried, however. r, in bo th ways.

. The adhering liquid was squeezed out as completely as possible
with a spatula, the _ was liquified by heat, and a thermo
metric bulb placed in -

Crystals first sppeuneat --- 102°F.
The liquid became thick with c Seed at’ ..0° 100
. The crystals were next taken out =» dried on blotting paper;

no

oo

Crystals first appeared at........--------- ede
e liquid became thick with crystals at---- 127 i
4. Nine volumes of the same wood-spirit were next mixed

repeate
. The crystals of methylic oxalate were freed from a
liquid as far as could be done by pressure, the mass was lig
fied, and as it cooled, oF
ee first appeared at... -.cesss-+ 28s 98. F.
The liquid became thick with crystals at- ---- oT ied.
6. These crystals were dried as before, and then fused and Pe
rystals — to form at. .......---------- os es
became thick “ 127 £.

or

It thus — - the melting eat of the St ane
have be n blotting paper, is precise rg
eae snitniner frie methylic alcohol nearl
taining about ten per cent of ethylic alcohol. fe no ink

ences can be drawn from this.
When the crystals have been simply eer
ing point appears to be lower when Sa “tochol. ss

A table has been given to show the relation F.
Per cent of ethylic Aooliel 0 is Methylic oxalate solidifies at or about ee
5 if

a“ “ “ 10 “ “ M 16° tis

“ “ “ 15 é ts “

Chemistry and Physics. 367

present, and when, consequently, the liquid which moistens the
crystals contains ethylic oxalate. But it seems evident that the
congealing point will depend quite as much on the amount of
liquid which chances to be left with the crystals, as upon the
purity of the wood-spirit, so that two operators working with
the same materials would be apt to get quite different results.

Accordingly, the congealing point attained at (5) compared
with the table would indicate the presence of 8-4 per cent of
ethylic aleohol, whereas there was present about ten per cent.
This conclusion is to be regretted, as the method, if reliable,
would have been valuable.

March 2, 1872.

Art. L.—Discovery of a New Planet; by Prof. James OC. Wat-
Son. From a letter to one of the editors, dated Ann Arbor,
April 4, 1872.

_Idiscoverep last night, in the constellation Virgo, a planet
-eahpe unknown, of which I have observed the following
places :

Ann Arbor M. T. a é
1872, April 3, 12" 20" 09% 13% 23™ 43°13
3,13 51 30 18 23 40°42 —9° 28’ 2071
8.15 13 43 18 23 3759 —9 27 42 8
Hourly motion, Ac=—2%0 Ad=+27'"0.
The planet shines like a star of the eleventh magnitude.

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
I. CHEMISTRY AND Puysics.

1. On the aromatic phosphines.—A. W. Hormany has obtained
the first known members of the series of aromatic phosphines cor-
responding to the aromatic ammonias. When two molecules of
chloride of benzyl, two molecules of iodide of phosphonium, and
one molecule of oxide of zine are heated together in a closed —
4 white crystalline mass is formed, from which the author obtat
a ae liquid boiling at 180°C., and having the formula,

: . oes ar
Pia ", Which is that of benzyl-phosphine. The liquid is in-
Soluble j i wari aga

in water, but soluble in alcohol and ? “PL The

crystallized iodhydrate, which has the formula €,H,
Corresponding chiadiginake and bromhydrate appear not to crys

368 Scientific Intelligence.

tallize; the platinum salt forms a yellow — _——
Benzyl-phosphine i is formed according to the equa

2€,H,Cl+2PH,1+Zn0 = 2P©,H,. ie +0H?,
Dibenzyl-phosphine remains in the retort after distilling off the

volatile products. When pure, it forms brilliant crystalline need-
les, which are perfectly free from taste and smell, and insoluble in

water. Dibenzyl-phosphine, P €.H,, does not unite with acids

or even with platinic chloride: oxygen exerts no action upon it
even at a » high temperature. Its formation is expressed by the
equation

£t. H ,Cl+PH,I+Zn0 = P(€,H,),H,1+ZnCl, +0H,.

Besides these products, the mother-liquor of dibensy aa
abe g a sticky ie insoluble in alcohol, whic to pos

2. O :
Pisepniven Whe ow current of methyl-phosphine 18 COM
ducted into Faming iets acid, oxidation takes place, soon ;

posing the lead salt by sulphydric acid. It is a white crystalline al
mass resembling spermaceti, which is hy oscopic but not d
quescent. It dissolves readily in in water; the solution reddens :
mus paper, and has a oe nts taste. The sete | of the

regia without the enter chan The acid melts at 108 C,

and may be, in great measure at least, distilled without we

Its constitution is expressed by the formula (€H,)H, 05:
rm

nd
any of the metallic salts are insoluble or soluble with inal
Hofmann describes the salts of silver, lead and Labi: ek rete
: 0

d which

has the formula P(€H,),HO,. It is a white seer 4
resembling paraffin, very soluble in water, alcohol and ether.
crystals melt at 76°C., and volatilize at a higher tem
without rm Oi The silver salt of ibis ey os
mula P(CH,),Ag@.; it presents fine felted needies

soluble s cae The barium and lead salts are unerystalig .

and dry to clear masses like varnish. Hofmann also brie of 3
scribes the two corresponding ethyl-acids, = first 4s he feet
ame the second fluid even at —25°. The stitution rt

s becomes intelligible if we regard th
gthophelehe ts acid, in which methyl a omaie hydroxyl,

Chemistry and Physics. : 869

Thus we have for the phonphorts and corresponding arsenic series
the following formulas

0H 0H
Orthophosphorie acid, P@ 4 OH, Orthoarsenic acid, AsO 4 OH,
0H 0H

€H, €H
Methyl-phosphinic acid, PO OH” geet ape getee. eH,
oH’ thylic acid, 0H

if €H ; €H
Ge A aed PO €H.,, Kakodylic acid, As €H,,
0H 6H
Teimethylphosphin oO cH, spies panies as ei.
€H, oxide
— Berichte der Deutschen chem. Gesellschaft, Jahrgang Vv, P. 104.

n the compounds of Tungsten.—Roscox has sdticuunional
the jean of an elaborate and most successful study of the com-
eo = tungsten with chlorine and bromine. The author began

W,.
=i to be igo Pexaehlotiae of tungsten is Poker by

bt Bg slowl ea attacked by cold water; but if traces of the oxy-
= , are present, it is immediately dec omposed into

Cl 5) ee free

By reducing ‘he. fa rucbloride in a current of Diy ole and
repeatedly distilling the product in the same gas, lo ng black,
brilliant needles of pure pentachloride, WCl,, are obtained, which,
wh bed to powder, have a dark green color like that of

tassic manganate. The crystals are very hygrosco get — “ne
at 248° C., solidify at 242°C., and boil at 275°°6 C.

With water it yields the blue se ts W.9,, ee hlorhydic acid

Tetrachloride of tun n, -
brown, crystalline powder when thethesachlorie, or a mixture of
hexachloride and pentachloride, is distill vee peapelees es ge

Au. J ete Series, Vor. III, No. 17. nit 1872.

370 Scientific Intelligence.

gen or carbonic acid. It is not volatile, and does not melt under
ordinary pressures, but is decomposed by heat into pentachloride
and dichloride. At the melting point of zinc, hydrogen reduces

it to metal. Water gives a brown oxide (we, ?) and chlorhy-
dric acid. The dichloride, WCl,, is prepared by moderately

of a br ox
chlorides WCl and awe,

The two oxychlorides, “wWecl, and W®,Cl,, are well known.
The monoxychloride, W OCI “ forms ruby red needles, which melt
at 210°:4, solidify at 206°°7, and boil at 227° C. Its he!
density corresponds with theory (171). The dioxychloride is

quid at na ft heating the brown oxide in chlorine. It remains

Br,, but whieh’ is very readil etic te. iving a DI
powder, which is the ery a two oxy web
and W®,Br,, are formed reese spumeter4 by heating a mixture 7“

two parts of the dioxide and one part of the metal in bromine, @
may easily be separated by sublimation, the monoxybromide big
much the more volatile, fusing at 27 7°, and boiling at 327 es
is readily decomposed by water, while the dioxybromide sub

, 18.

n the Decomposition of Potassium Chlorate. _Bava ‘ab
mont has investigated the conditions under which potent srith
rate is pre when heated both alone aie when org a

oxide, p pared by nites ipt ication, its oxygen 18 ev: voly :
¢ 60° "wet than before) wena y but be Leet the sole solid pe
uct being potassium chloride. No perchlorate is prod unde

appears t that sonia substances, bach _ platinum sponge” io the
tic oxide, and mercuric oxide, = in the least fa 4 cuprie
ecomposition ; ; while others adnate ese dioxide ap mange

oxide, and, in a less degree, fectio oxide, cobaltic oxide,

Chemistry and Physics. 371

noso-manganic oxide, and lead peroxide, cause the evolution of
oxygen at temperatures varying from 240° to 360°. The author
observed that fine division facilitated the action, precipitated
oxides acting more efficiently than those prepared by calcination ;
that, while the effect of even is noticeable, yet that from 4 to
4 of the oxide is the most efficient quantity ; that with these mix-
tures the rapidity of the decomposition is proportional to the tem-
perature; and that no chlorine is evolved below 300°. Moreover,
certain substances, which act chemically on the chlorate, decom-

t even lower temperatures. Thus chromic oxide causes

Ww

and a complete transformation into potassium chromate is
effected below 290°. Stannic, tungstic, silicic and boric oxides
act similarly. Baudrimont attributes the result, in the case of
cupric oxide and allied bodies, solely to the action of presence or
contact; the point of fusion of the mixture being ten degrees
lower than that of the unmixed chlorate.—Moniteur Scientifique,
xi, 783, Nov.
5

result in nicotine- isoning. They examined a smoking tobacco—
i it, one part
* pipe, the other made up into cigars, and drawing the smoke—

ases, The gaseous products were found to consist of oxygen,
nitrogen, Sarbonie ose and marsh gas. An oily verni-aglid sub-

afforded, when disti Te tant ‘ oti &
: istilled, an oily liquid of sp. gr. 0°8, apparently
ede of hydrocarbons of the penesl series, and a solid, in pearly
Taig having the composition C,, H,,. ‘The potash-soluti
illed, and the distillate was added to the sulphuric acid solu-

372 Scientific Intelligence.

tic, propionic, patie valeric, and carbolic — a dub
caproic, caprylic, and succinic acids, were detected. The su
ric a3 pitas ‘which the smoke had Bee eed, which was t ik

eatted to fractional distillatio The bases were adil farther puri
fied by re-crystallization of their latinum salts. In this way the
whole series of the so-called pyridine bases was obtained, as fol
lows: Pyridine C,H, . ee C,H,N, Lutidine C,H,N, Cot
lidine C,H, ,N, Barvoline C,H. ,N, Coridine C,,H,,N, Rub
dine C,,H.-N, and ee wdel Viridine O,,H,,N. No traceof
nicotine was found.

he authors investigated pe hysiological action of (1) those
— volatile = 160° and (2) of those Use: between 160°

ridine
line bases, and not to nicotine. They explain the fact that stronget

tobacco can be smoked in cigars than in a pipe, by finding
mo

e authors compared this. action with gi of the he
obtained from other plants used for smoking; with those *.
sone, willow wood and stra ae Ae and with pure F nthe

oghea ad coal. The action was entirely siento, but gr
pines of the willow wood bases, they produced no Ce pro
tion of the pupil. — Picoline 3 in vapor ‘is see ca os end et

i

ES
:
a

:
-
4
a
-
2

Geology and Natural History. 373

Il. Geotocy AND NaturAL History.

1. The Hassler Expedition. Tornocaris Peircei.—In a letter to
Prof. Peirce, dated Rio, Feb. 12, and recently published, Prof.

was dredged in 45 fathoms about 40 miles east of Cape Frio. It
is described as very like Serodis, with the marked difference, that
the thoracic rings are much more numerous, and the a domen

unmistakable and very striking, and that it can be referred to no
one of the orders or families in Milne Edwards’ or Dana’s classifi-
0

mal is eyi ently o f the Serolide, apparently congeneric,
perhaps specifically identical, with the Brongniartia trilobitoides
of Eights (Tra Ibany Institute, vol. ii, p. 53, pl. 1, 2, 1833),

anterior abdominal legs of the ordinary Serolid e 2
ry Serolide. pe
Seah in all other respects, however, leaves little doubt of the

affinity between Tomocaris and the Brongniartia of is
r ies refe to

1
Serolis, ‘there are several enera, distinct from the typical 4.
0 seascrag and that the species described by Eights represents one
these, although the name Brongniartia is preoccupied. ts
$. I. SMITH.
‘ 2. Discovery of the tusk of an Elephant in Colorado.— Concern-
lowi i 302, we have received the fol-
Techie note from Prof, Alfred P. Rockwell, dated Institute of
echnology, Boston, April 4.
b See in the April number of the Journal a notice of the error
y Capt. Berthoud of the tusk of an elephant near Golden, Colo-

374 Scientific Intelligence,

rounded pebbles, boulders, and sand ; it was arranged in distinctly
horizontal layers, and had not been disturbed since its original
deposition, It was a small patch preserved in a peculiar way

tusk. The exact elevation of the spot where the tusk was foun
is 5675 feet above the level of the sea, as determined by the rail

. -

is underlaid with sandstone, barren of fossils, that is ex *
the higher ground, and this water-worn débris, deeper

- On two new Ornithosaurians from Kansas ; by Epwanp D
Corr. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, pve
Ist, 1872.)—In this paper two species of Pterodactyls “te Pro-
scribed, which are identical with two of those described by

fessor Marsh in the last number of this Journal, pp. 241-247,

viz:

Geology and Natural History. 375

the names given by Prof. Marsh have pas
5. Preliminary Report of the U. 8. eological Survey of
Montana and portions of adjacent Territory, being a Jifth Annual

of Progress, p> Fe ¢ S. Geologist. Conducted
under the authority of the Secretary of the Interior. Washington,
1872.—This Report by Dr. Ha is one of unusual interest.

lowstone Geyser region, a part of which has appeared under his
name in this volume, besides notes on the geology along the route
from Ogden, Utah, to Fort Hall in Idaho, Fort Ellis in Montana,
and the Yellowstone ; and thence from Fort Ellis to Snake River
basin, Fort Hall, Bear River valley, and Evanston, on the Union
Pacific railroad ; and the text is illustrated by many sketches and
several maps.

Dr. Hayden’s special report is followed by a preliminary report
on the minerals, thermal waters, etc., by Dr. A. C. Peale. We
find in it that the siliceous deposit of the springs (geyserite, a
variety of opal) afforded in one analysis, silica 83°83, water 11°02,

loride of magnesium 4°00=98°85; the specific gravity was

thickest to the north; it is one of the largest and best coal mines
im the west. Dr. Peale’s brief report is followed by other reports
as follows:

On the Agricultural Resources of the Territories, by Prof.
Cyrus Thomas; on the fossil Flora, Cretaceous and Tertiary, by
L. Lesquereux; on the Geology and Paleontology of the Creta-
ceous Strata of Kansas, by E. D. Cope; on the Vertebrate Fossils

Bila eek; besides zoological reports, on e worms, by
eidy, on Coleoptera, by Dr. G. on Henin ra, by P.
Uhler, on Orthoptera, by P Thomas, on Butterflies, by

rof. C.
- H. Edwards, on Reptiles and Fishes, by E. D. Cope; a cata
logue of plants, by Prof, T. C. Porter; and of the Mosses, by
0

the region, by J. W. Beaman, The volume contains thus a very
large contribution to our knowledge of the physical features and
condition, the geology, and Savaeey
of the Rocky Mountain region. sti.
Dana’s Mineralogy. Appendix to the Fifth Edition. pee
and iv pages, 8vo.—An appendix to the last edition of Dana’s
Mineralogy has just been issued by the publishers, J. Wiley & Son
of New York. “It: has’ heen prepared y Professor G. J. BrousH.

oe

376 Scientific Intelligence.

during the past four years since the Mineralogy was published, and
also notices of some important facts regarding a few o i

The place of each new species in the system is shown b iving
it a number corresponding to the position in the series, 19 of the
so-called new species belong to the group of sulphides, arsenides,

silicates; 23 hydrous silicates; 2 tantalates and columbates; 14
phosphates, arsenates, etc.; 3 orates ; 4 tungstates, molybdates,
vanadates ; 5 sulphates, chromates; 1 carbonate ; 1 oxalate; 7 car-
ohydrogen compounds.
7. Bentham, Revision of the genus Cassia, (From Trans, Linn,
Soc., xxvii). Read March, 1869. Printed May-July, 1871. 4to,
pp. 503-591, with 4 plates.—The earlier pages of this monograph

ical affinity and geographical habitation mutually throw bi Fs
h i

a,
“phenomena which may be shortly summed up as a general ditfu-
sion of uniform primary types, with more or less of divergence

munity of descent.” ‘To anyone who would see with what. good
account this principle may be recognized and employed i a
hands of a naturalist who is completely familiar with the kno
facts, we commend the present brief discussion. : bythe
Three sub-genera are admitted, and these are recognizable by
flower as well as by the fruit. The first, Wistwla, has only ps
admitted species; the second, Senna, over 160; the third,
rhegma, about the same number. After vast pameigr
Bentham has still to recognize 1338 species. One from A
Am.

bs : * er
C. Covesti Gray, in Proceed. cad., vii, p. 399, has beac
1 a su ts

looked, naturally enough, as it was out of place in ip PP er

tributed
ssors of
large herbari Neder ti the
€ may here enumerate synoptically the species cargo the
United States—all of them’ on the Atlantic side, or all ah
Mexican frontier. One or two of them have not actually bee
found within our territorial limits.

Geology and Natural History. 377

Of the Senna sub-genus,—known by the pods never opening
elastically, the seeds on slender stalks, and the shoal ue of the
anthers glabrous—we have at most fourteen species,

I, With short and turgid pod, no gland on base of ag (all
exano-Mexican species), and
(1.) A single pair of leaflets,
eu 0. ey? Gray: very dwarf; leafiets linear, and peduncle one-
ow pe
riana Scheele: less dwart; leaflets lanceolate, smooth-
ish, ag Sdhanils few-flowere
; O. bauhinioides Gray: dwarf; leaflets it and ovate-oblong,
owny.
(2.) Two or more pairs of Silas high leaflets: soft-downy plants,
2 feet high or

C. Covesit Gray (omitted by Beuthia am, ee almost certainly C.
crotaluriodes Kunth): with 2 or 3 pairs of leaflets, and pubescent

ardly an inch long.

CU. Lindheimeriana Scheele: with 5 or 6 pairs of leaflets, and
a longer pod.

C. eee L. aerate on our southern borders: has 4 or
5 pairs of ovate or ovate-lanceolate acuminate ee and thickish-

inches

sessile a clusters, and a broadish linear flat pod, 3
ng.
(a. ligustrina L., a West-Indian species. of this group, with

n ore termin y
smooth ast; 3 or 4 inches long, we still suppose is wrongly
nited States. We have, stad cultivated ie.
said to come from Louisiana and Texas, of C. levi,
ct known, in flower, by the fewer leaflets, with guste between

(2.) No gland on the petiole, one between each pair of leaflets or
he

v oC. Tor a L., to which is joined C. obtusifolia L., the common
merican form: annual herb, ics oe three pair

h nen mensis Mill., which occurs on the Florida page ens
as been referred to C. angustisiliqua Lam. (which is a form o

378 Scientific Intelligence,

the next): shrub, with three to five pairs of oblong leaflets, a gland
between the lower pair; anthers all beakless

flora L., :
the Mexican frontier: shrub, with 3 to 8 pairs of oblong leaflets,
and the tips of two or three of the lower anthers prolonged into a
slender beak.
(3.) No gland either between the leaflets or on petiole,

. Wislizeni Gray, of Arizona: shrub, with 4 to 7 pairs of v
small, coriaceous, obovate leaflets, large flowers, and linear flat
pod, 3 or 4 inches long.

the Lasiorhegma sub-genus—the pods of which open elasti-
cally, and the sutural lines of the anthers are mostly woolly-pubes-
cent—our representatives are all of the Chamecrista section.

Sub-section Xerocalyx, so well marked by its rather rigid and
striate, many-nerved sepals, has one tropical species, which has
advanced into Texas, viz: ;

C. calycioides DC., which is No. 2036 of Berlandier’s collection,
found on the banks of the Rio Medina.

Sub-section Leiocalyx, with thin sepals not striate, affords the
following :

(1.) Leaflets only 4 to 6 pairs: flowers rather large.

C. Wrightii Gray, from Arizona: wholly glabrous, low, from
woody perennial root-stock: veins of the narrowly-oblong leaflets
nearly simple and inconspicuous. ; a

. grammica Spreng., a West Indian species, of which we fi
specimens from Key West: diffuse, soft-pubescent throughout; |
the slightly inequilateral-oblong or cuneate-oblong and rather
coriaceous leaflets lineate with the strong pinnate veins. _ :

'. Greggit Gray, from Tamaulipas province, at some distance
south of the Rio Grande: a rigid, shrubby species, with reticulate
veins to the coriaceous leaflets.

(2.) Leaflets 8 to 20 pairs. : ae

C. nictitans L.: a widely-diffused annual, extending north oe
New England, known by its small and subsessile flowers, wi
sa 5 (or at most 6) anthers, . 2 Peper er

Chameerista L., of about the same geographical praie
i southe

and even more variable, is an annual. or in some sout

cinereous Texan forms, with the veining inconspicuous or obscure,
of which Lindheimer’s 239 (coll. 2) is the most remarkable. on
- procumbens L, (Herbarium, and of the Spec. Pl. in p®
only the C. chameeristoides of ‘Colladon), a LOW ee
tescent species, of tropical America, and, if rightly }
or sout.

C. procumbens: in his mono h he mentions the grr |
‘+ procumbens as seemingly a rather larger variety, wit vai
stipules and flowers, and longer pedicels, and cites the latte

Geology and Natural History. 379

less jg; mabe A synonym of the Texan species, whatever it be,
is Buckley, in Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Dec.,

their light and most abundant pollen is correlated to this, and
the structure of the fertile inflorescence is such that the pollen
reaches the very orifice of the ovule. In Yew and Cypress, and
in other if not all other genera of the sub-orders they represent,
Delpino finds that, at the time when the ovule is ready for fecun-

as to its appearance, function, and re-absorption, to his late vener-
able townsman, Vaucher, and is described in his Physiology of the
ys of Europe, published in 184

likely ind
this “A ependent. | ‘Gakage! i ally constructed on dichoga-

380 Scientific Intelligence.

sect agency, one group only is anemophilous, namely the Artemisi-
as above indicated. Fro

h
Yet characters of this sort, standi in inti
; icters ort, standing as they must in intimate
ores with the well being and continuance of the species, will
doubtless prove to be of real classificatory value, and be turned to

produced Jva ; this, the Ambrosineous genera, and from Ambrosia
through Franseria to Aanthium, our troublesome cockle-bur. —
; 6

9. J. Miller, on the Cyathium of Euphorbia.—The mono-
grapher of Luphorbiacece (Huphorbia excepted) in De Candolle’s
Prodromus, has discussed this question in the Flora for Feb. 1],

B
@
5
eo
Rn
S
A
}
=)
ct
a
—
Rn
m
|
SS,
ia")
ie)
a
i]
=)
Qu
px]
ia")
ie)
°
ve
Su
®
or)
°
5
oO
®
P4
4!
ia)
=
:
=%
&,
Ee
3

set fruit, but failed to mature it. That of ZL. Davuricum fertilized
by the pollen of L. bulbiferum matured well, but to the surprsé
of the observer, it formed the long capsule of LZ. bulbiferv
arabe! the short one of the species. The experiment should be
epeated, as it doubtl ill be i i t - Og ee
ik fei ess will be in the — page imate
schen Anordnung: Ein Abriss der vergleichenden Geographic 4

nzen. Leipsic, W. Engelmatin, 1872. 2 vols. 8v0.—

Geology and Natural History. 381

sketch of the earth’s Vegetation in its relations to Climate or
Comparative Geography of Plants, upon which Prof. Grisebach
of Géttingen has long been occupied, has just reached us, and ma
hereafter receive the further report which this elaborate treatise
deserves, especially if Ney cg hes translation which has been
called for should appear. The work is strictly a geography of
lants, and it treats of the ajinatc an at of the twenty-
our regions into which the author divides the rth, so that it is
upon a plan wholly different Bois Alphonse DeCandolle’ s —
A.

12, Mr. Ravenel’s interesting notice of the Arrangement we
Morphology of the Leaves A Laptisia perfoliata, m set forth by
the present writer in the December number of this Journal, is
reprinted here, as well as in ie Annals and Mscuaine of Natura
History ; and ‘the perusal brings to our view an abominable mis-
print, which makes utter nonsense of the last ieeype af the
penultimate paragraph, to be corrected as follow

Correction.—In vol. ii, No. 12, p. 463, in ee 11, fox -¢ fasion”
read torsion ; line 12, for “ adopting * read adapti: ng ; ; So that t
sentence will read: “in the torsion of the axis and the distri
tion of the stomata, adapting me foliage to its vertical position”

corrected. Cam mbridge, 1872. Published by B. Pickman Mann.—

is m , With corrections and a few additions,
of the Catalogue known familiarly as “ Mann’s Exchange List,

‘h has been of great service to all collectors of American
plants. Since the running numbers have not been changed, it will
be possible to use the old and the new editions interchangeably.
The “ typographical and other errors,” which have been found and
corrected, are over one hundred and fifty, and Mr. Mann, in his
Prone, renews his brother’s request that persons using the .
ogue would send him notice of all errors discovered

14. Illustrated Catalogue of the ao Comparative Zo-
dlogy.” ypplement to the Ophiuri oa Astrophytide ;
Trropore Lyman .—(Concluded from page 225.) @ part, of

(p. 50).
excuse my answering it at greater length than its somewhat
terse” language—to use i

382 Scientific Intelligence.

t part of my note reads as follows: “ Though highly
valuing the great care with which Mr. Lyman’s ‘Catalogue’ is
worked up, and fully acknowledging its great scientific import-

nce, I cann me the unreasonab er in which he
upholds the (fictitious) rights of priority of authors before Linné
Thus Astrophyton muricatum (Lmk. ostosum,

is ed A.
because it is thus named by Seba (!); Ophiothrix Jragilis (Abgd.)
gives way to O. rosula (Linck); Ophioderma lacertosa (Lmk.) to
Ophiura levis (“ Stella levis /) (Rondelet); Ophiura texturata
(Lmk.) to Ophioglypha lacertosa (Linck),—it is quite another

set : th Mr. N ;

name to A. muricatum (Lmk.) is the more useless, because the

Euryale costosa of Lamarck is, as pointed out by Mr. Lyman him

self, a West Indian species, different from A. muricatum and from
g ”

prehension of my proposition) “I may say, that Linnzeus first con
trived what is called binomial nomenclature, in which each animal
has two names—the generic and the specific. Consistency is the
first duty of a naturalist, therefore it was the first duty of the fol-

. e 8 i T
tainly apply that name to the West Indian species to bp It
belongs. Did not Seba, more than a century ago, publish a fine

ames
given after the introduction of the binominal system of nomencla
t. .
us consult, e. g., “The Revised Rules of Zodlogical Nome
clature, adopted by the British Association in 1865 (wit
by A. E. Verrill, 1869), p. 6:*
* This Journal, II, vol. xlviii.

Geology and Natural History. 383

confined to the binomial system of nomenclature, or that which
indicates species by means of two Latin words, the one generic,

pelled to go a little further back, i.e. to the “ Museum Tessinia-
num,” 1758,
lished.] “Previous to that period naturalists were wont to indicate

ought not, therefore, in any instance to supersede the bino al
by Linn Nothi

designations imposed geus.”” can be more true,
more , more decisive, than this argumentation, and
yman’s eloquence falls completely to the ground before it A

sS=
—
=

: ve, he will—* consistency being the first duty of

4 naturalist ’—be obliged to maintain their first part | , tto-
“a, Bellis) as true generic, their second half as specific denomi-

nations. Instead of this, Mr. Lyman, in a quite arbitrary manner,

1n some instances prefers the first (pseudo-generic) to the secon
(pseudo-specific) part of the need

Ophiothriz rosula, ;

Consequence of the practice advocated by Mr. by™

Spreads confusion and capriciousness in nomenclature. I have
oubt, therefore, that it will be universally disapproved ; but I

thon; ht it right, nevertheless, to protest against it, to prevent, if

possible, younger naturalists from being induced to take it up.

384 Scientific Intelligence.

The rule is very simple: the priority of a specific name can not be
sought in works in which the binominal system of nomenclature is

go

<

ro)

°.

oy

ee

5

gg

©

<

oO
2 J 5° 3

ba} i) ° ¢

o = B ” ae

—,

dQ.

S

Lod

ea Pee 3 Though :
* Respecting these substitutions I wrote as follows (Addit. iii, p. 69): remarks
T have perhaps myself occasioned this substitution of names through py wasthe
(I. c. p. 31) on the application of the name Ophiura, I am now not pn ae gents
right thing to be done. When Forbes and Miiller and Troschel divi , 4
Ophiura (Ag.), they ought certainly to have left this name with the
but as they did no such thing, and Forbes limited and defined his genus
in a perfectly correct manner, as did Miille

nm conveniently used as a collective designa
s bbe

undefined or undefinabie (i. e. many fossil) species.

”»

Geology and Natural History. 385

followed by Mr. ‘foes and, I faite by all American authors,*
is prejudicial, because it will tempt vain men—and many good
men are vain, naturalists not the least—to create a host of unn

cessary new genera or generic denominations, with the evident or
secret intention to make an easy harvest of rigor, to which their

practice is clinging to the well-established rule, that the name of
the author who first established and published a species shall
remain with it, may the generic ch gree asi be changed or not—a
rule adopted, T believe, by m f the European authors who
have paid any attention to this ae question of nomenclature,
and without exception by all Scandinavian naturalists.t The
ractice — which I thought it — to — is

rther only capable of — confusion and loss
ret enough, Mr. his allies defend their cause
by ar hat “ cain leedient is a system of exact registra-
tion ;” aes true, but for the very cause of “exact registration” it

is absolutely necessary that the ced is referred at once to the
author who first published the species, and not to him who after-

different thing in view. I shal give an example that will, 1 hope
act as an “argumentum ad hominem.” Tf I am right (as I think
I am) in reducing the new genera, Ophio , Ophiomitra and

o be
Ophiacantha vicaria (Lym .), valida (Lym.) and sertata (Lym.),
“orden ig the reader to consult the works of Mr. Lyman to

these animals; if, according to Mr. Lyman, they a re written
hiocnemis eacdotica Ltk., Ophiacant. ‘eieaeha lik, etc., the
— student will ‘ am et oleum perdere” in finding out

where in the world Me Liitken had anything to do with these

* In regard to this point Dr. Liitken is quite mistaken, for Brora American natu-
ralists cope —— Ae still do, in all case : 3, write the na e of the original de-
scriber of the species. See for examples rof. Dana * Reports on the Zoéphytes
_ Saker of the U. S. Exploring Eepeacen, 1846-1852; numerous papers by

pson; most of the soblopicel publications of the Smithsonian Institution,
— Prof. Dana’s works, the name of the original describer of the species is
“aan. in — esis. Others do this when the synonymy is not given m
: € species.—Eps.
+ Not all of these, however, age the —s of authority in parenthesis when the
eric name has been cha anged; Lovén, Sars, i etc., usually add, in bl
renthesis, the name - the old genus, writing, e.g. Triton ium reticulatum (Pleurot-
oma) Brown, Ophiactis Balli (Ophiocoma) Tho! etc.
Am. Jour. Sc1.—Tump Series, VoL. III, No. 17.—Mar, 1872.
25

386 Scientific Intelligence.

of this gentleman being of course put in parenthesis, to indicate
that his original generic denomination has been changed. The
“ .

same time reminded of its discovery.” ‘Therefore it is recom
mended that the authority for a specific name, when not applying
to the generic name, should be expressed thus: (Linn.) as

7

nus crinitus (Linn.
he

mollusks on the character of their shells,” he would no -_
have been more just in comparing a classification of the Op

Sal bia oe sealant cele a eek | ae

?
classifications established in Mammalia, Ophidia, Gaster ;
rthropoda, ete., on the teeth or other “or barva —_
fications which are, to say the least, generally esteemed as to pe :
‘ble approximations to an “ expositi ature.” The
system

Mery enV ese Mae ee

tion :
—some naturalists will tell us that such a thing 4

exist—will only be finally found when all genera (recent ams

future communications from Mr, Lyman about the
researches on the Ophiuride in the European museums ! —
Copenhagen, Dec., 1871. CHR.
15. Additional Note on the Rules of None fei

t © ;
that he is one of those “ American authors” who believe
practice the custom of writing the name of the aap for
gave the correct binomial name to a species, as the aut see
that particular name. It seems fitting, therefore, to give? to
the arguments in favor of this practice (by no means C0
American authors), as briefly as possible :

first

Pua er he
Ge: epee Lp

Geology and Natural History. 387

be connected with the attachment of a man’s name to a species, 1s
of little or no account; but if it were of more importance, justice
i h

who have, like Linné, Lamarck, Fabricicus, and many others,
described vast numbers of species under useless or artificial general
f

and understand, are not deserving of m
later systematists, who by a prolonged and careful study of the
anatomy have shown their true structure, and have thus arranged |
them in natural groups, and so brought them properly into the
“domain of science.”

3d. As to the matter of convenience, or saving of time, it seem

for the same specific name may occur many times. Thus, if any
one not | egrneomd familiar with conchological literature undertakes
or instance, the Genera of Recent Mollusca, by H. & A.

€ . .
has met with similar inconvenience and loss of time in using this
work, Th
“Check Lists of Shells,” constructed on the same plan, find the

© do poor or hasty work for the sake of perpetuating their names

48 “authorities.” we have found that the actual result 1s just ais
oer")

upon such a pore than the certainty that, if he makes a

mistake in hastily describing a species, before h
its true stracture. sen pelacsone is name will drop into the ob-

*

388 Scientific Intelligence.

scurity of erroneous synomyms? What can be more encouraging —
to one of that class of persons than the certainty that if he names
and describes a species, no matter how poorly, or in what false
relations, or under what wrong genus, his name must nevertheless
always remain attached to it? ‘The effect of the “ American” cus
tom is certainly to induce naturalists to attach more importance to
the study of the structure and true relations of species, and less to
mere descriptions of new species. And in this country, where any
naturalist can easily obtain at least 50 new species in an excursion
of a single day, this is of much consequence for the future progress
of the science. |
16. New Zoélogical Periodicals.*—No less than three zodlogical —
periodicals have lately made their appearance, and judging

S ic
adds a purely zodlogical archive to its list, edited by Professor a
Selenka. The first number contains a tolerably complete embry:
ology of one of the naked Gasteropods by Selenka, and a long paper
by C. K. man on the anatomy of Echinoderms; aa

re excellently illustrated. Professor Selen
issue his Niederlandische Archiv fiir Zodlogie whenever
material is at hand ; he solicits articles either in German,

or English. :
17. Hast India Crustaceans. On Indian and Malayan i

the Asiatic Society of Bengal. The

* Archives de Zoologie Expérimentale et Générale. Sous la Direc
caze iers. Paris—Niederlindische Archiv fiir Zoologie a pa
Em. Selenka. Haarlem—Leipzig.—Journal de Zoologie par Paul Gervais

Astronomy. 389

skidld, of Stockholm, Sweden, to sell one of the celebrated Green-
land meteorites lately found by him. This meteorite weighs
10,000 Ibs, and the price is $12,500 in gold. He has a few other
large specimens, adapted to public collections, of smaller size.
Specimens of any desired size may be obtained for private collec-
tions at $8.00 per pound or 75 cents per ounce.

Ill Astronomy.

u arge number of persons have ;
consult these tables with great interest, and we trust the Commis-

sioner of Agriculture will reconsider his decisiou respecting the
publication of these tables.

Auroral displays in the United States in the year 1871.

Jan. 3, 6, 7. 10, 13, 16, 18, 19, 20, 23, 29, otal 11 days.
eb. 3, 10, 11, 12, 18, 15, 16, 20, 21, 22, 24, 26, 27, « DB «
bee, 1,2, 3,0: 10,1 , 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, ye ae
Wet 1,5, % 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 29, « 16 «
Tao 1: 7,8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, « 1 «
June, 4,7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 28, 24, 26, 30, Fe
duly, 7, 8, 10, 20, 21, 32, 24, 36, 28. Ge ee
Aug. 5,9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, i ee me
Sept. 1,2, 4, 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 18, 14, 17, 30, s wos
Get. 2, 4, 6, 7, 10, 13, 14, 15; 16, 17, 18, 19, 24, 25, 30, a Bs
Nov. 1, 2,3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 20, 21, 28, 25, Oe er ta
ce. 1,8, 9, 10, 12; 13, 14, 16, 18, 28, 25, 28, “6 on
Total for the year 1871, na

The following is a summary of the Smithsonian observations for
the past three years:
Jan.|Feb.|Mar.|April.|May.|June.|July.|Aug.|Sept.|Oct.| Nov.| Dee.
ame, 35 Fart Marne enya SR OFS" | 1
ooo | ae pas a1 (23 | 14 | 20] 19] 31) 2 4 12 | 170
S71, | 11-13] 15 | 16 | 17 17 | 9| 13| 18 | 15110 | 1
_.The correspondence of these results with the number of —
visible on the sun’s surface is quite noticeable. The disturba
of the sun’s surface attained its maximum in 1870, and is now Tap

Year.

idly declinin Santen ber of auroras visi-
a g. It is anticipated that the num! av om
ble in the United States in iabieniens years will exhibit a similar
decline, ; ER L.

390 Scientific Intelligence.

the results of observations of the zodiacal light at Rio Janeiro
and at various places upon the high plateaus of the interior of
Brazil. Mr. Liais finds that the light is visible as far as the antic
solar point of the heavens. Polariscopic observations have not
enabled him to discover any trace of polarization.
aid of the spectroscope, and has found that it gives a s
apparently continuous, though, perhaps, containing dark lines.
These results would indicate that the light is derived from the

e ee
acal light, its gaseous condition being a result of its proximity 0

The observations of Janssen during the recent solar pies
of interest here, as confirming the polarization of the corona, #
showing that it emits light giving a continuous spectrum a
the solar dark lines. ; |

supe me
the spectrum of the zodiacal light, as, if the latter is really prec
uous, it would be extremely feeble when observed with an! Be

through the sun. This observation was
the same party, wh t +i aha

the dark bands distinctly. On the following nah waght he

was visible but less brilliant than before, and Secchi t ‘a age

detected faint bands on viewing it with a Savart, but those

: : ition to the
sure of his obse These results are in opposition ¢

rvation. ‘ther from
of M. Liais, and indicate that the light is reflected, either

Astronomy.

ter in such a condition that its particles are small compared with
gas, or

from matter capable of giving specular reflection. It is not im-
ssible indeed that the light consisted of portions reflected in
th modes, the relative proportions of polarized and unpolarized

Willard, Phillips, und Mahoney, denen sich der als gewandter
Dr. C. A. Yo

known as an experienced spectroscopist, and . , to
whose charge the photographic department was ¢ te

sented by M. Delaunay to the Institute of France. The Rev.
- Webb laid them before the Royal Astronomical Society,
where the report and the photographs were discussed at length at
the meeting of November 12, 1869. :
enry Morton, President
Stevens Institute of Technology, Hoboken, New Jersey.
4. Aurora of February 4th.—This aurora, particular account of
which is given by Prof. Twining at page 273 of this volume, was
Seen at Suez and also at Bombay. a
It was also observed at the Cape of Good ag as announced in
the following account by E. J. Stone of the yal nde epapngd
at the Cape, dated Feb. 19, copied from Wature of April 4.

392 Scientifie Intelligence.

aurora of a very unusual splendor for the latitude was seen here
on Sunday evening, February 4, 1872. The sky, extending in
i ie Ss

could be most distinctly traced. The streamers extended at about
nine o’clock to the constellation Orion, and Sirius was well within

here in October, 1870, but no such aurora as that of February 4,
1872, appears to have been visible for at least fifty years. 1
aurora was well seen over a large portion of the colony, and com
siderably frightened the natives. oe
5. A New Planet (118).—Dr. R. Luruer has discovered a minor —
planet (118), Peitho, at Bilk.
M. T. at Bilk. a
1872. es eee ihe Se : a
March 15, 14 18 59°6 R.A. = 12 7 26-73 N.P.D. = 79 42 335
An observation made by Dr. Tietjen, at Berlin, is as follows:
M. T. at Berlin. . 6 Roe
1872. hy mi. 8 11 phe tea 90 461
March 21, 9 33 23 R.A. = 12 1 36:36 N.P.D.= ce HE a
The daily motion obtained from these observations is in a
in N '45". The planet is of the eleven 4

— 608-6, and in _— .
magnitude.— Atheneum, March 30, 1872.

. .

IV. MiscenLanrous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE.

Siti
1. Topography of the Punjab Oil Region ; by BENJAMIN OM"
Mi ing sis : pp. 4to. (From the Trans. — 3

Phil. Soc., vol. Xv, p. 1.)—The oil of this region, according t0 4 o

on the oil. le
The oil has been bored upon at Gunda, and at first sity

five months), the daily yield was less than ten gallons.
region, oil flows also at five other places from natt f it as
from a gill to three quarts a day, and there are traces 0 a

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 393

half a dozen places where there are small traces of one or the
other, enough to attract notice in the minute examination of the
country by its inhabitants. About half of all the places are in
the northeastern corner of the region; about half toward the
southwestern corner; and one or two in the northwestern corner
toward the middle.

The Aluggud oil (now dried to asphalt) seems to have come
other things would rather show that they were of later age. If
they are Carboniferous, then the nummulitic rocks are wanting
above them, and have thinned completely away from a thickness
of 2,000 feet; only thirty miles distant. This oil is also the only
case of oil outside of the older Tertiary rocks anywhere In the
whole region.

All the other oil springs or shows of oil in the southern part
of the region, are on the northern side of the Salt Range, and in
the nummulitic limerock or close above it. The northern ones
are either in the nummulitic lime rock of the Choor Hills, the same
probably as that of Salt Range; or in the Gunda rocks (chiefly
sandrocks) that lie south of them, also accompanied by num-
mulites,

In every case the oil seems to come from a depen of very small
horizontal extent, sometimes only a few feet, seldom as much as

the oil comes from a much smaller thickness of rock, from fort

Scarcely do any two oil springs come from the same bed o age
The oil is dark green in color, and so heavy as to mark 25° of
Beaumd’s scale, or even less, ‘The Gunda oil has been burned 3
little by the natives with a simple wick, resting on the side of an
flam

highly prized forty years ago by the natives as medicine, taken in
Pills, especially eg BE i es Tt was carried far and —
and was called “negro’s fat,” because it was enerally believ
o have dripped from the brain of a negro that ad been hung up
by the heels before a slow fire.

394 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

It is perhaps needless to say that there is nothing whatever in
the mode of occurrence of the Punjab oil, to uphold the chimeri-
cal belief that rock oil ever passes by distillation, emanation, or
otherwise, from one set of rocks to another, or that it originates in
any different rocks from those in which it is found; and nothi .
to show that it has been formed by any other method than the —
very natural and sufficient one of the slow decomposition of
organic matter, deposited along with the other materials of the —
rock, Neither is there anything to show that the oil has been
driven by the upward pressure of water, from the lower parts of

i is wea ee

numerous in some regions along the tops of rock saddles, the
reason is clear, that the oil-bearing bed lies too deep for boring —
conveniently elsewhere.

the spirit of a Chinese traveller in those days. I

ing-yuen was at the time the junior member of the *m
Commission despatched from Pekin to accompany the Lewé
delegation in 1801. : right

“The sailors came to us to-day, to say that it was er
time to sacrifice to the Heh-kao or Kuro-siwo, i. e the ne
Sewer; and it appears from the account of Wang, 2 fore ee
to Lewchew, that it was the practice when the vessel ree :
Kuro-siwo, to throw a live sheep and a pig into it to po
the god, and then to scare him by drawing up the guard :

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 395

Tiao-yu tia we know that the god resides there and then worship
him out at sea, by throwing a live sheep and pig overboard, burn-
ing some silk and pourin i
the guard” The whole of to-day two vessels were seen some
scores of miles ahead of us.*

and 51°22°
46-01°, 46°66° and 47°12°); the extreme variation in the annual
temperature is therefore here 5°70 degrees.

‘he extreme range of the thermometer at Boston in the 47 years,
was 114 degrees, from 100° on July 11th, 1825, to 14 below zero
on February 8th, 1861. The greatest sudden change was a fall of
60° in 18 hours, from 46° at one p. m. of February 7th, 1861, to

4, Climate of the Post-tertiary, or Quaternary, after the Glacial
era.— The April number of Woodward’s excellent “Geological
Magazine,” contains an important article on the post-glacial climate
of Britain, by 8. V. Wood, Jr., ini ng
presented, that there was a second period of cold in the Quater-
na i

ing article, argues that the warm-climate quadrupeds may have
been pre-glacial. But various facts bear against this view.
* Mr Williams adds the following note: ‘ sng that
This notice of the Great Pacific Gulf Stream is interesting as showing
Chinese and Japanese navigators had both noticed it and given it the same ed
; - Black Sewer, which has

Tes Son why
Rothing about the Kuro-siwo, and constantly affirm that there is none.

396 Miscellaneous Intelligence. ”
5. Colorado Fxpedition.—Major Powx11 has returned from the é
cafions of the Colorado, having left his party in the field in charge
of Professor Thompson. Since the party started in April last, it has
passed through the caiions of Green River and the cafions of the
Colorado, to the mouth of the Paria, at the head of Marble Caion,
ere the major left his boats for the winter, and he expects tore
turn as soon as there is a favorable stage of water, and embark for
the second trip through the German Cafion. a
Jn the way down the party explored the region to the west of —
the Green and Colorado, tracing the courses of the larger streams —
emptying into the two great rivers to their sources in the Wahsatch —
Mountains and Sevier Plateau, and examined the geology of the —
great mesas and cliffs. o
Early in the winter a base-line 47,000 feet in length was meas —
ured ona meridian running south from Kanab, and the party 8
now engaged in extending a system of triangles along the clifls —
and peaks among lateral cafions of the Colorado. 1a
During the past season the party has discovered many more

> *

among the monntains to the west. Stone implements, gee
basket-ware, and other articles were found buried in some of e
ruins. .

north of Cuba, and back to New York

command of Capt. Giraud, and, in accordance with
received, he made lines of soundings

of the voyage, of the direction and velocities of the ees ie
of the temperatures at the several depths obtained, deo
. . ious ce

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 397

8 at 5 ’
temperatures reappear. I trust that hereafter much attention will
: : gee

be given to this point.
‘The conclusion at which Professor Draper has arrived, from a

careful examination of the results obtained, is that there exists, all .

over the bottom of the Atlantic and Caribbean Sea, a stratum of

n fro

that there is a general movement of the lower waters of the

Atlantic toward the equator, and a corresponding flow of the
surface-waters toward the poles.” ;

It should be here added that this movement of the oceanic
waters was long since advocated by the meteorologist, Wm. C.
Redfield, of New York.

7. Public Aquarium at Naples.—Antox Doran gives, in Wature
of April 4, an account of th great a uarium in process of erec-
tion at Naples under his direction, besides discussing some of the
objects which science may gain from it. The building 1s rectan-
gular, measuring 100 feet by 70, with a height of 40 feet, and is

long, 10 broad and 34 deep, another, 26 feet long, and twenty-six
rs ished with a co

8. Corrected longitude results across the North American Conti-
nent. Note from G. W. Dran (April 8, 1872).—Soon after the
paper relating to the “U. S. Coast Survey Longitud
tions across the Continent” had been printed in the December
number of this Journal,* it was discovered that the corrections for

* This Journal, II, ii, 447.

~

~

898 Miscellaneous L intelligence.

‘
personal equation had inadvertently been mkt = to the longitude
results, with the wrong algebraic sign. The following longitude
results are therefore printe

Difference of | Personal Corrected Probable
Stations. longitude. equation. difference of errors.

a longitude

8. h. m. 8.
Camb. to Omaha, 1 39 15°159 —'130 1 89 15°029' £008
“ to Salt Lake, 2 43 4°257 -— ‘110° 2 43 4147 +008
Omahato “ 1 3 49°081 +°020 1 3 497101 +008
Camb. toS.Fr’ nCisCo, 3 a5 7260 +070 .3 25 7330 +007
Omaha to 1 45 52°094 +200 1 45 52:294 +010

Salt Lake to “ 0 42 3°:024 +°180 0 42 3°204 +008

9. A Contorted Halo ; by H. W. Parker. atcapey es
A aa ear prismatic ‘effect in a cloud, was visible at Amhe
Mass., 11 , March Ist. A large, white sheet of Pees ;
at its ‘dosibly lobed end near the sun, exhibited bright spectrum —
colors in bands of very irregular breadth, several times repo
and flexed in zig-zag curves, accordant with the structure :
outline of the mass. The beautiful iridescence covered nearlya —
third of the cloud, and the bands were bent far back on them
selves, some of them even twice, with nothing of the figure of cir -

ar . Os. :

. Logan Chair of Geology in W Gill University, Montreal— : |

Sir William E, Logan has recently given $18,000, in addition to the — |
sum of $2,000 before contributed by him, toward endowing the o
chair of geology in M’Gill College. Princ cipal Daves under ah
|

|

|

.

orth are not yet perfected, will be announced in the next number |
of this Journal. x
British Association.—The next meeting of this Association, a
ee gy Sata tet nd, will be held at Brighton, and will co ommenc?
Wednesday, poe ‘14th of August. Dr. Wm. B. Carpenter is pres a
dent for the yea ian |
13. Annual Reaties of the Board of Regents of the Smith a
Institution Jor 1870. 494 pp. 8vo. Washington, 1871.— Th

>
S
ot
a
=}
Rn
=
—
ZO
<
a
=I
&
oO
—
oO
><
a
2
:
Fe
E
°
ae
rd
Se

oO : on t
dentition of Helix turbiniformis, by T. Bland and W. pee? Binneys
on the Ascidea Manhattensis and Mammaria Manhattens's,

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 399

J. A. Telkampf; on the N. American Crustacea in the Museum of
the Smithsonian Institution, by Wm. Stimpson.
OBITUARY.
Samuet Frxtey Breese Morst.—Prof. Morse died at his

and introducing the system of electric telegraphy which bears his
r. Morse was the eldest son of Jedidiah Morse, D.D., an
Ww

usual term of human experience the first choice of Mr.
Morse after graduation was for the fine arts, which he pursued
in London in 1811 under Benjamin West the painter, in git

sculpture, his “ Dying Hercules,” which was crowned by the gold
medal of the Adelphi Society of Arts of London, being pa
a ationa

while yet abroad was elected
to the professorship of the literature of the arts of design in the
invention, which were undoubtedly long before slumbering in his
a discussion which took
place on board the packet-ship Sully in the autumn of 1832, while .
on his way to America, and then took on a more definite form ; and

* This Journal, I, xxiii, 185.

400 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

York, in the autumn of 1837. Failing to secure any enco
ment “frora the national government of hae own country toward
construction of an experimental line, in 1838 he in vain sought aid —
or protection of his rights as an inventor in Great Britain and—
France; and it was only after several years of disappointment and
poverty that he was gratified by the appropriation of $30,000 by
the U. 8. Congress (March 4th, 1843), for the purpose of encour
aging his first attempt to construct a line of tele egraph between
Washington city and Baltimore, a work which, after many difi- —
culties, he completed in 1844.

From that time to this the system of Morse has spread with
great rapidity, until it now reaches the remotest hamlets of the —

orth American continent, covering the whole land with its 7
mote nerves or iron, a nd com mmunicating with all the belie

eeinal investigations. He was emphatically an inventor, using —
the discoveries of science to carry out and perfect his inventions —
Gifted with a far-reaching mind, and indomitable energy, pee: ;
ferred in — 8 way a great blessing on the human race.
PicteT DELA Rive, the eminent Swiss physicist died at Geaens 3
on the ‘oth of Marek: at the age of sixty-tw 4
a sing lgebir: B. Geinitz. Zweiter Theil. Se
"e =e len, Soci sarep tina no + aati rg mit 6 Tafeln gears
nee ot Limulus polyphemus, by A. S. Packard, Jr. (Mem. Boston

flee Soc., Vol. s
Note sur les Pecnitaasbiiis “ei pera en 1868, avec Binet pour lei are
antérieurs de 1843 4 1867, ee xis Perrey, Prof. H a Faculté des

gs (Bull. Ac. Roy. de B ans Febr. 1870. «veg in this
s Oscillations des Cétes de France, by A. Delesse. Delesse Se eof Frante se
i el on the coast of Franc:

s for
the year 1871 by D D. Honeyman. 88 pp. 8vo. Halifax gon rivet
Descri tions of some new a of fossils, from the le ‘of the Hudson itl,
‘ eye a ‘ y es Hall. Publ blished October,

otes on some new or imperfectly known forms among the ae figures, :
James — Published March, 1871; reprinted with explanation iz
March, 18

> frei ‘of the Phage og ag found in - Cosecnet strata
E. D. Cope. (Proc. Am. Phil. en ., December, 1871.)
On the Families 3 Fishes of the Cretaceous of Kansas, by E. D. Cope

Soc.. January, 1872 <p (trans
4 Contributions to the Fenttgolegy of the Lesser Antilles, by E. D. Cope.
hi

Description of me ‘genus Protostega, a form of extinct weg g
_ fom Kansas and New Jersey, by E. D. Cope. (Proc. A =

AMERICAN

JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS.

[THIRD SERIES]

Art. LI—Brief Contributions to Zoology from the Museum of
Yale College. No. XX1.—The Early Stages of the American
Lobster (HomaRUS AMERICANUS Edwards); by S. I. SMITH.

taki
leaving it. Of the later stages, which connect the newly hatched

The specimens were all obtained in Vineyard Sound, or the
adjacent waters, during July, and were mostly taken at the
surface in the day-time, either with the towing or hand net.
They present three quite different stages in the true larval con-
dition, besides a later stage approaching closely the adult. The
exact age of the larve of the

third stage, here described, and the last, there is sian. an
res have

402 S. I. Smith—Early stages of the Lobster.

all been drawn from specimens preserved in alcohol, as there
was no opportunity for studying them while alive.
First Stage—The larve of the first stage observed

figures. The eyes are bright blue: the anterior portion an
the lower margin of the carapax and the bases of the legs are
speckled with orange; the lower margin, the whole of the
penultimate, and the basal portion of the ultimate segment of
the abdomen, are brilliant reddish orange. They are very
active; swimming about very much like the species of Myss

have the principal branch cylindrical, not flattened and ap a>
to the inner mouth organs as in the adult; the exognathus

: : as
maxillipeds are pediform, the endognathus as long 2
and much resembling the endopodi of the posterior legs, mie
the exognathus is like the — of all the legs, being.

i i hus
along the edges with long plumose hairs. e epignathus
i The rior thoracic legs, which 1

y Milne Ba
* To prevent confusion the terms here used are those proposed by pendages:
wards to designate the different branches of the cephalic and thoracic as ch (a8
. for the main branch of a leg; exopodus, for the accessory exognatl

fig. D); epipodus, for the flabelliform appendage (5); and endognathus,
and epignathus, for the correspondin

_

S. I. Smith— Early stages of the Lobster. 403

longer than the external maxillipeds. The pediform branch is,

owever, somewhat stouter than in the outer legs, and subcheli-
form. The legs of the second and third pairs (fig. D) are simi-
lar to the first but not as stout. The legs of the fourth and
fifth pairs are still more slender, and styliform at the extremity
as in the adult.

The exopodal branches of all the legs and of the external max-
illipeds are quite similar, and differ very little in size. In life,
while the animal is poised at rest in the water, they are carried
horizontally, as represented in figure B, or are curved up over the
carapax, sometimes so as almost to cover it. The cireu-
lates rapidly in these appendages, and they undoubtedly serve,
to a certain extent, as respiratory organs, as well as for locomo-
tion. By careful examination, small —— were found rep-

e Didninen! is slender, the second to the fifth segments
each armed with a large dorsal spine curved backward, and with
the lateral angles produced into long spines, and the si
segment with two dorsal spines. The proportional size and the
outline of the last segment is shown in figure B; its posterior
margin is armed with a long and stout central spine, and each
side with fourteen or fifteen plumose spines or setse, which are
articulated to the margin.

Second Stage.—In the next stage the larve have increased
somewhat in size, and the abdominal legs of the second to the
fifth segments have appeared. The rostrum is much broader,
and there are several teeth along the edges. The basal segments
of the antennule have become defined, and the secondary —
lum ‘has appeared but is not subdivided into segments.
antennz and mouth organs have undergone but slight changes.

he first thoracic legs are proportionately larger and stouter

* The number of branchi i ids, in the American lobster is
twenty on each side: A aiagis Sis Oke ae ae second maxilliped, three well-
ral maxilli

the
max w. en (Lectures on the Anatomy of

in als, 2d ed., p. 322) and Edwards (Hist. nat. des Crust, 1,
ie the whole number on each side as twenty-two, although Edwards
nd volume of the same work, under rus, p. 333,

404 S. L Smith—Early stages of the Lobster,

the branchial processes are distinctly lobed along the edges, and
ave begun to assume the form of true branchie. The seg-

or clothing of hairs or sete, The penultimate segment is s
without appendages.

Third Stage—In the third stage (pl. IX, figs. H, F, @) the
larvee are about half an inch (12 to 13™™) in length, and the
integument is of a much firmer consistency than in the earlier
stages, The antennule are still rudimentary, and considerably
shorter than the rostrum, although the secondary flagellum has
increased in length, and begins to show division into numer
ous segments. The antennz retain the most marked feature of
the early stages—the large size of the scale—but the flagellum
is much longer than the scale, and begins to show division
into segments. The mandibles, maxille, and first and second

verse articulation near its eeeanty, and both are ™ 4
except the outer edge of the outer lamella, with Jong P umos?

S. I. Smith—Early stages of the Lobster. 405

tip of the rostrum. The antennal scale is very much redu

The lateral angles of the second to the fifth abdominal seg-
ments are prolonged downward into long spiniform teeth, the

appendages of the penultimate segment are oval, and margined
with long plumose hairs. The terminal eek is nearly
quadrangular, as wide at the extremity as at the base, the pos
terior margin arcuate, but not extending beyond the prominent
lateral angles, and furnished with hairs like those on the
margins of the lamelle of the appendages of the penultimate

en
n this last stage, the young lobsters swim very rapidly

means of the abdominal legs, and dart backward, when disturbed,
with the caudal appendages, frequently jumping out of the water
in this way like A ep which their movements in the water
much resemble. They appear to be truly surface animals as 1n
the earlier stages, ree

From the dates at which the different forms were taken, it 18
probable that they pass through all the stages here described in
the course of a single season. How late the young, after reach-
ing the lobster-like form, retain their free-swimming habit was
Not ascertained,

406 J. J. Woodward—Nomenclature of Achromatic
EXPLANATION OF PLate IX.
Figure A. Lateral view of the larval young in the first stage observed, enlarged 10
diameters,

‘“ B. The same in a dorsal view, the abdomen held horizontally.
“ @. Antennula, enlarged 20 diameters,

exopodus; 6, epipodus; ¢. branchie.
‘“ E. Lateral view of the larval young in the third stage, enlarged 8 diametei
“‘ ¥. Terminal portion of the abdomen seen from above, enlarged 15 diame-

minal segment, enlarged 75 diameters. ;
“_ @. Basal portion of one of the legs of the second pair, showing the epipo-
dus and branche, enlarged 20 diameters.

Art. LIL—Remarks on the Nomenclature of Achromatic Ubjec-
tives for the Compound Microscope ; by Dr. J. J. Woopwarp,
U.S. Army.

For some years past, while most of the Continental opticians
have continued to give arbitrary designations to their achro-

Under these circumstances, it appears desirable to give some
account of the principles involved, and of the practical d he
ti be considered in their a plication, particularly et
microscopical text-books contain little or no information on
subject. In fact, the only scientific discussion of the me R
with which I am acquainted is the paper of Mr. Charles

Toss, “On the focal length of microscopic objectives. pet
nal of the Franklin Institute, June, 1870, p. 401). ‘This pa

' gives a b | | of

equivalent focal lengths, and furnishes some other vale a
ti j ee ei
refer more than once to this excellent Pane a

ave 10n to L .
which the reader would do well to examine in connection
the following remarks,

Objectives for the Compound Microscope. 407

the magnifying power, viz :
— a and & =m, in which fis the length of the focus

pp
br parallel rays, p the distance of the lens from the object, p’
its distance from the image, and m the true magnifying power,
that is, the size of the image divided by the size of the object;
p and p’ are termed the conjugate foci and are variable quan
tities; f is termed the principle focus, and has an unchangeable
value for each single lens. :
If now we combine the above equations, representing p +
or the sum of the conjugute foci by /, we may deduce the formula

i which represents in the case of any single convex

lens the relationship existing between the length of the rincl-
pal focus, the magnifying power, and the distance from the ob-
is f

ens m and / are given, the accuracy of the value of f resulting,
will be limited only by the degree of precision with whic

rated, in such a manner that the image of a micrometer should
be focussed upon a white sereen, using of course no eye-piece,
to measure the distance from the micrometer to the screen, to

A » m : .
many different values for fas there are distances , 108
of obtaining but one value for all distances as we do with a
Qgie lens,

408 J. J. Woodward— Nomenclature of Achromatic

Mr. Cross (loc. cit. p. 409) has already pointed out this cir-
cumstance which results from the fact that the modern achro-
matic objective has considerable thickness, from its anterior to
its posterior surfaces, and that it has properly speaking no true
optical center. He gives two examples, in one of which a
change of 5-24 inches in distance corresponded to a change of
‘0067 inch in calculated focal length; in the other a change of
6°10 inches in distance corresponded to a change of -0029 inch
in calculated focal length, the objectives used in the a
ment being uncorrected ths, so called. If, however, Mr.

had used for this purpose lower powers, or had made greater
variations in the distances employed, he would have found much
greater discrepancies. For example, by measuring the magni
fying power first at 25 and then at 50 inches, and deducing the
value of f by the formula of Mr. Cross, I obtained in two cases
the following equivalent focal lengths. For a so-called 1; inch,
at 50 inches distance, 1:2187 inches; at 25 inches distance,
1-2468 inches; difference (0271 inch. For a so-called }th, at 50
inches distance, 1982 inch; at 25 inches distance, ‘1893 inch;
difference 0089 inch.

Moreover, since the achromatic objectives of different makers
are constructed on different series of curves, and the component
lenses placed at different distances apart, it will be found that
if two achromatic objectives magnify the same at any give
sean, they will no longer do so if the distance is materially
changed. :

Hence I am compelled to agree fully with the observations
of Mr. Cross (loc. cit. p. 401), that the nominal focal length
signed to an achromatic objective can only serve in any case of
‘‘a general appellation serving to group together bar's
approximately the same magnifying power,” and must conclu
therefore, that the English an
ses no real claim to strict scientific accuracy, an Jestial
that the comparison made by some with the case of the
telescope is not vali

{
p

But besides the inevitable inaccuracy resulting from this .
source, there are in the case of the higher powers of modern

ers two other sources of much more considerable be

The first of these involves the case of all those objectives 7” a

are provided with a screw collar to correct for thick ‘wo
cover; the second involves the case of objectives » but 008

:
:

fronts, one for wet and the other for or those wit 8
front which can be used wet or ea merely chang!g- rane
correction given by the screw collar. i, well

The correction for thickness of cover is made, aS bine
combine

known, by changing the distance between the front

on of the triplet and the posterior two combinations As i

Objectives for the Compound Microscope. 409

Magnifying power Magnifying power
at uncovered. at covered.
Nald pees vik 990 canis age
No. 2, - - - 250 - - - 275
Nei Opi a6) se Soe 800) o ieee pan aee
Dee: Seip sete gat 350 von: (ucgdeicelees gk
NOB e: escent esiot OD) teeter
DO Be ict epic nsPics meth te MOO nati ae ee a
1. Ck eee erimaaiens Caner Seems ae FS
No. - - - 890 - - 1250

These values were obtained by throwing the image of a
micrometer on a card board screen, using the objective without
an eye-piece, and the distance from micrometer to screen in eac
ease remained the same, the screw collar and the focal adjust-
ment of the objective being modified. Of course, for all inter-
mediate positions of the screw collar intermediate values result.

‘alge ae ver.
Now it is evident that even if, by the formula of Mr. Cross,
or otherwise, we could obtain accurate equivalent focal lengths

wer objectives ; for
s, and too generally
pursued, is to give values to an eye-plece micrometer by com-
am it with a stage micrometer at a fixed position of the

w tube, and to use these values in subsequent measurements.

410 J. J. Woodward— Nomenclature of Achromatic

Now as these values vary considerably with the cover comec-
tion, it is to be feared that the majority of the measurements,
made with high powers during the last twenty years are sadly
inaccurate.

The difficulties in the way of a nomenclature based upon

Magnifying power.

Dry. Wet. “ioe
‘Uncovered. Covered. Uncovered. Covered.
No. 1, 225 250 0 275
No. 2, 425 490 450 500
No. 3, 700 900 900 1000
No. 4, 770 910 900 1100
No. 5, 790 930 975 1180

Of these objectives No. 1 had but one front, the correction
for wet being made by the cover correction; the others had two
separate fronts, one for wet, the other for dry. io

ow it is just in connection with these complex objective
with double fronts or other devices to correct for wet and dty,
that the greatest diversity of nomenclature exists. In one quar
ter it is claimed that the system should have two names, one

from the magnifying power at uncovered dry alone. It is @¥F q

‘yin pe
dent, however, that neither of these plans has any prete “

rally,—not always,—the angle at the correction for thi

the greatest angle attainable by the combination, which ae “

7
i

Objectives for the Compound Microscope. 411

cover, their usual practice in this case being the reverse of their
usual practice with regard to magnifying power. Now I have
seen * eanal with an angle of 170° and upward at full cover
correction, which did not exceed 140° at uncovered. is evi
dent, therefore, that the maker should furnish with each glass

h maximum and minimum angle, or the mieroscopist
must measure for himself.

After a full consideration of all the circumstances, I am dis-
posed to think that the best interests of both makers and pur-
chasers would be consulted if the present nomenclature were
abandoned altogether, and objectives named instead by their pre-
cise magnifying power without eye-piece at some selected dis-
tance. It would be well if all the makers could be brought to
agree on some fixed distance; but until we obtain this happy
uniformity, which perhaps is not to be anticipated, it is only
necessary for each maker to state the distance he selects. By
this plan objectives without correction for cover would be named
by one number, objectives with correction by two, and those
with two or more fronts or backs by two or more pairs of num-

ers.

Thus we should have objectives without cover corrections
named precisely 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and so on up to 100 or more,
the number in icating the exact magnifying power, say at twelve
and a half inches from micrometer to screen. Objectives with
cover corrections would be named 80 to 40, 35 to 46, 75 to 89,
125 to 140, &., the numbers representing the minimum and
maximum magnifying powers at the selected distance. Objecs
tives with wet and dry fronts would require a separate name for
each; thus 78 to 95 dry, 98 to 180 wet, &e. ;

_ By this plan the real magnifying power of the glass and its
Imits of variation would be accurately stated, whereas at present
even those makers who are most careful about their nomencla-
ture do not hesitate to call a glass an }th provided its power at
uncovered approximates that of a single lens of }th of an inch
focus more nearly than it does a ith ora ;; th. Hence glasses
Which differ materially in magnifying power at uncovered, re-
ceive the same name, and the changes in power produced by the
Cover correction, are invariably ignor Pee

If the plan I here recommend be adopted, the precise distance

™m micrometer to screen which may be chosen does not appear
to me to be of very t importance. Many persons wou di
Suppose prefer 10 inches to 12}. I have selected the latter
number because many of our larger stands have tubes too long
to permit the convenient measurement of low powers with eye-
eat and stage micrometers, in the manner I shall presently

escribe, if the distance be taken at 10 inches, whereas on most
stands, with the help of the draw tube, 12} inches can be used

412 J. J. Woodward—Nomenclature of Achromatic

conveniently with all powers from the three inch upward. J

o not, however, insist on any particular distance, but only that
the distance selected shall be stated in each case until some uni-
form plan shall be generally agreed upon.

In this connection I may add that the actual plan of the Con-
tinental opticians is also unsatisfactory. In the matter of angle
of aperture, when they give it at all, they also, as a rule, give only
the maximum. In the matter of magnifying power, when they
give any information, they attempt, as a rule, to give the
nifying power of the objective with each eye-piece as acta
looked through when in use. But as the magnifying power of
the combination under these circumstances involves the dis
tance of distinct vision for each observer, it is evident that the
figures thus furnished cannot have any practical value.

Pending the adoption of some such system as I have sug:
gested above, it will be necessary for the microscopist to meas
ure for himself the magnifying power of the objectives he uses,
whenever he desires to be possessed of the real information con-

Multiply the distance between the two micrometers i” the
and decimals, by the magnifying power, and divide a be

Square of the magnifying power pl one ; the result ie

n us =
the equivalent focal length (for the given conditions) 12
inch.

ee es

Objectives for the Compound Microscope. 413

micrometers, divided by the magnifying power, will give very
nearly the same results as are obtained by the more complex
rule, but this of course is not true for lower powers.

It must, however, be constantly borne in mind that the re-
sults obtained in any case are true only for the cover correction
and distance used.

For the convenience of those who may undertake such com-
parisons, I append a table in which the real magnifying powers
of single convex lenses are given for three different distances.
In the treatises on optics the magnifying powers of single lenses
are sometimes stated at some given distance from the lens to
the screen, but I know of no table which shows their powers at
given distances between image and object.

This table is calculated by substituting the numerical values

of fand Jin the equation f= mh when m= the magnify ;

power remains as the only unknown quantity and is easily
computed. I have carried out the values of m to two decimal
— only; but in practice the nearest whole number will
ound sufficiently accurate.

Table of the magnifying powers of single convex lenses.

Focal length for Magnifying power at 12}, 25, and 50 inches
parallel rays, distance from micrometer to screen.
~ 12 1-2 inches, 25 inches. inches.
Sinvhes, © 2) EO 17 14°59
Re ie eran ay 10°40 22°95
1y “ By seis leat gay 14:59 81-30
Isinohi)) ese wis wooeeo 22°95 47°99
$rds of an inch, - - 16°69 35°47 42°98
ithe: fica, 342 808 60°48 122°99
f= - - 47°99 97°98 197°99
$th ao 122-99 247°99
Se ee 14799 297°99
$th Ow Nac! gee 197°99 397°99
oth el es SOROS 247-99 497°99
th OY Ss oe eree 297-99 597°99
sth oo a eee 37299 747-99
ma . yy Tee 397-99 797°99
ath... 4 -. +, . 999-00 447-99 897-99
vth = 8% 5. 947-90 497°99 997-99
sth ie Sn eee 622°99 1247°99
wth =“ . . 622-99 1247-99 2497°99

Note. —Since writing the foregoing article, I have read with
Pleasure a paper on the same aehjent by Dr. R. H. Ward

414. A. M. Mayer—New form of Lantern-Galvanometer,

(“Remarks on uniformity of nomenclature in regard to micro-
scopical objectives and oculars,” American Naturalist, March,
1872, p. 136). This paper contains much valuable matter, and
should be read by all who are interested in this subject. I learn
from it for the first time that the method of determining the
magnifying power of objectives by removing the field glass of
the eye-piece and using eye-piece and stage micrometer as de-
scribed above, has already loot used by Dr. J. J. Higgins of
New York (American Naturalist, Dec., 1870, p. 628), to whom]
asten to give the credit due.

I am very glad to find Dr. Ward indicates the feasibility of
the substitution of magnifying powers at a fixed distance as
names for objectives instead of alleged equivalent focal lengths

must, however, differ from him when he recommends thatthe

Dr. Ward’s paper also contains some interesting suggestions
on the subject of the nomenclature of eye-pieces, a matter which
will, however, I think, particularly in the case of the ordinary
eye-piece, require further discussion. I agree fully with Doctor

rately measured? To this subject I may recur at some future
time.

—

FRED M. Mayer, Ph.D., Professor of Physics
Stevens Institute of Technology, Hoboken, N. J.

Art. LIUL— On a new form of Lantern -Galvanometer a iy

On the 21st of December, 1871, I delivered a lecture 7
Magnetism before the American Institute, at the Academy pei
Music, in the city of New York. It was necessary for 19

$ etism

experimental discussion I then made of the earth's magn of
to use a galvanometer, so constructed that the least deflection
its needle would be visible to a very large audience; at 8
same time the astatic condition of this needle had to

pe 2

A. M. Mayer—New form of Lantern-Galvanometer. 415

controlled that it could readily be altered during the progress
of the lecture; while finally, the arrangement of the a
magnets had to be such as allowed me instantly to bring the
needle into the magnetic meridian when disturbed therefrom,

an yen lantern; while the front lens of the condenser

around the axis of the lens.

The horizontal condensing lens is five inches in diameter,
and the magnetic needle is four inches long. With this arrange-
ment I have obtained sharp and bright images of the graduated
circle 16 feet in diameter.

FP See: arrangement of lenses, which is due to President Morton, gives a bright

7 eonny illuminated tield free from coloration. :
cont, the Quarterly Journal of Science, Oct. 1871. is a report of Prof. Morton's ac-
L t of this invention [* the vertical lantern”, delivered before the

stitute, as follows: ‘The original idea and general plan of the instrument shown,
hn Bo } essor J. P. Cooke, of ;_his

chaniny ounection with it being confined to the devising of @ convenient me-

rm arrangement of parts, the improvement of the combination of condensing

reflecting lenses [mirror as to secure a white and evenly

the i silv mirror

416 A. M. Mayer—New form of Lantern-Galvanometer,

To deflect this needle by means of an electric current I place
as close to the condensing lens as possible the two vertical wire
spirals 8, S, formed of 4; inch copper wire of square section, so
as to bring the convolutions as close together as possible. The
turns of the spirals are separated with very thin vulcanite rib-
bon, coated with paraffine, and are wrapped on the faces of vul-

ite di The spirals have an internal diameter of four
inches and an external diameter of ten inches, and each contains
49 feet of wire in 26 turns. The four terminals of the spirals
are connecting screws, two of which serve to connect the spirals
so that a current will circulate in the same direction in both,
The spirals are so placed that a line joining their centers will
pass through the center of the magnetic needle.

The vertical-lantern rests on a base three feet and a half
long, with guides on its sides, between which slide boards
carrying two bar-magnets, A and B, 15 inches long and one
inch in diameter, as shown in the figure. These magnets can-

not only aes to and recede from the lantern ‘in
ke poes

%
alter their distances from the galvanometer-needle, but
so rotate around their centers on vertical axes. The %
of the magnets and of the needle point in the same pen a
and by sliding the magnets to or from the lantern-D

A. M. Mayer—New form of Lantern-Galvanometer. 417

render the latter more or less astatic. Also, in case the needle

with poles reversed.

In working with thermal currents we use a smaller needle
and condenser which allows the spirals to approach nearer; but
for thermal currents it is better to wind close around the needle

under the control of the damping magnets.* The breadth of
the coil used in this last device need not exceed ,';th of an inch,
and its image on the screen can answer for a rough zero point.
I will now give a few experiments in which this galvanome-
ter has been used ; and they will serve to show its usefulness.
Experiment 1. A coil of 24 feet in diameter, containing 40
turns of 300 feet of ;';th inch wire, was placed, with its plane, at
right angles to “the dip.” Its terminals were connec h
the galvanometer whose needle was rendered astatic by means
of the the damping magnets, I now quickly rotated the coil
80° around an axis at right angles to the direction of dipping-
needle. The galvanometer needle was deflected about 12° by
the magneto-electric current induced by the earth’s magnetism.
cp. 2. I poyed the coil, used in Exp. 1, on a wooden wheel
provided with a commutator and rotated it around an axis at
right angles to the dip. The galvanometer-needle went steadily
up to a deflection of 85° and was held there as long as the coil
revolved.
_ «Hep. 8. The two cores of the large electro-magnet of the
Stevens Institute of Technology were placed end to end, thus
oe one iron bar, seven feet long and six inches in diam-
. 1S was surrounded by its eight bobbins contaming 1n
all 2000 feet of 4 inch copper wire; and through them was
sunt the electricity dovdiopsd by the most advantageous com-
bination of 60 plates of zine and carbon, 10X8 inches.
whionh® UPPer needle of this astatic combination swings in the interior of the coil
incloses e needle and the condenser c; the lower un-

Am. Jour. Sct.—Turrp Serres, Von. III, No. 18.—Jons, 1872
27

418 <A. M. Mayer—New form of Lantern-Galvanometer,

A coil of 20 inches in diameter formed of one turn of ;', inch
wire was rotated 180° around a vertical axis 3} feet from the
end of the magnet. The needle was deflected 8°.

Exp. 4. A coil of 20 inches in diameter having 5 turns of
zz inch wire was rotated 180° around a vertical axis, at a dis-
tance of 34 feet from end of magnet. Deflection of needle was
30°.

Exp. 5. Same as Exp. 4, only coil had 10 turns of wire in-
stead of 5. Galvanometer needle deflected 50° to 60°.

Exp. 6. A coil of 20 inches in diameter formed of 10 turns,
z» inch wire was revolved 180° around a vertical axis 64 feet
from end of magnet. Deflection of 22°.

Exp. 7. The coil used in Exp. 6, was placed three feet eight
inches above center of axis of the magnet and revolved 1
around a vertical axis; the needle was deflect ‘

Exp. 8. A coil of 24 feet in diameter, formed of 40 turns of
800 feet of ;', inch wire, was placed 28 feet distant from the
center of the magnet, and with its plane coinciding with the
plane of the magnet’s equator. On rotating it around a vertr
cal axis the needle was deflected 20°.

The following experiments will show the excellent propor
tions (arrived at by a long series of experiments) of the
used in Exps. 1,2 and 8, for the evolution and study of the
electric currents induced by the earth’s magnetism.

xp. 9. The coil used in Exps. 1, 2 and 8 was laid on a table
and its terminals connected with a galyanometer, which 1s
in connection with Nobili’s thermo-electric pile. The me
of this instrament made one oscillation in nine seconds.
lifted the east side of the coil only six inches; the needle was
deflected 10°. Lifting the same side nine inches, the needles
went to 22°. I now placed the coil in a north and south vert
cal plane and suddenly tilting its top six inches to the east OF
to the west the needles went to 60°. Tilting the coil nine
inches sent the needles with a blow against the stop at ue

The advantages of the new galvanometer may be summ “
in a few words. It gives on the screen a bright clear eee
only the graduated circle and of the needle. It can read . res
rendered more or less astatic to adapt it to the character © “8
electric currents worked with. The direction of its need’
completely under the control of the damping —
finall: , it is of simple construction and can be rapidly a¢j4
to the requirements of any special experiment.

SW. Ford—New species of Primordial Fossils. 419

Arr. LIV.—Descriptions of some new species of Primordial
Fossils ; by S. W. Forp.

Hyolithes tmpar, n. sp.

Tux shells of this species are plump, elongate bodies, taper-
ing to an acute point. The largest specimen obtained would,
if perfect, be one and three-fourths inches in length. The
usual length, however, is about one and one-fourth inches. The
section is generally broadly and regularly oval, but in some
specimens is rather more flattened on the ventral side than in
the diagram of the one below given. Some specimens show a

dag) 8s
e operculum is of an oval form, irregularly convex exter-
nally, and for the most part concave within. The nucleus 1s

Widens in passing from the center out 4 2
to the edge. With the exception of
the nucleus, which barely separates G) &

hese are respectively the dorsal and
ventral limbs. The ventral limb is a

by concentric lines. Its convexity 1s

imb has nearl , Sometimes quite, the

Same degree of convexity, but may be

- 1 @, outline of a shell of H. i , Seen m the most flattened or ven-

be Side ; 1} transverse section. 2 a, side view to show the form of the aperture
the extension of the lip. 2 , is the interior of an operculum, natural size.

420 S. W. Ford—New species of Primordial Fossils,

readily distinguished from the ventral by the presence of two ob-
scure ridges radiating from the nucleus to the margin, and en-
closing a triangular space along the central portion of the limb,
The two limbs are so situated relatively to each other as to

e

give to the base of the operculum a curvature equal to that

mb. All of these ridges are widest at their junction with the
margin. They severally terminate in the central pit, and
divide the interior into four unequal parts. ;
he surface of the operculum is covered with fine concentri¢
strize, from 8 to 10 in the space of 06 of an inch. Along wi
these there sometimes occur coarser lines of growth. The in-
terior is both radiately and concentrically striated. The con-
centric lines are mostly coarser, fewer in number, and far less
regularly disposed than those on the outside. _ The radiating
ines are very numerous, and with the concentric lines give to
the interior a singularly reticulated appearance under the mag-
nifier. They are barely visible to the naked eye, ae
This is a well marked species, and offers but little varla-
tion of form. It is closely related to Hyolithes communis Bil-

Billings. .
The specimens were collected by the writer.
: * Canadian Naturalist, vol. vi, p. 214, December, 1871.

S. W. Ford—New species of Primordial Fossils. 421

exceedingly convex. The head is broadly semi-elliptical, wider
than long, the length to the breadth about as 5 to 6. Con-

and posterior portions of the border. The surface of the head,
including the border, is transversely crossed by numerous faintly
impressed lines, curving baicwandl for the most part invisible
to the naked eye.

The pygidium is of equal length and width with the head.
The convexity, however, is a trifle greater along the middle,

d

to the angles. The contour of the sides and posterior margin
the same as that of the sides and anterior margin of the head.

harrow marginal border similar to that of the head, though
not tuberculated, surrounds the pygidium, terminating on either
side of the concave portion of the anterior outline. The sur-
face 1s covered with delicate lines similar in character and
direction to those of the head. :
_ The two extremities are connected by a single thick thoracic
ning. This ring is partly shown in fig. 1. From the appear-
ance of the figure, owever, there would seem to be room for

* Fig. 1. A nearl j limit of
ze y perfect specimen of Agnostus nobilis. T .
the head is not well shown in the figure, but may be made out clearly in oo

cim
on the border are wanting in this igure owing to their removal on the side of the
presented.

422 SW. Ford—New species of Primordial Fossils

a second ring, but this appearance is due to the damaged condi-
tion of the head.

ded limestone east of Troy, N. Y., in the same layer with
Olenellus asaphoides, Agnostus lobatus, Obolella celata, and 0.

fe By. gidium along the middle, a plain instead of inbersalane

No entire specimens of A. paritis have been iar ee
the two extremities having been referred to each other, a0 is
doubt rightly, from their similarity of form. The species
stated to occur near the middle of ‘the formation.

Troy, March 30th, 1872,

F. B. Meek—New species of Fossils, ete. 498

Art. LV.—Descriptions of New Species of Fossils from the Cin-
cinnati Group of Ohio; by F. B. Menx.*
ANOMALOCYSTITES (ATELEOCYSTITES ?) BALANOIDES M.

THE only specimens of this fossil that I have seen are in a

bad state of preservation, being distorted by pressure, and con-
ody, and some of the

of it; while the carinate marginal pieces, which are quite dis-

.

unctly seen in this view of our species, are scarcely visible

been stated, it will be seen to differ too widely in the form a
Proportions of its lower range of plates to render a comparison

essary, :
Compared with Ateleocystites Huxleyi of Billings, the
and only known species of that genus, our species will be
ae’ ts

aving its base greatly more widely and deeply sinuous on the
flat si e, for the reception of the column ; while its central two

* :
cal ove are to be fully illustrated in the final report of the Ohio Geologi-

“

424 F. B. Meek—New species of Fossils

ieces taper more rapidly upward, and are longer in proportion
to the lateral ones. Its lateral pieces, on the contrary, ta

The convex side of A. Hucleyi and the wpper
parts of our type being unknown, we have no means of carry-
ing the comparison further ; but enough can be seen to show
beyond doubt that the two forms are at least clearly distinct
specifically.

Whether these several forms belong to one, two, or three
genera, it must be evident, I think, to any one accustomed to
study these old types of the Echinodermata, that in a systematic
classification of the Cystoidea they will have to stand together

men I have seen belongs to the collection of C. B. Dyer, Esq.,
of Cincinnati. I am also under obligations to Prof. 0. C. M.

of New Haven, for the use of another more crushed specimen
of the same or an allied species. Both of the specimens were
discovered, I am informed, by G. W. Harper, Esq., of Cin-
cinnati.

in the Cincinnati group of the Lower Silurian. The best Es ;

DALMANITES CARLEYI M.

efined, a rgin ‘or lateral
cheeks, and curving backward a little on the posterior 1a
spines ; occiputal segment comparatively thick i
posterior diameter at the midi

from the Cincinnati Group of Ohio. 425

shallow marginal groove; eyes comparatively large, situated
full half their antero-posterior diameter from the posterior
ins of the cheeks, and elevated somewhat above the
height of the glabella, truncato-subconical in form, the visual
surface curving around so as to form about three-fourths of
at its base; lenses of comparatively moderate size,
showing about seven in a vertical row at the middle, and twelve
or fourteen in the longest oblique rows. Surface of anterior
lobe of — showing small, obscur egranulations; other
e cephalic shield nearly smooth, or less distinctly

Yr.

Thorax unknown. A pygidium found in the same associa-

e
characters, there is very little reason to doubt that they belong
to the same trilobite.

l us
differs materially ; i i f the
materially in having the posterior lateral angles 0
cephalic shield’ produced io oe spines, instead of merely

amtinating in broad, rounded, wing- x

the eyes proportionally shorter, and more remote from the
Posterior Margins of the cheeks, as well as much more curved
‘round, than represented in the figures of the New York species.

426 F, B. Meek—New species of Fossils

Again, the surface of its cephalic shield is less strongly granu-
lated. There are likewise equally well marked differences in
the pygidium found associated with our species, which shows
in each lateral lobe thirteen well defined segments, without
sulcation; while in D. callicephalus these lobes are described
as having each only nine segments, that are marked with strong
. furrows.

Although fully satisfied that the species here described is dis-
tinct from D. callicephalus, I was in doubt whether or not it
might be the same form for which Prof. Hall had proposed the
name Dalmania breviceps (= Dalmanites breviceps),* and conse-
> cea withdrew the description from a paper on some Ohio
ossils that I had submitted for publication. I observed some
important differences in our specimens from the character given
in the description of D. breviceps ; but fearing that these might
possibly be due rather to some accidental condition of the
specimens of that species, I preferred to wait until a figure
of that form ee : :

form. The neck segment of our species likewise differs in being
fully twice as thick as that of D. breviceps, while its palpeom —
lobes have an entirely differerit form, and its eyes are ecidedly

more strongly curved and farther removed from the posteno!
margin of the cheeks, T

The specific name of this trilobite is given in honor of 5. 4

Carley, Esq., formerly of Cincinnati, one of the earliest and most
successful collectors and students of the Cincinnati foss 4
Locality and position—Three hundred feet above low-water —
mark, at Cincinnati, Ohio, in the Cincinnati group of the wees
Silurian. The specimens studied and figured belong we
q- a

ot
=
ce
a>
=
°
:
mR
=
fa)
co
far)
i=
2,
pened
:
5"
gg
fale
i]
ct
= a
ia)
Eh
a
cr
ef
is)
©
2
=
fa)
R

collection of U. P. James, Es

Proetus Spurzocki M. aes
General form, exclusive of the spines of the cephalic shield,
ovate-subelliptic, with moderate convexity. Cephalic shield

The name Dalmania haying been pre-occupied for a genus of insects,
Rae te DS retained for these trilobites. I therefore prefer to follow Prof.
and others in using for the group the name Dalmanites.

from the Cincinnati Group of Ohio. 427

sharp spines, that extend back nearly or quite the entire length
of the thorax ; glabella a little less than one-third the breadth
of the posterior part of the head, separated from the cheeks on
each side by a well defined furrow, but without having the
neck furrow behind distinctly marked ; other characters of the
glabella unknown ; eyes sublunate, nearly their own length in
advance of the posterior margins of the cheeks.

Thorax apparently shorter than the head, showing in the
specimen examined only seven segments (one or two being
probably concealed by the slipping backward of the cephalic
shield); mesial lobe moderately prominent, scarcely equaling
the breadth of the lateral lobes anteriorly, and tapering more
rapidly backward, with its segments not arching forward.
Lateral lobes less convex than the middle one; pleurs nearly
straight and transverse, and furrowed for a little more than half
on out, with their outer extremities merely rounded in front,
and nearly rectangular behind, without any distinct backward
curvature,

Pygidium subsemicircular, scarcely one-half as long as the
cephalic shield, and provided with a smooth flattened margin;
mesial lobe moderately prominent, narrower than the lateral,
tapering posteriorly, where it terminates rather abruptly, with-
out passing quite upon the flattened margin, showing only very
obscure traces of five or six segments on its anterior half.
Lateral lobes more depressed than the mesial one, and wit
flattened margins rather more than one-third the breadth at the
anterior end of each, and each showing obscure traces of six or
Seven furrowed segments. ’

Entire surface smooth.

ngth of a specimen apparently very slightly shortened by
the slipping of the cephalic shield a little back wpon the thorax,
0°33 inch ; breadth at the widest part across the posterior part
of the head, 0-25 inch; length of head, 027 inch; do. of
pygidium, 0-11 inch.

Until T saw the published figure of Proetus eects Hall,
Thad thought it possible that this might be the same, although
it did not seem to agree in several characters with those men-
tioned in the previously issued description of that species. On
comparing it with the figure of that form, however, it will at
ae € Seen to present well marked differences. In the first
pace its cephalic shield is decidedly longer in proportion to its

Teadth, and more narrowly rounded in front; while the pos-
terior lateral spines of its cheeks are nearly or quite twice the
Proportional length of those in P. parviusculus. Its eyes are

428 Brooks and Pumpelly—Age of the

also placed decidedly farther forward, and its neck segment is
much less distinctly defined. hen we come to its thorax, we
also see equally well marked differences, its pleura not being
curved backward and falcate as in that species, nor having their
furrows extending so far outward. It almost certainly has one
or two segments less, though the slight slipping backward of
the cephalic shield leaves some little room for doubt on this
point. I have, however, also an inferior specimen before m
belonging to the collection of Dr. H. H. Hill of Cincinnati,
believed to belong to this species, and this certainly has only
eight thoracic segments. Again, the pygidium of our species
differs in having distinctly flattened, smooth, and very obscure
furrowed segments on the lateral lobes, that do not extend out
ward upon this border, while on that of P. parviuseulus the
segments are strongly defined, without furrows, and extend very
oe or quite to the border, so as scarcely to leave any flat
tened margin.
The specific name is given in honor of T. W. Spurlock, Hit,
of Cincinnati, who discovered some of the new fossils loan
to the Ohio Survey, and is well known in that city for his long
devotion to the study of the natural sciences. |

Lecality and position.—Cincinnati group of the Lower Silt: :
rian, at a horizon of about 100 feet below the tops of the hill —

at Cincinnati, Ohio. Mr. Dyer’s collection.

Art. LVL—On the Age of the Copper-bearing Rocks of Lake :

Superior ; by T. B. Brooks and R. PUMPELLY.

SomME observations made by us in the southwestern ye 4

the Upper Peninsula of Michigan demonstrate a wide d
in age between the Cupriferous series of sandstones, conglom-

erates and melaphyres on the one hand, and the Lower Silurian

sandstone, with which they have generally been considered a8

nearly identical in age, on the other. Both series et ben

referred by Foster and Whitney:to the Potsdam, by >

liam Logan to the Chazy, while Mr. Bell of the Canadian Comps ie
considers the Cupriferous series to be Triassic, the latter pees :

ing herein with Jackson and with the view afterwards
doned by Owen.

The principal facts on the south shore of Lake Supe :
as follows: A series of red sandstone and shales, Ly ce
where nearly ge Cromrpee'e borders the Michigan —_ Pi

the Saulte St. Mary and Béte Gris Bay on Keweena

From the former place to west of Grand Island, this sands"

is overlaid on the south by other Silurian rocks, and Deb"

Copper-bearing Rocks of Lake Superior. 429

Grand Island and Marquette the whole series ars around to
the southwest, on its way to form the western, as it had hitherto
formed the northern, rim of the great Michigan basin. Where
this southwesterly bend begins, the outcrop-line of the sandstone
divides, and from Marquette westward we find, with short in-
terruptions, the sandstone beds flanking the northern foot of
the Huron mountains, and dipping gently, 5° to 15°, toward
the trough of Lake Superior.
In this part of its course, where it may be said to belong to
Ripetivk basin proper, it forms a marginal band along
the lake shore, varying in breadth from a few rods to one or two
miles. But west of the Huron Islands it widens with the south-

and often nearly vertical plane of contact, having been seen by
the earlier geologists at several points along a distance of man

of faulting motion, was considered as a dislocation.

able resemblance to those of the eastern horizontal occur,
apparently conformably overlying the Cupriferous series.* Both
ee came to be considered as identical in age, and as
g the upper member of the group. ;
ere were nan sicenuiniins which made it difficult for
us to accept this conclusion. One obstacle lay in the enormous
amount of dislocation required ; for instance, at Portage Lake,
Where the strata of the Cupriferous series, with an actual thick-
ru of several miles, dip away from the supposed longitudinal
ault at an angle of about 60°.
*It is not yet known the west side of Keweenaw
Point are upper members "Of the Crpeifctons savice or beloug to the Lower Silurian.

430 Brooks and Pumpelly—Age of the

Again, there are at least two patches of sandstone lying on
the upturned melaphyre beds near Houghton, though it was
not easy to prove that they were not brought thither by glacial
action. Mr. Alexander Agassiz informs me that he has found
in the horizontal sandstones near this so-called “ fault,” abun-
dant pebbles of the melaphyre and conglomerate of the Cuprif:
erous series. d

Sir William Logan hints at a similar doubt as to the proxi-
mate equivalence in age of these two series of rocks.* Durin;
last autumn, traveling sometimes together and sometimes apart,
we made a reconnaissance of the country between Bad river in
Wisconsin and the middle-branch of the Ontonagon, east of
Lake Gogebic+ in Michigan. Our route was chiefly confined
to the surface of the upper member of the Michigan Azoi
which we have provisionally considered to be the equivalent of
the Huronian.

? ‘ i) ee laa a se Sate
Fa OY See a ete ae aT ee GN es Ones SCR res yo a a eT eS ee eee ee ee ee 2 I

Keweenaw Point. Between these two ranges lies the —
western part of the Silurian trough, which has been mention

0°.t But in approaching Lake Gogebic from the west, W®
find that erosion of Silurian or pre-Silurian age has made 4

of
* Geol. of Canada, page 85. And again in Geol. Survey of Canada, a ogly
Progr. 1866-69, pp. i341 5. In the last mentioned place, he protests. 5
ba Be ee that the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior are Triassi¢
rongly written A bic on many maps. wie

} We observed several d dips in the fruvoulid of 25°-40°, while in ee! at “i
lying Cupriferous series none lower than 50° were found. While this ph oe
toward non-conformability, the greater dip of the overlying beds would mas”
probable that the lower dips were of a local character and due to minor NU”
tions in the Huronian. je

Copper-bearing Rocks of Lake Superior. 431

west of the lake these rocks end in steep and high declivities,
at the base of which lies the level country of the Silurian sand-
stone, in which is cut the basin of the lake. From this point
eastward, this ancient erosion had made great inroads upon the
continuity of the Cupriferous and older rocks before the deposi-
tion of the Silurian sandstone. The melaphyre ridges are broken
into knobs, or are wanting, and no Huronian was found as far
as the Ontonagon river, seven miles away, and the limit of our
observations,

.E. corner of Sec. 5, about four miles distant. It is a charac-

clusions we are drawn to are these :
he Cupriferous series was formed before the tilting of the
Huronian beds upon which it rests conformably, and conse-
quently before the elevation of the great Azoic area,* whose
existence during the Potsdam period pre-determined the Silu-
nan basins of Michigan and Lake Superior.
fter the elevation of these rocks, and after they had
assumed their essential lithological characteristics, came the
deposition of the sandstone, and its accompanying shales, as

It Is still uncertain whether they should be referred to the Pots-
dam, Calciferous or Chazy. e question would still seem to
n open one, whether the Cupriferous series is not more
Rearly related in point of time to the Huronian than to the
Silurian.
Our observations have detected a lack of conformability
between the Laurentian and Huronian at several points on the
pper Peninsula. On the other hand, in the — have
n discussing, which is the only one where the Huronian and
Cupriferous are seen in contact, there seems to be a well-marked

482 <A. E. Verrili—Radiata from the Coast of N. Carolina.

Some of the most salient topographical features of the U
Menomonee had been sculptured to the depth of two hannah
feet or more before that time, and were afterward buried and
wholly obliterated by the Lower Silurian deposits, and have been
partially restored by the subsequent erosion to which that valley
now owes its features). We now find ridges, consisting of the
nearly vertical beds of Huronian quartzite and iron ores, ca
with the horizontal sandstone, of which last patches still remainin
sey on the end and side declivities. Where the sandstone was
eposited at the base of these cliffs, we find it consisting largely
of a breccia of the debris of quartzite and iron ore, identical in
character with these substances in the unbroken ledge It
would probably be perfectly safe to apply the same remark to the
Cupriferous series. . Its members were formed, as we have seen
in the previous pages, before the elevation of the Huroniam
rocks. The deposition of the Silurian rocks bordering on Lake

sandstone over an area, which after having undergone an enor —

for instance, by supposing them to have thinned out, when ata

distance of 18 miles they have a thickness measured by m
a thickness they exhibit wherever they are known, at pomls
hundreds of miles apart on the north and south shores.

=———

Art. LVII.— Brief Contributions to Zoology frem the Museum of

Yale College. No. XXIL— On Radiata from the Coast of North —

Carolina; by A. E. VERRILL.

Potyrs; ALCYONARIA.

Corallum somewhat flabelliform, branching nearly in om
eon but the branches are not normally coalescent. a
are irregularly pinnate and sometimes partially he
the branchlets are alternate and diverge at a wide ang

times nearly at right angles, and are usually from ‘2

one i

A. E. Verrill—Radiata from the Coast of N. Carolina. 483

of an inch apart, and generally not more than % to 1 inch
long before dividing. The branches are rather stout, terete or
aig arg usually but little crooked. The branchlets are

‘20 of an inch; of the branchlets, 05 to ‘07.

The spicula of the coenenchyma are light red, and consist of
minute “double-spindles” of several degrees of stoutness, but
mostly rather short, thick, and blunt. The largest and stoutest
ones are 096™™ by -042, -096 by ‘036, 090 by 048; they have
a very narrow naked median zone, and two close whorls and a
terminal cluster of rough warts on each end; many other
smaller and shorter ones have but one whorl and a terminal
cluster of warts. The most slender ones are small and acute

In the largest specimen four main branches of nearly equal
Size spring directly from the base.
Leptogorgia setacea Verrill.
Corgonia setacea Pallas, Elenchus Zoéph., p. 182, 1756 (non Dana).
Xiphs gia simplex Val., Comptes-rendus, xli, p. 13.
phigorgia setacea Kaw. and Haime, Coralliaires, vol. i, p. 172, 1857.

Aa. Jour. So.—Tamp Serres, Vou. III, No. 18.—Jung, 1872.
28

484 A. FB. Verrill—Radiata from the Coast of N. Carolina,

Length 56 inches; greatest diameter ‘08 by ‘10 of an inch.
7

036, 132 by °048, 182 by 036, 182 by 042
The polyp-spicula are bright yellow, minute, slightly spmulose,
oblong or slender, simple spindles, mostly varying in size from
‘114 by ‘018 to 090 by ‘009.
Near Fort Macon, N. C.,—Dr. H. C. Yarrow. po
This species is of great interest both on account of its sit-
gular form, and because it has always been an imperfectly

known species, without a definite location, either geographically

or systematically. Pallas stated that his specimens were
h

ed to American shells, but with one exception the axis alone
remained, and no additional information has been published im :

regard to its habitat since his time, so far as known to me.

The species described by Prof, Dana, under the same specifi :

name, has a calcareous axis and belongs to -Juncella.

minutely granulous with rough irregular spicula, closely united

together. The spicula are of many forms and sizes,

are flattened at the large end. Besides these there are por” .

coenenchyma and polyp-tubes, and especially in the aed

structure; the walls are thicker and more rigid ; an
of growth quite different.

ing of the rough spicula, but the spicula are very be mode 2

Baa ae : Sa Sea
a Sa ee ‘
eo eee ee Cd cree BAT) a ene ae ee

A. E. Verrill—Radiata from the Coast of N. Carolina. 485

Anthopodium rubens V., sp. nov.

l
ligh

The spicula of the coonenchyma and verruce are light but
Bright red; the larger ones are irregularly oblong, blunt at the
ends, and covered throughout with rough, often lacerate, spinu-
lose warts; some of these were 288" by ‘084, 264 by “072,
‘228 by ‘096, ‘216 by 084. With these there are many 1rregu-
lar, rudely spinulose, acute spindles of about the same length,
but more slender, measuring “204 by ‘048, ‘192 by 060. There
are many smaller obtuse, fusiform, oblong and glomerate spl-
cula, of various sizes, covered with rough spinulose warts, like
the larger ones. The club-shaped spicula are less numerous,
and usually smaller than the largest oblong ones, but are simi-
larly covered with rude spitules. There are also many small
oblong spicula, with a smooth naked median zone, and bearing
a few small acute spinules on each end, and other similar ones
with small distant spinules on all parts; some of these are
irregularly branched, either with three, four, five, or more points,
but regular crosses are rare. The polyp-spicula are deep red,
simple, fusiform, or club-shaped spicula, with a few irregular
minute spinules, or with the surface merely uneven ; they are
about 156 long and -036 in diameter.

ort Macon, N. C.,—Prof. E. S. Morse.

In addition to the preceding the following onan of Aleyo-

naria were collected at Fort Macon by Dr. H. C. Yarrow.
ula reniformis Cuvier (Ellis sp.).

Leptogorgia virgulata Edw. and Haithe (Lamk. sp.).

Titanideum suberosum V. (Ellis sp.)

Telesto fruticulosa Dana.

ACTINARIA.

Calliactis sol Verrill. ;

Cereus sol Verri i SL, i, p. 58, 1864; Memoirs
Hien ~ by fog ede = Mus. Comp. Zool, i, p
Pita Yarrow has sent numerous specimens of this species

m Fort Macon, and also a colored drawing, showing the ap-
pearance while living. The base, as in the other species of the
genus, is dilated, with a thin border, often expanding into lobes

436 A. E. Verrilli— Radiata from the Coast of N. Carolina.

and radiately lined; just above the base there are two circles

of conspicuous pores. ‘The tentacles are numerous, crowded
together toward the margin, in length more than half the dia-
meter of the disk (about ‘5 of an inch in the figured specimen),
moderately slender and scarcely acute. The lobes of the
mouth are bright yellow; a broad circle of purple surrounds
the mouth; the rest of the disk is light blue with darker radii;
the tentacles are bright orange-red ; the body is light purplish-
red, with dark red blotches and longitudinal streaks, especial
near the base. Other varieties of coloration occur.

It lives like the other species of the genus, adhering to dead
shells inhabited by hermit-crabs. A variety of this, or an allied
species, is abundant on the eel-grass and alge.

Paractis rapiformis Edw. and Haime.

Actinia rapiformis Lesueur, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., i, p. 171, 1817; Verrill,
em. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., i, p. 35, 1864.

This species, still very imperfectly known, was collected m
bers by Dr.

considerable num Yarrow, who found them thrown

sion is vertically sulcated or fluted, nearly smooth. e

‘eri adult, darker and
transparent in the young. The tentacles are numerous, rathe?
short, tapering, sub-equal, pale greenish olive, with a pale orange
line along their insertion, and a blackish band around the base,
connected with a dark line radiating from the mouth. The
mouth was frequently everted, but no acontia were observed.
Toward the summit the surface of the body is minutely wrink-
led and capable of attaching sand to itself; close to the ings
it is thinner and smooth. This species has once been foun

The following species were also collected by Dr. Yarrow 936,
Sagartia leucolena V., Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., x, P- 9°

Aulactinia capitata V., (Ag. MSS.) Mem. Bost. Soe., N. H 4
p. 20, 1864. A

Cladactis cavernata V., (Bose) Trans. Conn. Acad., 1, P- ah
Paranthea pallida V., (Ag. sp.) Proc. Essex Inst., V, P- on
Cerianthus Americanus V., Mem. Bost. Soc., N. H., 1; P:

MADREPORARIA.
Astrangia Dane Ag., 1847.

the Astrangia astreiformis Edw. and Haime (1848) sete mee
of this species with the cells crowded together, which occur

A. E. Verrill—Radiata from the Coast of N. Carolina, 487

some New England specimens, as well as in southern ones,
although less frequently than in the latter. I have hitherto
considered the two forms distinct species, but am now in pos-
session of specimens from Vineyard Sound, Mass., which radase
me to unite them.

Oculina arbuscula V., Mem. Bost. Soc., N. H., i, p. 40.

0. implicata V., op. cit, p. 41.

Ace

Physalia Arethusa Til.

Parypha cristata Ag. (McCrady sp.) Piles of wharf.

Hydractinia polyclina Ag. Common.

Aglaophenia tryfida Ag. Very common.

Dynamena cornicina McCrady.

Diphasia s

Srastarie: Sisiiaiiics V., sp. Ov.

Stem long and slender, very flexible, giving off numerous
slender, falcate branches, one to three ‘inches long, arranged
8 irally. The branches are riety simply pinnate, but some of
the lower ones are bipinnate, with the beret falcate. The
hydroid cells are small, unequally alterate, rather clnele =
pressed, with an oblique, slightly bilobed aperture.
sules are stout elliptical, about four times as Mee as the vhwdroed
cells, and with the breadth about one third of the len A swollen
in the middle, narrowed toward the aperture, whic I
simple, with the margin slightly uneven. Height Bike one foot.

ECHINODERMS
Thyone Briareus Sel. (Lesueur sp.) ‘Abundant.
Pentamera pulcherrima Ayres. Four eipemrnge
Thyonella gemmata V., gen. nov. (Pourt.
> — matus Bots Proc. Am. Assoc., an shee be
shy nepal Selenka, Zeitschrift fir Wissenschaftl. Zodl., xvii, 1867,
Pp. 345, tab. xix, figs. 1
is species differs so much in structure from the typical
species of Thyonidium that it should form the type of a distinct
genus. It has but ten tentacles, of which the two inferior ones

nes.
present on is thicker and filled with an csi large
amount of calcareous plates. Other differences are to be f found
in the oral plates, the genital organs, etc.
eth Atropos ee. 1855. Common.
he name Mera is preoccupied for a genus of Crus
seis Tea the name of the present genus must, sievefor,

ae pentapora Liitk. Brazil to Vineyard Sound, Mass.

by ale | nat and Echinoderms, unless otherwise stated, were collected

438 C. U. Shepard—Meteoric Iron from California.

Jersey, at Great Keg Harbor.
Echinocidaris punctulata Desml. Common.
Gulf of Mexico to Long I. Sound and Vineyard Sound.
Asterias arenicola Stimp. Common.
Florida to Massachusetts Bay.
Astropecten articulatus Liitk. (Say sp.) Not common.
Luida clathrata Liitk. (Say sp.) Common.
Ophiura olivacea Lym. (Ayres sp.) Common.
South Carolina to Vineyard Sound.
Ophiophragmus Wurdemanni Lym. Common, Dr. E. Coues
Ophiothrix angulata Ayres. Common in cavities of sponges.

Art. LVIIL—On a Meteorie Iron lately found in El Dorado
county, California; by CHARLES UPHAM SHEPARD, Sr., Mas-
sachusetts Professor of Natural History in Amherst College.

For my knowledge of the meteoric iron of El Dorado Co,
I am indebted to Mr. Alfred Stebbins, librarian of the Merean-
tile Library Association of San Francisco. A letter from him,
dated April 26th, inclosed a few grams of turnings obtained dur
ing the separation of a slice of the mass destined for the collee-
tion of the geological survey now in progress under the direc-
tion of Prof. Whitne

The mass is dcmaabea by Mr. Stebbins as having the size and we
shape of a man’s head. It was found in a field, and, as usual,
was first taken to a blacksmith’s shop, where it was soon found :

be an unmanageable subject for working, and hence, fortt- se

nately, found its way into scientific hands. Its surface

the indentations common to these bodies—the erust or coating —

—_ partially oxidized. It weighs eighty-five pounds.

find the turnings to have a specific gravity of 7 8 2

may perhaps be a trifle above what the ma

presumable that the turnings have suffered a slight condens

‘tion in the process of separation. é
ents sent are free from all traces of sulphur.
single analysis upon one gram has afforded me,

aeieeroet 88°02
] for. eee
tA hd =-- << — -
Insoluble. consisting of a mixture of #e and Fe, with minute sil- ; 3°50
very particles of supposed phosphor-metals (Schreibersite).---- pee
100°

The amount of material at command was too small to search
for the other metals commonly found in meteoric 1rons.
Amherst, May 6, 1872.

4
;

W. W. Johnson—Solar Halo. 439

Art. LIX.—On a Solar Halo; by Prof. W1LL1AM WooLsEY
JOHNSON, of Kenyon College, Gambier, Ohio.

THE accompanying diagram represents a combination of solar
halos witnessed by myself and others at Gambier on the morn-
ing of March 2nd, the sun having an altitude of about 40°.

The double circles represent prismatic halos, the single cir-
cles white ones. The halo of 22° and its contact arcs were red
on their inner edges. The short arc above and the lateral ares
were blue on the inner edge. The points of contact on the
halo of 22° were intensely bright. The upper contact are was
plainly elliptical in form, the lower too short to exhibit decided
curvature.

_ Jue taterat ares possessed the brightness and apparently about
the curvature of the ordinary rainbow. Hach rose above the
horizon to a height equal to 3 of its radius, leaving the center
depressed about 2 of a radius below the horizon. The diagram
being first constructed upon a globe, it appeared probab
the centres were situated upon the creat circle of which the sun
is the pole, and at distances of 120° from each other and from
the culminating point of this circle.
Gambier, 0., March 25, 1872.

a

440 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics,

Art. LX.—On Molecular and Cosmical Physics; by W. A.
NorRTON.

[Continued from page 340.]

4. THE electric envelopes of the two molecules effectively at-
tract each other at all distances greater than Oa, or thereabouts.
Beyond Oc, or within the sphere of the outer repulsion, this
effective attraction becomes very feeble, and the repulsion is
chiefly heat-repulsion.

It is assumed, throughout the investigation, that the value of
r is the same for the receptive as for the active molecule;
whereas it is undoubtedly greater ; but the only general result,
worthy of note, that can follow from any error committed in —
making this assumption is, that the intensity of the molecular
heat-repulsion will be less, as compared with that of the effect-
ive attraction exerted by the one envelope upon the other, and
hence that the amount of derived heat-pulses required, in cop-
eration with the natural heat-repulsion, to neutralize this attrac-
tion, will be greater.

points—thus increasing Oa, diminishing Oc, ac, and bm, and ?
increasing dn. , af”

6. The extraneous heat-impulses received have also a certain
indirect effect. They urge each molecular envelope farther

8 se
from the central nucleus, and thus alter the ratio —; that 18, a

certain portion of the living force of the heat-pulses 18 &
pended in this act, to be afterward given out as the temper
ture falls. The direct tendency of this recess of the envelope
is to diminish the values of both n and m, since its aistam

from both the center of attraction and center of a tee is 10-
creased. But inasmuch, as we have seen (p. 337), that the ret
center lies nearest the envelope, the proportional decrease Wilt

be greater for m than for n, and thus the value of = should be

augmented, and the curve of molecular action will tend ates ng.
at all points, and expand—Oa diminishing, and Oc mer
The curve then tends to fall from the direct action of the hee
gai and rise from their indirect action in raising the some
ar envelopes ; and the actual result should be the differ heat
these two tendencies. We may accordingly expect that ne
may In some instances augment the effective attraction of co

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 441

sion between molecules. It in reality has this effect upon iron
and india-rubber, at ordinary temperatures, and upon water at
temperatures below that of maximum density (39° F.).

7. The distance of a molecular envelope from the atom with
which it is associated may be increased by augmented attractive
impulses exerted upon it from another molecule, as well as by
repulsive heat-impulses taking effect from below. The effect of
such recess of the envelope from the atom upon the molecular
forces, and upon the curve of effective molecular action will, in
general, be the same in either case.

8. The effective attraction which the electric envelopes of two

of bodies; also more expanded in the interior of bodies than at
their surfaces.

and also, when this recess is effected by heat-waves, because 0
the momentary condensation of the ether that attends the reflec-
tion of a portion of the wave-force from the central atom. e

of the envelope that occurs in the gaseous condition, and at

the surfaces of bodies, and the latter in the more expanded state

that occurs within solids and liquids. i this idea we will
i

perature. ?
should at the same time observe that the secondary tendency 1s
reinforced by the direct repulsive action exerted by the heat-

aed molecular condition in which a rise of temperature will
attended with an augmentation of tenacity, and a peg

442 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics.

ro 0

exceptions among solids, and water below the temperature of
39° Fr. among liquids. For heat contracts india-rubber and
water (below 39° F.); and the tensile strength of bar-iron aug-
ments as the temperature rises, until it reaches about 500° F.
Beyond this a farther rise of temperature has the opposite effect
From this we may infer that bar iron in cooling, from a high
temperature, passes back from the secondary into the primary
condition at about 500°. Water does the same at 39°. The
temperature at which the change occurs in india-rubber is not
known.

10. We have now distinctly recognized the important theo-
retical principle, that primitive molecules are subject to a change of
physical condition, with varying circumstances; and that tas
change consists ina recess of the molecular envelope from the cen-
tral atom, or an approach toward it, and is attended with a bs
in the intensities of the several molecular forces exerted by the mole
cule at a given distance, and in that of the effective molecular achon
at any supposed distance. This principle furnishes the key
the explanation of a multitude of general and special phenom:
ena, which have hitherto remained inexplicable, on the preva
lent notion that the atoms of bodies have certain inherent,
unvarying forces—repulsive at one distance and attractive at
another, or indeed upon any supposition of vibratory or other
modes of atomic motion as sources of special forces. ;

It is important to observe here, that this change of the physi:
cal and mechanical condition of molecules, may, 10 §
eases, be either transitory or permanent; and that any ¢ a
effected may either wholly or only partially por off when

e seen on atten
tively considering the change in the condition and extent of .
the portion of the ethereal atmosphere of a molecule lying

return to its original position, or more probably may stop short
of it more or less. :
11. These principles serve to explain the distinction between
Saty and imperfect elasticity. It has been conclusively a
ished by the experiments of Hodgkinson, Chevandier
Wertheim, and others, that many, and probably the great
majority of solids, when relieved of any strain to which they “a
ave been exposed, do not entirely recover themselves, first
ave a certain set; which, from being very minute when it

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 448

by one envelope upon another remains very nearly the same
or considerable augmentations or diminutions in the distance
tween them, about the natural position of equilibrium (the
point a in the curve of molecular action, p. 839); also that when
the ratio ~ is greater than 6°9, the corresponding effective
attraction increases, from any distance less than Oa, fig. 4,
to a certain distance greater than Oa; and that when the same
ratio is less than 6-9, the attraction in question increases, from
any distance greater than Oa, to a certain distance less than
Oa. us the maximum value of this attraction is at the dis-

n
tance Oa when ~=69, at a greater distance when — > 6-9, and

at a less distance when ~< 69. This will appear on con-

sulting the following table, giving the results of the calculations.
*The more accurate value is 6-7, in this and the following cases.

444 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics.

Effective attractions between contiguous molecular envelopes.

n=5'143m| n=6'5m | n==6'9m | n=im | n='l-3m n=T'576m| n=8m no =1244]
a|f ey fy ee eG ee wit x mk
y :

0°8r |0°567/0-Tr [0-381/0-%r (0-485 0-6r '0°183
810-97 |0°677/0-8r |0-598/0-8r |0-691/0-7r |0°581/0-6r |0-514/0-4r \0-08]
649) |0°725/0-9r |0°704|0-97 |0-787/0-8r |0°776)0-Ir |0-727/0-5r [1515

T1-l 8; r |0°750\0-9 11/0-9r ‘Br \0°906)0Sr*1

0°788'1-27 |0°865) 1-27 |0°959|0°9r4|2°208
0°252/1-8r [0°520/1-6r |0-631/1-4r |0-705/1-4r |0-757\1-3r |0°832/1-3r |0-919) r (21
0- r 0516 1-5r |0-6 724/1-4r4'0-805{ 1-47 |0-S79/1-Ir |19
0°768|1-5r |0°836| 10r (0
0-052! 107 |0°056! 20r |0

n
Uist fs *e/s

0-690 L-5r
0-050) 10r

wT
o>
Oi
be 3

047/1-°67 |0°64

44/107 |0-047/1- 1-6r
0:009/207 |0-012! 207 |0-013) 10r

645
0-048! 10r

20r

f= Gp Ge The values of f” are in terms of 7. ‘The * indicates the
value Oa (fig. 4, p. 339) of 2, for the zero of effective action of the molecules.

e sign + indicates the value 0b of x for the maximum of effective attraction
of the molecules.

et
It appears, therefore, that substances for which the ratio =

secondary condition. — Liquids, and solids of feeble tenacity, .—
less than that of india-rubber, may be elastic from the latter
physical characteristics. Iron is the only substance whose elas-
ticity is to be attributed to the former characteristics. Of all
simple substances, iron has the greatest tenacity ; its molecules

should therefore have the maximum value of ee
Inelastic substances, so called, must either be those for which
the ratio = is greater than 6-9, and which are in the secondary

molecular condition, or those for which the same ratio Is less
than 6-9, and are at the same time in the primary con apie
In both of these cases the molecular envelopes will either ex-
pand or contract when the distance between them is altere@

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 445

and the changes which the envelopes undergo will be attended
with a diminution of the molecular actions that are opposed
to the force of distortion.
Since reaching this conclusion, with regard to the physical
cause of imperfect elasticity, and the precise molecular state of
inelastic substances, I have met with a striking confirmation of it
in the results of the recent experiments of Dr. Warburg on heat
developed by sound. On referring to the table on page 444, it

will be observed that for all substances for which the value of =

is greater than 6°9 (that is, for all the harder and more ten-
acious substances), the maximum attraction between their mo-
lecular envelopes occurs at distances greater than that of quies-
ence, Oa, and that in consequence the diminution of this attrac-
tion will be greater for small diminutions of the distance between
the molecules than the increase of the same for small incre-
ments of the distance. Now a diminution of this attraction
will be attended with a contraction of the molecular envelopes
and a consequent evolution of heat, while an augmentation of
the attraction will be attended with an expansion of the enve-
lopes and a consequent absorption of heat-pulses from without.

permanent contraction of the molecular envelopes, and therefore
4 certain amount of heat given out. The gradual subsidence
of the vibrations, after the inciting cause has ceased to act,
results from the process of contraction of the envelopes, attend-
ant upon each vibration, and the consequent evolution of heat-

energy.
Tndia-rubber must belong to that class of substances for
which the ratio = is less than 6-9, for the heat given out by it

when it is stretched, shows that its envelopes must contract
when the molecules recede from each other (p. 443). Still as

much below 6-9. Again, the fact that heat pee oa ag

ia-
are

sibi
lopes contract, and their attractive action diminishes in conse-

446 W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physies.

quence (p. 442), the ratio ~ will decrease, the curve of molec-

ular action (fig. 4) become depressed, and the distances Oa and
Obincrease. The effective attraction between the molecules that
uts itself in equilibrium with the stretching force, as this
increases, must then obtain ata distance that augments wi
Oa, as well as in the ordinary way. Its moderate tenacity also

assigns to it acomparatively low value of the ratio =

ents by Prof. E. Villari, published in the Philosophical Maga-

m :
zine (Feb., 1872). He finds that while india-rubber gives out ~

(p. 442) also appears to be the originating cause of erystaliza,
tion and solidification in general, chemical combinations, a?

in the light of this general conception, how chemical a %
may spring up. ‘T'wo primitive molecules of different pens
stances, when brought into contiguity, will at first come UN”
the operation of their mutual exterior repulson (Pp. 339), ane
is plam that unless this repulsive action be in some way

an attractive one, no union of the two molecules can ™

ot eee

a
if

W. A. Norton—Molecular and Cosmical Physics. 447

place. Now we have seen that contiguous molecular envelopes
attract each other; and that the molecules at the surface of
bodies, and of gases are, in all probability, in that ‘ primary
condition” in which any expansion of an envelope enhances
its attractive action. The tendency of the mutual actions of
the two molecules supposed, is, therefore, to augment the range
of the effective attraction of each (that is, to increase the dis-

iminish the exterior repulsion. It is

it is ap ntly on y ina few exceptional cases that the interior
molecules of a liquid or solid are in the primary condition in
which heat tends indirectly to induce an attraction. — In fact the
same amount of heat which has been developed in the union
of two molecules ought to suffice to dissociate them.

448 0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

It will be seen, in view of what has been stated, that two
primitive molecules of the same substance should ‘seldom, if
ever, unite unless their envelopes are brought by heat, ora dis-
turbance of electric or mechanical equilibrium, into different
conditions of expansion or electric accumulation. In fact, soli-
dification appears in all cases to begin at certain points of the
iquid mass, as the result of thermal or other changes, and pro-
ceed outward from these points, from molecule to molecule,
along certain lines of direction.

(To be concluded.)

tT. LXIL.—On the Structure of the Skull and Limbs in Mosasau-
roud Reptiles, with descriptions of new Genera and. Species; by
O. C. MarsH. With Me Plates.

ou

points in the structure of these pale in addition to those
already announced,* and also to correct some errors of previous
observers who have written on the subject. ‘These new results,
here Ries recorded, will be more fully discussed in a future

te bone in this group, in ‘affording generic and specific
c acta was first recognized by Prof. E. D. Cope, to whom
science is so largely indebted for its ee knowledge of this
most interesting order of vee In his valuable Synopsis of

a number of terms to designate its most charac aracteristic pany
which were well ‘tlaetented™ by figures in different portions 0
the work, and in some of his more recent publications. In
ve position there assigned to the quatre in the aba it

* This Joumal, vol. i, p. 44, Ps 1871, and vol. iii, p. 290, gy 1872. a
t Synopsis, ~ am and Proceedings American Association ience,
xix, pp. 217 and 2

0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 449

Harger, of the Yale exploring party, who discovered a quadrate
bone of Lestosaurus latefrons Marsh, in place, and firmly united
to the suspensorium. Another specimen in the

is equally conclusive. The natural position of the quadrate,
therefore, in the Pythonomorpha is with the great ala external.
This clears up, at once, several difficulties in regard to the mo-
tion of the jaws, which could not be satisfactorily explained
when the quadrates were reversed. is discovery of its
true position necessitates a change of terms used in deseribin
this bone, and those proposed by Prof. Cope may be amend
as follows:—The “external angle” may be called the internal
angle; the “external ridge,” the internal ridge ; and the “ distal-
external longitudinal ridge” may be termed the internal longi-
tudinal ridge.

genus (Z. felix Marsh), the entire stapes, apparently, was
1] i each case the bone

8. Discovery of the Columella. No evidence of the existence
of this bone in the skull of any Mosasauroid reptile has hitherto
been adduced, and Prof. Cope asserts that it im not exist In
the group.* In removing th
skull of Lestosaurus felix, which had the stapes preserved, the
Writer found a slender cylindrical bone adhering to the basi-

what compressed throughout, slightly sigmoid, and has both ends
ghtly sigmoi t
moderately expanded. The tose larger, extremity has a
f its gre

in * Synopsis of Extinct Batrachia, etc., p. 176.
- Jour. Sct.—Turep Serres, VoL. III, No. 18.—June, 1872.
29

450 0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

pointed tubercle at the posterior external angle. tosau-
rus, the jugal has a less complicated union with the post-frontal,
and is throughout a more slender bone. This arch is apparently
well developed also in Rhinosaurus. :

6. Pterotic bone. Among other new points brought to light
during the present investigation of the cranium of the Pythone
morpha, may be mentioned the discovery, in Hdestosaurus, 4
distinct ossification at the distal end of the suspensorium, whi!
is evidently the element called the pterotic by Huxley. Itis 4
small oval bone, which is attached to the opisthotic, and yr
on the superior surface of the quadrate. In several of ied
genera of this group, the cartilaginous wall which exten i
from the quadrate to the base of the skull was so much ossifi
that large sheets of this membrane are frequently found La
served, adhering to the quadrate, or the lower part of the sk

Laie ee ae

7. Anterior Limbs. recently the nature 0
r 8. very y and in Our

prove that these limbs were es in the pepe fe

estosaurus simus Marsh, which shows at a rigid
of the scapular arch and the corresponding limb. This ee
oe with other important parts of the same skeleton, exact
ound, by the writer, with the various bones almost in the

* Huxley, Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals, p. 230, 1871.

0. 0. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 4651

longest digits had six phalanges and the shortest but four.
Moreover, that the paddle was expanded as in some of the

aceans, and not contracted as in Ichthyosaurus, Plesiosaurus,
and other Enaliosaurs. Another os of interest jis, that, in

evelopment. The humerus was even shorter and stouter, an
the whole paddle apparently broader in proportion. In Rhino-
Saurus, the anterior limbs were proportionally much smaller,
and more slender.
8. Posterior Limbs. The absence of these extremities in the

oe limbs in nearly all the other genera was soon after ob-
—. while investigating the subject, and at the present time
ere can be no reasonable doubt that they are common to the

— arch, however, presents some peculiar features, and its
ements, which are here figured for the first time, deserve @
me

The acetabulum was formed by the coadapted ends of the

* This Journal, vol. i, p. 447, June, 1871.

452 O. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

ward, downward and backward. The ilium, which is usually
the longest of the three pelvic bones, has, in Hdestosaurus, a
nearly round shaft, slightly sigmoid, and tapering gradually to
its distal end. This is truncated nearly at mght angles to
the axis of the shaft, and covered with an articular face,
There was evidently a cartilaginous union with a vertebra of
the sacral region, although there was no true sacrum in any of
the group. This vertebra was probably the last without chey-
rons, as In a specimen of Lestosaurus, with the pelvic arch com-
plete, the right ilium was found by the writer adhering to the
right diapophysis of this particular vertebra.

The inferior end of the ilium is in Hdestosaurus much di-
lated, with a sub-rhombic transverse outline, and three terminal
facets, the largest of which forms part of the acetabulum, The

P. and t t
oblique. The bone called “ilium” by Prof. Cope, in his de
scription of Liodon dyspelor,* is evidently the ischiwm, and we
versa, as is clearly shown by several very perfect pelvic arches
in the Yale Museum, some of which were found not only with
the elements in position, but, what is much more conclusivé
actually united. Moreover, a careful comparison of these bones
with the corresponding parts of the pelvic arch in recent lizards,
as well as in the extinct swimming Saurians, strongly confirms
the interpretation here given.

The ischium in Edestosawrus (Plates XI-x11) has the acetabu-
lar end expanded and thickened, and just below, on the poste
rior margin, the tuberositas ischii is well develo The sh
is constricted in the middle, and the distal end has a subtrial:
gular articular face for union with its fellow, although Prof.
Cope, in the article above quoted, states that “the pubes are

below.” In Lestosaurus (Plate X11
tig. 2, b) the ischium is a broad flat bone with a posterior Pry
jection on its proximal third. The distal end is expanded, with
the anterior angle especially produced. This extremity we
articular face along its fore-and-aft extent, showing clearly ¢
it was united below to the opposite ischium. In the genus
Rhinosaurus, the ischia were also flattened, and the poster?
process well developed. Their distal ends were moderately
ss ao and closely united on the median line. ae

_ The pubis is longer than the ischium in all the genera 12¥®
tigated. In Hudestosaurus, its extremities are about the same
* Proceedings American Philosophical Society, Dec., 1871.

0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 458

femur i I ed with the humerus, and of muc
emur is very small compar cies i=

genus,

The tibia in Lestosaurus is a very short, stout bone, with a4
shaft nearly round, and the proximal articular face flat, fer
broadly oval in outline. The distal end is more expan ed,

coids, and that in figure 15,a scapula. On Plate 248, the spect-
men in figure 4 spend to bea ails and that in figure ge
Phalanx. The bone represented in figure 24, which was ote, :
to be a humerus by Camper, and an ulna by Cuvier, is withou
doubt an ilium,

x

454 0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

Number of Cervical Vertebre. In all the genera examined
during the present investigation, the skull was supported on a
very short neck, much shorter, in fact, than any species of the
group has been supposed to possess. Prof. Huxley, in the work
already cited (p. 224), places the Mosasauria with the Reptilia

aving more than nine cervical vertebra ; and Prof. Cope states
(Synopsis, p. 218) that in Chdastes propython there are ten cer-
vical vertebre with articulated hypapophyses. In the Yale
useum are numerous series of cervical vertebra of Lestosaurus,
all apparently complete, and several of them known to be 80,
as they were found in position. None of these series have over
four vertebrae with articular faces for hypapophyses behind the
axis, and following these one, or sometimes two, with a tubercle
more or less developed. In Hdestosaurus, judging from several
series of cervicals apparently complete, there were probably but
ve vertebre with free hypapophyses, in addition to the atlas
and axis, and, posterior to these, two or three with small rugose
tubercles. The same number was observed in a specimen of
inosaurus. It is evident, therefore, that the neck in this
group was unusually short, resembling very nearly, among
swimming Saurians, that of Jchthyosawrus.

New Genera and Species.

In a catalogue, recently published, Prof. Cope has given 4
complete and instructive list of the species of Pythonomorpha
now known from the Cretaceous deposits of Kansas.* these
species are arranged under various generic names, which do
not, in all cases, meet the requirements of our present knowl
edge of these reptiles, especially in view of the hight thrown o
the subject by the very large collections made in that region by
the two expeditions from Yale College. An attempt 18 “—
fore made below to define more closely the generi¢ relations
the groups best represented in the West. The material for 4
similar definition of some of the rarer forms, as well as t e
from the Eastern Cretaceous beds, has not yet been broug
together.

Lestosaurus,t gen. nov.

United premaxillari short obtuse
muzzle, that extends little if any in front of the premaxillary

ings American Philosophical Society, vol. xii, Dee., 1871.

* Proceedi
+ Agoric, pirate, and cavpoc, lizard.

much

0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 455

larger than Vertebree with rudimentary zygosphenal articu-
tethers sari vertebrae with sitccianed eaten six.
Chevrons articulated.

Several species with the above generic characters have been
referred to Liodon and to Holcodus by Prof. Cope. From the
former they are widely separated by the teeth, which in Liodon
anceps Owen, the type species, are compressed, and smooth, as
the name implies. The Holcodus of Gibbes was based on teeth
of Hyposaurus, and a single dental crown, which indeed some-
what resembles the teeth of Lestosawrus in surface characte

Widely separated, also, from Mosasaurus, Platecarpus, Clidastes,
and destosaurus, by the articular chevrons, as well as by other

Lestosaurus simus, sp. Nov.

This species is established on the complete anterior portion
of a skeleton, including skull, paddles and vertebra, of one
individual, and portions of several others which fully supple-

Temoved from the rock, and every bone numbered, eo

456 O. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

nt.

The quadrate is large, with a stout elongated hook. The
internal angle is nearly a right angle. The distal articular face
is prominently convex, with its anterior margin but slightly
inflected. There is a large tubercle on the inner margin of the
hook opposite the meatal pit, but no articular button. The
cervical and dorsal vertebree have transverse broadly oval ar-
ticular faces, slightly emarginated above for the neural canal,
The articular faces for attachment of the free hypapophyses ate
sub-trilateral in outline, the smallest angle being in front. The
rudimentary zygosphenal articulation is well marked.

Measurements. ast

Distance from end of snout to premaxillary suture, -- ---- 34°"
Depth of maxillary at anterior nareal expanse, - --- ------ 39°
Length of alveolar portion of dentary,----------------- 275°
Width of basioccipital on condyle,-------------------- 55°
Depth of hasioecipital,.......5 .. 2.2 Soo. ee ces 28°
Rignith: of Guédratejn cis. SA Go. 2 en 93°
Greatest diameter of distal articular face,-_-------------- 47°
haunt diameter, ouls. oiodid.wieeuea. fo 2 cc ce 8

ngth of posterior hook, é ic ~/2s..u0 sac auuses se abeers :
Length of axis, with odontoid process,_---------------- 98°
Tith: OF 0516: SONG, ieee si nade nn ee 66°
Vertical diameter of articular ball of axis,-.------------ 27°
Transverse diameter,_-..._...--- ‘ae 36".
Length of centrum of first dorsal vertebra, ------------ 58
wares Gameter of Hall... ss. owe nee 33°
mueoeversc Giaatieter a ce nee 48°
ee or are ee ee eee 141°
Greatest diameter at proximal end,._.___-------------- 95"
Greatest diameter at distal end,.........--:----------- 131
MR RNs i i i ee 99°

0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 457

Length of ulna, 104° mm.
Length of ilium, 153°
Length of ischium, ..138"
PEE OE. DRYER y hice mn nach wean tensaed Gale yee 175°-
OE ST in eee 116°
Rene OF HOB. ss kc ene 56°
Greatest diameter of proximal end, 40°
i 33°

This species may be distinguished from Jodon curtirostris
Cope, perhaps its nearest known ally, but a smaller species, by
the number of teeth in the maxillary, which are eleven instead
of ten; by the more anterior nareal expanse; and by the supra-
occipital Snel which is inclined obliquely forward. The two |
latter characters separate it also from Holcodus corypheus Cope,
from which it differs likewise in its large quadrate. From the
other allied species, the description given above will readily
separate it.

The remains of this species here described were found last
summer by Mr. F. Mead, Jr., of the Yale College party, and the
writer, in the upper Cretaceous shale, near the Smoky Hill
River, in Western Kansas.

Lestosaurus felix, sp. nov.

been much less dep

type specimen by pressure. 3 ;
interspace between the second and third teeth behind the inter-

beyond the
te

dae si are slightly deflected. The stapes and columella
ound with this skull’ have already been described. The teeth

rine are eleven in the maxillary, and twelve in the mandible.
+ og ing to the jugal bone, is a single dermal scute, which 1s
ick, and pitted externally.

a say ala ag are perfect, and the left is represented on

458 0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles,

the external margin of the hook, and hence the inner angle
is much greater than a right angle. There is a broad, shallow
depression on the front face of the ala near the middle, and
below this a deep pit on the inner face above the internal angle
of the distal end. The anterior margin of the distal articular
face is strongly reflected near the mi

The cervical vertebrz are short, with broad transversely oval
faces, faintly emarginated for the neural canal. The axis has a
short spine, much elongated fore and aft, and with caps of car-
tilage at its anterior and posterior angles, connected by an ob-
tuse ridge. The hypapophysis of the axis stands on the middle
of the centrum, and the articular faces for these processes are
nearly round, and rest on a prominent ridge, as in Hdestosa
mainly produced by the deep excavation of the infero-lateral
surfaces of the centra. The dorsal vertebrae have neural spines
much extended antero-posteriorly, and abruptly truncated.

Measurements.

Depth of maxillary at anterior nareal expanse, i
Width of frontals at posterior margin,----------------- 115
Wreath ty (Ont Of Orbe, 2255 oe Oe ee
Distance from center of occipital condyle to end of suspen-

NI i er ts ees Shee 90°
Expanee of: suspensoria,. 650. ase ee 170°
Length of stapes, os. gcc ke etic st eee
Length of columella, Soe ne eee 51°
RUBE abr anMirabee see oe cd eee eae oe 81°
Transverse diameter of distal articulation,. ------------ 39
Hptero-posterior diameter, .... ... ..--<.<+--++ -naneee4 20°
Lapoth of postenor hook oes 54°
Length of axis without odontoid PEGCGEE, <i eee eee 48°
Rerana. dianietér of Dale us ee 21
Transverse diameter, _...._.-___- eanetse 32
Length of anterior dorsal vertebra,.........2-++e00 09" 60
sransverse disineter of ball: -. os. es os ccm ca ee 38
Weta Giatieter fo re rt Sere 32°

‘The remains on which this species is established were ob-
tained by the Yale party last summer in the upper Cretaceous
yellow shale, near the Smoky Hill River in Kansas.

Lestosaurus latifrons, sp. nov.

0. C. Marsh—Siructure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 459

line near the middle there is a.sharp crest. The supra-occipital
keel projects obliquely backward, and its posterior pe is sharp.
The batiohenotd has the anterior lateral processes petbcs 5
and strongly decurved, thus showing a marked difference from
the last described species. There are eleven maxillary an

twelve mandibular teeth, which have unequal facets externally,
and irregular striz on the inner face. The palatines are alate,
sigmoid in fore-and-aft outline, with the pointed anterior ends
converging. ‘There are ten palatine teeth, all more or less pleu-
rodont, the anterior four being entirely so. The quadrate has
an elongated depression on the back of the ala near the middle ;
and a deep semi-circular excavation under the hook, and behind
the meatus. There is also a prominent smooth knob on the
inner face, between the meatus and the large rugose knob at the
end of the hook. The distal articular face has its anterior

Measurements.

Width of frontals between posterior angles,.-------- ---- bE omg
Width in front of orbits, é ete ae 85°
Depth of maxillary at anterior nareal expanse, .-.------- 33°
nsverse diameter of basi-occipital on condyle, - ------- 44°
reenter rs ce ee 26°
eeneen of quadrata 2 ee 17
Length of posterior hoo SO ES oa eee 52
Transverse diameter of distal articular face,....-------+ 40°
TO-p ior ; me pieces bine sel i ieeeee ‘“ 20°
Length of axis with odontoid process, .-.-------------- 68°

This species may be distinguished from Liodon curtirostris
Cope, and Holeodue coryphceus Co e, by the number of teeth in
the jaws, or in the alatines, as well as by other charac
si ie above, shot

ated species. The known remains now represen
found last summer, in the upper Cocsaoosek salt by Mr. 0.
Harger, of the Yale party, Mr. om S. Lane, guide, and the writer,
Kane our explorations, near the Smoky Hill River, in Western

460 O. C. Marsh—sStructure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

Lestosaurus gracilis, sp. nov.

is nearly round, and larger than in any known species of the
genus. The quadrate is likewise very characteristic. The m-
ternal angle of the proximal end is much less than a right angle,
although the great ala is nearly in the same plane as the outer
margin of the hook. This leaves a deep broad notch between
the alar process and the internal angle. There is a deep groove
below the meatal pit. The distal articular face is convex in 118
longer direction, but concave antero-posteriorly, owing to 4
shallow depression which divides the inner third from the outer
ortion. The lower margin of the ala extends inward near!

Paatatly, and is produced into a compressed process, whie
meets the free end of the hook. The borders of the articular
surfaces are strongly striated.

The articular ends of the cervical and dorsal vertebra ate
transversely oval, with a distinct excavation on the superior

r;

neural canal, between the anterior zygapophyses, ‘des of
species, but there is no groove between these and the sides
the roof. The zygantral excavations are well marked.

Measurements. hae

Length of parietal on median line,.............0099 fed
Width in tron, cic: cas <a, (Kk ENE OO ike ~~
Antero-posterior diameter of parietal foramen, ...-+++*+* bs
Pransyerse. diameter, . oi 5.0500 s ences = gkeamess eeeee a
Length of qua oe Ska ough ee at ae act ; nani ee ie
Length of posterior hook,...-...-..0cisevreeenrscst? ott
Transverse diameter of distal articular face,....---°> ian fe
Antero-posterior diameter, .........2-+e0e2+00000" ae
Length of centrum of axis,............---- AP ae ee

Height of neural spine of axis above floor of neural ca pean :
Ante . a

0. C. Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 461

The eg specimen of the present species was discovered last
summer by Mr. G. G. Lobdell, Jr., and vertebree of a second
individual by Mr. J. F. Quigley, of the Yale party, in the same
formation, in Kansas, as the fossils already described.

The additional species, previously described from the West,
that can now be referred with certainty to the genus Lestosau-
rus, are as follows :—Lestosaurus curtirostris, = L[iodon curtiros-
tris Cope, Lestosaurus ictericus, = Holcodus ictericus Cope, an
Lestosaurus corypheus, = Holcodus corypheus Cope. ;

Rhinosaurus,* gen. nov.

United premaxillaries large, forming anteriorly an elongated
cylindrical muzzle, that projects some distance in front of the
teeth ; posteriorly they contract gradually, and coalesce with a
broad nasalelement. Mandibles closely in contact at distal ends,
and projecting beyond the dental series. Parietal foramen of
moderate si eeth stout, and more or less compressed an
faceted. Palatines narrow, with bases of teeth unequally ex-
posed. Quadrate small, with short posterior hook. Humerus
small and slender. Manus and pes of nearly equal size. Cau
dal extremity comparatively short, with articulated chevrons.

Fhinosaurus micromus, sp. NOY.

The present species is established on the greater portion of
one skeleton, in good preservation, and fragmentary remains of
several others. In the former skeleton, the skull is nearly en-
tire, and shows well the more important characters of the genus.

€ muzzle is much produced (Plate x11, fig. 2), and has a
rounded obtuse extremity. The premaxillary suture is elon-

continued as a ridge to the antero-internal ang
end. The meatal pit is large, sigmoid in outline, and oblique

* From jis, nose, and caipog, lizard.

a

462 0. C. Marsh—sStructure of Mosasauroid Reptiles.

The humerus is very small and slender, and moderatel
stricted in the middle. The deltoid crest is ae bya
round articular tubercle, separated from the head bya deep
a The distal end is somewhat broader than the head, and

has a well-developed posterior process, and is Sat distally,

The cervical vertebree have the articular faces but slightly
transverse, with a faint superior emargination. The anterior
dorsals are subcordate at their extremities, and the pee
dorsals have their articulations still more depressed. ‘The ca
dals are elevated, and have the chevrons artic

Measurements.
Length of Sa border of maxillary,........++++ 320° “
Depth of maxillary at anterior nareal expanse,......-+-+ 44°

Space pegied by ieave anterior teeth in mandible,. . . 205°
Anterior extent of mandible beyond center of first tooth,. 32°

Depth of mandible under first to es » Heb ds S45 e ee 30°
Extent of seven anterior palatine teeth,........+..- Feet
Transverse diameter of ancoouioieal i on condyle, rucensaee 54°
OOD CINE oi ck ech ss cae eb ae Cee oe snes
Length of basioccipital, tide Peis Gade es sae eee ate 69°
OF WUROPR is Ss bas oh i ee A Uevue eeere 81°
Transverse diameter of distal. ond, .4..0i00 0555-0 meme 44°
Antero-posterior diameter, ........ ...++- had eee 19°
Length of pesos Ook, «59 ) ln dy abe e sis ue Whty a4 me 43
BTC Gr OMOEA os cs pa vc SV as oy beeps e seme ?
Greatest Sawer of wae OMG, «ao 0 os < cious nee oem 44°
Greatest diameter of Mintel end; cs save 0s » SO EEE 57°
Maen OF Wenn 2k A ys wp 0s oo ase eee 106°
en Se of axis with odontoid PTOCESS,... 2c ee ce eeeceee 68°
Length of centrum of axis... .. 0.000 cane sv eewnenneoes 44°
Vertical diameter of articular i | Rg eases ear olau cde orias 34°
Transverse diameter, .........0.cee500 eR cae
Length of proximal caudal, Oo is okt eda a oe
Vertical diameter: of ball, 225 10..% 5.0 voi s esc tose ee
Pranéverse diametet. ..¢ii0. 5,600. 04505s' Tevanceesee Vie

It is only necessary to compare this species with Laodon crass:
artus and Liodon proriger, both described by. Prof, Cope. ks

se ws foun the writer, in Jul last, on the a ae eof the
ey Hl iver, in Kansas. The geological horizon is the
ee ale of the upper Cretaceous.

0. C. Marsh—*Structure of Mosasauroid Reptiles. 468

The remaining known species which clearly belong to the
se Rhinosaurus are the following :—Rhinosaurus proriger, =
acrosaurus (Inodon) proriger Cope; Rhinosaurus dyspelor, =
Liodon dyspelor Cope; and Rhinosaurus Mudget, = Lnodon (Hol:
codus) Mudgei Cope.
_ - Kidestosaurus, Marsh.
This Journal, vol. i, p. 447, June, 1871.

United premaxillaries moderately developed, forming ante-
riorly a short, obtusely pointed muzzle; iat posteriorly taper-
ing gradually. Parietal foramen small. Palatines horizontal
in front, but nearly vertical at posterior extremity. Palatine
teeth more or less pleurodont. Quadrate small, with internal
angle produced. Humerus very short and stout. Manus larger

an pes. Femur slender. Vertchres with complete zygos-
phenal articulation. Caudal extremity much elongated, and
attenuated. Chevrons codssified with centra.

Edestosaurus rex, sp. Nov.

og sai arch is proximally lame os
are slender. The pterotic bone is oval in transverse outline,

have suffered somewhat from pressure, the femur east so.

1d a more prominent anterior process. The femur is slender,
With its shaft moderately constricted. It is peculiar in having
the trochanter at the inner posterior angle. e dermal scutes,

464 0. C Marsh—Structure of Mosasauroid —

asurements. Rey: Acre tee
Width of frontals between aes angles, .... 6.06. 56.124 am
Distance from parietal foramen to end of uspensortany. 170°
Caeeth « of dentigerou portion of palatine,............. 164° |
MAES OE TN, ick oc cancies vt ne escéeonue die 124°
Length of igthties, KA eGR RONN 9b oo 8n 0d eeu ee gee 6 ecg eee 102*
RRO. OUI Bsc oes es Ln s nc sccu cs codec ee 108
path Of feniat ei i. ois vd as 135 84
Transverse diameter of proximal end, 16 ¢in db amine 42 |
Transverse pyases: OS Wet! ONG. os. cee cee 47
osterior cervical vertebra, eer ern oe » 44°
Vertical Ped es OF TAM ts ce deeens ses 24°
A PMNOVORMG (IMME 8 os eis coves av sqsvi te mn eeakas 29'5
ngth of & dorsal vertebra, 2... 0... oes ode a 6
Length of anterior caudal,....... o\s'nakvws aEveees nee ae
Vertical dimmeter of ball 2... es aa 38°
avamsverte Gidmetee!: 600.640. ASA ee aa ee |
This species differs from Clidastes cineriarum Cope, in the —
transverse articular faces of the dorsal vertebrae; from Hudesto-
i

saurus tortor Cope, and #. dispar Marsh, in the less number of
palatine teeth, and in other characters. E. stenops te Vows the
nown

ae
5
5B
a |
ag
ay
Fi
a
.
A
i)
mn
8
=
=
rd

Tie Vymani “Mars , = Chidastes omen Marsh,
Ope.

Yale College, New Haven, Ct., May 15th, 1872.
eRe OF PLATES. a sh y
Plate X. Right anterior ere > searecna ing pa. 8
Lestosaurus

saurus dipar (p. 451). Weare 1, a, coracoid; 8,
2, a, ilium; 0, ischium; ¢, pubis. se 3, ia quadrate, —

view , 4, left quadrate, posterior view.
Plate XII. Figure u Right side of pelvic arch ra right femur of Bistro
463). a, ilium; }, ischium; ¢, pubis; 4, a pi

Right side of pelvic arch and righ
453). a, ilium; }, ischium; ¢, pubis; d, fog Side view
med by pressure. (} na s
Plate XIIL Figure 1 side of pelvic arch and left femur of cateearnee S
lium; 6, ischium; ¢, pubis; d, femur. Figure 2. Muzzle of #
, seen from below. 3. Muzzle of L ga
inferior view. Figure 4. Left quadrate of Lestosaurs

latifrons, r
Jez, anterior view. (4 natural size.)

Chemistry and Physics. 465

SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
L CHEMISTRY AND Puysics.

eed, by covering
one-half the slit of the spectroscope with the metallic spark from

meters n e of this spark is formed on the slit by
Means of a lens, the spectrum, in the case of magnesium, showing
the triple green ray 6 with great sharpness. On ng now

lowering of the carbon be continued, the second, and at last the
third, are reversed also. In this way the author has succeeded in’
Teversing rays in the spectra of sodium, thallium, lead, silver,
aluminum i

produced spontaneously by exterior cooling around each
, Ixxili, 332, July, 1871. F.

nd powerful o- Battery. — ry,
rvented by Noé of Vienna, the negative metal is an alloy like
rman silver, in the form of a wire; the saith also a secret
roti 18 In cylinders, cast round the wire. is protected
/tom the flame by a copper cylinder, insulated from the positive
metal by a piece of mica. One of these elements equa’ lectro-
votive power 1-24 to 1:36 Jacobi-Siemens’ units; therefore 9 to 10
Noé’s elements equal one Daniell cell, and 2 Bunsen’s,

0, one 0
A battery of 72 elements, when arranged for intensity, decompo-
M. Jour, Te Sertzs, Vor. III, No, 18.—Junz, 1872.

466 Screntific Intelligence.

ses water aepidly 5 in two series of 36, Sey in | complete action a
moderate sized

over eth acid, I aelinad that when the acid ooeheg to crystal-

ne the air in the jar (covering the arying dish) had a stron
mell of ozone, or active oxygen. A couple of years afterwa

- again m making iodic acid, this observation recurred to m

and I carefully tested the air in the jar during the evaporation ;

no trace of ozone could be detected until the acid began to ¢ erystal-

lize, when the smell of ozone became aie po percents and

all the ee tests for that body succeeded perfectly.

Durt t+ month I have had occasion to con wo
ounces ‘of iodine into iodic acid, and exactly the same sel se
been observed.

The acid usually anh s to opaque verrucose masses; but on
this occasion, the crystals formed were clear and brillia nt. The
solution had in this, as in all the former cases, been boiled down
to thin syrup, so that no trace of chlorin ne, or nitric acid, could
possibly have remained to act on the ozone paper. The air in the
jar was tested from day to day, both by the smell, and the action
of iodized starch paper. Even when a few crystals began to form
no change hg policed, pon when the crystallization set in mel

or nitric

offer r no os Sasi of the gent gone that air over :. onlin

seems to offer a wide field for further Ben HS which I have
unfortunately not the time to carry out.

Il. Grotocy anp Natura. History.
i: Remarks on the Taconic Siti tin A ; ‘hs

te ost talen
sort of an aristocracy, cons isting of the ape io f g
earned, active and influential of its devotees. The views

Geology and Natural History. 467

happen to be contrary to the established creed of the dominant
party. As a general rule, the leading men are right, and yet it
will sometimes happen that they are wrong. One of the most
remarkable instances on record is that of the great question in
American geology, relating to the age of the rocks whic :
Emmons called “ Taconic System.” Upon this question
nearly all of the leading geologists of North America arranged
themselves upon one side, and, as it turned out after more than
twenty years discussion, on the wrong side, Although they were
wrong, yet so overwhelming was the weight of their authority,
that for nearly a quarter of a century Dr. Emmons stood ress
d

During the last thirteen years, a great revolution of opinion has
vi mons. Although not

is at this moment dead, more so than was the Taconic theory im
1859, the year in which the subject was reopen s I under-

Worked out, and judging from the manner in which the strata are
folded, broken up and thrown out of their original position by
almost every kind of geological disarrangement, I venture to say
that no man, at present living, will ever see a perfect map of the
Taconic re ion. |
_The theory that the Taconic rocks belonged to the Hudson
tiver group, was an enormous error, that originated in the
Geological Survey of New York, and thence found its way Into
the Canadian Survey. No doubt the mistake was due, in the fi
instance, to the extraordinary arrangement of the rocks, the more
ancient strata being elevated and often shoved over the more
— us, without the aid of paleontology, 1t was Lape
to assert positively that they were not, what they app to be,
e of th dson river formation.

Strata, together with their numerous disturbances, might be ex-
Plained physically, so as to meet either theory. If, for instance,
the trilobites of Vienbat and Point Levis had turned out to be of

468 Scientific Intelligence.

the paleontologists, were m ame, With regard to the
rst, when a geologist finds one rock overlying another, he is
obliged to accept that as the natural arrangement. en as
the fossils, with all our increased knowledge, I y
good paleontologist of the present day would feel himself justified
in st physical appearances, on t

specimens figured in 1847, on pl. 67, Pa . Vol. i, Be this as

A
with me in the scnilossion of the mistake, whereas neither Prof.
Hall nor Dr. Hunt contributed any aid whatever, but, on the con-
trary, opposed the change that has been made to the utmost
[These remarks are followed by a history of the observations on
the Vermont trilobites, and on the determination of the age of the
Black Slate and Red Sandrock of Vermont, substantiating Mr.

You see by the enclosed* that we differ about the Taconic.
And yet we do not differ materially. For, viewing the Taconi¢
as you do—the system developed by Professor Emmons through

* A copy of a brief article from the May number of ‘the American bier it
pe . 3 7n his
ni

ion are give ne, ‘ch-
section on the same plate representing a section from Lake Champlain pee
mond, Vt., through Charlotte. No description of the rocks of this section
found in the of the volume. ‘i ic slate”
In figure 4 of plate x1 representing a section through Graylock, the hare west
stops just west of Berlin, Rensselaer county, New York, the slates on

Geology and Natural History. 469

sition. Again, on page 147, after having spoken of the three
mestones and discussed the question whether they might not be
repetitions of the same formation, he decides this question ad-

North A limestone, the most eastern rock in his section, the
most recent. He concludes his chapter on the Taconic by the
statement that “the Taconic rocks appear to be equivalent to the

Lower Cambrian, and are alone entitled to the consideration of

But during the year following the publication of the Geo ogical
Report of 1842, Prof Emmons met with a new discovery, and in
Consequence made most desperate bineiecite in American
eology. He found a “ Black Slate” at Bald Mountain, mn Co-
umbia Co, N. Y, (west of Berkshire), to contain fossils. As the
locality lay to the west of the Taconic, it seemed to prove, on the
being put d : es,” and in figs. 2 and 3 the houndary is
: : Bits, heath oe toe eg on ote 138 ‘Lite volume, the distinction
of the Taconic from the Hudson river shales or slates adjoining (or “ upper mem-
i of the Champlain group”) is particularly dwelt upon. The extension of the
Taconic to the Hudson river, so as to include the “slates and masses of the
tn amplain group.” appears first in Prof. Emmons’s Agricultural Report, published
* Prof. Emmons says that the strike of the rocks is very uniformly between
N. 10° W. and N. 10° E., and the dip throughout easterly, averaging 30° to 35°.
The dips he regards as a result of monoclinal uplifts (pp. 141, 142).

470 Scientific Intelligence.

rinciple adopted in 1842, that all his Taconic system, announced

fore as unfossiliferous, was newer than this Black Slate, that is,
newer than a foss iliferous rock. This, to his mind, was impossible;
and he was thence led to think out a way by which aa s might
dip xi nies yea still si ig be to the westward; and, without a
fact argum to sustain it, he announced, in his
Do cealiden! Hanott published in 1843, this as the true order,
He thus, by a stroke of his pen, tipped over the Taeohiad system,
and a ’the Black Slate to the ‘top, with all other Taconic rocks
beneath it; and so, in his mind, it ever remained.* lack
Slate, Tigerpolaced in 1843, thus ‘brought mischief to the Taconic
system and to much American geolo Its introduction was
an error, and a source of greater errors, ‘and it has been an occa
sion of confusion in the science ever since. It soon followed that
these black slates, including that of northern Vermont, so far

>
Thanks to yourself, the ee has rt 0
vines gine and an appreciation of the fact that the addition
0 i: Slates to the system was an error at the start, will
Pocrkis te science from the rest of it.

backeae in the Williamstown section, the only quartzite, that
the

e only way for geology to get out of the Reece perplexity

4 vay ome a , where the original
basis of the system is present ted by its author. The Williamstown
section, figured on plate xi of this report, is, as I have said, fifteen

* It is probable, from the facts stated by Professor Emmons and esi ob-
ada by me elsewhere, that the Bald Mountain Black Slates are uncontfo: pee
to the Taconie rocks. is point I propose soon to investiga ee

the
Graylock; and no fact has yet been brought ne that proves
ere rete at Be western base of the Taconic range to be newer than the Stock-

order of superposition. The slates of the Taconic range are certa rtainly not newer
than those

,
’
4

Geology and Natural History. 471

Hill do not make a thirtieth of its length. The true typical Ta-
conic is therefore not the quartzite portion, but the slates and lime-
stones of the Taconic range, as he has directly declared. In fact,
there is some reason for believing that this quartzite portion un-
derlies the rest of the Taconic rocks of the section unconformably,
and hence never was rightly a part of the Taconic series. Whether
this last be true or not, the name Taconic belongs only to the era
represented by the rocks of Taconic mountain, about which and
out of which the system was engendered.

Professor Emmons is deservedly honored for combating the

system so unscientific, that his opponents had abundant reason
for their doubts. o one

be nearest the truth; and no one has sufficient grounds yet for
asserting that the “ Hudson river beds” (those above the Tren-
ton) may not be included among the beds of the Taconic forma-
tion overlying the Stockbridge limestone.

8. The Development of Limulus Polyphemus ; by A. S. Pack-
ArD, Jr., M.D. 48 pp. 4to, with 3 plates. Memoirs Bost. Soc.
Nat. Hist. (Printed without date.)—In this memoir, Dr. Packard
makes an interesting and very important addition to our knowl-
edge of the embryology of the Crustacea, in tracing the develop-
ment of the horseshoe, or king-crab, of our coast. he changes

tion to embryology, we cannot quite agree with the views of
homologies and classification taken by the author.
Dr. Packard regards Limulus and all the Merostomata as

- 472 Scientific Intelligence.

to disregard the more direct relations of Limulus with the Ento-
mostraca (to which he as well as Dana refers the Merostomata) in
order to compare it with the young of the Decapods. Professor
Dana’s views are fully sustained by Owen in a recent paper on the
anatomy of Limulus read before the Linnean Society of London.t

Dr. Packard makes four orders of Branchiopoda, which he re-
gards asa subclass, as follows: Ist, Cladocera, 2d, Merostomata,
including the suborders, Xiphosura and Eurypterida, 3d, Trilo-

is discussed.

Eurypterida and Trilobites, as one of the primary groups of om

tacea, while others would separate them entirely from the ris:
§. LS.

* U.S. Expl. Expd., Crustacea, p. 40.
+ Reported in Nature, for Dec. 28, 1871, and Jan. 25, 1872.

Geology and Natural History. i ey

found, was able to absorb and fix more than a hundredth part of
its weight of water upon a short immersion. His note upon the
subject was presented to the French Academy Sept. 11, 1871, and
is printed in Ann. Sci. Nat., V, xiv, p. 243. A. G.

5. Change of Habit.—Loranthus macranthus of New Zealand,

; poe
as 1859. Its flowers are abundantly visited

f Britis

the author or publisher (which we will supply) ; gives illustra-

tions of the importance of insects in the fertilization of blossoms
an economical point of view, and notes the history and mode

; so in Americar
eesliet for March, 1872. Miss Millington of Glen’s Falls is the
ady who had the good fortune and acuteness to detect the little
logical sub-

8.
. The remainder of the paper is occupied with myco a ely thie

hist. in which Mr. Peck is a proficient, = especially

474 Scientific Intelligence. .

the result of his own assiduous Rr RRR: he concludes that
the malady is really due to a particular fungus, mor-

ao weinitz in ultimate development, but in earlier state a
Cladosporium ; that it is not at all the work of insects nor an
knit malady. The only remedy as yet en is —

~

Cooke, Handbook of British Fungi, with full Deutigitaas

of vl a ibeaiae and ones of the Genera. London;
Macmillan & Co., 1871, pp. 981, in two volumes, 12mo.—This is
the work mentioned in the picending article, and the one by which
American students are to acquire a knowle edge e of our own Fun
until the wished-for day arrives in widolioah we may have a Mycolo-

ia of our own. No better model than this could be asked for.
By its aid good progress can be made in the study of our own
species ; and it will be interesting to know that the occurrence of
any British species in this country, so far as yet recorded, is dul 7
mentioned in these volumes. Copious and characteristic woo

matur a views in soe rT but these views are most erie and
te 4 presented, a
ntelligence.—At the very time in which this welcome “aid is
supplied to those who would enter upon the study of our Fungi,
we have to lament the sudden death of our veteran mycologist,
. the Rev. Dr. M. A. Curtis, of Hillsborough, North Carolina. He
died on the 10th of April, just before completing the 64th year of
his <r A biographical notice will be given later.
. Hugo von Mohl, the prince of vegetable anatomists
- our d day, was found dead in his bed on the morning of the first
of April.
of. A. de Bary is transferred from Halle to the University
of Strasburg, and Dr. Hermann Count Solms-Laubach is appointe
extraordinary Professor of Botany,—a strong botanical professorate
ft erman University.
Dr. “Ml cNab, late Professor of Botany at the Agricultural Col-
lege at Cirencester, has been Ae people —-. at the — Col-

The Journal of Botany, British and Foreign, since “the
i of Dr. Seemann, edited by Dr. Trimen of the a ish Mu-
seum, and Mr. Baker of the Royal Herbarium, Kew appa
rently entered upon a career of assured prosperity. An crea

ood aipersvens of the late editor adorns the ‘ebruary nu number (an

receiv

Dr, costes contributes some Histological Notes ; ; one of a
pointing out the fact that Cynara Scolymus (the Atichole)
he woody bundles of the stem scattered through the cell
tissue after the manner of Niymphwacew and Cucurbita
an apparently endogenous character. He also describes certain

Geology and Natural History. 475

elongated thickened cells in Pine-leaves, which resemble bast cells
i as-

Rey. E. O’Meara begins an account of Recent Researches in the
Diatomacee, principally German, which promises to be interest-

fruit in the very south of China; and adds some remarks about
the geographical distribution and systematic extent of the species,
which seem to imply that he would include in it even C. pumila,
our Chinguapin.

The other leading articles relate to British Botany ; but one of
them, viz., Notes on the British Ramalinas in the Herbartwn of
the British Museum, by the Rev. James M. Crombie, is of gene-
ral interest,

_Among the short notes, extracts, ete., Prof. Dickson calls atten-
tion to Irmisch’s papers in the Linnea and Botanische Zeitung,

giving the appearance of a hypocotyledonary ;
case of Delphinium nudicaule mentioned in this ournal, vol. ae

liar. .

Dr. Carruthers contributes to the February number a. Review
of the Contributions to Fossil Botany, published in Britain, in
1871, with critical remarks.

Notices of other articles will be given hereafter. = A &
10. Fossil Flora of Great Britain. —With much satisfaction we
learn that Dr. Carruthers is editing a re-issue, 1 monthly —
of Lindley & Hutton’s Fossil Flora, to which he 1s to add a ng
plementary volume, to contain exact —. 8 sa Fotail
tany sinc ore
Which will bring the whole work up to the state of the science 0
the present day.” This will be a most important work, sure
ably and faithfully done. -

476 Scientific Intelligence.

11. The Garden, a “ Weekly Illustrated Journal of Gardening
in all its branches,” is of about the size and extent of the Athen-
zum, i. e., smaller than the Gardeners’ Chronicle, but of about the
same number of pages, is published in London, and conducted by

r. Wm. Robinson, who is so well and favorably known in his
Parks and Gardens of Paris, his Alpine Flowers, Wild Garden, ete.,
as well as personally to those who had the pleasure of making his
acquaintance during a recent visit he made to this country. The
publication began toward the close of the last year, so that it is

in its first volume; No. 17, the number for March 16, extends
to p. 388. It covers a somewhat different ground from that of

know it not as yet, by calling attention to it. We shall proba-
ly have occasion to make some extracts, or at least should do so
if we could find room. A. G.

Ill. Astronomy.

e two celebrated memoirs of Olbers and Bessel o
These are followed by his own memoir, entitled, “ On the Stab
of Cosmical Masses and the Physical Constitution of the Comets,

tarting from the well known fact that water, mercury, and
many other substances, even in the solid state, give off vapor, h
certain amount, though of very low tension, and inferring from the

characteristic odors of the metals, that they also, even at very low
4 hough of an

the latter will depend upon the mass of the body, that paps a

* Ueber die Natur der Cometen Beitriige zur Geschichte und — fred
Erkenntniss; von Johann Carl Friedrich Zéllner, Professor an der 1872 8yo.
Fg? es X Tafeln, Leipzig, Verlag von Wilhelm Englemann. ;
PP. c, 528.

|
|

Astronomy. 477

ture, the evolution of vapor will be continuous until the whole
mass is converted into it.

Then comes the question whether a mass of gas or vapor under
these circumstances would be in a condition of stable equilibrium.
The analytical discussion of this point leads to the result that, in
empty and unlimited space, a finite mass of gas is in a condition

f unstable equilibrium, and must become dissipated by continual

quence of this result is that the celestial spaces, at least within the

air upon the surfaces of the celestial bodies and in space.

stellar system is everywhere filled with atmosp eric air, and tak-
ing the temperature as that of melting ice, he finds that the lower

of that of

limit of density for a portion of gas in space is aise

becomes still smaller if the temperature of space is taken at —60°
. with Fourier, or at —142° C. with Pouillet. en
Any solid body in space must, by virtue of its gravitative
energy, condense the gas to form an atmosphere upon Its suriace,
and the density of this gaseous envelope can readily be calculated
when the size and mass of the body are known. For the m
the value is found to be ; ao ; of that of the air at the earth’s sur-
face, a vanishing quantity, and
the fact that no-trace of a

spheric influ f : :
If uid mass, a meteoroid for instance, should exist at a dis-
tance from the sun or any body capable of radiating heat to it, its
temperature would be at of the surrounding space, and, if is
Mass were not too great, a slow evaporation woul nve

after the lapse of sufficient time into as
the fiuid mass, on the contrary, approac
Would occasion a continuous development

478 Scientific Intelligence.

Seah short with reference to the interval nece in
astm case, and the smaller the amount ‘of matter the shorter this
time would be. The smaller comets, which often have the appear-

ance of Pephiertnal masses of vapor, are examples of bodies of sucha
nature. Prof. Zéllner thinks there is no improbability of the
existence of such fluid masses in space, > aaa of water or of
liquid hydro-carbons,* and the spectra of some of the nebule and
smaller comets confirm the idea very str saiglvt

The peculiarities already mentioned are readily Bt cron a
reference to the general properties of fluid su
comets, el offer others which are the result of other esses,
name ely, t thei el fl and the formation of a train, with a
special relation’ “of the tatieny in its position and aitwction: % the
sun.

As to the origin of the former of these phenomena, the question
arises, under what circumstances can a vaporous or gaseous mass
be babeAistnlsistg ? and only two causes are ring through the

operation of which this can happen. These are, first, elevation of
temperature, as by combustion, and second, hassle rahi
The former of these causes the author sets aside, on account of its
insufficiency and the theoretical difficulties and contradietiall
which it involves. The second, therefore, must be assumed to.

u

from it, we h
account both for the self- iffuminosity of the comets and the forma-
tion of their trains. It is sh wn, moreover, by numerous experl-
ments, that the Seeamestee of electricity by similar processes
within the limits of our experience is a well established fact.

of these substances, and in this manner the resemblance and rel
tial coincidence of the fear Se cometic spectra with those o

* See note, p. a.

Astronomy. 479

searcely fail to think of something analogous to electrical attrac-
d repulsion. Bessel also, in his memoir upon Halley’s

d upon Hankel’s numerous and very careful researches upon

the determination of atmospheric electricity according to an a
lute standard (nach absolutem Masse), leads to the remarkable
no

*M. Faye assumed, for explanation of the peculiar appearances of a comet’s
train, a repulsive force as existing between bodies at a high temperature, and as
an effect, or one of the modes of action, of heat, a cause whi cannot be regarded
N ge awe the ph f Donati’s comet,

oO in di ing the phenomena 0
assume al rton, in 1859, in discussing DP Odes the art
agrmape distinctly the adequacy of this force to produce the observed effects, and
; St the rationale of its action. He says, “I conceive the telescopic pucleus of

comet to consist of an atmosphere of aqueous vapor, OF of a va
i i more or less cov

ern i
in the condition of ice. In the ease of the teles-
a

eine . by the sun. * * * * It is these electric discha fae :
~~ lve, disengage the particles of aqueous vapor, or ne ous matter so-called ;
impel them off with a certain velocity.” This Journal, May, 1859, p. 100.—a. W. W.

480 Scientific Intelligence.

Tliese are magnitudes of the same order, and show that it is sufficient
to attribute to the sun electrical energy not greater than that
which is observed at the earth’s surface, to account satisfactorily
for the appearances presented by cometic trains, and that it is quite
unnecessary to assume the existence of some otherwise unknown
repulsive force.
urthermore, comets have appeared with trains directed toward
the sun, and such a direction is easily explained by the supposition
of opposite instead of like electrical characters, which accords
perfectly with the phenomena observed in the development of elec-
tricity by vapor-streams in the hydro-electric machine, where, as
is well known, the sign of the electricity depends upon the pres-
ence or absence of various substances in the boiler or the tubes,
The theory acquires an additional interest, and a strong confir-

of the pat f cert ets eat meteor-streams, since
the meteoric masses must inevitably be converted into or 0
appro g the sun, even a t distances if composed of

moon’s atmosphere, the
the phosphorescence of the nocturnal sky, and other phenomena.

dall’s theory of comets. vy. W.
2. New Planets.—The planet (119), the discovery of which, by
h of il, was announced in the May

of April, this
Peters, at the Litchfield Observatory of Hamilton College. d
clouds prevented a second observation until April 16th. The fol-
lowing observations were made by Prof. Peters:

1872 April 11, 14° m, t. BR A. 42" .0% 5° Dec. — :
ey ; 135 87™ 295 114 56™ 52°42 ak” 4 vei
“ gs 11" =7™ 165 11 56™ 20°96 ae 42! sph
“ 19, 118 52m gs 1155" 13°69 = — 4°. 37 16

Ann Arbor M. T. (121) @ (121) 6 “ 5
1872, May 12, 14 18" 42" 16" 20" 8758 —18° 53 O"S
13,11 18 22 16 19 59°35 18 52 46° 2
Daily motion, Ae=—44° Ad=+0'26'

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 481

IV. MISCELLANEOUS SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE.
of Petroleum in the Island of Santo

7)
. M. Gass. (Editorial correspondence, dated
Sto. Domingo, April 20, 1872).—We must add to the known

ered by deposits of pitch; for half a mile down the now dry bed
ave

An attempt was made during the “ oil excitement” of 1865 or

18 a depression where there are several gas jets, and where, over
the whole area, there is not a single blade of grass or any other
Ee itttion.

and 569,

2. Terrestrial tism, a measure of the sun’s rate of rotation ;
Ca, Hornsremy.—The changes in the three elements of terrestrial
magnetism, viz, the declination, inclination, and horizontal inten-
‘ity, appear to run in a cycle of 26°33 days. In 1870, the periodic
change in the declination at Prague was equal to 0°705 sin
(z +190°20'), « equaling 0 on January, 1870, and 360° on January,
1871. This oscillation is a little greater at Vienna.

(24

tion in the inclination in 1870 was a third that of the ype ee

and that of the intensity about 24 units in the fourth p:
Aw. Jour, Sct,—Tump Series, Vor. III, No. 18—June, 1872.
29

°

a

482 Miscelianeous Intelligence.

decimals. The cycle corresponds therefore with the time of the
Esty rotation, the mean of which is 26°33 days. e magnetic

delivered before the convocation of the University of the State of

ork, at Albany, August, 1871; by Freperick A. P. Bar-
ins, S.T.D., LL.D., President of Columbia a College, New York,
1872. 8vo. pp. 194 4,—President Barnard’s address on the Metric
System was delivered in obedience to a resolution of the Board of
Trustees of Columbia College, requesting him to attend the convo-
cation of the University of New York, at Albany, in August,
1871, and explain to that body ote far the views of the Faculty
of Columbia College, in respect to the Metric System of Weights
and Measures, are in accordance with those of a committee made
to the convocation on that subject the previous year. From this

positions of the passes reporter of the former year, adverse to

least acrimony and with a most charming geniality of humor.
But the scientific interest of Dr. Barnard’s address is its fea-
ture of real and permanent value. Like all his writings this ad-
dress is characterized by co mpleteness, exactness and clearness of
-onerarm He divides his subject under the following heads,
and Nature of the Meta System ; Recent progress 88 of

and i in a series of Appendices and Notes he adds important jute
“On the Unification of Moneys; Effect upon existing contracts of
a change in the legal weight of coins; The New System of Coin-
age of the Japanese Empire; On Capacity Measures and the

measures, and cannot fail to exercise an important mm la-
advancing and strengthening the public appreciation of the bebe’
wide importance of this subject, leading, it is to be ho ped, at ‘
late day to the adoption of thé only system which has any chane
of success as a universal standard, viz., the Metric System. Bs
4. Die Hieserguete der Fitterung der landwirthscha, pi
Nitzthiere, von Dr. Pur. Tuzopor von GouREN, 637 pp. °' 19
with 36 wae ‘otk, Leipzig, 1872. C. L. Hirschfeld.—This ¥

t
«

“s

Miscellaneous Intelligence. 483

—within the last 20 years very aah ish on the subject
of animal nutrition, considered both as a branch of physiologi-
eal science and as an art. ter an introductory chapter on
“Matter and Force,” the parts of the animal body are described,
in respect to their ‘structure and functions ; ; then the Chemistry
of the Tissues, Juices and Secretions; and thirdly the Processes of
ife and Growth—Respiration, Metamorphosis of Tissues, Diges-
tion and Resorption—are discussed. The titles of the other chapters

te of Flesh: The Production of ee The Production of
Wool: Reproduction and Nutrition: The Practical Farmer and
the Doctrines of Feeding. Appendices, Tables and a copious In-
dex complete the book.

The author, Professor at the Royal Bohemian Agricultu
Academy at: Liebwerd, gives equal justice to fundamental am
gations like those of Pettenkofer and Voit, and to the many em-
pirical trials which have been conducted with such prea go
skill at the various experiment stations in Germany and else

€ combines the hitherto too isolated results of physiologiste,
chemists and agriculturists, of pated and practicians, in

il t

ake for rp Da or advanced stu ontrast
between this masterly work and anything» under a pee title
e English literature has yet tie is pening 4 to ese

Let Co.).— o his = -ocket-boo » is an aatiegy <a
nient companion for people of all trades and professions, far
Bibire so than is implied in the title. It meets the necessities not
only of practical engineers and mechanics in the calculations which
er Wo. i

their work requires, but, also of all who have anything t

figures beyond sting up ordinary accounts, and is especially a
desirable hand-book for the scientific a en the ordinary
traveler. Besides seen the many tables and formulas of

1 to 1,000; of the coins, weights as
the flags of nations; of the areas of ‘a continents; of the distances

484 Miscellaneous Intelligence.

of places over this and other countries; also an almanac for the
19t gent an astrononical almanac ; the deaf and dumb alpha-
bet, e

ay ae Elementary Manual of Chemistry, abridged from Eliot
and Storer’s Manual, with the codperation of the authors, by Mr.
Rietey Nicuots, Assistant Professor of General Chemistry i in the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 370 pp. New York,
1872, Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor & Co.—This is an abridgement
and revision of the Manual of Inorganic Chemistry, with which is

PpPp-
New York.—The first number of this important monthly ss
in May. The two issued treat, as the title implies, of eee
a

that are now ve giant Pretarg 6 tor Zh the popular min e largest
topic is man in his s relations, zoological, geological, social,
political, pinobtionsl, "reli phoak, etc.; and the widest range of opin-

bs oi. on some rs — subjects, in the different papers.
a teat commences in these numbers a series of able
ai on Social Science or Boelbice Other articles treat, of the
eclipse of the sun ; the sun’s spots: ‘. uvius ; the superstitions of
medicine ; the art rtificial production of stupidity in schools; the
physiological position of alcohol, and various miscellaneous topics
of interest. The June No. has as a frontispiece an excellent por-
trait of Sir Charles Lyell.
OBITUARY.
Dr. Witi1am Srrmpson.—<As these last pages are going to
press, we learn that Dr. Stimpson died on the evening of the 26th
y- He had recently returned from a dredging expedition
across the Gulf of Mexico, and had been very ill since bis return.
as for many years been well known as one of the leading
zoologists of this country, and has pra himself chiefly to ma-
rine eee ta brata. A more extended notice is deferred to the
next n er.
A Cai ec of the Birds of Kansas, by Frank H. Snow, Prof. Nat. Hist. _
Meteorology in the University of Kansas, at Lawrence. Contributed abl
Kansas Academy of Science. 8 pp. 8vo, Topeka, Kansas, 1872. This list com
. tains ria names of 239 species, with brief notes on many of them

woman
Page 448, note, for p. 44, read oe
Page 457, 14 lines from Seen, for = hisictclpiial keel, read supraoccipital keel.

3
i
\
b
i

INDEX * <FG

VOLUME III.

A
Abbe, C., table for the i aa oO

+
i=}
‘5

sekio acid, letras of a substitut-
ed derivatives of, Moo
stical ae shite, I
Agassiz, A., application of Aeidbevanon
to natural history, noticed, 156.
gassiz, fish-nest in the Sargasso

Sea,
Ales, cetyl, method of estimating,

bso ne preparation of, 214.
Alides see sian

nia-platin m bases, 2
= what of N. Y, Journal,

Aquarium at Naples,
Aion Seaeaticeis, Peterman, 61.
Tizona, exploration i
ra Aine, mess . meet-
ing, 398.

British, notice of meeting, 398.

Asteroid, Latter, — 367, 480.
Tut

“conspire 4, 1872, — ae rie
Auroras, recent in U. 8, Loom

Baillon, Historie des Plantes, seer 307.
ker, G. F., chemical abstracts, 139,
370, "465.

, address on metric

rmo, 465.
ecom osition of potassium
chlorate, 370. zx
, revision of Cassia, noticed, 37

ok. alcpliaet 0 r mastodon tusk ‘i
Baan of the Phosphoms he 142,
pote ooski mar-
a at Swan

sane E., question of pee 270.
w Paleozoic foss
remarks on the nal controversy,

shack ee Crustacea Amphipoda, noticed,

Boston, climate of, Paine, 395.
Botanical, notices Gray, 58, 147, 306,
376, ae
telligence, 474.
Botanist to the pv ard ee: of Agricul-
a, amen of, 3
Bota
bicep of water by leaves, 473.
= comparative, of the Mo aad
ze, Coniferee, and Gentace
of "the flowers and “fruit of
mis islet

61.
Baillon’ 8 Histoire des Plantes, 307.

oho The, noti
ges sin Monographie, no-

ary
abit > parasitic plant, change in,
pe Tcones Rigen 58.

Jounal of Botan ticed, 474
ing’s peslagingl “exploration of the

bth P Parallel, 62,

na from a lin
fier’s Contributions, n 147 :
{iiller on Cyathi Euphorbia, 380.
Jliver’s Flora o te frica,

ce, structure ‘of pistil in, 59.
Report pu oy GE = Adin: noticed, 473.

]

]

]

(

Oregon, plants of, 1
I

flower in, 60.
‘

See further under GEOLOG
Bouchardat, transformation of glauco-

a from a linden, 238.
peor age re ae

of aa s0- si Se Huronian of New-
223.

eact, pte, Index contains the general heads.

Botany, Geology, Mineralogy,

Zoology, and under

dl

486
Budde, action of light on chlorine and
bromine, 215.
—_ absorption of water by leaves,
Shoe acid, preparation of, 140.
Capillary a ion,
Carbon, direct oxidation of, to mellitic
aei
Chase, P. £., rainfall at San Francisco,
234.
— eae of estimating the sun’s
Chemica abstracts, Gibbs, 54, 214, 297,
367.

439, 311
Ganlincy. 1 pene J ournal o noite. 78.

of, 300.
o expeditio

INDEX.

Dean, G. W., corrected longitude results
cross N. A., 397.
oe Er J, glacial action on Mt. Katah-

ih,
Delesse et en Revue de Géolo-
, noticed, 8
Delpind, Fetiation of Conifers, etc.,
noticed, 3

caehadel gs P., Treatise on Natural
Philosophy, noticed, 240.
sper aires fr: bene improvement in
me , 214.
Ditse hei einer, ' wave-lengths of Fraunho-
ie s lines; 297.
one io, — of measur-
ing ap velocity. - rotation, 248
|| Dredging expeditio asslerieep-en 73.
Duchene, G. B., rt Ts n Localized
lectrization, noticed,

E
Earthquake in New England, Rockwood,

sensigg saeevatiicis o *ibricke’a inc.

Comets, ern s work on the nature of,
noti iced, 4
ss G. it, geological report, noted)

Cooke, Handbook of British Fungi, no-
ticed, 474,
ano E. — ver hot fossils, 65.
of preva mmals, 224.
iicsbagadaia fro; nsas, no-
ti
Cornu, coma of spectrum-lines of

metallic
Cin SAY Be sociated report, noticed, 302.
Cr e H H., anomalous production of

Opiacetia. annual, noticed, 78.

Dale and Schorlemmer, a
Dana, E. S., conipeaitan of eas ‘Sow
dorite 9 * Waterville,
ce of the address oF: f
= Hat fomes F the Amer, Association,

he Mt. geol the quartzite
179, 250. ~~ . ‘

arthquakes works of Perrey, noticed, 79.
e Sun.

euttpes
Eh aaa CG.
3 aoretia ¢ sources, noticed, 8

trolysis of ‘he stated deriva-
gee of acetic acid, Moor 177.
Electro

he from atmos-

te
Elenmeyer, sreparision of abil alco-

hol, 214.
AS ee Naess proportion of iron and

sulphur n Iowa
ngineers, ‘Report of the ‘Corps of, no-
ticed, 3

Fehling, von, Neues Handworterbuch
der Pears ie, notice

Flame, new se sensitive singir ng, Geyer, 340.

pare W., new species of primordial

fossils, 419.

ny ssi, oe GEOLOGY.

Fra unhofer’s lines, wave-lengths of, 297.

Friswell, double salt of thallium, 139.

G
|Gabb, W. M., Petroleum in San Domingo,

Galvanometer, new form of lantern,
Ma

supposed le egs of a 221. Geographical ‘work, recent, in the U.S,
Corals and Coral Islands, noticed,305. Elbe Val-
Mine pearson noticed, Geinite, Oh, or atigal of the
; noti
on the true Taconic, 468. Gactosten! and mineralogical 1 a 06.
Dawson, J. W., tree ferns and other fos-|| mining iy of Utah, gape 147
sils from the Devonian, 220. Geological report, Hayden Lecture!
logical cture ineral|| 375.

and
— of Prince Edward Is., —

of Indiana, noticed, 302.
of Nebraska, ete., 147.

Ahi fs |.

INDEX.

Geological report of N. ee. 305.

of In :
indy United States, 302.
GEOLOG

Alpine, Z

Bird, tacovery of a Marsh, 56.
Birds, cretaceous, Marsh, 36

Sore rou, new ‘fossils of, Meek,

Otim, 9 the tobe rte Ae 5.
cautiton Tentaculites, and a new

02,

of Lake Superior,
ooks and — lly, 428.
F Paledeate tabulate vaffinities
existi ing ie tens Verrill,
ceous basin in the Sauk Valley,

Minn.,
Devonian, ho ah and other fossils
fro Dawson, 2 220.

ga or mastodon tusk in Colorado,}|

> ada rocks, notes on, Hunt, 1
~ the

Green

179, 2 quartzite, jen
Hadr on , hew species, Marsh, 301
goers adress — Amer ‘Assoe.,

tice of, 19.

Sirbuian of Pet d, 223.
Kansas vertebrate fossils, Cope, 65.
ce Survey of the 40th Parallel,

oe orite r of Waterville, New
Dota mpshire, practi of, Dana, 48.
ae a supplementary note on,
ee

Lower ee fossil,
James,

487

|GEOLOGY—
Taconic, on
Triaatie
e,

the true, Dana, 4
seer of reg ‘Palisade

nobis, eee legs of, Dana, 221.
rae at Swanton, Vt., fos-

eso aa Firehole Rivers, hot
a and geysers of, Hayden,
Gen ee ou ‘mineral resources of North
Saeke noticed,
; E., new sensitive singing
flame, 340.
Gibbs, W., chemical abstracts, 54, 214,
297, 367.
Glacial action on Mt. Katahdin, De Laski,

Glacier-motion, Canon Moseley’s views,
‘athews,
Glaucosides, trans formation of,
in, Kra aut, Handbuch pia Chats
noticed,
Gohren, P. T. von, work on animal nutri-
tion, notice
sien ay, A, botanical notices, 58, 147, 306,

H
Hailstones of salt and sulphide of iron,

Halo, contorted, sete 398.
solar, Johnson, 4
ay , hot s sates and geyse
of the Yellowstone and Firehole pivers,
peor reports, sitar wets 375.

Yellowstone national par
fase table for a. oF ative

new species,|| rry-hoo

altitudes, Abbe,
Henry, borg i rr acid, 141.
C. H, Norian rocks in New

Mammals als, ae =e shire,
—_ of, Cope, 224.
Mastodon i in Mass., Hite tcheock, 146. He 9 ota report, seat Peg a
oe eM seen structure of skull Hof ™ Fis cr ¢ phosphin es, 367.
“sche es f, Me products of meth pres a the methyl-
Norian “ieee Sensige Ts and cthy-phosphines 3 :
Hitchcock in Hampshire, Hornstein, C., terrestrial ronal arg oged
Onions itn ena Hun, ES at ~ ere ‘
Prim reall nei, Puage, > s on granitic rocks, 115.
“agg fauna in Nevada, Whitney,

I
ee as new species of, sens Es ace 0 of quartzites, schists, and

s and crinoid, Meek, 257.

pang
Taconic, controversy, Billings, 466.

of Sauk Co., Wise... 93.

J
, U. P., new species of fossil from
quamet Silurian,
‘anssen, ecli of Dee. si 226.
em eremejew v., occurrence of diamonds
in Xanthophyllite, 3.

James,

488

. W. W., solar halo, 439.
ae " phosphorescence of the eggs of
the glow worm, 73.

K

Kansas oe of Science, 319.

INDEX.

eas is

Marsh, O. C., geological expedition of,

descriptions of Pterosauria, 24].

der scutes of Mosasauroid rep-
tiles, ae

new sate of Hadrosaurus, 301.

description of Hesperornis, and noti- ~

ety lay Grannis, and ‘Neptuno, — ces of other Cretaceous ae Ser
Klos, .3 H., cretace in bane in the ta rr . Bere
osasauroid sso
Sauk Valley, Minn a notiecd: 80: Martin. E. ‘s, fot pact in
’ sta ps, 6
ast he ‘work on Pennatulide, no- Mas W., — on East India crus-
i notice:
a Ie = a0. salts of roseo-cobalt and luteo- | Math W,, Can a “Moseley’s views
ne lacieranotion,

Lake geld She of, we
anaig
Lapham, e, 69.
nals ‘et t Delesse, Revue de Géologie,
noticed, 8
Lea, M. C., el of estimating ethylic
alcohol when present in methylic al-

May

Teas: oes noticed,

: Liais, E. zodiacal light,
Liebermann, coloring choot ‘of cochineal,
141.

Light, action on chlorine and bromine, 215
at the bottom of

ustical experiments, 267
tlio on palveaesihel 414.

= Supp plementary note on
Tichenoerit us,

ar-fi sei es and crinoid from
the thaanastt group,
new species of fossils from the
Cincinnati group,

Mercurie fig amorphous, occurrence

e, Moore, 42.
Mercury, pee aie cruise of, 396.
Meteor in Mexico,
Meteoric 1 cnliioolson of 0. U. Shepard, 236.
ae ten iron, 71.

from El Dorado Co., Cal., Shepard,

mann, impr ent in the
of ran, improw ion, 214. Meteorite, Greenland, 388. a
lc, Wisco nsin,
epiale eclipse of Dee. 12, 226, re ‘Concepcion nd Be
America, 397. regorio, Urgindi, 2

is, E., recent auroras in U. S.,
ge Nat. Hist., N. Y., Ann als, a
My we fe pod of the Punjab
oil region, notice eS
— i, Snpplement to Ophia ridz and
hytide, n ticed, 157, 224, 381.

w of Lyman’s Supplemen t
neg and Astrophytide, 224,

M
McGill University, Logan chair of geology
in, 398.
Maclear, J. P., eclipse of Dec. 12, 310.
Magnetism, treatise on terrestrial, no-

tism, te — a measure of the

sun’s rate ae motion, 4

Magnetometer indications. on Sept. 7,
Young, 69.

Magnets, electro, demagnetization of,
Willson, 346.

Metric system, Barnard’s amie on,

notic
eyer, Betaine of the phosphorns series,

142.

Microscope, Se of objectives,
Woodward,

a um aoa Naturalist, 156

Contributions to bene noticed,
eralogical notes on the mining dis-

tricts of Utah, Silliman, 195.

i appendix to Dana’s, noticed,

Moore, 36
301.

INERALS, €
jo ree sulphide, oe
pea erence

Diamonds, ooure
it

Mann, Catalogue of Plants, noticed, 381.
Marsh, O. C., discovery of fossil bird, 56.

tives of acetic aci

INDEX. 489.

ar H., American eclipse expedition,
cific Gulf Stream
Mane, J., Cyathium of Euphorbia, 380. lass
railroad, route or on northern, 326.
Murrish, J. Fa cohogliel report noticed, 306.|| po ka, rd, A. Sy Development of ima

N lus, notice
Risers ecrology, anes, ey 152. Paine, € a gros of sun, Sept. 29,
Nevada, a ration in, 232. 1875,
Nichols, J. R., Fireside Science, noticed, ‘ina te of Bosto

—— xvatlaroarsier animals, 156.
Nichols, R., Manual of Chemistry, noticed, , H. W., cont ag halo, 398
mistry, noticed,||77° ayer, J, otter of, 5

Nicholson, H. A. = Ooennliet Tentaculites,|Pech ©. H., report on botany, 473.
and a neon genus, 2 Peirce, B., mean motions of the four outer
67.

Nickel-plating, aw method of, 54. planets,
Niles, W. H., peculiar phenomena observ-||2e77e¥: A; works on earthquakes, 79.
ed in quarrying, noticed, 222. Peterman n, = Masti German arctic
Petre, canons of Sudder, 348. exploration
rules of, Verrill, Petermann, on te Gulf Stream, 305.
cline — pee Peters, 0. F. W., ie eats Tafeln
physics, 327, 440 und si rmeln, notice d, 7
Nystrom, J. W., Pocket-book of Mechanics Petroleum in San oar a 481.
and B Engineering, — d, 4 te: oa ager for, 871.

hillips, J., Geology of Oxford — ese
alley of the lesa? noticed, 3
ee <a

Ostru. oa
Anderson, Thomas, ae da of oxi-

Babbage Charies, oe = 2 ae
Curtis, M. he et pil Tinlcaioa to natural his-
ily C. T., 153. Df
ugel, Charles von, 153
i : : ya wes she pte nT of, 239.
scr aaeeeg, me tee Photo ee lat and cosmical, Norton,
oan enry, 153 y
Laveille 4e othe Fag Planets, mean motions of Se four outer,
cong aha ier ce seit
— Julius, 153 ode 5 don
ong hae fe Wn SES Popular § Selenite Monthly,
Morse, Se Me gg Potassium, chlora te, decomposition, jon
es \Pourtalés, L. F. "De p-sea
a ley, Canon, 320 she
Pe on age en Priority, question of, Billings, 270.
Perottet, G g, 162 ‘Pumpelly, and Brooks, age of copper-
Reissek, S., 153. pearing rocks of Lake Superior, 428.
a ieapie ~ oe 400.
: ul, 153. uarryi henomena observed in, 222.
Sagra, Ramon de la, 153.
Schultz-Schultzenstein, C. H., 153. Rainfall at San Francisco, Chase,
Seemann, Berthold, 153. Raymond, R. W., Mines, Mills pe a ur.
Sowerby, J. De Carle, 153. naces, noticed, 303.
mpson, William, 484. Respighi, L., cad eclipse of Dec. 12, area
Strecker, ye a 320. \Rockwell, A. P., elephant tusk in Color-
Swan, J. A., 77. ado, 373.
wager, Fran Z, 152. —— pod i earthquake in New
ilson, William, 153. Englan ;
Dears Cordoba, it sats ee 230,||Roscoe, compounds of tungsten, 369.
, Annals, noticed, 7 Rose, F, ammoniacal compounds of co-

‘hes : Nev Appendi . bserva- 299.
ae : “ iano, ego —— of measuring the
Oral adi, synthesis of, 141. velocity of, Dolbear, 248.

ne, anomalous production of, Croft,466. Rumford medals, end

. Trow

490

$
Sauk a Minn., cretaceous basin in,
Kloos, 17.

Schellen, H, Spectrum Analysis, 318.
Schools, Schools, public, natural science in, 158.
and Dale, Aurene, 140.
Seder. "S TL, Canons of systematic
‘nomenclature, 3
ar acai meteorite, 388.
Shepard, C. U,, gad iron - from El

oo Co., Gal., 4
Prodromus Oditoghaphie Geo-

ey ‘noticed, 3
Silliman, B.,. Geological and mineralogi-
cal notes on the mining districts of whee

Smith S. L, Tomocaris Peircei, 373.
arly stages of the lobster, 401.
Smithsonian fos t., Report, noticed, 398.
_ Solar, se
poctrum.ine of metalic = rever-
Sal of,
Star maps, improvement in, Maw tins

Sti , William, o ry of, ee
Sun, Am. eclipse expedition, Morton
eclipse of Dec. 12, 68, 158, 226, 310,
312, 313.
of Sept. 9, of —. Abbe, 264.
of 1875, Paine, 3
mass, new le of estimating,
Chase,

rate o ‘motion, terrestrial magne-
tism, a measure of,
ctroscopic observation of the ro-
tation of, “oes
of, 239.

tempera
Surgical “ ri in U. S. Army,
noticed, 77.

Thallium, new double salt of, 139.
Phaudéchum an ypré, Treatise on Wine,
notice

Tobacco, physiological action of, 371.
bridge, J., sie action of
liquids aissier peli mbranes, 432.
Tungsten, Pear graces of, “369.
ae . C., aurora of Feb. 4, 1872,

U
—— J., meteorites of La Concepcion
and San Gr regorio, 207.

Vv
Valson, capillary a traction, 217.
Verrill, A. E., descriptions of N. Amer.
freshwater leeches.
—
wi spe
ditions to to the mollusean

8 of Paleozoic tabulate corals! |

INDEX.

Verr: E., additional . note on rules
of gol le pee 386.
adiata 7 csi coast of North

: a,
bows recurrent sual

Vohl d Hulenberg, ei iocteal ac-
tion “of tobacco, 371.

WwW
gps J. C., discovery of new asia
rs. pre of the 40th Parallel,

Watias, ry Ww. Pacific Gulf Stream,

Wilson, R. W., ea oaege of elec-
tina 2
goto se D. Primordial Fauna in

Viredon, puna of camphoric acid,
140.

Woodhull, A. A., elephant in Colorado,
‘B74.

Woodward, J. Hoe crs Bs of ob-
jectives for microscope, 4

oa park, Haye cose 326.

k

You: “a 2 . magnetometer indications

on eck “4 18 871,
observations on ink 's Comet, 81.

wk = ext thesia 314.
Z
Zéliner and Vogel, spectroscopic observa-

tion of the rotation of the sun, 299.
Zollner, sae on the nature of pi mets,

noticed,
Zodiacal light, note on, 390.

ag

*Crnstacea amphipoda, noticed,
_— expedition, Hassler,

Fishes in he pk as Sea, 154.

a Cae of shells,
eee . Amer. rests 126.

errill, 432. x
Tv. ig Peircei, Smith, 373.
lomocarii

cedar adi
fauna of New England, 209, 281.

See further under GEO.